Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutClark Hall SpecificationsCLARK HALL LEARNING FACILITY - PHASE II Project Manual & Specifications March 14, 2014 Owner Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14853 Architect Peter Gisolfi Associates 566 Warburton Avenue Hastings -on -Hudson, NY 10706 CLARK HALL LEARNING TABLE OF CONTENTS FACILITY PHASE II Page 1 Instructions to Bidders Bid Form General Conditions Exhibit A Exhibit A-1 Exhibit B Exhibit C Exhibit D Exhibit E Exhibit F — Exhibit F — Exhibit F — Exhibit F — Exhibit G Exhibit H Exhibit I and Exhibits Change Order Change Order Documentation Instructions Construction Contract Change Order Request Construction Contract Change Order Summary Schedule of Values for Contractor Payments Final Release Application and Certificate for Payment Guarantee Fonn I Contractor's Affirmative Action Plan Use of MBE/WBE Vendors Form II Contractor's Affirmative Action Plan Summary of Bid Activity with MBE and WBE Subcontractors and Vendors Form III Affirmative Action Workforce Report Form IV Minority— Women Utilization Report Labor Rate Breakdown Stored Materials Invoicing Documentation Contractor Performance Evaluation DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 11 00 Section 01 25 00 Section 01 31 19 Section 01 32 16 Section 01 32 33 Section 01 33 00 Section 01 35 29 Section 01 35 43 Section 01 35 44 Section 01 41 00 Section 01 45 00 Section 01 45 29 Section 01 50 00 Section 01 51 00 Section 01 51 23 Section 01 57 13 Section 01 66 00 Section 01 73 29 Section 01 77 00 Section 01 78 22 Section 01 78 23 Section 01 78 36 Section 01 78 39 Summary of the Work Substitutions and Product Options Project Meetings Construction Schedules Photographic Documentation Submittal Procedures General Health & Safety Requirements General Environmental Requirements Spill Control Regulatory Requirements Quality Control Testing Laboratory Services Temporary Facilities and Controls Temporary Utilities Heat During Construction(s) Soil Erosion and Sediment Control Storage and Protection Cutting, Patching and Repairing Project Close Out Inventories Operating and Maintenance Data Warranties and Bonds Record Documents CLARK HALL LEARNING TABLE OF CONTENTS FACILITY PHASE II Page 2 DIVISION 2— EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 19 Demolition, Removal, Cutting and Patching DIVISION 3- CONCRETE 03 54 16 Cement -Based Underlayment DIVISION 6— WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 06 20 23 06 44 00 Rough Carpentry Finish Carpentry Architectural Woodwork DIVISION 7- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 21 00 Insulation 07 29 00 Caulking 07 84 13 Firestopping DIVISION 8- OPENINGS 08 14 13 08 31 13 08 41 13 08 71 00 08 88 00 Flush Wood Doors Access Doors Aluminum Entrances and Storefront Finish Hardware Glass and Glazing DIVISION 9- FINISHES 09 21 10 Acoustic Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 25 50 Acoustical Ceiling Boards 09 29 00 Gypsum Drywall 09 29 50 Gypsum Drywall Ceilings 09 65 13 Resilient Flooring 09 68 13 Modular Carpet Tile 09 91 23 Painting DIVISION 10 - SPECIALITIES 10 11 00 Chalk Boards DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11 52 13 Access/Series M Manually Operated Projection Screen DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12 24 13 Manual Solar Shades CLARK HALL LEARNING TABLE OF CONTENTS FACILITY PHASE I1 Page 3 DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00 General Fire Protection Provisions 21 05 00 Common Work for Fire Protection 21 05 19 Fire Protection Specialties 21 05 29 Fire Protection Hangers, Supports, and Sleeves 21 07 00 Sprinklers 21 10 00 Fire Protection System Piping DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 01 23 05 00 23 05 13 23 05 19 23 05 23 23 05 29 23 05 53 23 05 80 23 05 93 23 07 13 23 07 19 23 09 00 23 21 13 23 21 14 23 22 23 23 31 13 23 33 00 23 34 16 23 36 00 23 37 13 23 37 23 23 57 00 23 70 11 23 73 13 General HVAC Provisions Common Work for HVAC Common Electrical Requirements for HVAC Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping General -Duty Valves for HVAC Piping Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment HVAC Identification Roof Curbs and Rails Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Duct Insulation Piping and Equipment Insulation histrumentation and Control for HVAC HVAC Piping HVAC Piping Specialties Steam System Specialties Metal Ducts Air Duct Accessories HVAC Fans Air Terminal Units Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles Gravity Ventilators Heat Exchangers Limited Chemical Treatment Systems Custom Indoor Central -Station Air -Handling Units DIVISION 26 — ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 26 05 00 26 05 19 26 05 26 26 05 29 26 05 33 26 05 53 26 05 73 26 05 80 26 09 23 26 24 16 26 27 26 26 29 23 26 51 00 General Electrical Provisions Common Work Results for Electrical Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems Identification for Electrical Systems Short Circuit and Arc Flash Study Electrical Powered Equipment Lighting Control Devices Panel Boards Wiring Devices Variable -Frequency Motor Controllers Interior Lighting CLARK HALL LEARNING TABLE OF CONTENTS FACILITY PHASE II DIVISION 27 — COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 00 27 01 20 27 05 00 27 05 28 27 05 29 27 05 34 27 05 53 27 08 00 27 15 13 27 15 43 27 16 19 General Communications Provisions Summary of Communications Work Common Work Results for Communications Pathways for Communications Systems Hangers and Supports for Systems Communications Systems Floor Boxes for Electrical Communications Systems Identification for Communications Systems Testing of Communications Cabling Systems Copper Horizontal Cabling Communications Faceplates and Connectors Communications Patch Cords, Station Cords, and Cross Connect Wire DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 31 11 Digital, Addressable Fire -Alarm System LIST OF DRAWINGS A -T ARCHITECTURAL TITLE SHEET A-001 CODE ANALYSIS A-051 DEMOLITION PLAN (PHASE II) A-101 CONSTRUCTION PLAN (PHASE II) A-151 CONSTRUCTION PLAN (PHASE II) A-402 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS (PHASE II) A-403 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS (PHASE II) A-404 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS (PHASE II) A-405 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS (PHASE I & II) A-600 MILLWORK DETAILS A-701 PROPOSED FLOOR PATTERN PLAN (PHASE II) A-800 WALL TYPE & DETAILS A-801 CEILING DETAILS A-900 DOOR & FINISH SCHEDULE A-910 INTERIOR STOREFRONT SYSTEM (PHASE II) A-911 INTERIOR STOREFRONT SYSTEM (PHASE II) ELECTRICAL Page 4 E-001 ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS, AND NOTES E-102.2 SECOOND FLOOR PLAN - DEMOLITION (PHASE II) E-202.2 PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR PLAN - LIGHTING (PHASE II) E-302.2 PARTIAL GROUND FLOOR & BASEMENT PLANS - POWER & SYSTEMS (PHASE II) E-303 PARTIAL NORTH PENTHOUSE PLAN - POWER AND SYSTEMS E-500 ELECTRICAL DETAILS E-700 LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE AND FEEDER SCHEDULE E-701 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES AND PARTIAL ELECTRICAL RISE DIAGRAM CLARK HALL LEARNING TABLE OF CONTENTS FACILITY PHASE II Page 5 FIRE PROTECTION F-001.2 FIRE PROTECTION SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS, AND GENERAL NOTES F-102.2 FIRE PROTECTION DEMOLITION PLANS (PHASE II) F-202.2 FIRE PROTECTION FLOOR PLAN (PHASE II) MECHANICAL H-001 MECHANICAL SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS, AND NOTES H-102.2 SECOND FLOOR PLAN - HVAC DEMOLITION (PHASE II) H-103.2 NORTH PENTHOUSE DEMOLITION PLAN (PHASE II) H-202.2 SECOND FLOOR PLAN - HVAC DUCTWORK (PHASE II) H-203.2 NORTH PENTHOUSE PLAN (PHASE II) H-302.2 SECOND FLOOR PLAN - HVAC PIPING (PHASE II) H-501 HVAC DETAILS H-701 HVAC SCHEDULES H-801 HVAC CONTROLS H-802 HVAC CONTROLS H-20SB SUB -BASEMENT HVAC PLANS END OF DOCUMENT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Project: Clark Hall Learning Facility - Phase II Owner: Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Architect: Peter Gisolfi Architects 566 Warburton Avenue Hasting on Hudson, NY 10706 1. PROPOSAL FORMS a. Proposals shall be made only on the forms provided and all blank and underlined spaces in the forms shall be fully filled in, in ink or typed; amount shall be fully stated both in writing and in figures. Proposals shall be signed by Principals or Officers duly authorized to execute such documents on behalf of their respective firms or organizations, and the Certificate included in the Bid Form shall be completed accordingly. Bidder's legal name must be fully stated. Completed form shall be without interlineation, alterations, or erasures unless initialed and dated by the signer. 2. RECAPITULATION OR PROPOSAL a. Proposals shall not contain any recapitulation of the work to be done. No oral, telegraphic or telephonic proposals or modifications will be considered. 3. METHOD OF SUBMISSION a. Proposals shall be prepared and enclosed in a sealed envelope. Envelope shall be addressed to: Nancy A. Phelps, Director Facilities Contracts 121 Humphreys Service Building Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Proposal for: Clark Hall Learning Facility - Phase II Submitted by: (Bidder) b. Proposals shall be delivered to the Owner at the address listed above not later than 2:00 PM on April 10, 2014. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS -1 4. BID OPENING a. Proposals will be opened publicly by the Owner in Room 133, Humplu-eys Service Building, Cornell University Campus, Ithaca, New York, at the hour and date listed in 3b. The Owner reserves the right to postpone the date and time of opening of proposals at any time prior to the date and time announced in this Instruction to Bidders or amendments thereto. 5. BIDDING DOCUMENTS a. The Bidding Documents will consist of the following: (1) Instructions to Bidders. (2) Bid Form. (3) General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 - "General Requirements". (4) Drawings and Specifications. (5) Addenda and/or bulletins issued prior to date of opening of Proposals. 6. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS FURNISHED a. Contract Documents may be obtained from the Facilities Contracts website (http://finance.fs.cornell.edu/contracts/pob/projects.cfm ). For assistance call 607-255-5343. b. Additional sets will be available at $50.00 per set without refund. All subcontractors and suppliers requiring may order these at $50.00 per set without refund. No partial sets will be issued. The Contract Documents remain the property of the Owner. c. The successful bidder will be allowed ten (10) sets of drawings and specifications. 7. START OF WORK a. Work at the site shall be started within ten (10) calendar days from the date of issuance of written authorization to proceed and shall be completed no later than October 3, 2014. 8. BONDS a. Performance and Payment Bonds. The successful Bidder shall furnish the Owner with "Performance" and "Labor and Material Payment Bonds", each in the amount of 100% of the Contract Price. The cost of such bonds shall be included in the Bidders Proposal. Each of these Bonds are to be in a form with such sureties as the Owner may approve. b. Bid Bond. Each Bidder will be required to furnish a Bid Bond in the amount of 10% of the Bid Amount. Such Bid Bond shall guarantee that the Bidder will execute the Contract if it is awarded to him in conformity with his Proposal. Such Proposal Guarantee Bond shall include a statement that the Insurer shall, at the option of the Bidder, be willing to provide to the Bidder the Contract Bonds as described in 8a above. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS -2 9. AWARD OF CONTRACT a. It is the intent of the Owner to enter into a Contract with one General Contractor for the entire project. All labor and services and materials and supplies, etc. are to be provided in accordance with the Contract. b. The competence and responsibility of the Bidders' proposed principal subcontractors will be considered in making the Award. c. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Proposals, and to waive any informalities in Bidding. d. All Proposals shall remain in force and effect for a period of not less than sixty (60) calendar days following the bid opening date. e. The Owner reserves the right to accept any of the Alternate Proposals listed within ten (10) calendar days following the award of a construction contract. 10. EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS a. Each Bidder shall visit the Site of the proposed work, fully acquaint and familiarize himself with the conditions as they exist and the character of the operations to be carried on under the proposed Contract, and make such investigation as he may see fit so that he shall fully understand the facilities, physical conditions and restrictions attending the work under the Contract. b. Each Bidder shall also thoroughly examine and become familiar with the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents. c. By submitting a Proposal, the Bidder convenants and affirms that he has carefully examined the Drawings, Specifications, associated Bid Documents, the Addenda and Bulletins, if any, and the Site, that he relies on no representation by the Owner, and that from his own investigation he has satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work, the general and local conditions, and all matters which may in any way affect the work or its performance, and that as a result of such examination and investigation, he fully understands the conditions of bidding and that he will not make any claim for, and waives any right to damage because of misinterpretation or misunderstanding of the Bid Documents and the conditions of bidding. 11. DISCREPANCIES a. Should a Bidder find discrepancies in or omissions from the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents, or should he be in doubt as to their meaning, he shall at once notify the Architect, who will send written instructions to all bidders. Neither the Owner nor the Architect will be responsible for oral instructions. Every request for such interpretation should be in writing, addressed to the Architect. Inquiries received seven (7) or more days prior to date fixed for opening of Bids will be given consideration. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS -3 12. PRE-BID CONFERENCE a. A pre-bid conference has been scheduled for 10:00 AM, March 25, 2014, in Room 133 of the Humphreys Service Building. The purpose of the conference will be to clarify the intent of the Contract Documents if necessary. Results will be published in an Addendum. 13. TRADE SUBCONTRACTORS, MATERIAL SUPPLIERS a. Each portion of the work shall be performed by an organization equipped and experienced to do work in that particular field, and no portion of the work shall be reserved by the Bidder to himself unless he is so equipped and experienced. Subcontracts shall be awarded only to parties satisfactory to the Owner and the Architect. Each subcontractor and materials supplier shall be approved individually. b. In the spaces provided in the Bid Form, the Bidder shall list all portions of the work he proposes to perform directly with his own forces. c. A list of names from which the Bidder proposes to select subcontractors, materials suppliers, and/or manufacturers for the principal trades or subdivisions of the work is required as part of the Proposal. d. In the Bid Form, there has been listed the principal trades or subdivisions of the work for which such a listing is required, together with the provisions which govern the listing, selection and approval of principal subcontractors. 14. ALTERNATE PROPOSALS a. Certain Alternate Proposals may be requested. They will be listed in the Bid Form and all Bidders are required to bid on all Alternates without exception, in the spaces provided. b. Alternate Proposals shall include all overhead, profit and other expenses in connection therewith. 15. UNIT PRICES a. Certain Unit Prices may be requested. They will be listed in the Bid Form and all Bidders are required to bid on all Unit Prices without exception, in the spaces provided. b. Unit Prices shall include all overhead, profit and other expenses in connection therewith. 16. SCHEDULE OF VALUES a. A partial "Schedule of Values" for certain trades and/or subdivisions of the work is required as part of the Bidder's Proposal in the Bid Fornn. b. The successful Bidder shall submit a complete "Schedule of Values" showing the amounts allocated to the various trades, suppliers, subcontractors, installers and General Contractor's work, aggregating the total sum of the Contract. If requested by the Owner or Architect, the complete "Schedule of Values" shall be submitted prior to award of Contract. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS -4 17. ADDENDA AND BULLETINS a. Addenda and/or bulletins issued during the bidding period shall be acknowledged in the space provided in the Bid Form. 18. SUBSTITUTIONS a. Proposals shall conform to the requirements of the Bid Documents. b. The Bidder may offer substitutions for any item of material or equipment, element of work, or method of construction set forth in the Bid Documents, with the exception of Form of Contract, General Conditions and General Requirements - Division 1, by listing the proposed substitutions and the amounts to be deducted from the Base Bid corresponding to each such proposed substitution in the spaces provided in the Bid Form. However, the Bidder is cautioned to make his base proposal on the materials and items specified by name or other particular reference. 19. SUB -SURFACE CONDITIONS a. Boring information, water levels, indications of sub -surface conditions and similar information given on the Drawings or in the Specifications are furnished only for the convenience of the Bidders. The Owner, Architect and Consulting Engineer make no representation regarding the character and extent of the soil data or other sub -surface conditions to be encountered during the work and no guarantee as to the accuracy or validity of interpretation of such data or conditions is made or intended. b. Each Bidder shall, by careful examination, inform himself as to the nature and location of the work, the conformation of the ground, subsoil and ground water conditions, the character, quality and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, the general and local conditions and all other matters which can in any way affect the work under this Contract. The Bidder may, at his option, conduct tests at his expense, including borings, by prior notification to the Owner. Each Bidder shall make his own deductions of sub -surface conditions which may affect methods or cost of construction of the work hereunder and he agrees that, if awarded the construction contract, he will make no claim for damages or other compensation, except such as are provided for in the Contract Documents, should he encounter conditions during the progress of the work different from those as calculated and/or anticipated by him. 20. SALES AND USE TAX EXEMPTION a. The Owner, Cornell University, a non-profit educational institution, is exempt from payment of certain Sales and Use Taxes. 21. FEDERAL EXCISE TAX a. The Owner, Cornell University, a non-profit educational institution, is exempt from payment of certain Federal Excise Taxes. 22. TAX EXEMPT STATUS a. Bidders shall inform all prospective subcontractors and suppliers from whom they expect to obtain proposals or quotations of the tax exempt status of the Owner as set forth above and request that they reflect anticipated tax credits in their proposals or quotations. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS -5 23. EXEMPTION CERTIFICATES a. At the Contractor's request, following the award of a Contract, Contractor exempt purchase certificates will be furnished by the Owner to the Contractor with respect to such tax exempt articles or transactions as may be applicable under the Contract. 24. REQUIRED SUBMISSIONS a. Provide with Bid Proposal: Acknowledgement of Addenda and/or Bulletins issued prior to bid opening Certificate as to Corporate Bidder List of Proposed Subcontractors Schedule of Values Alternate Proposals and Unit Prices b. Within fourteen days after bid opening: (1) (2) (3) Use of Minority and Female Vendor Forms Summary of Bid Activity with Minority and Female Subcontractors/Vendors Six -Month Workforce Projection c. Execution of Contract: (1) Insurance Certificate (2) Performance Bond (3) Labor and Material Payment Bond (4) Schedule of Work (bar chart) (5) Federal Tax Identification Number END OF SECTION INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS -6 CLARK HALL LEARNING FACILITY - PHASE II Cornell University, Ithaca, New York BID FORM Submitted by: Date To: Nancy A. Phelps, Director Facilities Contracts 121 Humphreys Service Building Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Gentlemen: The undersigned, a (Name of Bidder) (Type of Firm, State of hicorporation, if applicable) of (Address) having carefully examined the Instructions to Bidders, the "Conditions of the Contract" (General, Division 1 - "General Requirements"), and the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents dated March 14, 2014 prepared by Peter Gisolfi Associates, 566 Warburton Avenue, Hasting on Hudson, NY 10706 as well as the premises and conditions affecting the work, proposes to furnish all material, equipment, labor, plant, machinery, tools, supplies, services, applicable taxes and specified insurance necessary to perform the entire work, as set forth in, and in accordance with the said documents for the following considerations: 1. BASE BID a. All work complete, for the sum of for MATERIALS, SUPPLIES, LABOR, and SERVICES AND ALL OTHER COSTS. (8 ) BID FORM BF -1 2. ALTERNATE PROPOSAL a. The undersigned, if awarded the Contract, proposes to perforin work in addition to or in place of the scope of the work shown and specified herein as associated with the Base Bid in accordance with the following Alternate Proposals, which amounts are to be added or deducted to the amount of the Base Bid as indicated for the Alternates specified in Division 1 of the Specifications. b. If the Bidder desires to indicate that the acceptance of any Alternate or Alternates will result neither in an addition to nor a deduction from the value of the work, he shall enter the phrase "No Change" in response to such Alternate or Alternates. c. It is understood that the Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all of the following Alternate Proposals within ten (10) calendar days following the award of a construction contract. Alternate No. Description None. BID FORM BF -2 3. START OF WORK AND TIME FOR COMPLETION a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to commence work at the site within ten (10) calendar days after date of issuance of written notice to proceed and to complete the project no later than October 3, 2014. 4. LIST OF PROPOSED PRINCIPAL SUBCONTRACTORS a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to employ subcontractors from the following list for the Sections or Subdivisions of work stated below subject to the following provisions: (1) Prior to the award of the Contract, the Owner and Architect reserve the right to review the list of "Proposed Principal Subcontractors", and to delete from it the name or names of any to whom they may have a reasonable objection. The Contractor may make the final selection of principal subcontractors at his option from the resulting list after the award of the Contract. b. Bidder shall list the names of at least one subcontractor for each Section or Subdivision of the work listed below and shall limit the listing for each such Section or Subdivision to THREE (3) names. c. If Bidder does not propose to employ a Subcontractor for any Section or Subdivision of the work listed below, he shall enter the name of his firm for each such Section or Subdivision. CONCRETE WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION DOORS AND HARDWARE BID FORM BF -3 STOREFRONT FLOORING PAINTING SHADES FIRE SUPPRESSION HVAC ELECTRICAL BID FORM BF -4 COMMUNICATIONS ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY BID FORM BF -5 5. PRINCIPAL SUBDIVISIONS OR ELEMENTS OF THE WORK TO BE PERFORMED BY GENERAL CONTRACTORS FORCES a. If awarded a Contract, we will perform the following portions of the Work with forces directly employed by the undersigned: 6. TIME PROGRESS SCHEDULE a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to furnish a "Time Progress Schedule" showing the starting and completion dates for all principal trades and subdivisions of the Work, together with such additional information related thereto as may reasonably be required. 7. BONDS a. Performance and Payment Bonds. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract to execute and deliver to the Owner "Performance" and "Labor and Material Payment Bonds" in such form as acceptable to the Owner and in an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Sum. Such bonds will be furnished by (Name of Surety) b. Bond Premium Rate c. Bid Bond. A Bid Bond in the amount of $ Amount) is attached to this Bid. 8. SCHEDULE OF VALUES (10% of Bid a. The undersigned agrees, prior to the award of a construction contract and upon the request of the Architect or Owner, to submit a complete, itemized and detailed "Schedule of Values" including Alternates elected, if any, showing the amount allocated to the various trades and subdivisions of the work, aggregating the total Contract Sum. b. To facilitate the evaluation of Bids, the undersigned has included in each part of his Bid the following values for the trades and/or subdivisions of the work as listed below. Values for work included under Alternate Proposals are excluded. Values relative to General Contractor's costs for General Conditions are excluded. BID FORM BF -6 Spec Section Trades and/or Subdivision Division 1 General Requirements Division 2 Existing Conditions Division 6 Wood, Plastics and Composites Division 7 Thermal and Moisture Protection Division 8 Openings Division 9 Finishes Division 10 Specialties Division 11 Equipment Division 12 Furnishings Division 21 Fire Suppression Division 23 Heating, VentilatinLI and Air Conditioninc Division 26 Electrical Division 27 Communications Division 28 Electronic Safety and Security Total Values Included in Base Bid Labor Material Total Combined Bid $ BID FORM BF -7 9. SUBSTITUTIONS a. The Base Bid is predicated on compliance with the Drawings and Specifications without substitutions. b. The Bidder may offer substitutions for any item noted in the Specifications, with the exception of Form of Contract, General Conditions and General Requirements - Division 1, by listing in the space below the proposed substitution, together with the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid if the substitution is accepted. c. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any proposed substitution. d. The sum stated includes any modifications of work or additional work that may be required by reason of acceptance of substitution. Substitute materials must be approved and accepted by the Owner in writing before same may be used in lieu of those named in the Specifications. Item and Specification Description of Reference Deduction from Base Bid Substitution Section & Page No. Labor Material BID FORM BF -8 10. ACCEPTANCE a. The undersigned agrees that this Proposal shall remain in force and effect for a period of not less than sixty (60) calendar days following the bid due date. b. If written notice of acceptance of this Proposal is mailed, telegraphed or delivered to the undersigned within sixty (60) calendar days after the date of opening of Bids, or any time thereafter before this Proposal is withdrawn, the undersigned will within ten (10) calendar days after the date of such mailing, telegraphing or delivery of such notice, execute an Agreement between Contractor and Owner, amended and/or supplemented, if required, in accordance with the Proposal as accepted. c. The undersigned further agrees, if requested by the Owner, to furnish Performance and Payment Bonds pursuant to Article 7 herein within ten (10) calendar days of issuance of such notice. d. It is understood and agreed that the Owner reserves the right to accept any of the Alternate Proposals listed within ten (10) calendar days following the award of a construction contract. e. It is understood and agreed that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, to waive any informalities in bidding, and to hold all proposals for the above noted period of time. BID FORM BF -9 11. ADDENDUM RECEIPT a. Receipt of the following addenda to the Terms and Conditions, Drawings or Specifications is acknowledged: Dated: Addendum No. Dated: Addendum No. Dated: Addendum No. Dated: Addendum No. Dated: Addendum No. Dated: By: Title: Business Address: (Bidder) BID FORM BF -10 CERTIFICATE OF NON -COLLUSION By submission of this bid, each bidder and each person signing on behalf of any bidder certifies, and in the case of a joint bid each party thereto certifies as to its own organization, under penalty of perjury, that to the best of his knowledge and belief: a. The prices in this bid have been arrived at independently without collusion, consultation, communication, or agreement, for the purpose of restricting competition, as to any matter relating to such prices with any other bidder or with any competitor. b. Unless required by law, the prices which have been quoted in this bid have not been knowingly disclosed by the bidder and will not knowingly be disclosed by the bidder prior to opening, directly or indirectly, to any other bidder or with any competitor. c. No attempt has been made or will be made by the bidder to induce any other persons, partnership, or corporation to submit or not submit a bid for the purpose of restricting competition. Dated: By: Title: (Bidder) BID FORM BF -11 CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE BIDDER I, , certify that I am the of the Corporation named as Bidder within this Bid Form for General Contractors; that , who signed said Bid Form on behalf of the bidder was then of said Corporation; that I know his signature; that his signature thereto is genuine and that said Bid Form and attachments thereto were duly signed, sealed and executed for and in behalf of said Corporation by authority of its governing body. Dated: (Secretary -Clerk) (CORPORATE SEAL) BID FORM BF -12 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CLARK HALL LEARNING FACILITY - PHASE II CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK Rev 08-20 12 ARTICLE 1 Section 1.01 Section 1.02 Section 1.03 ARTICLE 2 Section 2.01 Section 2.02 Section 2.03 Section 2.04 Section 2.05 Section 2.06 Section 2.07 Section 2.08 Section 2.09 Section 2.10 Section 2.11 Section 2.12 Section 2.13 Section 2.14 Section 2.15 ARTICLE 3 Section 3.01 Section 3.02 Section 3.03 Section 3.04 Section 3.05 Section 3.06 ARTICLE 4 Section 4.01 Section 4.02 ARTICLE 5 Section 5.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Owner Meaning and Intent of Specifications, Plans and Drawings Order of Precedence CONTRACTOR Contractor's Obligations Contractor's Title to Materials "Or Equal" Clause Quality, Quantity and Labeling Superintendence by Contractor Subsurface or Site Conditions Representations of Contractor Verifying Dimensions and Site Conditions Copies of Contract Documents for Contractors Meetings Related Work Surveys and Layout Errors, Omissions or Discrepancies Project Labor Rates Daily Reports INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE Access to the Work Notice for Testing Inspection of Work Inspection and Testing Defective or Damaged Work Acceptance Page 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 CHANGES IN WORK Changes 8 Form of Change Orders 10 TIME OF COMPLETION Time of Completion 10 Rev 08-2012 ARTICLE 6 Section 6.01 Section 6.02 Section 6.03 ARTICLE 7 Section 7.01 ARTICLE 8 Section 8.01 ARTICLE 9 Section 9.01 ARTICLE 10 Section 10.01 Section 10.02 Section 10.03 Section 10.04 Section 10.05 Section 10.06 Section 10.07 Section 10.08 Section 10.09 Section 10.10 ARTICLE 11 Section 11.01 Section 11.02 ARTICLE 12 Section 12.01 Section 12.02 Section 12.03 Section 12.04 ARTICLE 13 TABLE OF CONTENTS TERMINATION Termination for Cause Termination for Convenience of Owner Owner's Right to do Work DISPUTES Disputes Procedure SUBCONTRACTS Subcontracting COORDINATION AND COOPERATION Cooperation with Other Contractors PROTECTION OF RIGHTS, PERSONS AND PROPERTY Accidents and Accident Prevention Adjoining Property Emergencies Bonds Risks Assumed by the Contractor Contractor's Compensation and Liability Insurance Liability Insurance of the Owner Owner's and Contractor's Responsibilities for Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Hazards Effect of Procurement of Insurance No Third Party Rights Page 11 11 12 12 13 13 15 16 16 16 16 17 18 18 19 19 USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER Substantial Completion 19 Occupancy Prior to Acceptance 19 PAYMENT Provision of Payment Withholding Payments Documents and Conditions Precedent to Final Payment Final Payment and Release TAX EXEMPTION 20 22 22 23 Section 13.01 Tax Exemption 24 11 Rev 08-2012 ARTICLE 14 Section 14.01 ARTICLE 15 Section 15.01 Section 15.02 Section 15.03 Section 15.04 Section 15.05 Section 15.06 Section 15.07 .Section 15.08 ARTICLE 16 ARTICLE 17 ARTICLE 18 ARTICLE 19 Section 19.01 Section 19.02 Section 19.03 ARTICLE 20 TABLE OF CONTENTS GUARANTEE Guarantee STANDARD PROVISIONS Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted Laws Governing the Contract Assignments No Third Party Rights Waiver of Rights of Owner Nondiscrimination and Affirmative Action Limitation on Actions Owner's Representative ACCOUNTING, INSPECTION AND AUDIT CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATION ROYALTIES AND PATENTS CONFIDENTIALITY AND USE OF OWNER'S NAME Release of Information Confidential Information Use of Owner's Name Page 24 25 25 25 25 25 25 26 27 27 27 27 27 28 28 CORNELL UNIVERSITY STANDARDS OF ETHICAL CONDUCT 29 111 Rev 08-2012 EXHIBITS A Change Order A-1 Change Order Documentation Instructions Construction Contract Change Order Request Construction Contract Change Order Summary B Schedule of Values for Contract Payment C Final Release D Application and Certificate for Payment E Guarantee F Form I Contractor's Affirmative Action Plan Use of MBE and WBE Vendors Form II Contractor's Affirmative Action Plan Summary of Bid Activity with MBE and WBE Subcontractors and Vendors Form III Affirmative Action Workforce Report Form IV Minority -Women Utilization Report G Labor Rate Breakdown H Stored Materials Invoicing Documentation I Contractor Performance Evaluation iv Rev 08-2012 ARTICLE 1 -- INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Section 1.01 - Owner A. The Owner is Cornell University as identified in the Agreement and referred to throughout the Contract Documents as the "Owner" or "Cornell University". B. Ownership of Documents: All drawings, specifications, computations, sketches, test data, survey results, photographs, renderings and other material relating to the Work, whether furnished to or prepared by the Contractor, are the property of Cornell University. The Contractor shall use such materials or information therefrom only in connection with the Work of this Contract. When requested, the Contractor shall deliver such materials to Cornell University. C. The Owner shall give all orders and directions contemplated under the Contract relative to the execution of the Work. The Owner shall determine the amount, quality, acceptability, and fitness of the Work and shall decide all questions which may arise in relation to said Work. The Owner's estimates and decisions shall be final except as otherwise expressly provided. D. Any differences or conflicts concerning performance which may arise between Ole Contractor and other Contractors performing Work for the Owner shall be adjusted and determined by the Owner. E. The table of contents, titles, captions, headings, running headlines, and marginal notes contained herein and in said documents is intended to facilitate reference to various provisions of the Contract Documents and in no way affect the interpretation of the provisions to which they refer. Section 1.02 - Meaning and hitent of Specifications, Plans and Drawings The meaning and intent of all specifications, plans and drawings shall be determined in a manner approved by the Owner. Section 1.03 - Order of Precedence A. Should a conflict occur in or between or among any parts of the Contract Documents that are entitled to equal preference, the more expensive way of doing the Work, the better quality or greater quantity of material shall govern, unless the Owner otherwise so directs in writing. B. Drawings and specifications are reciprocal. Anything shown on the plans and not mentioned in the specifications, or mentioned in the specifications and not shown on the plans, shall have the same effect as if shown or mentioned in both. C. Requirements of reference standards form a part of these specifications to the extent indicated by the reference thereto. When provisions of reference standards conflict with provisions in these specifications, the specifications shall govern. Rev 08-2012 ARTICLE 2 -- CONTRACTOR Section 2.01 - Contractor's Obligations A. The Contractor shall, in good workmanlike manner, perform all the Work required by the Contract within the time specified in the Contract. The Contractor shall comply with all terms of the Contract, and shall do, carry on, and complete the entire Work to the satisfaction of the Owner. 1. All labor for this project which is normally under the jurisdiction of one of the local unions as covered in the contract between the Tompkins -Cortland Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division and Cornell University shall be performed by Union labor. B. The Contractor shall furnish, erect, maintain, and remove such construction plant and such temporary Work as may be required. C. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, material, tools, equipment, machinery, as well as utility connections, transportation, and all other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work, except as otherwise specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. D. Whenever a provision of the Specifications conflicts with agreements or regulations in force among members of trade associations, unions, or councils which regulate or distinguish what work shall or shall not be included in the work of a particular trade, the Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to reconcile such conflict without delay, damage, or cost to the Owner and without recourse to the Architect or the Owner. In case progress of the Work is affected by undue delay in furnishing or installing items of material or equipment required under the Contract because of a conflict involving such agreement or regulations, the Owner or the Architect may require that other material or equipment of equal kind and quality be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. Section 2.02 - Contractor's Title to Materials A. The Contractor warrants that the Contractor has full, good and clear title to all materials and supplies used by the Contractor in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. B. All materials, equipment and articles which become the property of the Owner shall be new unless specifically stated otherwise. Section 2.03 - "Or Equal" Clause A. Whenever a material, article or piece of equipment or method is identified on the plans or in the specifications by reference to manufacturers' or vendors' names, trade name, catalogue number, or make, no others may be substituted. Any and all other "Or Equal" considerations will be handled under this Section in accordance with General Requirements, Section 01 25 00. 2 Rev 08-2012 B. Where the Architect approves a product proposed by the Contractor and said proposed product requires a revision or redesign of any part of the Work covered by this Contract, or the Work covered by other contracts, all said revision or redesign, and all new drawings and details required therefor shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be approved by the Architect. All time spent by the Architect or its agents to evaluate the proposed substitution and or necessary engineering cost to accommodate the requested change shall be reimbursed to the Owner by the Contractor via the Change Order procedure. Section 2.04 - Quality, Quantity and Labeling A. The Contractor shall furnish materials and equipment of the quality and quantity specified in the Contract. Unless otherwise provided, all materials and articles incorporated into the work shall be new and of the most suitable grade of their respective kinds for the purpose. When required by the Contract Documents or when directed by the Owner, the Contractor shall supply the Owner's Representative, for their acceptance, full information concerning any material which the Contractor contemplates incorporating into the work. Materials and articles installed or used without such acceptance shall be at the risk of subsequent rejection. B. When materials are specified to conform to any standard, the Owner may require that the materials delivered to the Site shall bear manufacturer's labels stating that the materials meet said standards. C. The above requirements shall not restrict or affect the Owner's right to test materials as provided in the Contract. D. Whenever several alternative materials or items are specified by name or other particular reference for one use, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to submit in writing a list of the particular materials or items the Contractor intends to use before the Contract is executed. Section 2.05 - Superintendence by Contractor A. The Contractor shall employ a full-time competent construction superintendent and necessary staff; the construction superintendent shall devote full time to the Work and shall have full authority to act for the Contractor at all times. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with the names and authority of such personnel in writing. B. If at any time the superintendent is not satisfactory to the Owner, the Contractor shall, if requested by the Owner, replace said superintendent with another superintendent satisfactory to the Owner. There shall be no change in superintendent without the Owner's approval. C. The Contractor shall remove from the Work any employee of the Contractor or of any Subcontractor when so directed by the Owner. Rev 08-2012 Section 2.06 - Subsurface or Site Conditions A. The Contractor acknowledges that it has assumed the risk and that the contract consideration includes such provision as the Contractor deems proper for all subsurface conditions as the Contractor could reasonably anticipate encountering from the provisions of the Contract Documents, borings, rock cores, topographical maps and such other information as the Owner made available to the Contractor or from their own inspection and examination of the site prior to the Owner's receipt of bids. B. In the event that the Contractor encounters subsurface physical conditions at the site differing substantially from those shown on or described or indicated in the Contract Documents and which could not have been reasonably anticipated from the aforesaid information made available by the Owner or from the Contractor's aforesaid inspection and examination of the site, the Contractor shall give immediate notice to the Owner of such conditions before they are disturbed. Such notice shall include probable cost and/or any impact to the schedule. The Owner will thereupon promptly investigate the conditions and if Owner finds that they do substantially differ from that which should have been reasonably anticipated by the Contractor, the Owner shall make such changes in the drawings and specifications as may be necessary and a change order shall be issued. Section 2.07 - Representations of Contractor The Contractor represents and warrants: A. That the Contractor is financially solvent and is experienced in and competent to perform the Work; B. That the Contractor is familiar with all Federal, State, or other laws, ordinances, orders, building codes, rules and regulations, which may in any way affect the Work; C. That any temporary and permanent Work required by the Contract can be safely and satisfactorily constructed. D. That the Contractor has carefully examined the Contract and the Site of the Work and that, from the Contractor's own investigations is satisfied as to the nature and location of the Work, the character, quality and quantity of surface and subsurface materials likely to be encountered, the character of equipment and other facilities needed for the performance of the Work, the general and local conditions, and all other materials or items which may affect the Work. The Contractor has correlated those observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents and has made all other investigations essential to a full understanding of the Work and the difficulties which may be encountered in performing the Work. Section 2.08 - Verifying Dimensions and Site Conditions A. The Contractor shall take all measurements at the Site and shall verify all dimensions and site conditions at the Site before proceeding with the Work. If said dimensions or conditions are found to be in conflict with the Contract, the Contractor immediately shall refer said conflict to the Owner. 4 Rev 08-2012 B. During the progress of Work, the Contractor shall verify all field measurements prior to fabrication of building components and equipment, and proceed with the fabrication to meet field conditions. C. The Contractor shall consult all Contract Documents to determine exact location of all Work and verify spatial relationships of all Work. Any question concerning said location or spatial relationships shall be submitted in a manner approved by the Owner. D. Specific locations for equipment, pipelines, ductwork and other such items of Work, where not dimensioned on plans, shall be determined in consultation with the Owner and other affected Contractors and Subcontractors. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of the Work in place. F. Should failure of the Contractor to perform services under this section result in additional costs to the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible for such additional costs. Section 2.09 - Copies of Contract Documents for Contractors A. The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor, without charge, up to ten (10) sets of Contracts Documents and one (1) set of reproducible sepias. B. Any sets in excess of the number mentioned above may be furnished to the Contractor at the cost of reproduction and mailing. C. All drawings, specifications, and copies thereof furnished by the Owner are the property of the Owner. They are not to be used on other work, and with the exception of the signed Contract Set, are to be returned to the Owner on request at the completion of the work. Section 2.10 - Meetings The Contractor and all subcontractors as requested shall attend all meetings as directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative. Section 2.11 - Related Work The Contractor shall examine the Contract for related work to ascertain the relationship of said work to the Work under the Contract. Section 2.12 - Surveys and Layout Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract, the Owner shall furnish the Contractor all surveys of the property necessary for the Work, but the Contractor shall lay out the Work. Section 2.13 - Errors, Omissions or Discrepancies The Contractor shall examine the Contract thoroughly before commencing the Work and report in writing any errors or discrepancies to the Owner or the Owner's Representative. 5 Rev 08-2012 Section 2.14 - Project Labor Rates The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, for review and approval, within thirty (30) days after Contract is awarded all trade labor rates inclusive of fringe benefits, taxes, insurance for the duration of the individual craft agreement in accordance with Exhibit G. Revised rates shall be provided within thirty (30) days of signing any new agreements with the individual crafts during this project. Section 2.15 — Daily Reports The Contractor's Construction Superintendent shall submit a Daily Report to the Cornell University Project Manager or the Resident Field Engineer at the job site. Such reports shall, at a minimum, contain the following information: Name of Project Project Number Date of Report Weather Conditions Equipment on the site Contractors on site including name and number of employees on site for each contractor Work/area and activity for each contractor Overtime worked and planned work progress Environmental problems and corrections Other infonnation, such as special events, occurrences, materials delivered, accidents or injuries, recommendations, suggestions, visitors, inspections, equipment start-up and check out, occupancy, etc. ARTICLE 3 -- INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE Section 3.01 - Access to the Work The Owner and Architect, or their duly authorized representatives, assistants, or inspectors shall at all times and for any purpose have access to the work and the premises used by the Contractor, and the Contractor shall provide safe and proper facilities therefor. In addition, the Contractor shall, whenever so requested, give the Owner and Architect or their duly authorized representatives access to the proper invoices, bills of lading, specifications, etc., which may be required in determining the adequacy and/or quantity of materials used in completion of the work. Section 3.02 - Notice for Testing If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction require any work to be inspected, tested, accepted, or approved, the Contractor shall give the Owner timely notice of its readiness and of the date arranged so the Owner may observe such inspection, testing, or approval. The Contractor shall bear all costs of such inspection, tests, and approvals unless otherwise provided. 6 Rev 08-2012 Section 3.03 - Inspection of Work A. The Contractor will cooperate in all ways to facilitate the inspection and examination of the work. The inspections and examinations will be carried out in such a manner that the work will not be delayed. B. All Work, all materials whether or not incorporated in the Work, all processes of manufacturer, and all methods of construction shall be, at all times and places, subject to the inspection of the Owner and the Owner shall be the final judge of the quality and suitability of the Work. Any Work not approved by the Owner shall immediately be reconstructed, made good, replaced or corrected by the Contractor including all Work of other Contractors destroyed or damaged by said removal or replacement. C. Required certificates of inspection, testing, acceptance, or approval shall be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Owner. Section 3.04 - Inspection and Testing All materials and equipment used in the Work shall be subject to inspection and testing in accordance with accepted standards to establish conformance with specifications and suitability for uses intended, unless otherwise specified in the Contract. If any Work shall be covered or concealed without the approval or consent of the Owner, said Work shall, if required by the Owner, be uncovered for examination. If any test results are below specified minimums, the Owner may order additional testing. The cost of said additional testing, any additional professional services required, and any other expenses incurred by the Owner as a result of said additional testing shall be paid by the Contractor. Reexamination of any part of the Work may be ordered by the Owner, and if so ordered the Work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If said Work is found to be in accordance with the Contract, the Owner shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement. If said Work is found not to be in accordance with the Contract, the Contractor shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement. Section 3.05 - Defective or Damaged Work If, in the opinion of the Owner, it is undesirable to replace any defective or damaged materials or to reconstruct or correct any portion of the Work injured or not performed in accordance with the Contract, the compensation to be paid to the Contractor shall be reduced by an amount which, in the judgment of the Owner, shall be deemed to be equitable. Section 3.06 - Acceptance No previous inspection shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract. No payment, either partial or full, by the Owner to the Contractor shall excuse any failure by the Contractor to comply fully with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall remedy all defects, paying the cost of any damage to other Work resulting therefrom. 7 Rev 08-2012 ARTICLE 4 -- CHANGES IN WORK Section 4.01 - Changes A. The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes within the general scope of the Contract and the Contractor shall promptly comply with such change orders. B. A change order is a written direction to the Contractor signed by the Owner, issued after execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the Work, extra work, or an adjustment in the Contract price or time of performance. C. No claims for changes, extra work or additional time to complete the Contract or an adjustment in the Contract price shall be allowed unless such change is ordered in writing by the Owner. D. The Owner shall determine the amount by which the Contract consideration is to be increased or decreased by a change order by one (1) or more of the following methods: By agreement with the Contractor. By applying the applicable price or prices previously bid and approved. This method shall be used if the Contract contains applicable unit prices. (i) To the extent that Unit Prices are applicable, as determined by the Owner, work shall be priced and paid for or credited in accordance with such Unit Prices; except that a Unit Price shall not apply to any portion of work which is either reduced or increased by more than 25%. Said Unit Prices shall be valid for the duration of the project as applicable, unless stipulated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. (ii) For Unit Price items, additions and deletion of like items shall be algebraically summed and then multiplied by the applicable Unit Prices. For Direct Labor and Material items, all additions and deletions shall be algebraically summed for each subcontractor and then multiplied by the applicable markup. (iii) Unit Prices are for work complete, measured in place and cover profit and all other costs and expenses. Unit Prices include, without limit, all conditions of the contract and all general requirements such as layout, reproduction of Drawings and Specifications, testing and inspection, shop drawing and sample coordination, supervision (field and home office), small tools and expendable items, insurance, taxes, temporary facilities and services, including access and safety, "as -built" drawings, and general and administrative overhead and profit. 8 Rev 08-2012 3. By estimating the fair and reasonable cost of: (i) Labor, including all wages, required wage supplements and insurance required by law paid to employees below the rank of superintendent directly employed at the Site. (ii) Materials (iii) Equipment, excluding hand tools, which in the judgment of the Owner, would have been or will be employed exclusively and directly on the Work. 4. By determining the actual cost of the extra work in the same manner as in Subsection 3 except the actual costs of the Contractor shall be used in lieu of estimated costs. E. Mark-ups: 1. Work performed by the Contractor. Where the Work is performed directly by the Contractor by adding to the total of such estimated costs a sum equal to fifteen percent (15%) thereof. 2. Work performed by a Subcontractor. Where the change order work is performed by a Subcontractor under contract with the Contractor, by adding a sum equal to fifteen (15%) of said costs for the benefit of said Subcontractor, and by adding for the benefit of the Contractor an additional sum equal to ten percent (10%) of said costs. 3. Work performed by a Sub -Subcontractor. Where work is performed by a Sub -Subcontractor, by adding the sum equal to fifteen percent (15%) of said costs for the benefit of said Sub -Subcontractor, by adding for the benefit of the Subcontractor an additional sum equal to five percent (5%) of said cost and by adding for the benefit of the Contractor an additional sum equal to five percent (5%) of said cost. 4. No markup shall be paid on the premium portion of overtime pay. 5. No markup shall be paid on insurance, taxes, fringe benefits or bond cost. Where the Work involves both an increase and a reduction in similar or related Work, the above percentage override shall be applied only on the amount, if any, that the cost of the increase exceeds the cost of the reduction. F. Regardless of the method used by the Owner in determining the value of a change order, the Contractor, within thirty (30) calendar days after a request for the estimate of value shall submit to the Owner a detailed breakdown of the Contractor's estimate, including all subcontractors details, of the value of the Change Order Work, in the format detailed in Exhibit A-1. Each submission shall include a paper copy and an electronic .pdf format of all documentation. 9 Rev 08-2072 G. Unless otherwise specifically provided for in a change order, the compensation specified therein includes a full payment for both the Work covered by the order and for any damage or expense incurred by the Contractor by any delays, including any delays to other Work to be done under the Contract resulting from said change order. The Contractor waives all rights to any other compensation for said damage or expense. H. The Contractor shall furnish satisfactory bills, payrolls and vouchers covering all items of cost and when requested by the Owner shall give the Owner access to accounts and records relating thereto. Section 4.02 - Form of Change Orders All change orders shall be processed, executed and approved on the Owner's change order form, which is included herein as Exhibit "A" and made a pall of the Contract Documents. No alter=ation to this form shall be acceptable to the Owner and no payment for change order Work shall be due the Contractor unless a change order has been issued and approved on said form. ARTICLE 5 -- TIME OF COMPLETION Section 5.01 - Time of Completion A. The Work shall be commenced at the time stated in the written order of the Owner and shall be completed no later than the date of completion specified in the Contract. All required overtime to maintain progress schedule is included in the Base Bid. B. The date of beginning and the time for completion of the Work, as specified in the Contract, are essential conditions of the Contract. C. The Work shall be prosecuted diligently at such rate of progress as shall insure full completion within the time specified. It is expressly understood and agreed, that the time for the completion of the Work described herein is a reasonable time, taking into consideration the average climatic range and usual business and labor conditions prevailing in the locality of the Site. D. Time is of the essence on each and every portion of the Work. In any instance in which additional time is allowed for the completion of any Work, the new time of completion established by said extension shall be of the essence. If in the Architect's or Owner's judgment, it becomes necessary at any time during construction to accelerate and/or complete certain areas of the project, the Contractor shall concentrate efforts and manpower on designated areas. E. Where Work occurs within occupied areas, perform same only on approved schedule, so as not to interfere with normal operation of occupied areas. F. The Contractor shall not be charged with damages or any excess cost if the Owner determines that the Contractor is without fault and the Contractor's reasons for the time extension are acceptable to the Owner. The Contractor shall not be charged with damages or any excess cost for delay in completion of the work if the Owner determines that the delay is due to: 10 Rev 08-2012 1. any preference, priority or allocation order duly issued by the Government of the United States or the State of New York; 2. unforeseeable cause beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor, and approved by the Owner, including, but not limited to, acts of God or of public enemy, acts of the Owner, fires, epidemics, quarantine, restrictions, strikes, freight embargoes and unusually severe weather. G. The time for completion can only be extended by change order and may be extended for: 1. all of the Work, or 2. only that portion of the Work altered by the change order. H. Any claim for extension of time shall be made in writing to the Owner not more than ten (10) days after the commencement of the delay; otherwise it shall be waived. ARTICLE 6 -- TERMINATION Section 6.01 - Termination for Cause In the event that any provision of this Contract is violated by the Contractor or by any Subcontractor of the Contractor, the Owner may serve written notice upon the Contractor, and upon the Contractor's surety, if any, of the Owner's intention to terminate the Contract. The notice shall briefly state the reasons for the termination and shall specify a termination date. If arrangements satisfactory to the Owner are not made to remove and remedy the violation, the Contract shall terminate upon the date specified by the Owner in the notice. In the event of termination, the Owner may take over and complete the Work at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor and Contractor's surety shall be liable to the Owner for all costs thereby incurred by the Owner. In the event of such termination the Owner may take possession of and may utilize such materials, appliances, and plant as may be located on the Site and which may be necessary or useful in completing the Work. Section 6.02 - Termination for Convenience of Owner The Owner, at any time, may terminate the Contract in whole or in part. Any said termination shall be effected by delivering to the Contractor a notice of termination specifying the extent to which performance of Work under the Contract is terminated and the date upon which said termination becomes effective. Upon receipt of the notice of termination, the Contractor shall act promptly to minimize the expenses resulting from said termination. The Owner shall pay the Contractor for costs actually incurred by the Contractor up to the effective date of said termination, but in no event shall the Contractor be entitled to compensation in excess of the total consideration of the Contract. In the event of said termination the Owner may take over the Work and prosecute same to completion. 11 Rev 08-2012 Section 6.03 - Owner's Right to do Work The Owner may, after notice to the Contractor, without terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Owner may have, perform or have performed by others all of the Work or any part thereof and may deduct the cost thereof from any monies due or to become due the Contractor. ARTICLE 7 -- DISPUTES Section 7.01 - Disputes Procedure A. If the Contractor claims that any Work which the Contractor has been ordered to perforin will be Work which should have been authorized or directed by change order, or that any action or omission of the Owner is contrary to the tens of the Contract, the Contractor shall: 1. File a notice with the Owner which sets forth the basis of the Contractor's claim and requests a resolution of the dispute. Such notice shall be filed within fifteen (15) working days after being ordered to perform the disputed work or within fifteen (15) working days after commencing performance of the disputed work, whichever is earlier, or within fifteen (15) working days after the act or omission of the Owner which the Contractor claims is contrary to the terms of the Contract. 2. Proceed diligently with the performance of the work in accordance with the instructions of the Owner pending the resolution of the dispute by the Owner. 3. Promptly comply with the order of the Owner regarding the disputed matter. 4. Any such decision, or any other decision of the Owner in respect to a dispute, shall be final unless the Contractor, within ten (10) working days after such decision, shall deliver to the Owner a verified written statement which sets forth the Contractor's contention that the decision is contrary to a provision of the contract. Pending the decision of the Owner, the Contractor shall proceed in accordance with the original decision. The Owner shall determine the validity of the Contractor's claim and such determination shall be final. The Contractor may file a notice with the Owner reserving its rights in connection with the dispute but shall comply with the Owner's decision and complete the work as directed. B. No claim for additional costs regarding changed or extra work shall be allowed unless the work was done pursuant to a written order of the Owner. C. The value of claims for extra work, if allowed, shall be determined by the methods described in the Contract. Refer to Article 4 of these General Conditions. 12 Rev 08-2012 D. The Contractor's failure to comply with any or all parts of Article 7 shall be deemed to be: 1. a conclusive and binding determination on the part of the Contractor that the order, work, action or omission is not contrary to the terms and provisions of the Contract; 2. a waiver by the Contractor of all claims for additional compensation, time extension, or damages as a result of said order, work, action or omission. ARTICLE 8 -- SUBCONTRACTS Section 8.01 - Subcontracting A. The Contractor may utilize the services of Subcontractors. B. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, in writing, the name of each proposed Subcontractor and Sub -Subcontractor, as required by the Contract. The Contractor shall not award any Work to any Subcontractor or Sub -Subcontractor without the prior written approval of the Owner. C. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the Work, acts and omissions of Subcontractors, and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by Subcontractors. D. The Contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all subcontracts relative to the Work to bind Subcontractors to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract insofar as applicable to the Work of Subcontractors, indemnification and to give the Contractor the same power to terminate any subcontract that the Owner may exercise over the Contractor. E. The Contractor's use of Subcontractors shall not diminish the Contractor's obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor shall control and coordinate the Work of Subcontractors. F. Nothing contained in the Contract shall create any contractual relationship between Subcontractors and the Owner. ARTICLE 9 -- COORDINATION AND COOPERATION Section 9.01 - Cooperation with Other Contractors A. Normally, the Work will be performed by a single Contractor. However, the Owner reserves the right to perform work related to the Work with its own forces or award separate contracts. In that event, the Contractor shall coordinate its operations with the Owner's forces or separate Contractors. 13 Rev 08-2012 B. The Owner cannot guarantee the responsibility, efficiency, unimpeded operations or performance of any contractor. The Contractor acknowledges these conditions and shall bear the risk of all delays including, but not limited to, delays caused by the presence or operations of other contractors. C. The Contractor shall keep informed of the progress and workmanship of other contractors and shall notify the Owner immediately of lack of progress or defective workmanship on the part of other contractors where said delay or defective workmanship may interfere with the Contractor's operations. D. Failure of a Contractor to keep so informed and failure to give notice of lack of progress or defective workmanship by others shall be construed as acceptance by the Contractor of said progress and workmanship as being satisfactory for proper coordination with the Work. E. If the Contractor notifies the Owner, in writing, that another contractor on the Site is failing to coordinate the work of said contractor with the Work, the Owner shall investigate the charge. If the Owner finds it to be true, the Owner shall promptly issue such directions to the other contractor with respect thereto as the situation may require. The Owner shall not be liable for any damages suffered by the Contractor by reason of the other contractor's failure to promptly comply with the directions so issued by the Owner, or by reason of another contractor's default in performance. F. If the Owner shall determine that the Contractor is failing to coordinate the Work with the work of other contractors as the Owner has directed: 1. the Owner shall have the right to withhold any payments due under the Contract until the Owner's directions are complied with by the Contractor; and 2. the Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from any and all claims or judgments for damages and from any costs or damages to which the Owner may be subjected or which the Owner may suffer or incur by reason of the Contractor's failure promptly to comply with the Owner's directions. G. Should the Contractor sustain any damage through any act or omission of any other contractor having a contract with the Owner or through any act or omission of any Subcontractor of said other contractor, the Contractor shall have no claim against the Owner for said damage. H. Should any other contractor having a Contract with the Owner sustain damage through any act or omission of the Contractor or its Subcontractor, the Contractor shall reimburse said other contractor for all said damages and shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from all said claims. 14 Rev 08-2012 ARTICLE 10 -- PROTECTION OF RIGHTS, PERSONS AND PROPERTY Section 10.01 - Accidents and Accident Prevention A. The Contractor shall at all times take reasonable precautions for the safety of persons engaged in the performance of the work. The Contractor shall comply fully with all applicable provisions of federal, state, and local law. The Contractor alone shall be responsible for the safety, efficiency and adequacy of the Contractor's Work, plant, appliances and methods, and for any damage which may result from the failure or the improper construction, maintenance, or operation of said Work, plant, appliances and methods. B. The Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of all cases of death, occupational disease, and injury requiring medical attention or causing loss of time from work, arising out of or in the course of employment on Work under the Contract, and shall immediately notify the Owner in writing of any injury which results in hospitalization or death. The Contractor shall supply the Owner with all Contractor and Subcontractor written accident investigation forms and accident reports prepared. C. The Contractor shall provide to the Project Manager, Material Safety Data Sheets (OSHA Form 20 or the equivalent) for all chemicals to be used on site. All chemicals requiring any precautionary measures (eg. special storage or disposal requirements, personal protective equipment, or additional ventilation), shall be brought to the attention of Cornell University for review and approval, prior to their use on site. 1. All chemicals brought on site by the Contractor shall be clearly labeled. The label shall state the identity of the chemical, any associated hazards, and the Contractor's name. 2. All Contractor employees who are using chemicals shall be made aware of the hazards associated with their use. Safe chemical handling procedures in accordance with OSHA or other governmental agencies, and manufacturer's recommendations shall be used at all times. 3. The Contractor shall dispose of all chemicals in accordance with EPA and Cornell University requirements, regardless of the size of the container or the quantity of waste, and must receive prior approval of Cornell University. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the initiation, maintenance and supervision of safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. E. The Contractor shall, at all times, guard the Owner's property from injury or loss in connection with the Work. The Contractor shall, at all times, guard and protect the Contractor's Work. The Contractor shall replace or make good any said loss or injury unless said loss or injury is caused directly by the Owner. rF. The Contractor shall have full responsibility to install, protect and maintain all F. The Contractor shall have full responsibility to install, protect and maintain all materials and supplies in proper condition and forthwith repair, replace and make good any damage thereto until Final Acceptance. 15 Rev 08-2012 Section 10.02 - Adjoining Property A. The Contractor shall be required to protect all the adjoining property and to repair or replace any such properties damaged or destroyed by the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors thereof, by reason of, or as a result of activities under, for or related to the Contract. Section 10.03 - Emergencies A. In case of an emergency which threatens Loss or injury to persons or property, the Contractor will be allowed to act, without previous instructions from the Owner, in a diligent manner, to the extent required to avoid or limit such loss or injury, and the Contractor shall notify the Owner immediately thereafter of the action taken. Section 10.04 - Bonds A. Before commencing the performance of any work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner any required Bonds. The failure of the Contractor to supply the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the Contract signing shall constitute a default. Section 10.05 - Risks Assumed by the Contractor A. Indemnification. To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and its agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses, fines, and expenses, including attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the work including, but not limited to, those arising out of bodily or personal injury, sickness, disease, death, or injury or destruction of tangible property, including the loss of use resulting therefrom, to which the Owner, its agents or employees may be subjected by reason of any negligent act or omission, willful misconduct, violation of law, or breach of this Contract by the Contractor, or any of its subcontractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not it is caused in part by the Owner, except to the extent caused by Owner's own negligence. 1. In the event that any party is requested but refuses to honor the indemnity obligations hereunder, then the party indemnifying shall, in addition to all other obligations, pay the cost of bringing any such action, including attorneys' fees, to the party requesting indemnity. B. Neither the Owner's final acceptance of the work to be performed hereunder nor the making of any payment shall release the Contractor from its obligations under this Section. The enumeration elsewhere in the Contract of particular risks assumed by the Contractor or of particular claims for which the Contractor is responsible shall not be deemed to limit the effect of the provisions of this Section or to imply that the Contractor assumes or is only responsible for risk or claims of the type enumerated. 16 Rev 08-2012 Section 10.06 - Contractor's Compensation and Liability Insurance A. The Contractor shall procure and maintain, at its own cost and expense, until final acceptance by the Owner of all the work covered by this Contract, the following kinds of insurance: 1. Worker's Compensation Insurance. A policy complying with the requirements of the laws of the State of New York and any other laws that may be applicable thereto, including Coverage B - Employer's Liability with a limit of not less than $1,000,000. 2. Contractor's Comprehensive General Liability Insurance. A standard comprehensive general liability insurance policy, with contractual, completed operations, explosion, collapse and underground property damage coverage's issued to and covering the liability of the Contractor for all work and operations under this Contract, all obligations assumed by the Contractor under this Contract and all damage to work performed by subcontractors on your behalf. The Contractor shall provide Broad Form Comprehensive General Liability hrsurance, and the Owner shall be an additional insured in the policy. The policy shall include cross liability coverage and shall be endorsed to indicate that it is primary coverage. The completed operations coverage's shall be maintained for not less than two years after acceptance of the work. The coverage under such policy shall be not less than a combined single limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage as follows, or such limits carried by the Contractor, whichever is greater: BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY (BROAD FORM) $ 5,000,000 Each Occurrence $ 5,000,000 Aggregate 3. Automobile Liability Insurance. A policy covering the use in connection with the work covered by the Contract Documents of all owned, non -owned and hired vehicles bearing, or, under the circumstances under which they are being used, required by the Motor Vehicle Laws of the State of New York to bear license plates. The coverage under such policy shall be not less than a combined single limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage of: BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY $ 1,000,000 Each Person $ 1,000,000 Each Accident B. In addition to maintaining all of the above insurances, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and its agents and employees from and against liability, including additional premium due because of the Contractor's failure to maintain coverage limits as required under this section. 17 Rev 08-2012 C. Insurance similar to that required of the Contractor shall be provided by or on behalf of all subcontractors to cover their own operations performed under this Contract. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any modifications in these insurance requirements as they apply to subcontractors. D. Before commencing the performance of any work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner a current certificate or certificates, in duplicate, of the insurance required under the foregoing provisions including copies of subcontractor's certificates. Such certificates shall be on a form prescribed by the Owner, shall list the various coverage's and shall contain, in addition to any provisions hereinbefore required, a provision that the policy shall not be changed or cancelled and that it will be automatically renewed upon expiration and continued in force until final acceptance by the Owner of all the work covered by the Contract, unless the Owner is given thirty (30) days written notice to the contrary. Upon renewal of each of the Contractor's insurance coverage's, the Owner shall be provided with a new certificate of insurance showing such renewal. Certificates and written notices shall be directed to the Office of Facilities Contracts. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a certified copy of each policy including any and all exclusions to such policy. E. If at any time any of the above required insurance policies should be cancelled, terminated or modified so that insurance is not in effect as above required, then, if the Owner shall so direct, the Contractor shall suspend performance of the work covered in the Contract. If the said work is so suspended, no extension of time shall be due on account thereof. The Owner may, at its option, obtain insurance affording coverage equal to that above required, at the Contractor's expense. Section 10.07 - Liability Insurance of the Owner A. The Owner, at its own cost and expense, shall procure and maintain such liability insurance as will, in its opinion, protect the Owner from its contingent liability to others for damages because of bodily injury, including death, and property damage which may arise from operations under this Contract. 18 Rev 08-2012 Section 10.08 - Owner's and Contractor's Responsibilities for Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Hazards A. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain in force a builders risk insurance policy on the entire work. Such insurance shall be written on a completed value fonn and in an amount equal to the initial contract sum and modified by any subsequent modifications to the contract sum. The insurance shall name Cornell University and the State of New York, all subcontractors and sub- subcontractors. The insurance policy shall contain a provision that the insurance will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until the Contractor has given at least thirty (30) days prior written notice to Cornell University. The insurance shall cover the entire work at the site, including reasonable compensation for architects services and expenses made necessary by an insured loss. Insured property shall include portions of the work located away from the site and in transit to the site. The policy shall cover the cost of removing debris and demolition as may be legally necessary. The policy shall cover any boiler or machinery loss which may be suffered during installation and until final acceptance. The insurance required shall be written to cover "all risk" of physical loss including a loss due to collapse. Any deductible shall be the responsibility of the Contractor but in no case shall the deductible be more than $10,000 unless Cornell University has agreed to a higher deductible. The Contractor shall provide to Cornell University a certificate of insurance and a summary of coverage's including all endorsements and exclusions prior to commencement of the work. Once the policy is received, the Contractor shall provide a copy of such policy to Cornell University. There shall be a mutual waiver of recovery between Cornell University, the Contractor and all other parties to the extent such losses are covered by the builders risk policy. If Cornell University wishes to occupy the building prior to final acceptance and if the policy contains a provision which limits coverage for such partial occupancy, the parties agree work together to obtain consent of the insurance company for such partial occupancy or use under mutually acceptable terms. B. Losses, if any, under such insurance shall be payable to the Owner. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all loss of materials connected with the construction due to unexplainable disappearance, theft or misappropriation of any kind or nature. D. The foregoing provisions shall not operate to relieve the Contractor and subcontractors of responsibility for any loss or damage to their own or rented property or property of their employees, of whatever kind or nature, or on account of labor performed under the Contract incident to the repair, replacement, salvage, or restoration of such items, including but not limited to tools, equipment, forms, scaffolding, and temporary structures, including their contents, regardless of ownership of such contents, except for such contents as are to be included in and remain a part of the permanent construction. The Owner shall in no event be liable for any loss or damage to any of the aforementioned items, or any other property of the Contractor, subcontractors and the Architect, or employees, agents, or servants of same, which is not to be included in and remain a part of the permanent construction. The Contractor and subcontractors severally waive any rights of recovery they may have against the Owner and the Architect for damage or destruction of their own or rented property, or property of their employees of whatever kind or nature. 19 Rev 08-2012 Section 10.09 - Effect of Procurement of Insurance A. Neither the procurement nor the maintenance of any type of insurance by the Owner or the Contractor shall in any way be construed or be deemed to limit, discharge, waive or release the Contractor from any of the obligations and risks imposed upon the Contractor by the Contract or to be a limitation on the nature or extent of such obligations and risks. Section 10.10 - No Third Party Rights A. Nothing in the Contract shall create or give to third parties; any claim or right of action against the Contractor, the Architect, and the Owner beyond such as may legally exist irrespective of the Contract. ARTICLE 11 -- USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER Section 11.01 — Substantial Completion A. The term "substantial completion" means the completion of the Work to the extent that Cornell University may have uninterrupted occupancy or use of the facility or specified portion thereof for the purpose for which intended. The Contractor shall obtain all certificates of occupancy required prior to occupancy, and any electrical, mechanical and plumbing certificates, or other certificates or required approvals and acceptances by City, County, and State governments or other authority having jurisdiction. Section 11.02 - Occupancy Prior to Acceptance A. If, before Final Acceptance, the Owner desires Beneficial Occupancy of the Work, or any part thereof, which is completed or partly completed, or to place or install therein equipment and furnishings, the Owner shall have the right to do so, and the Contractor shall in no way interfere with or object to said Beneficial Occupancy by the Owner. B. Said Beneficial Occupancy (1) shall not constitute acceptance of space, systems, materials or elements of the Work, nor shall said Beneficial Occupancy affect the start of any guarantee period, and (2) shall not affect the obligations of the Contractor for Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract or other obligations of the Contractor under the Contract. C. The Contractor shall continue the performance of the Work in a manner which shall not unreasonably interfere with said use, occupancy and operation by the Owner. ARTICLE 12 -- PAYMENT Section 12.01 - Provision for Payment A. The Owner agrees to pay the Contract Price to the Contractor for the performance of this Contract and the fulfillment of all the Contractor's obligations. The Contract Price means all costs reimbursable under the Contract Documents. 20 Rev 08-2012 B. The final certificate of the Architect shall certify that the Contract has been completed within the stipulated time, and shall not be issued until all drawings and specifications have been returned to the Owner. The issuance of said certificates, however, or any payments made thereon shall not lessen the total responsibility of the Contractor to complete the work to the satisfaction of the Owner in accordance with the Contract. C. Payments on the Contract Price shall be made each month as the work progresses in accord with the following procedure: 1. The Contractor's schedule of values, including quantities, aggregating the total Contract Price, divided so as to facilitate payments to subcontractors as specified herein, shall be the basis for monthly progress payments. This schedule, attached hereto as Exhibit "B" and made a part of the Contract Documents, when approved by the Owner and Architect shall be used as a basis for progress payments. In applying for payments, the Contractor shall submit a statement based upon this approved schedule. 2. (a) On a date agreed upon by the Owner, Architect, and Contractor, a meeting shall be held by the Owner to review the work completed and materials on hand. This meeting shall review each item to be submitted by the Contractor in the requisition for payment. (b) On the first day of each month, or as soon thereafter as practicable, the Contractor shall submit a written statement, including Contract Number, full name of the project and the name of the Owner's Representative as set forth in Article 15, Section 15.08, in approved format to the Architect with five (5) copies, setting forth in detail the cost of the work done and materials delivered to the job site up to and including the last day of the previous month and shall make application for payment of ninety percent (90%) of the amount of said statement, less the aggregate of all previous payments made by the Owner against the Contract Price. (c) Each statement and application shall be accompanied by duplicate copies of an affidavit, executed by the Contractor, certifying that the statement is true and correct, and that all bills for labor, and materials incorporated in or delivered to the job, due and payable at the time of the preceding progress payment, have been paid. Before final payment is made, the Contractor shall submit evidence that all payrolls, material bills and other indebtedness incurred in connection with the Contract have been paid, including final waivers of any liens. (d) If, pursuant to a prior written agreement with the Owner, payments are requested on account of materials or equipment not incorporated in the work which have been delivered and suitably stored at the site, or at some other location, such payments shall be conditioned upon submission by the Contractor of bills of sale, insurance certificates, notice of bonded warehousing, in accordance with Exhibit "H". The Contractor shall bear the cost of transporting materials stored off-site to the site. 21 Rev 08-2012 3. Each such application for payment shall be subject to the review and approval of the Architect. If the Architect finds that the affidavit and application for payment are acceptable and that all the above requirements in connection therewith have been complied with, the Architect shall, within seven (7) calendar days after receiving such application for payment, certify to the Owner that the payment applied for is due and payable to the Contractor. The Architect shall submit the approved applications for payment to: Facilities Contracts 121 Humphreys Service Building Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 4. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment constitutes a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the date of the Application for Payment, that the work has progressed to the point indicated, that, to the best of their knowledge, information, and belief, the quality of the work is in accordance with the Contract Documents and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner provided in the Agreement within thirty (30) calendar days of receipt of the approved Certificate from the Architect. However, by issuing a Certificate for Payment, the Architect shall not hereby be deemed to represent that the Architect has made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work or that the Architect has reviewed the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or proceedings or that the Architect has made any examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used the monies previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. 5. Any reduction with respect to retention shall be done in accordance with the Change Order provisions as outlined in Article 4 of these General Conditions. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner a written request for such reduction including a Consent of the Surety for such reduction. 6. The remaining ten percent (10%) of the value of the work done and materials furnished and installed under this Agreement shall be retained by the Owner as part security for the faithful performance of the Contractor's work within the time specified, and shall be paid as indicated in Section 12.04. D. "Schedule of Amounts for Contract Payments" and "Schedule Contractors Monthly Requisitions" (AIA Document G702; Application and Certificate for Payment) must be submitted, in the form as those contained herein as Exhibit "D", to comply with requirements for tax exemption. 22 Rev 08-2012 Section 12.02 - Withholding Payments A. The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or a part of any Certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect the Owner from loss on account of: 1. Defective work not remedied. 2. To assure payment of just claims of any persons supplying labor or materials for the work and to discharge any lien filed against the Owner's property. 3. A reasonable doubt that the Contract can be completed for the balance of the Contract Price then unpaid. 4. Damage to another Contractor. 5. Unsatisfactory prosecution of the work by the Contractor. 6. Failure to provide and maintain an acceptable Critical Path Method Network Schedule. Section 12.03 — Documents and Conditions Precedent to Final Payment A. As -Built Documentation 1. Prior to acceptance by the Owner of all work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner through the Architect one (1) set of current reproducible full-size Contract Drawings on which the Contractor has recorded in a neat and workmanlike manner all instances where actual field construction differs from work as indicated on the Contract Drawings. B. Final Documentation: 1. Prior to final payment, and before the issuance of a final certificate for payment in accordance with the provisions of these General Conditions, file the following documents with the Owner. a. Warranties, Bonds, Service & Maintenance Contracts and any other extended guarantees stated in the technical sections of the Specifications. b. Release or Waiver of Lien for the Contractor and Sub -Contractors in accordance with Exhibit C, attached hereto. c. Project Record Documents as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 39. d. Notification that Final Punch List work has been completed. e. Manufacturers Instruction and Maintenance Manuals as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 23. 23 Rev 08-2012 Fixed Equipment Inventory as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 22. 2. The Contractor shall also provide a CD containing scanned .pdf format and/or Word Documents of all documentation. Section 12.04 - Final Payment and Release A. When the Contractor determines that the work or a designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare for submission to the Owner a list of items to be completed or corrected. This list, prepared by the Contractor, shall constitute a complete detailed list of defects and deficiencies which, when remedied, will complete all Contract requirements. The submittal shall be accompanied by a statement to that effect. B. The failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all work in accordance with the Contract Documents. When the Architect, on the basis of an inspection, determines that the work is substantially complete, the Architect will then prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion. C. Upon receipt of written notice that the work is ready for final inspection and acceptance, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the work acceptable under the provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contract fully performed, and if bonds have been required, the written Consent of the Surety to the payment of the balance due, and a satisfactory Release of Lien, attached hereto as Exhibit "C" and made a part of the Contract Documents, has been submitted by the Contractor, each subcontractor and sub -subcontractor, the Contractor will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment, stating that to the best of their knowledge, information, and belief, and on the basis of their observations and inspections the work has been completed in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, and that the entire balance is due and payable. D. All prior certificates upon which progress payments may have been made, being estimates, shall be subject to correction to the final certificate. E. The acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment aforesaid shall constitute a general release of the Owner and its agents or representatives from all claims and liability to the Contractor. ARTICLE 13 -- TAX EXEMPTION Section 13.01 - Tax Exemption A. The Owner is exempt from payment of Federal, State and local taxes, including sales and compensating use taxes on all materials and supplies incorporated into the completed Work. These taxes are not to be included in bids. This exemption does not apply to tools, machinery, equipment or other property leased by or to the Contractor or a Subcontractor, or to supplies and materials which, even though they are consumed, are not incorporated into the completed Work, and the Contractor and Subcontractors shall be responsible for and pay any and all applicable taxes, including sales and compensating use taxes, on said leased tools, machinery, equipment or other property and upon all said unincorporated supplies and materials. 24 Rev 08-2012 B. The Contractor and Subcontractor shall obtain any and all necessary certificates or other documentation from the appropriate governmental agency or agencies, and use said certificates or other documentation as required by law, rule or regulation. ARTICLE 14 -- GUARANTEE Section 14.01 - Guarantee A. The Contractor, at the convenience of the Owner, shall remove, replace and/or repair at their own costs and expense any defects in workmanship, materials, ratings, capacities or characteristics occurring in or to the work covered by Contract for the period of one (1) year or within such longer period as may otherwise be provided in the Contract, the period of such guarantee to commence with the Owner's final acceptance of all work covered under the Contract, and the Contractor, upon demand, shall pay for all damage to all other work resulting from such defects and all expenses necessary to remove, replace and/or repair such work which inay be damaged in removing, replacing or repairing the said defects. Acceptance means final acceptance of the entire work, early partial occupancy notwithstanding B. In some instances the nature of the work may require the Owner to accept various components, equipment, spaces or phase of the project. hi such cases the Contractor shall submit a separate guarantee for the Owner's acceptance on the form attached hereto as Exhibit "E". Upon completion of the project, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner a guarantee for the project on the form attached hereto as Exhibit "E". ARTICLE 15 -- STANDARD PROVISIONS Section 15.01 - Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted Each and every provision of law or clause required by law to be inserted in the Contract shall be deemed to be inserted therein. Section 15.02 - Laws Governing the Contract The Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of New York, without reference to conflict of law principles. Any and all proceedings relating to the subject matter hereof shall be maintained in New York State Supreme Court, Tompkins County or the federal district court for the Northern District of New York, which courts shall have exclusive jurisdiction for such purposes. Section 15.03 - Assignments The Contractor shall not assign the Contract in whole or in part without prior written consent of the Owner. Section 15.04 - No Third Party Rights Nothing in the Contract shall create or shall give to third parties any claim or right of action against the Owner, beyond such rights as may legally exist irrespective of the Contract. 25 Rev 08-2012 Section 15.05 - Waiver of Rights of Owner A. None of the provisions of the Contract will be considered waived by the Owner except when such waiver is given in writing. Section 15.06 - Nondiscrimination and Affirmative Action A. The Contractor shall submit copies of their Affirmative Action Program and the Affirmative Action Programs of its proposed subcontractors within thirty (30) days after execution of a contract. A meeting to review these forms will be scheduled by the Owner after receipt of the same. Such Affirmative Action Programs must be satisfactory to the Owner. The Contractor shall designate a Compliance Officer in their organization who shall be responsible for implementing the Affirmative Action Program of the Contractor and its subcontractors. Said Compliance Officer shall make such periodic, but not less than monthly, reports on the Plans' progress and on the number of women and minority workers employed. These reports shall be submitted to the Owner Representative on the Affirmative Action Workforce Report and Minority - Women Utilization Report attached hereto as Exhibit "F". B. The Contractor agrees, in addition to any other nondiscrimination provisions of the Contract, that the Contractor shall comply fully with and shall cooperate in the implementation of any Affirmative Action Requirements for Equal Employment Opportunity and Minority Business Enterprises (MBE) participation required by the Owner, at no additional cost to the Owner. Any such requirements shall be incorporated in their entirety in all subcontracts of any tier. C. These provisions shall be deemed supplementary to the nondiscrimination provisions required by applicable federal and state Law. D. The Contractor shall submit for Owner approval, a plan of affirmative action designed to assure minority group members an equal opportunity in employment and subcontract work within thirty (30) days of contract award. The Contractor's Affirmative Action Plan must be approved by the Owner. E. The following forms, attached hereto as Exhibit "F" and made a part of the Contract Documents, are to be used in submitting Affirmative Action Plans and hereby made a part of the Contract Documents. 1. Use of MBE and WBE Vendors (Form I) 2. Summary of bid Activity with MBE and WBE Subcontractors and Vendors (Form II) 3. Affirmative Action Workforce Report (Form III) 4. Minority -Women Utilization Report (Form IV) This Plan is supplementary to all federal and state nondiscrimination requirements. Cornell University is an Equal Employment Opportunity Employer. 26 Rev 08-2012 F. The goals for participation (minority and female), expressed in percentage terns for the Contractor's aggregate work force in each trade on all construction work, are as follows: Carpenters 4.8% Electricians 14.1% Laborers 7.8% Masons 2.8% Painters 25.7% Plumbers 5.9% Sheetmetal Workers 4.0% G. The Contractor shall demonstrate compliance with these goals by submission of the Affirmative Action Workforce Report (Exhibit F — Form III) on a monthly basis. The Prime Contractor shall provide a single monthly report inclusive of all subcontractor information for the project labor. On-site office personnel should not be included in the "workforce" totals. Such forms shall be submitted to: Facilities Contracts 121 Humphreys Service Building Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Section 15.07 - Limitation on Actions No action or proceeding shall be filed or shall be maintained by the Contractor against the Owner unless said action shall be commenced within six (6) months after receipt by the Owner of the Contractor's final requisition or, if the Contract is terminated by the Owner, unless said action is commenced within six (6) months after the date of said termination. Section 15.08 - Owner's Representative The Owner shall designate a representative authorized to act in its behalf with respect to the Project. The Owner or its representative shall examine documents and shall render approvals and decisions pertaining thereto promptly, to avoid unreasonable delay in the progress of the Contractor's work. Only directives from Cornell University's designated representative (RUTH HOWELL) shall be recognized by the Contractor. 27 Rev 08-2012 ARTICLE 16 -- ACCOUNTINGS, INSPECTION AND AUDIT The Contractor agrees to keep books and records showing the actual costs incurred for the Work. Such books and records (including, without limitation, any electronic data processing files used by the Contractor in analyzing and recording the Work) shall be open for inspection and audit by the Owner and its authorized representatives at reasonable hours at the Contractor's local office or at the Owner's office, if necessary, and shall be retained by the Contractor for a period of seven years after the Work has been completed, except that if any litigation, claim or audit is started before the expiration date of the seven year period, the records shall be retained until all litigation, claims or audit findings involving the records have been resolved.. Each Sub - Contractor shall be similarly obligated to maintain, for inspection and audit by the Owner, books and records respecting the Work. If requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish copies of any and all subcontracts, purchase orders and/or requisitions of any nature associated with the proj ect. ARTICLE 17 — CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATION The Owner shall schedule a meeting at fifty percent (50%) based on project invoicing and at project completion to review with the Contractor their performance for the project unless performance warrants additional reviews. The Owner shall present its review based on the attached "Contractor Performance Evaluation", Exhibit 1. The Contractor shall be given the opportunity to provide input as to the findings of the evaluation after completion by the Owner. ARTICLE 18 -- ROYALTIES AND PATENTS The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees and shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patents, and shall save Cornell University harmless from loss on account thereof; except that Cornell University shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular process or product is specified by Cornell University unless the Contractor shall have reason to believe that the particular process or product infringes a patent, in which event it shall be responsible for loss on account thereof unless it promptly provides such information to Cornell University. ARTICLE 19 -- CONFIDENTIALITY AND USE OF OWNER'S NAME Section 19.01 - Release of Information The Contractor shall not divulge information concerning the Work (including news releases, internal house organs, applications for permits, etc.) to anyone without Cornell University's prior written approval, except to subcontractors and suppliers to the extent that they need such information to perforin their work. The Contractor shall require a similar agreement from each such subcontractor and supplier, requiring their compliance with the foregoing. Cornell University reserves the right to release all information, as well as to time its release and specify its form and content. The Contractor may obtain Cornell University's approval to release information by submitting such request to the Cornell University Project Manager. 28 Rev OS -2012 Section 19.02 - Confidential Information The tern "Confidential Information" means all unpublished information obtained or received from Cornell University during the term of this Contract which relates to Cornell University's research, development, manufacturing and business affairs. The Contractor shall not disclose confidential information to any person, except to its employees and subcontractors to the extent that they require it in the performance of their Work, during the tern of this Contract and until authorized by Cornell University in writing. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall hold all confidential information in trust and confidence for Cornell University, and shall use confidential information only for the purpose of this Contract. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall require all of their employees to whom confidential information is revealed to comply with these provisions. The Contractor shall have an agreement with each subcontractor, requiring their compliance with the foregoing. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to defend in case of litigation related to its services rendered, permission shall be sought from Cornell University, who shall not unreasonably withhold such permission, before any disclosures are made. This Section does not apply to information which (1) is or becomes known in public domain or (2) is learned by the Contractor from third parties. Section 19.03 - Use of Owner's Name The Contractor shall not use, in its external, advertising, marketing program, or other promotional efforts, any date, pictures, or other representation of the Owner except on the specific written authorization in advance of the Owner's Representative. ARTICLE 20 -- CORNELL UNIVERSITY STANDARDS OF ETHICAL CONDUCT Cornell University expects all executive officers, trustees, faculty, staff, student employees, and others, when acting on behalf of the university, to maintain the highest standard of ethical conduct as per Cornell University's Policy 4.6 - Standards of Ethical Conduct, a copy of which is available at http://finance.fs.cornell.edu/contracts/forms/contractors.cfin. This includes treating equally all persons and firms currently doing business with or seeking to do business with or for Cornell University, whether as contractors, subcontractors, or suppliers. Such persons and firms are respectfully reminded that Cornell University employees and their families may not personally benefit from Cornell University's business relationships by the acceptance of gifts or gratuities, defined as a gift in excess of $75.00 given to a Cornell employee for personal use. Items not considered gifts/gratuities include occasional business meals, items of an advertising nature, and items that are generally distributed to all potential customers. In addition, it is expected that the Contractor's officers and employees shall conduct all business related to this Contract within the highest ethical standards, observing applicable policies, practices, regulations, law, and professional standards. All parties are expected to report violations of this policy to appropriate university personnel. You may file a report to on the web https://secure.ethicspoint.com/domain/en/report custom.asp?clientid=6357 or contact Cornell University through EthicsPoint by dialing toll-free 1-866-293-3077. 29 Rev 08-2012 Cornell University Facilities Services CHANGE ORDER Cornell University Facilities Contracts 121 Humphreys Service Building Ithaca, New York 14853 EXHIBIT "A" Distribution to: OWNER 0 ARCHITECT 0 CONTRACTOR 0 FIELD 0 OTHER 0 PROJECT: TO (Contractor): You are directed to make the following changes in this Contract: Item No. Description CHANGE ORDER NUMBER: INITIATION DATE: OWNER'S CONTRACT NO: CONTRACT DATE: Reference Amount Nol valid until signed by both the Owner and Contractor. Signature of the Contractor indicates the Contractor's agreement herewith, including, any adjustments in the Contact Price or Contract Time. The original (Contract Price) was $ Net change by previously authorized Change Orders $ The (Contract Price) prior to this Change Order was $ The (Contract Price) will be (increased) (decreased) (unchanged) by this Change Order The new (Contract Price) including this Change Order will be $ The Contract Time will be (increased) (decreased) (unchanged) by ( ) Days. The Date of Substantial Completion as of the date of this Change Order therefore is AUTHORIZED SIGNATURES: CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONTRACTOR OWNER BY BY TITLE TITLE DATE DATE EXHIBIT "A- l " CORNELL UNIVERSITY Division of Facilities Services Construction Contract Change Order Forms Instructions to Change Order Documentation Facilities Services ("FS") has created this Standard Change Contract Change Order Request and Change Order Summary Forms to facilitate preparation of contract change orders in conformity with construction contract requirements. The forms have been prepared to comply with contract requirements presented in the General Conditions, dated August 2012. The Change Order Request form shall be used by the Contractor and by all Subcontractors in preparing their cost estimates for services associated with the Changed Work. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner the Change Order Summary Form with all associated back-up documentation. Direct Cost of the Work: 1. Direct Labor — Include the "wages paid" hourly direct labor and/or foreman necessary to perform the required change. "Wages paid" is the burdened labor rate documented in accordance with Section 2.14 — Project Labor Rates of the General Conditions. "Assigned Personnel or Work Crews" should be stated by trade or type of work performed not by name of person or company title. For example carpenter, mason, backhoe operator, etc. Supervisory personnel in district or home office shall not be included. Supervisory personnel on the job -site, but with broad supervisory responsibility and paid as salaried personnel, shall not be included as Direct Labor 2. Direct Material — Include the acquisition cost of all materials directly required to perform the required change. Examples of "Unit of Measure" include square feet, cubic yards, linear feet, days, gallons, etc. 3. Equipment — Include the rental cost of equipment items necessary to perform the change. For company-owned equipment items, include documentation of internal rental rates. Charges for small tools, and craft specific tools are not allowed. Bond Premiums The Contractor's actual documented bond premium rate shall be added to all direct and indirect costs of the proposed change. Overhead & Profit The Contractor's overhead & profit rate shall be added to all direct and indirect costs of the proposed change in accordance with the Contract. CORN -ELL UNIVERSITY FACILITIES SERVICES EXHIBIT "A-1" CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER REQUEST COR PROJECT 111LE: CONTRACT NO. Name of Contractor/Subcontractor performing Work: DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. DIRECT COST OF WORK: 1 LABOR (Attach SupponinE Diccannernation) ASSIGNED PERSONNEL OR WORK CREW 5 MATERLAL (Attach Suppz.rtiag Dmmento tied). MATERIAL REQUIRED FOR CRANGE 3 EQUIPMENT (Attack Supporting Do<unwatatica;) EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR CHANGE HOU WAG RATE PAJD 01 WO LABOR TOTAL UNIT OF Al-EAST:RI REQT.TRED UNTIS NLATERLAL TOTAL UNTI PRICE Ui7NTI OF MEASURE REQUIRED UNITS EQUIP\ LENT TOTAL DIRECT COST (SUM 1. 2. 3) 4 OIT_RIEEAD AND PROk I OH& P Rate 5 BOND PREMIUM Bond Premium Rate TOTAL COST TOTAL CONTRACT DAYS ADDED/DELETED FROM PROJECT SCHEDULE TOTAL COST TOTAL COST TOTAL COST CORNELL UNIVERSITY FACILITIES SERVICES EXHIBIT "A-1" CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER SU\ SLARY COR PROJECT TITLE: CONTRACT NO. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A DIRECT COST OF WORK: 1 NAME OF CONTRACTORSUBCONTR_ACTOR PERFORMING WORK 4 PRIME CONTRACTOR OVERHEAD AND PROFIT 5 PRIME CONTRACTOR BOND PREMIUM DIRECT COST (SUM 1, 2. 3) OH&P Rate Boud Premium Rate TOTAL COST OF PROPOSED CHANGE ORDER ITE\1 TOTAL CONTRACT DAYS ADDED/DELETED FROM PROJECT SCHEDULE TOTAL COST 1 11111111111111111111111 Name of Co 0 EL) C•0 o 00 H FINAL RELEASE FINAL WAIVER OF CLAIMS AND LIENS AND RELEASE OF RIGHTS Date Contract Date Project Contract Price Address Net Extras and Deductions EXHIBIT "C" City Adjusted Contract Price County Amount Previously Paid State Balance Due - Final Payment The undersigned hereby acknowledges that the above Balance Due when paid represents payment in full for all labor, materials, etc., furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier in connection with its work on the above Project in accordance with the Contract. In consideration of the amounts and sums previously received, and the payment of $ being the full and Final Payment amount due, the below named Contractor or Supplier does hereby waive and release the Owner from any and all claims and liens and rights of liens upon the premises described above, and upon improvements now or hereafter thereon, and upon the monies or other considerations due or to become due from the Owner or from any other person, firm or corporation, said claims, liens and rights of liens being on account of labor, services, materials, fixtures or apparatus heretofore furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier to the Project. The premises as to which said claims and liens are hereby released are identified as follows: The undersigned further represents and warrants that he/she is duly authorized and empowered to sign and execute this waiver on his/her own behalf and on behalf of the company or business for which he/she is signing; that it has properly performed all work and furnished all materials of the specified quality per plans and specifications and in a good and workmanlike manner, fully and completely; that it has paid for all the labor, materials, equipment and services that it has used or supplied, that it has no other outstanding and unpaid applications, invoices, retentions, holdbacks, expenses employed in the prosecution of work, chargebacks or unbilled work or materials against the Owner as of the date of the aforementioned last and final payment application; and that any materials which have been supplied or incorporated into the above premises were either taken from its fully -paid or open stock or were fully paid for and supplied on the last and final payment application or invoice. The undersigned further agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner for any losses or expenses (including without limitation reasonable attorneys' fees) should any such claim, lien or right of lien be asserted by the below named Contractor or Supplier or by any of its or their laborers, material persons or subcontractors. In addition, for and in consideration of the amounts and sums received, the below named Contractor or Supplier hereby waives, releases and relinquishes any and all claims, rights or causes of action in equity or law whatsoever arising out of through or under the above mentioned Contract and the performance of work pursuant thereto. The below named Contractor or Supplier further guarantees that all portions of the work furnished and installed are in accordance with the Contract and that the terms of the Contract with respect to this guarantee will remain in effect for the period specified in said Contract. Sworn to before me this Corporation or Business Name Day of 20 By: Title: O 0 0 0 0 0 0 V 0 N E-+ z 0 J ION AND CE 0 Vo v a O F F.. G c� a. tis C ¢¢ aL� O C F CE ro r% 0. Z Ca.c y '0 xUO 0 Q G O v h DDOODC aa�� a G O C a G II2a .- 7 E U O 2 EC o O O 0 U u • '° a w a. 2 < C J a O y a V ! O O C G L ra c 0 c o. a y a o.c,�x ti U i .a v a t..0 -.0 ^ w > 0 .O p o G o P E .E U E APPLICATION NO.: a PERIOD TO: PROJECT NOS.: CONTRACT DA 'IA ARCHITECT: FROM CON CONTRACT F vri 1. ORIGINAL CONTRA CONTRACT() 2 . Net change by Change Orders > - a 2 a L p UC E E W 0 y U z y L n CG v V E 3. CONTRACT SUM TO DATE (Line 1 ± 2) w ❑ O 0 o r CU O wo Eld O W V V + a. 5`0 0 W O 0 0 C G J _c z I= O Ov nn 'J .O m h In 4 ro K` ” r-0 " 0(7_ C ' C a O a O J p ua V 2 u ✓ A EXHIBIT "D" CERTIFICATE FOR O c 0 9 G 3 a. 0 0^a O (.� 00 O 9 v 8. CURRENT PAYMENT DUE a zccw w 0 J U z N li o w V J a .- (73 c' EXHIBIT "D" z Z Z Z • z RETAINAGE (IF VARIABLE) RATE) BALANCE TO FINISH (C - G) 0 e. .1. 0 IOTA L COMPLETED AND STORED TO DATE (D+E+F) MATERIALS PRESENTLY STORED (NOT IN D OR E) WORK COMPLETED o a., v; f---4 0 FROM PREVIOUS APPLICATION (0 + E) SCHEDULED VALUE 0 DESCRIPTION OF WORK .2 tc d z Z Z Z • z GUARANTEE Date: EXHIBIT "E" In accordance with plans and specifications and the terms and conditions of our contract with Cornell University dated , we hereby guarantee the as found in the specifications for , Ithaca, New York to be free (Project Title) from defects in materials and workmanship for the period of year(s) from , the date of acceptance by the Owner. (Date) By: Title: (COMPANY) EXHIBIT "F" FORM I c 'W 1 LPI CONTRACTOR'S AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PLAN Use of MBE and WBE Vendors Please print or type all information, except where a signature is required. PROJECT: Amount of Contract: Name of Prime Contract Bidder: Address (Street, City, State and Zip Code): Telephone Number (Including Area Code): Trade: 1. List previous Cornell University work done by your firm: ?. Do you intend to subcontract any work on this project? Yes No A. What is the total dollar value of work you intend to subcontract? Amount $ AND Range: From $ to $ 3. Do you intend to purchase supplies and/or use vendor services? A. What is the total dollar value of your intended purchase and/or vendor? Amount $ AND Range: From $ to $ 4. List the work you plan to subcontract in area A. below and list the items you propose to purchase and/or vendor services you propose to use in area B. Use additional sheet(s) if required. A. Trade Amount of Work to be B. Supplies and/or Vendor Services Subcontracted Trade Amount Item Amount $ $ 1 EXHIBIT "F" FORM I 5. Indicate by dollar value and percentage of contract, the total of your goal for minority and female vendors and subcontractor participation including your goal for purchases and services. (The percentage given should be a percentage of your total contract amount. MBE Amount $ AND Percentage WBE Amount $ AND Percentage 6. Indicate your goal for minority participation in the labor force by dollar value and percentage of total monthly manpower per trade. MBE Amount WBE Amount $ AND Percentage AND Percentage 7. List MBE and WBE vendors utilized by your firm over the past five (5) years: MBE or WBE Vendor CONTRACT (Indicate which) ADDRESS PROJECT TRADE AMOUNT This space provided for any comments your organization may have regarding the utilization of MBE and WBE vendors: OFFICER OF PRIME CONTRACT BIDDER: Name and Title: Date: Signature: 2 EXHIBIT "F" FORM II CONTRACTOR'S AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PLAN Summary of Bid Activity with MBE and WBE Subcontractors and Vendors Please print or type all information, except where a signature is required. PROJECT: Name of Prime Contract Bidder: Address (Street, City, State and Zip Code): Contact Person (Name, Title and Telephone Number): MBE and WBE Subcontractor/Vendor Item/ Bid Submitted: Award Status Date of (Indicate which) Trade Date Amount Date Amount Elimination EXPLANATION OF ELMINATION: Include meetings held for negotiation, etc. (Use additional sheet if necessary) OFFICER OF FIRM: Name and Title: Date: Signature: 0 w 0 0 0 0 0 0 ,33 a m . I.. P31 tit 0 . 'V 0 H Z ell VI Please print or type all CORNELL UNIVERSITY PRIME CONTRACTOR H cC EN UTILITZATION REPORT a z 7 O P c ^ ."0:..‘ o G cs O E"' C C.) Dollar j Dollar I % of I Dollar Prime Contractor, Craft Amount ( Amount Prime I Amount Subcontractor and and/or of Minority Firm of I Total 1 Women Firm of Sub -Subcontractor's Name Trade , Subcontract Namc - Awards I Trade MBE Contracts Contract Name - Awards Trade WBE Contract s4 PROJECT Cornell University Facilities Services CONTRACTOR: TRADE: Base Horsly Rate: Payroll Taxes and Insurance F.I.C.A. FedUnemploym.nt State Unemployment * 'Worker's Conmentancu Bodily Injury & Property Dann ze Disability TOTAL Pa:,voll Taxes Irian -mace Rates: Base Rate (x) Total = * Rates are net Contactor cosi after premi= disc -clans and experience modifications have been applied azaiisst manti-.1 rate. EXHIBIT "G" LABOR RATE BREAKDOWN CONTRACT NO. EFFECTIVE DATE: Da/RATION DATE: SS per Hour Supplemental Benefits -- Vacation Health & Welfare Pension Aussuty Educe -no Trainine Industry S per Hour Total Homly Frinee Benefits Hourly Labor Rate: Base Rate, Taxesdnstaame and Fringe Benefits, AdjustmPttl for a composite rate which includesapprentices: CO?. it:ACTOR'S CERTIFICATION I certify that the Labor rates, insurance ett,ruerations, labor frinze enumerations and expenses are correct and in accordance with actual and true cost incurred_ Situr of Anihmized Repro Print N'T”P: Print Title: Cornell University Facilities Services STORED MATERIALS INVOICING DOCUMENTATION PROJECT TITLE: CONTRACT NO. CONTRACTOR: SLBCONTRACIOR: REASON FOR REQUEST: APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT NO. DATE: 1 Nlaterial Identification Description: Quantity: Provide Specific Location of \Materials Stored: Material Value Attach an Invoice or Quantified Statement of Value. Certificate of Insurance LIAttach a Certificate of Insurance for "Cornell University" as a loss payee 4 Transfer of Title above specified materials. Certificate shall name r respect to the specified materials. The Contractor hereby agrees to transfer complete ownership of all listed materials to Connell University at the tune payment is made to Contractor for the above referenced Application for Payi hent. The Contractor remains responsible for all contractual requirements for the above listed materials including complete installation and providing of all warranties. Signed: Date: EXHIBIT "H" EXHIBIT "I" Exhibit 1 Contractor Performance Evaluation Project Information Prop -et Harm: ?rcec NLeeraz-S2r(s): Cirkws: P:5szt Czy.t oats: stzstaiaa' Co=Viol: Contraor. Ciaignai CflxMant C011trafrX Prq'id Mannir. COritr3Vrg Srs intend:Silt Prequalfler, Tr Cary, NIA Totl Chmge Ord er Ponawit Frei mrtari EvaIntw EvVurion Type of Contract LIPrtrmi Caitradsr LilCcm Man Pro),EctCorrereTes,m1r.ton: Performance Evaluation Please give one rating for e.adi category,. Add comments as required to justify your ra ting_ linacpaptable 1 Poor 1 Average 1 Very Good 1 Excellent 1 GutyoTWorkmernip 1 2 3 4 5 Rare this coon acrs pallorrraice A-, regards to qualty of wort a_ Cora:Mance ,Attn pr*ct. dr-a/flogs and spe-wr-catC-ck-m 5. WortmanstVp (luny and aocuracy Tocia — qualtty and seem quarftcy d. Equprnent — ssrMlent quarttly and cope:rating oanalbon e. Malty of Jobst craft pww-sannEi Comments: 2 SolleclunngtProductIvIty Rare MS costwestorS performance with regard to pfoductlsgencfrffeettng contrast colle,5-1 end milesttonas Projec scfledtle qnfty and ccenolwtwrwas Controfing of golect es-We-W.11,P Manpower alloc.alicn fof malltaintro proleat scileatlm Matelot delvedes to spoon project soleta. Abillty to meet st.tatartlia: wmptetion dale and milwatones Prodactildi olwor54orce r.,!"0r, P.' Subcontractor Manapment Fare VII':1 nd owscest 11 rte.:gaging 07.7 csOcontractoro (rnoat] bconyacrors„ raze Ms cJo1reror5 overall projeor Ina r,ag emerr performance). Comments: 4 MBETATE PartlOpetion Rare die colts:torts LASENSZE sof ottadon effort and perttcOaCtOo tor thts project for Project Team; slit:zit-actor mateffe; Vendor. 5 Safety Rate Mrs contraacfs pelftwr7Thal1C,2 tri pager= to .ect safely a. Tinley silor=ston of sae spectra: safety occgam. 5. Knowledge of 02HA standards c. Prolementallon of Te1yn5e n2 reVM'ans IL Proroctal and creation of safety a Wafeneaa e_ Daly and overall hometeeplog Safety record g. Respor*e. o set.' (=errs r Awareness of pwolic safety CommerfM: 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 2 3 2 unacceptata 1 Pow 1 Average I very Good I Excellent e Cectra�Jt' AdmNn€atrat€an 1 2 2 4 5 flare r lts c cz r2 pent-arena/ice 6; Page= ro cC, t cr a cer per Merle €t 5:Av. a Tiny r & i Et ccrnpiete and cured encirneM3 regd ec Mira -ice and C9i4€io G_ Ch ori pr, asing c TmEgy sLtrri"sston, os PFGS, rrf araa'vnp, and Ch3n9e ChanceCSE SLiaaont-wirr payrnects male prorrrt5y e. z?ner} €-t rris4An cr cc.rnplete and carrect pa men acp.s � na r. cifa€y pape=nk t 4 relati=5Ep5 wtti Viler te: fe.e., ezimet5 etc.J 5. Supe I Rating Pare Me:. c peri im _ er Vs conts:raezc cs. _ a .er i5 a F perrzwiel end praject management s£-n;tall 4 53 Conrad Cioaeirat. Rate this czntrattar`55, overall anti, ta e . c='%eve out Vie pro; a_ rir ' yccrrpy_1JcBn of all pr. -let kerns T f marks -sin ar cutstanant5 "d`a ge orders b est: , V' al erre-oUl c ac irrrflt (OCMs, As-Eults, Warranties, Genera! Cc tra3b5 555mCrit v;C`, FinalReleases and Consent c5: 5-55ret Otrany tostrnentaton anl :ft.. ccq „eton clan), oi€ dng audt rue cis. Summary Sheet Contractor: -.-. . 00.0 D_00 1 c -.-. 0.. , c ad0 01 0 01 E 0 0 01 0 0 0 10 E 10 01 0 01 t 8 .0 0 0 0 01 01 01 01 :g E -0 rp0 0 0 01 01 10 111 re 0 0 01 10 01 10 0, 10 0 10 01 1-3 0) 1t 0 0 h,0) 0 0 by the Contractor before the discussion meeti Page 5 to be fill Cornell/Contractor Evaluation a) O 011 t g C C O 0 • 0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CLARK HALL LEA ING FACILITY - PHASE II CO ELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK 14853 3-14-14 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CLARK HALL LEARNING FACILITY - PHASE II TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF THE WORK Subsection 1.1 Work Under Contract PAGE 01 11 00-1 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS Subsection 1.1 General 01 25 00-1 1.2 Products List 01 25 00-1 1.3 Contractor's Options 01 25 00-1 1.4 Substitutions 01 25 00-1 1.5 Contractor's Representation 01 25 00-3 1.6 Architect's Duties 01 25 00-3 01 31 19 01 32 16 PROJECT MEETINGS Subsection 1.1 Description 1.2 Pre -Construction Meeting 1.3 Progress Meetings CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES Subsection 1.1 General 1.2 Form of Schedules 1.3 Content of Schedules 1.4 Progress Revisions 1.5 Submissions 1.6 Distribution 1.7 Stand Down and Restricted Work Dates 01 31 19-1 01 31 19-1 01 31 19-3 01 32 16-1 01 32 16-1 01 32 16-1 01 32 16-2 01 32 16-3 01 32 16-3 01 32 16-3 01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION Subsection 1.1 Description 01 32 33-1 3.1 Progress Photographs 01 32 33-1 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Subsection 1 1 General 01 33 00-1 1.2 Shop Drawings 01 33 00-1 1.3 Product Data 01 33 00-2 1.4 Samples 01 33 00-2 1.5 Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals 01 33 00-3 1.6 Coordination Drawings 01 33 00-4 1.7 Contractor Responsibilities 01 33 00-4 1.8 Submittal Procedures 01 33 00-6 1.9 Resubmission Requirements 01 33 00-8 1.10 Architect's Duties 01 33 00-8 1.11 Distribution 01 33 00-9 3-14-14 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CLARK HALL LEARNING FACILITY PHASE II TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 2 01 35 29 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY REQUIREMENTS Subsection 1.1 General 1.2 Contractor's Safety Plan 1.3 Asbestos & Lead 1.4 Site Visits 01 35 29-1 01 35 29-1 01 35 29-1 01 35 29-1 Job Specific Safety Manual Checklist Limited Pre -Renovation Asbestos Survey Report 01 35 43 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Subsection 1.1 General 01 35 43-1 1.2 Related Sections 01 35 43-1 1.3 Submittals 01 35 43-1 1.4 Job Site Administration 01 35 43-1 1.5 Clearing, Site Preparation and Site Use 01 35 43-1 1.6 Spoil and Borrow 01 35 43-2 1.7 Noise and Vibration 01 35 43-2 1.8 Dust Control 01 35 43-2 1.9 Protection of the Environment 01 35 43-3 1.10 Temporary Re -Routing of Piping and Ductwork 01 35 43-4 1.11 Hazardous or Toxic Materials 01 35 43-4 1.12 Disposal of Waste Material and Title 01 35 43-4 01 35 44 01 41 00 01 45 00 Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan Definitions for Use with Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan SPILL CONTROL Subsection 1.1 Spill Prevention 01 35 44-1 1.2 Spill Control Procedures 01 35 44-1 1.3 Spill Reporting and Documentation 01 35 44-3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Subsection 1.1 Permits and Licenses 01 41 00-1 1.2 Inspections 01 41 00-1 1.3 Compliance 01 41 00-1 1.4 Owner's Requirements 01 41 00-1 QUALITY CONTROL Subsection 1.1 Description 01 45 00-1 1.2 Control of On -Site Construction 01 45 00-1 1.3 Control of Off -Site Operations 01 45 00-2 1.4 Testing 01 45 00-2 1.5 Owner's Representative 01 45 00-2 3-14-14 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CLARK HALL LEARNING FACILITY PHASE II TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 3 01 45 29 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Subsection 1.1 General 01 45 29-1 1.2 Qualifications of Laboratory 01 45 29-1 1.3 Laboratory Duties 01 45 29-1 1.4 Limitations of Authority of Testing Laboratory 01 45 29-2 1.5 Contractor's Responsibilities 01 45 29-3 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Subsection 1 1 Description 01 50 00-1 1.2 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies 01 50 00-1 2.1 Materials, General 01 50 00-1 2.2 Temporary First Aid Facilities 01 50 00-1 2.3 Temporary Fire Protection 01 50 00-1 2.4 Construction Aids 01 50 00-2 2.5 Temporary Enclosures 01 50 00-2 2.6 Temporary Water Control 01 50 00-3 2.7 Tree, Plant and Lawn Protection 01 50 00-3 2.8 Guardrails and Barricades 01 50 00-4 2.9 Access Roads and Parking Areas 01 50 00-4 2.10 Project Identification and Signs 01 50 00-4 2.11 Security 01 50 00-4 2.12 Field Offices 01 50 00-5 3.1 Preparation 01 50 00-5 3.2 General 01 50 00-5 3.3 Removal 01 50 00-6 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES Subsection 1.1 Description 01 51 00-1 1.2 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies 01 51 00-1 2.1 Materials, General 01 51 00-1 2.2 Temporary Electricity, Lighting and Water 01 51 00-1 2.3 Temporary Use of Elevator 01 51 00-2 2.4 Temporary Heat and Ventilation 01 51 00-3 2.5 Contractor Telephone Service 01 51 00-3 3.1 Removal 01 51 00-4 01 51 23 HEAT DURING CONSTRUCTION(S) Subsection 1.1 General 01 51 23-1 1.2 Responsibility 01 51 23-1 3-14-14 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CLARK HALL LEARNING FACILITY PHASE II TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 4 01 57 13 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Subsection 1.1 General 01 57 13-1 1.2 Submittals 01 57 13-1 1.3 Plan and Implementation General Requirements 01 57 13-1 1.4 Performance Standards 01 57 13-1 1.5 Erosion and Sediment Control Plan Components 01 57 13-2 1.6 Inspections 01 57 13-3 01 66 00 STORAGE AND PROTECTION Subsection 1.1 General 01 66 00-1 1.2 Transportation and Handling 01 66 00-1 1.3 Storage 01 66 00-1 1.4 Protection 01 66 00-2 1.5 Protection After Installation 01 66 00-3 01 73 29 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING Subsection 1.1 Description 01 73 29-1 1.2 Submittals 01 73 29-2 1.3 Quality Assurances 01 73 29-3 1.4 Warranties 01 73 29-4 2.1 Materials 01 73 29-4 3.1 Inspection 01 73 29-4 3.2 Preparation 01 73 29-5 3.3 Performance 01 73 29-5 3.4 Cleaning 01 73 29-7 01 77 00 PROJECT CLOSE OUT Subsection 1.1 Project Close Out Inspections 01 77 00-1 1.2 Final Clean -Up 01 77 00-1 1.3 Maintenance Stock 01 77 00-3 01 78 22 INVENTORIES Subsection 1.1 Fixed Equipment Inventory 01 78 22-1 8 23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA Subsection 1.1 General 01 78 23-1 1.2 Form of Submittals 01 78 23-1 1.3 Content of Manual 01 78 23-2 1.4 Manual for Materials and Finishes 01 78 23-3 1.5 Manual for Equipment and Systems 01 78 23-4 1.6 Submittal Schedule 01 78 23-6 1.7 Instructions of Owner's Personnel 01 78 23-6 1.8 Operating Instructions 01 78 23-7 3-14-14 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CLARK HALL LEARNING FACILITY PHASE II TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 5 01 78 36 01 78 39 WARRANTIES AND BONDS Subsection 1.1 General 01 78 36-1 1.2 Submittal Requirements 01 78 36-1 1.3 Foini of Submittals 01 78 36-1 1.4 Time of Submittals 01 78 36-2 1.5 Submittals Required 01 78 36-2 RECORD DOCUMENTS Subsection 1.1 General 01 78 39-1 1.2 Maintenance of Documents and Samples 01 78 39-1 1.3 Recording 01 78 39-1 1.4 Submittal 01 78 39-2 3-14-14 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 11 00 Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF THE WORK 1.1 WORK UNDER THIS CONTRACT GENERAL A. Work to be Done Project Description: Phase II project. Phase II consists of renovating a portion of the former library space located on the 2nd floor of Clark Hall. 2. Phase II scope of work will include, but not be limited to: constructing 4 seminar rooms, a new conference room and a library office. Phase II work will include but not be limited to selective demolition, cementitious underlayment leveling, rough and finish carpentry, sound attenuation, aluminum storefront, removal and replacement of roof penthouse wall panels to complete mechanical equipment work, wood doors and finish hardware, access doors, clear and fritted glazed panels, caulking, gypsum partitions, acoustical gypsum board assemblies, gypsum board soffits, acoustical tile ceilings, floor covering, carpet tiles, painting, chalk and display boards, mechanical, electrical, plumbing, fire alarm and fire protection sprinklers. B. The Scope of the Work C. The scope of the WORK in all SECTIONS of this Specification shall consist of the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment and appliances and the performance of the Work required by the Contract Documents and/or by the conditions at the site, joining all parts of this Work with itself and the Work of others to form a complete, functioning entity. 2. Items not specifically mentioned in the Specifications or shown on the drawings, but which are inherently necessary to make a complete working installation, shall be included. Inter of Contract Documents The use of the word (or words): a. "provide" means furnish, install and connect ready for use; b. "furnish" means supply and deliver to job or where directed; c. "as approved" or "approved" means Architect's or Owner's approval; d. "as directed" means Owner's direction or instruction; e. "to do", "provide", "furnish", "install", etc., in these Specifications or on Drawings are directions given to the Contractor; f. "concealed" means Work installed in pipe shafts, chases or recesses, behind furred walls, above ceilings, either permanent or removable; g. "exposed" means all Work not identified as concealed. CLARK HALL LEARNING SUMMARY OF THE WORK 01 11 00-1 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 2. Notes or instructions shown on any one Drawing, apply where applicable, to all other Drawings. 3. Reference to a technical society, institution, association or governmental authority is in accordance with following abbreviations: a. ACI American Concrete Institution b. AGA American Gas Association c. AGCA Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. d. AIA American Institute of Architects e. AISC American Institute of Steel Construction f. AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Associates, Inc. g. ANSI American National Standards Institute h. ARI Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute i. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. j. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers k. ASTM American Society for Testing Materials 1. AWSC American Welding Society Code m. AWWA American Water Works Association n. IBR Institute of Boiler & Radiation Manufacturers o. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers P. NYBFU New York Board of Fire Underwriters q. NEC National Electric Code r. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association s. NFPA National Fire Protection Association t. SBI Steel Boiler Institute u. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association v. UFPO Underground Facilities Protective Organization w. UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 4. All references to codes, specifications and standards referred to in the Specification Sections and on the Drawings shall mean, and are intended to be, the latest edition, amendment and/or revision of such reference standard in effect as of the 12-7-12 of these Contract Documents. 5. Install All Work in Compliance with: a. Building Code of New York State b. National Electric Code c. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). d. Life Safety Code NFPA 101. e. All local ordinances f. Plans and Specifications in excess of code requirements and not contrary to same. D. Use of the Site 1. The Contractor shall carry on the Work in the manner which will cause the least interruption to pedestrian and vehicular traffic and permit access of emergency vehicles at all times. CLARK HALL LEARNING SUMMARY OF WORK 01 I 1 00-2 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 2. The Work shall be scheduled and performed in such a manner that at least one lane of traffic will be maintained on all public streets. Two flag persons, equipped with radio communication devices, must be provided for any activity blocking a traffic lane. One lane of traffic must be maintained at all times. Where traffic must cross open trenches, the Contractor shall provide suitable bridges and railings; including pedestrian bridges. 3. The Contractor shall post flag persons and suitable signs indicating that construction operations are under way and other warning signs as may be required. 4. The Contractor shall safeguard the use by the public and Owner of all adjacent highways, roadways and footpaths, and shall conform to all laws and regulations concerning the use thereof, especially limitations on traffic and the movement of heavy equipment. Access to the site for delivery of construction materials and/or equipment shall be made only at the locations shown in the Contract Documents or approved by the Owner's Representative. 5. The Contractor shall immediately remove dirt and debris which may collect on permanent roadways due to the Work. 6. The Contractor shall limit the extent of its activities to that area of the site defined on the Contract Drawings as being within the Contract Limit Lines. 7. For that portion of the Work required under this Contract which must be performed in other than the defined areas, including operations involving delivery and removal of materials, the Contractor shall schedule and coordinate its activities through the Owner's Representative, to meet the approval of the Owner and minimize disruption of the normal scheduled activities of the occupants of adjacent spaces. 8. All portions of the site, including the staging area and those areas affected by the work, shall be returned to their original condition after completion of Work. Such repair work shall include reseeding, if required, and shall be included in the Contractor's Guaranty of Work. 9. Routes to and from the location of the Work shall be as indicated in the Contract or as directed by the Owner's Representative. Temporary roadways shall be closed only with prior approval of the Owner's Representative. E. Parking 1. The Owner will designate an area for Contractor parking. The Contractor shall make all arrangements, and bear the cost, for transportation from the designated parking area to the construction site as necessary. 2. It should be noted that there is a fee for all parking on the Cornell University campus. The Contractor is responsible for the payment for all parking costs imposed by the Owner. The Contractor should contact the Project Manager (Ruth Howell) for additional information. 3. Contractor shall cooperate with Cornell Police and/or other police authorities having jurisdiction, as follows: CLARK HALL LEARNING SUMMARY OF WORK 01 1 1 00-3 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 a. Ensure parking by all employees of the Contractor, subcontractors, material suppliers, and others connected with this project only within construction fence or the designated parking area. b. Prohibit employees from parking in any other areas, roads, streets, grounds, etc. c. Discharge any employee refusing to comply with these requirements. d. Ensure proper transportation of personnel between the designated parking area and the construction site. 4. The Contractor shall remove from the parking area all temporary trailers, rubbish, unused materials, and other materials belonging to the Contractor or used under the Contractor's direction during construction or impairing the use or appearance of the property and shall restore such areas affected by the work to their original condition, and, in the event of its failure to do so, the same shall be removed by the Owner at the expense of the Contractor, and the Contractor shall be liable therefore. F. Changeovers and Continuity of Services 1. Make all changeovers, tie-ins and removals, etc., of any part of the Work that would affect the continuity of operation of the adjacent areas services at approved times that will not interfere with the Owner's operations. Secure approval of Owner before proceeding. 2. Make all necessary temporary connections required to permit operation of the building services and/or equipment. Remove the connections after need has ceased. 3. The Contractor may be permitted to make changeovers during normal working hours at the Owner's discretion. Should the Contractor perform this Work outside of normal working hours, no extra payment will be made for resulting overtime expenses. 4. When connecting new facilities do not shut off any existing Mechanical/Electrical facilities or services without prior written approval of Owner's Representative. 5. The Contractor shall not, except in an emergency condition, shutdown any utility without the express permission of the Owner's Representative. Major shutdowns of utilities will be perfornied by Cornell University to enable Contractor to perform required work. Major shutdowns shall be defined as those affecting life safety or which are outside the project site limits. 6. Maintain domestic water and firewater in service at all times. No service may be out for more than twenty-four (24) hours. Maintain firewater flow capability (hose, if necessary) to all buildings and coordinate with Cornell Utilities, Connell Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S), and City of Ithaca Fire Department. All shutdowns to be scheduled a minimum of seven (7) calendar days in advance and requests shall be submitted in writing to the Owner's Representative. CLARK HALL LEARNING SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-4 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 7. IN THE EVENT OF AN EMERGENCY WHERE THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE IS NOT AVAILABLE, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DIAL 911 IMMEDIATELY. G. Obstacles, Interference and Coordination 1. General a. Plans show general design arrangement. Install work substantially as indicated and verify exact location and elevations; DO NOT SCALE PLANS. b. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fitting, changes in elevations, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in the Work, equipment locations, etc., after notification to the Owner's Representative and Architect. Obtain approval from same, as part of Contract, to accommodate work to obstacles and interferences encountered. c. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing. If requested, submit at least five (5) copies of drawings, detailing all such deviations or changes. d. Exposed to view mechanical units, ductwork, conduit, pipes or other building equipment are essential parts of the artistic effect of the building design and shall be installed in locations as shown on the drawings. Conformance to given dimensions and alignments with the structural system, walls, openings, indicated centerlines are a requirement of the Contract and the Contractor shall familiarize himself with the critical nature of proper placement of these items. The Contractor shall notify the Architect of conflicts which would cause such equipment to be installed in locations other than as indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall not proceed with the installation of exposed to view mechanical units, ductwork, conduit, pipes, etc. until all conflicts have been identified by the Contractor and resolutions to conflicts approved by the Architect. 2. Interference a. Install work so that all items are operable and serviceable and avoid interfering with removal of rails, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors, etc. Provide easy and safe access to valves, controllers, motor starters and other equipment requiring frequent attention. CLARK HALL LEARNING SUMMARY OF WORK FACILITY PHASE II 01 11 00-5 3-14-14 H. Equipment Arrangements 1. Since all equipment of equal capacity is not necessarily of same arrangement, size of construction, these Plans are prepared on basis of one manufacturer as "design equipment", even though other manufacturers' names are mentioned. 2. If Contractor elects to use specified equipment other than "design equipment" which differs in arrangement, size, etc., the Contractor does so subject to following conditions: a. Submit detailed drawings indicating proposed installations of equipment and showing maintenance and service space required. b. If revised arrangement meets approval, make all required changes in the work of all trades, including but not limited to louvers, panels, structural supports, pads, etc. at no increase in Contract. Provide larger motors and any additional control devices, valves, fittings and other miscellaneous equipment required for proper operation of revised layout, and assume responsibility for proper location of roughing in and connections by other trades. c. If revised arrangement does not meet approval because of increase in pressure loss, possibility of increase in noise, lack of space or headroom, insufficient clearance for removal of parts, or for any other reason, provide equipment which conforms to Contract Drawings and Specifications. I. Supports 1. The Contractor shall include cost of all materials and labor necessary to provide all required supports, beams, angles, hangers, rods, bases, braces, etc. to properly support the Contract Work. All supports, etc. shall meet the approval of the Architect. J. Existing Equipment, Materials, Fixtures, Etc. 1. Where existing equipment, piping, fittings, etc. are to be removed, Contractor shall submit complete list to Owner. Carefully remove and salvage all items that Owner wishes to retain shall be delivered to building storage where directed by Owner. Items that Owner does not wish to retain shall be removed from site and legally disposed of. K. Examination of Premises, Drawings, Etc. 1. Before Submitting Proposal a. Examine all Drawings and Specifications relating to Work of all trades to determine scope and relation to other work. b. Examine all existing conditions affecting compliance with Plans and Specifications, by visiting site and/or building. c. Ascertain access to site, available storage and delivery facilities. CLARK HALL LEARNING SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-6 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 2. Before Commencing Work on Any Phase or in any Area a. Verify all governing dimensions at site and/or building. b. Inspect all adjacent work. 3. Tender of Proposal Confirms Agreement a. All items and conditions referred to herein and/or indicated on accompanying Drawings. b. No consideration, additional monies or time extensions will be granted for alleged misunderstanding. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 11 00*** CLARK HALL LEARNING SUMMARY OF WORK FACILITY PHASE II 01 11 00-7 3-14-14 CORNELL Ithaca, New York 1.1 GENERAL SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the products specified, under the options and conditions for substitutions stated in this Section. 1.2 PRODUCTS LIST A. Within thirty (30) days after the award of Contract, submit to the Architect five copies of a complete list of products which are proposed for installation. B. Tabulate the products by listing under each specification section title and number. C. For products specified only by reference standards, list for each such product: 1. Name and address of the manufacturer. 2. Trade name. 3. Model or catalog designation. 4. Manufacturer's data: a. Reference standards. b. Performance test data. 1.3 CONTRACTORS OPTIONS A. For products specified only by reference standard, select any product meeting that standard, by any manufacturer. B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any one of products and manufacturers named. C. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers and stating "or equal", the Contractor shall submit a request as for substitutions, for any product or manufacturer not specifically named. Such substitution shall have been listed on Bid Form as required in Instructions to Bidders. If not so listed, no substitution will be allowed. D. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, no option and no substitution will be considered unless listed on the Bid Form as provided in the hlstructions to Bidders. 1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Submit a separate request for each substitution in triplicate. Support each request with: 1. Completed "Data for Evaluation of Materials, Products, and Systems" in an approved format. CLARK HALL LEARNING SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS FACILITY PHASE II 01 25 00-1 3-14-14 2. Complete data substantiating compliance of the proposed substitution with requirements stated in Contract Documents: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturer's literature; identify: 1) Product description. 2) Reference standards. 3) Performance and test data. c. Samples, as applicable. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used, and the date of each installation. 3. An itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with the product specified listing any variations. 4. Data relating to any changes in the construction schedule. 5. The effect of the substitution on each separate contract of the Project. 6. List any changes required in other work or projects. 7. Designate any required license fees or royalties. 8. Designate availability of maintenance services, and source of replacement materials. B. Substitutions shall not result in additions to the Contract Sum. C. Substitutions will not be considered as having been accepted when: 1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without a formal request from the Contractor. They are requested by a subcontractor or supplier. 3. The acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. D. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance of the Owner. E. The Owner and the Architect shall be the sole judges of the acceptability of a proposed substitution. CLARK HALL LEARNING SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS FACILITY PHASE II 01 25 00-2 3-14-14 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION A. In making a formal request for a substitution the Contractor represents that: 1. The Contractor has personally investigated the proposed product and has determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified. 2. The Contractor will provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution as for the product specified. 3. The Contractor will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into the Work, and will make such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects. 4. The Contractor waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which may subsequently become apparent. 1.6 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES A. Review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness. B. Transmit evaluations and recommendations to the Owner, so that the Owner can notify the Contractor of the decision for acceptance or rejection of the request for substitution. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 25 00*** CLARK HALL LEARNING SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS FACILITY PHASE II 01 25 00-3 3-14-14 CORNELL SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Owner will schedule and administer pre -construction meeting, periodic progress meetings, and specially called meetings throughout the progress of the work. 1. Prepare agenda for meetings. 2. Distribute written notice of each meeting four days in advance of meeting date. 3. Make physical arrangements for meetings. 4. Preside at meetings. 5. Record the minutes; include all significant proceedings and decisions. 6. Duplicate and distribute copies of minutes after each meeting. a. To all participants in the meeting. b. To all parties affected by decisions made at the meeting. c. To the Architect. B. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors and suppliers attending the meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents. 1.2 PRE -CONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Schedule at least five (5) days after date of Notice to Proceed. B. Location: A central site, convenient for all parties. C. Attendance: 1. Owner's Representatives 2. Architect and its professional consultants 3. Major Subcontractors 4. Major suppliers 5. Safety Representatives for the Owner and Contractor CLARK HALL LEARNING PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-1 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 D. Minimum Agendum: 1. Distribution and discussion of: a. List of major subcontractors and suppliers b. Projected Construction Schedules 2. Critical work sequencing 3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities 4. Project Coordination a. Designation of responsible personnel 5. Procedures and processing of: a. Field decisions b. Proposal requests c. Submittals d. Change Orders e. Applications for Payment f. Requests for Information g. Daily Reports 6. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents 7. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents 8. Use of premises: a. Office, work and storage areas b. Owner's requirements c. Job site personnel conduct d. Building access and security 9. Temporary facilities, controls and construction aids 10. Temporary utilities CLARK HALL LEARNING PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-2 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 11. Safety and first-aid procedures a. Site specific safety plan 12. Security procedures 13. Housekeeping procedures 14. Affirmative Action Plan and Reporting requirements 1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule regular periodic meetings on the site, every week throughout the Construction period. B. Attendance: 1. Architect 2. Architect's professional consultants when, in the opinion of the Owner, needed 3. General Contractor, including Site Superintendent 4. Owner's Representatives 5. Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda 6. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda 7. Safety Representative C. Minimum Agendum: 1. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting 2. Review percentage of work to be in place by next meeting by individual trades. 3. Review of work progress since previous meeting. 4. Field observations, problems, and conflicts. 5. Problems which impede Construction Schedule. 6. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules. 7. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. 8. Revisions to Construction Schedule. 9. Planned progress and schedule, during succeeding work period. CLARK HALL LEARNING PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-3 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 10. Coordination of schedules 11. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required. 12. Maintenance of quality standards 13. Review status of all issued proposal requests and change orders. 14. Review proposed changes for: a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date. b. Effect on other contracts of the Project. 15. Other business D. All decisions, instructions, and interpretations given by the Architect/Engineer or its representative at these meetings shall be binding and conclusive on the Contractor. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED ****END OF SECTION 01 31 19*** CLARK HALL LEARNING PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-4 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 CORNELL SECTION 01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 1.1 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall, within five (5) days after award of the Contract, prepare and submit to the Owner estimated construction progress schedules for the entire Work, with sub -schedules of related activities which are essential to the progress of the Work. B. Conferences will be held with the Architect, Owner and Contractor at the start of the project to agree mutually on a progress schedule which must be diligently followed. C. Submit revised progress schedules periodically and when requested to do so by Owner. D. Submit to Owner and Architect a cash flow projection in accordance with Schedule of Values. E. Submit electronic versions of all schedules, including updates, as well as all back-up to the submitted schedules. 1.2 FORM OF SCHEDULES A. Prepare Critical Path Schedule. Provide activities that have a labor value no greater than $5,000. Each activity shall be resource loaded. Labor, material and equipment shall be clearly identified and valued. B. Format of listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of work, early start, late start, early finish, late finish, duration, progress measured by work to completion, etc. C. Identification of listings: By specification section numbers. 1.3 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES A. Construction Progress Schedule: 1. Show the complete sequence of construction by activity. Show the dates for the beginning, and completion of, each major element of construction. Specifically list: a. Site clearing b. Site utilities c. Foundation work d. Structural framing e. Subcontractor work f. Equipment installations CLARK HALL LEARNING CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01 32 16-1 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 g. Finishes h. Pre -Installation meetings 3. Show projected percentages of completion for each item, as of the first day of each month. 4. Show estimated dates for the beginning and completion of work which must be completed by or coordinated with the Owner such as hazardous materials abatement, moving, training and other such items as they are identified. B. Submittals Schedule for Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Confer with the Architect and agree on all elements of the Submittals Schedule. The schedule will be based on the understanding that minimum turn -around time in the Architect's office is ten (10) working days. Some submittals or groups of submittals may take longer to review. Submittals which do not conform to the agreed schedule may be subject to delays in processing. Show: The dates for Contractor's submittals. 2. The dates reviewed submittals will be required from the Architect. 3. Confined lead time for manufacturing, production, fabrication and shipment to the project site of all materials which have an impact on the critical path of the Project's construction schedule. 1.4 PROGRESS REVISIONS A. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submission. B. Show changes occurring since previous submission of schedule: 1. Major changes in scope 2. Activities modified since previous submission 3. Revised projections of progress and completion 4. Other identifiable changes C. Provide a narrative report as needed to define: 1. Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on the schedule. 2. Corrective action recommended, and its effect. 3. The effect of changes on schedules of other prime contractors. CLARK HALL LEARNING CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES FACILITY PHASE II 01 32 16-2 3-14-14 1.5 SUBMISSIONS A. Submit initial Construction Progress Schedules within fifteen (15) calendar days after award of Contract. 1. Owner will review schedules and return review copy within ten (10) days after receipt. 2. If required, resubmit within seven (7) days after return of review copy. B. Submit progress revision schedules to accompany each application for payment. C. Submit Submittals Schedule within thirty (30) calendar days after date of commencement of work. D. Submit one reproducible transparency and one opaque reproduction. 1.6 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute copies of the reviewed schedules to: 1. Job site file 2. Subcontractors 3. Other concerned parties B. Instruct recipients to report to the Contractor, in writing, any problems anticipated by the projections of the schedule. 1.7 STAND -DOWN AND RESTRICTED WORK DATES Strict and effective enforcement by Contractor's management and supervision of the following dates and hours is required. Stand -Down Dates (No construction work and no deliveries on site): Saturday, May 24, 2014 Sunday, May 25, 2014 Saturday, June 7, 2014 Sunday, June 8, 2014 CLARK HALL LEARNING FACILITY PHASE II Commencement Weekend Commencement Weekend Reunion Weekend Reunion Weekend CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01 32 16-3 3-14-14 Restricted Work Dates (delivery& demolition restrictions but otherwise work as usual): Friday, May 23, 2014 Commencement weekend- deliveries and work outside fence stops at noon Thursday, Friday June 5-6, 2014 Reunion guest arrivals- no work outside fence; no demo or utility work inside fence Friday, June 6, 2014 Reunion weekend- deliveries and work outside fence stops at noon Friday, August 22, 2014 New student move in — no work outside fence 9am Work Start Dates (No noisy construction activities prior to 9am): May 8 - 20, 2014 Study/Exam period Note: Normal work hours are 7:00 AM -dusk Monday -Saturday except during above noted restrictions. This means that Contractor shall not permit any noise generating activities that could disturb residents to take place outside of these hours. Should any conditions necessitate work to extend beyond these hours — Contractor may submit a detailed written request with reasonable advance notice to Cornell. Cornell (at its sole discretion) may issue a written relaxation of the above but Contractor is advised never to assume that it will be granted. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED **END OF SECTION 01 32 16*** CLARK HALL LEARNING CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01 32 16-4 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 CORNELL SECTION 01 32 33 Ithaca, New York PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall provide digitally existing condition photographs taken before commence of Work, progress photographs taken monthly on CD during progress of the Work, and final photographs upon completion and full occupancy of the building. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS A. Photographs shall be taken weekly in a manner which completely documents the work. B. Each digital photograph shall be identified with project title, date and a description of the view. C. The photographs shall be submitted to the Owner at the end of the first week for review. The photos shall be mounted in clear plastic 3 -ring photograph insert sheets with the date, location and descriptive information given on the label below each photograph. D. At the end of the project, the photographs and the 3 -hold plastic insert sheets and labels shall be placed in a 3 -ring binder that is labeled with the project name, dates and Contractor information. This binder shall be turned over to the Owner no later than two weeks after completion of the project. ***END OF SECTION 01 32 33*** CLARK HALL LEARNING PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION FACILITY PHASE II 01 32 33-1 3-14-14 CORNELL SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1.1 GENERAL A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals, including the following: 1. Shop Drawings 2. Product Data 3. Samples 4. Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals 5. Coordination Drawings B. Designate in the construction schedule, or in a separate Submittals Schedule, the dates for submission and the dates reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples will be needed. C. With the exception of physical samples and color charts, or as otherwise approved by the Owner, all submittals shall be electronic images in PDF format created electronically (saved with commenting allowed) which shall be submitted for review and approval via the electronic project management web site. PDFs shall be created directly from the native file format electronically. Scanning of paper to PDF shall be used minimally. Any non- electronic submittals shall be approved on a case by case basis and logged into the electronic management system as directed by a Cornell representative. D. The electronic system used to send submittals is "Box", a cloud based storage and collaboration system that provides a web interface for uploading, downloading, sharing and discussing files. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Drawings shall be newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale by skilled draftsmen and presented in a clear and thorough manner. 1. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from Contract Documents. 2. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as basis of Shop Drawings. 3. Standard information prepared without specific reference to Project is not Shop Drawing. B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar Drawings. Include the following information: 1. Dimensions. 2. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number. CLARK HALL LEARNING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-1 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 3. Compliance with specified standards. 4. Notation of coordination requirements. 5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurements. 6. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8 '/z by 11 inches but no larger than 36 by 48 inches. 7. Submittal: For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the electronic project management system and will be reviewed and returned electronically marked with action taken. 1.3 PRODUCT DATA A. Product Data includes brochures, diagrams, standard schedules, performance charts, and instructions that illustrate physical size, appearance and other characteristics of materials and equipment. B. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. 1. Clearly mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. 2. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 3. Show dimensions and clearances required. 4. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls. 5. Where printed Product Data includes information on products that are not required, eliminate or mark through information that does not apply. 6. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the Work. 7 Preliminary Submittal: Submit single copy of Product Data where selection of options by Architect is required. 8. Submittals: For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the electronic project management system (Box) and will be reviewed and returned electronically marked with action taken. 1.4 SAMPLES A. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern. B. Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate: CLARK HALL LEARNING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-2 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 1. Functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 2. Full range of color, texture and pattern. C. Field samples and mock-ups: 1. Contractor shall erect, at the Project site, at a location acceptable to the Architect. 2. Size or area: that specified in the respective specification section. 3. Fabricate each sample and mock-up complete and finished. 4. Remove mock-ups when directed by the Architect. 5. Perform necessary work to bring any area disturbed by mock-ups to the areas original condition. D. Submit fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with material or product proposed. 1. Mount or display Samples in manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated. 2. Identify Samples with generic description, product name, and name of manufacturer. 3. Submit Samples for review and verification of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture. 4. Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics is inherent in material or product represented, submit at least three (3) multiple units that show approximate limits of variations. 5. Preliminary Submittals: Submit one (1) full set of choices where Samples are submitted for Architect's selection of color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices. Additionally, for electronic transmittal, photograph sample and its label and attached to the submittal from electronically via the electronic project management (Box). 6. Submittals: Submit two (2) sets for Architect's review. Architect will return at least one (1) set marked with action taken. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at Project Site, for quality comparisons throughout course of construction. Additionally, for electronic transmittal, photograph sample and its label and attached to the submittal from electronically via the electronic project management (Box). 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS A. Quality assurance and quality control submittals include design data, test reports, certifications, manufacturer's instructions, and manufacturer's field reports. CLARK HALL LEARNING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-3 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 B. Delegated -Design Submittals, Professional design services or certifications: Where Contract Documents require delegated -design submittals, professional design services or certifications by a design professional, Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a qualified design professional, whose registration seal shall appear on drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other submittals prepared by such professional. Architect shall be entitled to rely upon adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of services, certifications, or approvals performed by such design professionals. C. hispection and Test Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports from independent testing agencies as specified in the Contract Documents. D. Manufacturer's instruction: Preprinted instructions concerning proper application or installation of system or product. E. Manufacturer's Held reports: Reports documenting testing and verification by manufacturer's field representative to verify compliance with manufacturer's standards or instructions. F. Submittals: For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the electronic project management system and will be reviewed and returned electronically marked with action taken. 1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare and submit coordinated layouts of the mechanical and electrical systems and equipment for all areas; drawn at a scale not less than 1/4" per foot showing on both plan and elevation including but not limited to all equipment, ducts, pipe sleeves, piping including plumbing and, sprinkler system, lighting, special supports and other items contained within the space. Show mechanical and electrical services as well as architectural and structural features drawn to scale. Provide mylar record of each coordination drawing submitted. Provide coordination drawings for all corridors, laboratories, offices, mechanical rooms, boiler room, shafts, tunnels, and all congested areas. Copies of coordination drawings shall be distributed to all trades to assure a complete, coordinated installation of work within the space available. 1. Show architectural, structural and other adjacent work requiring coordination with services. Show items, including but not limited to, access doors, ceiling grids, ceiling construction, structural decks and framing, fixtures, devices and other adjacent work coordinated with services and architectural layouts shown on Drawings. Also show code required and maintenance clearances. B. Submittal and review of coordination drawings will be required before work can start in any given area of the building. 1.7 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review submittals for compliance with Contract Documents and approve submittals prior to transmitting to the Architect. CLARK HALL LEARNING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES FACILITY PHASE II 01 33 00-4 3-14-14 B. Specifically record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitation. Comply with requirements of Section 01 25 00 Substitutions and Product Options. C. Contractor's approval of submittals shall indicate that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria, and has checked and coordinated information within each submittal with requirement of the Work and Contact Documents. D. Contractor shall be responsible for: 1. Compliance with the Contract Documents 2. Confirming and correlating quantities and dimensions 3. Selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction. 4. Coordination of the work represented by each submittal with other trades. 5. Performing the work in a safe and satisfactory manner. 6. Compliance with the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 7. All other provisions of the agreements. E. It is understood that the Architect's notation on the submittals is not to be construed as an authorization for additional work or additional cost. F. If any notations represent a change to the Contract Sum, submit a cost proposal for the change in accordance with procedures specified before proceeding with the work. G. It is understood that the Architect's notation on the submittal is not to be construed as approval of colors. Make all color -related submittals at one time. H. Notify the Architect by letter of any notations made by the Architect which the Contractor finds unacceptable. Resolve such issues prior to proceeding with the Work. 1. Begin no fabrication of work until all specified submittal procedures have been fulfilled. J. Do not submit shop drawings, product data or samples representing work for which such submittals are not specified. The Architect shall not be responsible for consequences of inadvertent review of unspecified submittals. K. The review of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for proper construction and the furnishing of materials and labor required even though the same may not be indicated on the review shop drawings. CLARK HALL LEARNING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-5 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 1.8 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination 1. Coordinate submittals with performance of construction activities. 2. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity. 3. Prepare and transmit each submittal in accordance with the Submittals Schedule, agreed to by all entities involved. 4. Prepare, review, approve and transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 5. Architect's Review: Allow ten (10) working days for Architect's initial processing of each submittal requiring the Architect's review and response, except for longer periods required as noted below, and where processing must be delayed for coordination with subsequent submittals. The Architect will advise the Contractor promptly when it is determined that a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. Allowing ten (10) working days for Architect's reprocessing of each submittal. Advise the Architect when processing time for a submittal is critical to the progress of the work, and the work would be expedited if its processing time could be foreshortened. An additional 5 working days will be required for items specified in Divisions 23 and 26, and for Millwork, Hollow Metal Work and Hardware Schedules. 6. Allow time for delivery in addition to review. 7. Allow time for reprocessing each submittal. 8. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to prepare submittals sufficiently in advance of Work to permit processing. 9. Submittals made which do not conform to the schedule are subject to delays in processing by the Architect. 10. Refer to Section 01 32 16 Construction Schedules for requirements of the Submittals Schedule. 11. Failure of the Contractor to obtain approval of Shop Drawings shall render all work thereafter performed to be at Contractor's sole risk, cost and expense. B. Submittal Preparation 1. Place permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 2. Indicate name of entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. CLARK HALL LEARNING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-6 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 3. Provide space on label or beside title block on Shop Drawings to record Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, action taken, verification of products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information within the submittal with requirements of the Work and of Contract Documents. 4. Include following information on label for processing and recording action taken. a. Project name and number. b. Date of submission and the dates of any previous submissions. c. Contract identification. d. Name of Architect. e. Name and address of Contractor. £ Name of subcontractor. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Name of supplier. i. Drawing, detail or specification references, including section number, as appropriate to clearly identify intended use of product. j. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. k. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials. 1. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers. m. A blank space for the Architect's stamps. 5. Identification of revisions on re -submittals, other than those noted by the Architect on previous submittals. 6. Shop drawings with the comment "by others" are not acceptable. All such work must specifically identify the related responsible subcontractor. C. Submittal Transmittal 1. Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. 2. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal foi in. 3. On transmittal, record relevant information including deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations. 4. Transmit submittals to Architect unless otherwise noted or directed. CLARK HALL LEARNING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-7 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 5. Where noted or directed, transmit submittals to Architect's consultant and forward copy of transmittal form to Architect. 1.9 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make any corrections or changes noted on previous submittals. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data: 1. Revise initial drawings or data, and resubmit as specified for the initial submittal. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those noted by the Architect. C. Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal. 1.10 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES A. Review submittals with reasonable promptness as identified in 1.8, paragraph 5 of this Section. B. Notations on the Submittal Review Stamp mean the following: 1. "No Exception" indicates that no deviations from the design concept have been found and Work may proceed. 2. "Make Corrections Noted" indicates that deviations from the design concept which have been found are noted, and the Contractor may proceed accordingly. 3. "Revise and Resubmit" or "Rejected" indicates that Work covered by submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity may not proceed. Revise or prepare new submittal according to Architect's notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark. C. Informational Submittals: Submittals for information or record purposes, including Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals, and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), will not require responsive action by the Architect. Architect will not return informational submittals to Contractor, and will forward informational submittals to appropriate parties that require a copy. 2. Architect will reject and return informational submittals not in compliance with Contract Documents. 3. If required by the Owner, submit MSDSs directly to the Owner; do not submit to architect. a. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return without review. CLARK HALL LEARNING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-8 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 b. Do not include MSDSs and remove MSDS sheets attached to product data or included with other submittals that require submission to the Architect. D. Delegated Design Submittals: Architect will receive each submittal and will not return it, or will return the submittal with a letter if it does not comply with requirements. 1. Architect's receipt or review of Delegated Design Submittals is not intended to, and is not to be considered, a review of the sufficiency or adequacy of the Delegated Design Submittal, including, but not limited to Shop Drawings, Product Data, design data, calculations, dimensions, product or materials selection, fabrication or installation procedures, coordination with other portions of the Work or equipment, or other qualitative or performance representations or assumptions. E. hlcomplete Submittals: Architect will return incomplete submittals without action. F. Unsolicited Submittals: Architect will return unsolicited submittals to sender without action. G. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution, or for resubmission. 1.11 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute reproductions of reviewed Shop Drawings and copies of Product Data to: 1. Job site file 2. Record Documents file 3. Subcontractors 4. Installers 5. Suppliers 6. Manufacturers 7. Fabricators 8. Architect 9. Owner B. Do not permit use of unmarked copies or rejected copies of submittals in connection with construction at Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 33 00*** CLARK HALL LEARNING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES FACILITY PHASE II 01 33 00-9 3-14-14 CORNELL Ithaca, New York 1.1 GENERAL SECTION 01 35 29 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY A. This Section provides requirements for general health and safety during the project. The requirements of this Section shall apply to both Contractor and all tiers of sub -contractors involved in the project. B. h1 addition to the requirements of this Section, all laws and regulations by applicable local, state, and federal agencies shall apply to the work of this contract. In some cases the requirements of these Specifications may by intention exceed such legal requirements, but in no case shall this Specification be interpreted or understood to reduce or eliminate such requirements. 1.2 CONTRACTOR'S SAFETY PLAN A. The Contractor will submit a site Safety Plan for review by Cornell University before commencement of work on the site. The safety plan should address site specific safety concerns related directly to the Work being done. The following safety plan review checklist is provided to assist contractors in tailoring their safety plan to the Work. Safety plans that inadequately address safe operations and equipment will be returned for resubmission. Failure to submit an appropriate site safety plan may result in denial of the payment. 1.3 ASBESTOS AND LEAD A. Attached for the Contractor's information are lead based paint and asbestos reports which represent samples taken within the building. B. Removal and disposal of material containing asbestos shall be performed by the Owner under separate contract. C. Building may contain lead based paint. The Contractor shall protect workers in accordance with OSHA regulations. The Contractor selects the means and/or methods to address the presence of lead based paint, and must concurrently protect its workers based on the Contractor's means and/or methods. Lead was a common ingredient in paint until 1978. Clark Hall was constructed in 1965. The Contractor is required to submit a lead plan that is site specific, indicating that the protective measures the Contractor proposes meet the OSHA standard 1926.62 "Lead in Construction Standards". This site specific plan should address the particular methods the Contractor intends to protect its workers, the building occupants and the building structure based on its selection of addressing the presence of lead based paint. 1.4 SITE VISITS A. The undertaking of periodic Site Visits by Architects and/or Engineers or Owner shall not be construed as supervision of actual construction, or make them responsible for the safety of all persons; or make them responsible for means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction selected by the Contractor or its Subcontractors; or make them responsible for safety programs and precautions incident to the Work, or for the safe access, visit, use, Work, travel or occupancy of any person. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED CLARK HALL LEARNING GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY FACILITY PHASE II 01 35 29-1 3-14-14 Job Specific Safety Manual Checklist Jobsite Name: Job No: General Contractor: Jobsite Location: Subcontractor: Scope of Work: Prime Contractor: Completed by: Shops: Date: Standard Applies Designated to this Competent Contractor? Person Y/N (employee name) Subpart C - General Provisions 1926.20 - .35 Subpart D - Occupational Health & Environmental. Controls 1926.50 - .66 Gases, Vapors, Fumes, Dusts, Mists 1926.55 Lead 1926.62 Subpart E - Personal Protective Equipment 1926.95 - .107 Subpart F — Fire Protection & Prevention 1926.150 - .159 Subpart G — Signs, Signals and Ban'icades 1926.200 - .203 Subpart H — Materials Handling, Storage, Use & Disposal 1926.250 - .252 Subpart I — Tools — Hand & Power 1926.300 - .307 Subpart J — Welding & Cutting 1926.350 - .354 CLARK HALL LEARNING GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY FACILITY PHASE II 01 35 29-2 3-14-14 Standard Applies to this Contractor? Y/N (employee name) Designated Competent Person Subpart K — Electrical 1926.400 - .449 Subpart L — Scaffolds 1926.450 - .454 Subpart M — Fall Protection 1926.500 - .503 Subpart N — Cranes, Derricks, Hoists, Elevators, & Conveyors 1926.550 - .556 Subpart P — Excavations 1926.650 - .652 Subpart Q — Concrete & Masonry Construction 1926.700 - .706 Subpart R — Steel Erection 1926.750 - .761 Subpart S — Tunnels, Shafts, Caissons, Cofferdams, & Compressed Air 1926.800 - .804 Subpart T — Demolition 1926.850 - .860 Subpart U — Blasting & Use of Explosives 1926.900 - .914 Subpart V — Power Transmission & Distribution 1926.950 - .960 Subpart X — Stairways & Ladders 1926.1050 - .1060 Subpart Y — Commercial Diving Operations 1926.1071 — 1090 Recordkeeping — 1926.1091 - .1092 Subpart Z — Toxic and Hazardous Substances 1926.1100 - .1152 ***END OF SECTION 01 35 29*** CLARK HALL LEARNING GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY FACILITY PHASE II 01 35 29-3 3-14-14 Limited Pre -Renovation Asbestos Survey Report Performed at Cornell University Clark Hall (Building 2082) For the Suite 293 Space and Penthouse Renovation Project Cornell University Ithaca, New York Campus Prepared for: Mr. Dale Houseknecht, Asbestos Project Coordinator Cornell University Maintenance Management 116 Humphreys Service Building, Ithaca, NY 14853 Prepared by: ADELIA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607-231-6600 Fax: 607-231-6640 wvvvv.deltaengineers.com Delta Project No. 2012.004.338 Cornell Work Order No. 5581032 Field work performed by: Derek Franklin, December 12th, 2012 Report prepared by: Derek Franklin Report reviewed by: Stephen Prislupsky ADELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.0 INTRODUCTION 3 5 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 2.0 ASBESTOS SURVEY AND SAMPLING PROCEDURES AND METHODS 3.0 SURVEY FINDINGS AND CONCLUSIONS 4.0 INACCESSIBLE AREAS Appendix A, AsBEsTos BULK SAMPLE REPORT FORM Appendix B, LABORATORY ANALYTICAL RESULTS Appendix 0, DELTA ENGINEERS, COMPANY AND PERSONNEL CERTIFICATIONS Appendix D, LABORATORY CERTIFICATIONS Appendix E, BULK SAMPLE LOCATION DRAWINGS 2 .DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS 1.0 INTRODUCTION: 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com Delta Engineers, Architects, & Land Surveyors (Delta) was contracted by Cornell University to provide a Limited Pre -Renovation Asbestos Survey at Clark Hall (Building 2082) in support of the upcoming Suite 293 Space and Penthouse Renovation Project. The survey was performed in sections of the 2nd floor and Penthouse levels and addressed ONLY those specific areas/spaces and associated suspect building materials with the potential to be impacted by the upcoming Renovation Project. The areas addressed as a part of this Survey included Rooms 200CD, 287, 289, 293, 293A and the Penthouse section where Air Handler Units 5 and 6 are located. On December 12th, 2012, Delta Certified Inspectors Derek Franklin and Thomas Ferro conducted a walkthrough of the above referenced renovation area spaces/rooms to identify the various suspect materials present. Based on a visual inspection of the areas along with a discussion of the Project Scope of work and walkthrough of the affected spaces with the Building Coordinator, a total of seventy-seven (77) bulk samples were collected representing thirty-three (33) separate suspect homogenous building materials. Forty-four (44) of the samples collected were non -friable organically bound (NOB) representing twenty-two (22) homogenous materials. The remaining thirty-three (33) samples were "friable" non -NOB representing eleven (11) homogenous materials. The suspect homogenous building materials identified and sampled in the affected renovation areas included the following: Homogenous Area (HA) Building Material 01 1' x 1' Fissure Splined ceiling Tile, Suite 293 Space 02 Tan Mastic on Door Frame, Suite 293 Space 03 White Sheetrock from Column Enclosure, Suite 293 Space 04 Joint Compound from Column Enclosure, Suite 293 Space 05 Dark Brown Covebase Mastic, Suite 293 Space 06 Light Brown Covebase Mastic, Suite 293 Space 07 Yellow Capet Mastic, Suite 293 Space 08 Tan Covebase Mastic, Suite 293 Space 09 Tar Paper Wrap over Pipe Insulation, Suite 293 Space 10 9" x 9" White w/ Black Streak Floor Tile, Room 293 11 Yellow/Brown Mastic from HA10A Floor Tile 12 9" x 9" Tan w/ White Streak Floor Tile, Suite 293 Space 13 Brown Mastic from HAl2A Floor Tile Suite 293 Space 14 12" x 12" Grey w/ Black spec Floor Tile, Room 200CD 15 Grey Mastic form HA14A Floor Tile, Room 200CD 16 Original Black Mastic under HA14A Tile/15A Grey Mastic, Room 200CD 17 Grey Floor Leveler, Suite 293 Space 18 Green Sheet Vinyl Flooring, Suite 293 Space 19 Yellow/Brown Mastic from HA18A Flooring, Suite 293 Space 20 Blue Sheet Vinyl Flooring, Suite 293 Space 21 Yellow/Brown Mastic from HA20A Flooring, Suite 293 Space 22 White Top -Coat Plaster, Walls/Columns, Suite 293 Space 23 Gray Base -Coat Plaster, Walls/Columns, Suite 293 Space 3 ADELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS Homogenous Area (HA) Building Material 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com 24 White Cloth Outer Covering on Ductwork, AHU #'s 5 & 6 Penthouse Area 25 Grey Vibration Cloth, AHU #'s 5 & 6 Penthouse Area 26 Black Tar Paper Wrap on Duct, AHU #'s 5 & 6 Penthouse Area 27 Black Tar at Duct Seams, AHU #'s 5 & 6 Penthouse Area 28 Grey Duct Sealant, AHU #'s 5 & 6 Penthouse Area 29 Chilled Water Supply Line Fitting Insulation, AHU #'s 5 & 6 Penthouse Area 30 Chilled Water Return Line Fitting Insulation, AHU #'s 5 & 6 Penthouse Area 31 White Patch Material on Chilled Water Supply/Return Insulation Lines, AHU #'s 5 & 6 Penthouse Area 32 Roof Drain Fitting Insulation, Room 293 33 Steam Line Fitting Insulation, AHU #'s 5 & 6 Penthouse Area Suite 293 Space includes Rooms 200CD, 287, 289, 293 & 293A Specific information required by 12 NYCRR Part 56-5.1, (f) — "Building/Structure Asbestos Survey Information" to be included in this pre -renovation report is as follows: 1) Building Name/Address: Clark Hall (2082) Cornell University Campus Ithaca, NY 14853 2) Owner's Name/Address: Cornell University Humphreys Service Building Ithaca, NY 14853 3) Owner's Agent: Mr. Dale Houseknecht 4) Survey Performed By: Delta Engineers, Architects, & Land Surveyors 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 5) Certified Inspectors: Derek Franklin Thomas Ferro Certificate No. 05-08623 Certificate No. 99-11328 6) Date of Survey: December 12, 2012 7) Laboratory: America Science Team New York, Inc. 117 East 30th Street, New York, NY 10016 4 /.DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, 8. LAND SURVEYORS 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com 2.0 ASBESTOS SURVEY AND SAMPLING PROCEDURES AND METHODS: 2.1 Survey requirements Requirements to perform Pre-Demolition/Pre-Renovation Asbestos Surveys are based on the following State and Federal Regulations. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): OSHA survey requirements and sampling protocols are included in 29 CFR Part 1910.1001(j)(2) & (j)(8) and 29 CFR Part 1926.1101(k),(5): 29 CFR Part 1910.10010)(2), Installed Asbestos Containing Material: Employers and building owners are required to treat installed TSI and sprayed on and troweled -on surfacing materials as ACM in buildings constructed no later than 1980 for purposes of this standard. These materials are designated "presumed ACM or PACM", and are defined in paragraph (b) of this section. Asphalt and vinyl flooring material installed no later than 1980 also must be treated as asbestos -containing. The employer or building owner may demonstrate that PACM and flooring material do not contain asbestos by complying with paragraph (j)(8)(iii) of this section. 29 CFR Part 1910.10010)(8), Criteria to rebut the designation of installed material as PACM: 1910.10016)(8)(1) - At any time, an employer and/or building owner may demonstrate, for purposes of this standard, that PACM does not contain asbestos. Building owners and/or employers are not required to communicate information about the presence of building material for which such a demonstration pursuant to the requirements of paragraph (j)(8)(ii) of this section has been made. However, in all such cases, the information, data and analysis supporting the determination that PACM does not contain asbestos, shall be retained pursuant to paragraph (m) of this section. 1910.1001(j)(8)(ii) - An employer or owner may demonstrate that PACM does not contain asbestos by the following: 1910.1001()18)(ii)(A) - Having a completed inspection conducted pursuant to the requirements ofAHERA (40 CFR 763, Subpart E) which demonstrates that no ACM is present in the material; or 1910.10010)(8)(11)(8) - Performing tests of the material containing PACM which demonstrate that no ACM is present in the material. Such tests shall include analysis of bulk samples collected in the manner described in 40 CFR 763.86. The tests, evaluation and sample collection shall be conducted by an accredited inspector or by a CIH. Analysis of samples shall be performed by persons or laboratories with proficiency demonstrated by current successful participation in a nationally recognized testing program such as the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) or the National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST) or the Round Robin for bulk samples administered by the American industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) or an equivalent nationally -recognized round robin testing program. 1910.10016)(8)(iii) -The employer and/or building owner may demonstrate that flooring material including associated mastic and backing does not contain asbestos, by a determination of an industrial hygienist based upon recognized analytical techniques showing that the material is not ACM. 29 CFR Part 1926.1101(k)(5), Criteria to rebut the designation of installed material as PACM: 1926.1101(k)(5)(i) - At any time, an employer and/or building owner may demonstrate, for purposes of this standard, that PACM does not contain asbestos. Building owners and/or employers are not required to communicate information about the presence of building material for which such a demonstration pursuant to the requirements of paragraph (k)(5)(11) of this section has been made. However, in all such cases, the information, data and analysis supporting the determination that PACM does not contain asbestos, shall be retained pursuant to paragraph (n) of this section. 1926.1101(k)(5)(il) — An employer or owner may demonstrate that PACM does not contain more than 1 percent asbestos by the following: 1926.1101(k)(5)(ii)(A) - Having a completed inspection conducted pursuant to the requirements ofAHERA (40 CFR Part 763, Subpart E) which demonstrates that the material is not ACM; or 5 860 Hooper Road ADELTA13760 Tel 607 231.6600 ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com 1926.1101(k)(5)(ii)(B) - Performing tests of the material containing PACM which demonstrate that no ACM is present in the material. Such tests shall include analysis of bulk samples collected in the manner described in 40 CFR 763.86. The tests, evaluation and sample collection shall be conducted by an accredited inspector or by a CIH. Analysis of samples shall be performed by persons or laboratories with proficiency demonstrated by current successful participation in a nationally recognized testing program such as the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) or the National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST) or the Round Robin for bulk samples administered by the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) or an equivalent nationally -recognized round robin testing program. 1926.1101 (k)(5)(iii) - The employer and/or building owner may demonstrate that flooring material including associated mastic and backing does not contain asbestos, by a determination of an industrial hygienist based upon recognized analytical techniques showing that the material is not ACM. EPA National Emissions Standard for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAPs): (NESHAPs) regulates asbestos under "40 CFR Part 61, Subpart M - National Emission Standard for Asbestos". Subpart M regulates demolition and/or renovation of "facilities" that may contain asbestos -containing materials (AGMs). "Facilities," as defined by NESHAPs, includes any institutional, commercial, public, industrial, or residential structure or building, except residential buildings having four or fewer units. ACMs are defined in NESHAPs as materials containing more than 1 percent asbestos. Section 61.145 states: 61.145 Standard for demolition and renovation. (a) Applicability. To determine which requirements of paragraphs (a), (b), and (c) of this section apply to the owner or operator of a demolition or renovation activity and prior to the commencement of the demolition or renovation, thoroughly inspect the affected facility or part of the facility where the demolition or renovation operation will occur for the presence of asbestos, including Category I and Category 11 nonfriable ACM. It should be noted that 40 CFR Part 1 Subpart M, NESHAPS has no cut-off date exempting survey requirements. New York State Department of Labor (NYS DOL): Guidelines followed for the inspection are those established by the NYS DOL's Industrial Code Rule 56 (Cited as 12 NYCRR Part 56, as amended, adopted January 11, 2006; effective September 5, 2006). The specific survey, sampling and reporting requirements included in 12 NYCRR Part 56-5.1(e) — "Building/Structure Asbestos Survey Requirements" include: 56-5.1 Asbestos Survey Requirements for Building/Structure Demolition, Renovation, Remodeling and Repair (a) Asbestos Survey Required. An owner or an owner's agent, except the owner of one and two- family dwellings who contracts for, but does not direct or control the work, shall cause to be conducted, an asbestos survey completed by a licensed asbestos contractor using inspectors certified in compliance with Section 56-3.2(d), to determine whether or not the building or structure, or portion(s) thereof to be demolished, renovated, remodeled, or have repair work, contains ACM, PACM or asbestos material. This asbestos survey shall be completed and submitted as indicated in Subdivision (g) of this Section, prior to commencing work. All such asbestos surveys shall be conducted in conformance with the requirements of Subdivision (e) of this Section. 6 .DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, 8. LAND SURVEYORS 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com (b) Exemptions To Asbestos Survey Requirements: The asbestos survey required by this Subdivision (a) of this Section shall not be required for the following classes of buildings or structures: (1) an agricultural building; (2) buildings or structures for which original construction commenced on or after January 1, 1974; (3) A structure certified in writing to be structurally unsound by a licensed Professional Engineer, Registered Architect, Building Inspector, Fire Inspector or other official of competent jurisdiction. (See Section 56-11.5) (c) Building/Structure Demolition. If a building/structure asbestos survey is not required or performed per Subdivision (b) of this Section, and the building/structure is certified to be unsound or slated for contracted demolition, the building/structure shall be assumed to contain asbestos, and shall be demolished per this Part, unless the building/structure is adequately certified to be free of asbestos containing material. Acceptable documentation for certification shall be a previous thorough building/structure asbestos survey, abatement records or other documentation acceptable to the Commissioner or his or her representative. (d) Responsibility To Comply. No exemption to the requirement to conduct an asbestos survey shall exempt any person, asbestos contractor, property owner or business entity from the inspection or asbestos survey requirements of EPA, OSHA, and any other applicable section of this Part. (e) Building/Structure Asbestos Survey Requirements. The asbestos survey shall include a thorough inspection for and identification of all PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM, or asbestos material throughout the building/structure or portion thereof to be demolished, renovated, remodeled, or to have repair work. The required inspection shall be performed by a certified asbestos inspector, and, at a minimum, shall include identification of PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM or asbestos material by all of the following methods: (1) The review of building/structure plans and records, if available, for references to asbestos, ACM, PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM or asbestos material used in construction, renovation or repair; and (2) A visual inspection for PACM and suspect miscellaneous ACM throughout the building/structure or portion thereof to be demolished, renovated, remodeled, or repaired. For the purpose of this Part, all PACM and suspect miscellaneous ACM visually assessed shall be treated and handled as ACM and shall be assumed to be ACM, unless bulk sampling is conducted as per this Section, standard EPA and OSHA accepted methods, including multi -layered systems sampling protocols; the subsequent analyses are performed by a laboratory that meets the requirements of Section 56-4.2 of this Part; and the analyses satisfies both ELAP and federal requirements, including multi -layered sample analyses, to document non -asbestos containing material. (f) Building/Structure Asbestos Survey Information. (1) The asbestos survey shall, at a minimum, identify and assess with due diligence, the locations, quantities, friability and conditions of all types of installations at the affected portion of the building/structure relative to the ACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM, PACM or asbestos material contained therein. The following list is not inclusive of all types of ACMs, it only summarizes typical 7 860 Hooper Road ADELTA13760 Tel 607 231.6600 ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, S LAND SURVEYORS Fax: 607231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com ACMs. The certified asbestos inspector is responsible for identification and assessment of all types ACM, PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM and asbestos material within the affected portion of the building/structure: PACM (i) Surfacing Treatments: (a) Fireproofing; (b) Acoustical Plaster; (c) Finish Plasters; and (d) Skim Coats of Joint Compound. (ii) Thermal System Insulation: (a) Equipment Insulation; (b) Boiler, Breeching, Boiler Rope, Duct, or Tank Insulation, Cement or Mortar Used for Boilers and Refractory Brick; (c) Piping and Fitting Insulations including but not limited to, Wrapped Paper, Aircell, Millboard, Rope, Cork, Preformed Plaster, Job Molded Plaster and coverings over fibrous glass insulation. SUSPECT MISCELLANEOUS ACM (i) Roofing and Siding Miscellaneous Materials: (a) Insulation Board; (b) Vapor Barriers; (c) Coatings; (d) Non -Metallic or Non -Wood Roof Decking (e) Felts; (f) Cementitious Board (Transite); (g) Flashing; (h) Shingles; and (1) Galbestos. (ii) Other Miscellaneous Materials: (a) Dust and Debris; (b) Floor Tile; (c) Cove Base; (d) Floor Leveler Compound; (e) Ceiling Tile; (f) Vermiculite Insulation (g) Gaskets, Seals, Sealants (including for condensate control); (h) Vibration Isolators; (i) Laboratory Tables and Hoods; (j) Chalkboards; (k) Pipe Penetration Packing or Other Firestopping Materials (/) Cementitious Board; (m) Electrical Wire Insulation; (n) Fire Curtains; (o) Fire Blankets; (p) Fire Doors; (q) Brakes and Clutches; (r) Mastics, Adhesives and Glues; 8 /.DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS (s) Caulks; (t) Sheet Flooring (Linoleum); (u) Wallpaper; (v) Drywall; (w) Plasterboard (x) Spackling/Joint Compound; (y) Textured Paint; (z) Grout; (aa) Glazing Compound; and (ab) Terrazzo. 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com (2) All ACM, PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM, or asbestos material reported under Paragraph (1) of this Subdivision shall include the location of the materials, an estimate of the quantities, types, friability and condition of the identified materials to be treated and handled as ACM. For the purpose of this Part, all PACM and suspect miscellaneous ACM visually assessed shall be treated and handled as ACM and shall be assumed to be ACM, unless bulk sampling is conducted as per this Section, standard EPA and OSHA accepted methods, including multilayered systems sampling protocols; the subsequent analyses are performed by a laboratory that meets the requirements of Section 56-4.2 of this Part; and the analyses satisfies both ELAP and federal requirements, including multi -layered sample analyses, to document non -asbestos containing material. (3) The building/structure asbestos survey shall also include the building/structure name, address, the building/structure owner's name and address, the name and address of the owner's agent, the name of the firm performing the asbestos survey and a copy of the firm's current asbestos handling license, the names of the certified inspector(s) performing the survey and a copy of the current asbestos handling certificate for each inspector utilized, the dates of the asbestos survey, a listing of homogeneous areas identifying which ones are ACM, all laboratory analyses reports for bulk samples collected, and copies of the appropriate certifications for the laboratory used for analysis of samples taken during the asbestos survey. (g) Transmittal of Building/Structure Asbestos Survey Information. One (1) copy of the results of the building/structure asbestos survey shall be immediately transmitted by the building/structure owner as follows: (1) One (1) copy of the completed asbestos survey shall be sent by the owner or their agent to the local government entity charged with issuing a permit for such demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair work under applicable State or local laws. (2) The completed asbestos survey for controlled demolition (as per Subpart 56-11.5) or pre -demolition asbestos projects shall also be submitted to the appropriate Asbestos Control Bureau district office. (3) The completed asbestos survey shall be kept on the construction site with the asbestos notification and variance, if required, throughout the duration of the asbestos project and any associated demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair project. (h) Removal Required. If the building/structure asbestos survey finds that the portion of the building/structure to be demolished, renovated, remodeled, or have repair work contains ACM, 9 ADELTA860Hooper Road 1 3760 Tel 607.231.6600 ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM assumed to be ACM, or asbestos material, which is impacted by the work, the owner or the owner's agent shall conduct, or cause to have conducted, asbestos removal performed by a licensed asbestos abatement contractor in conformance with all standards set forth in this Part. All ACM, PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM assumed to be ACM, or asbestos material impacted by the demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair project shall be removed as per this Part, prior to access or disturbance by other uncertified trades or personnel. No demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair work shall be commenced by any owner or the owner's agent prior to the completion of the asbestos abatement in accordance with the notification requirements of this Part. For multi -phased work, the access restriction for uncertified trades or personnel applies to each intermediate portion of the entire project. Upon completion of the intermediate portion of the asbestos project, other trades or personnel may access that portion of the work site. For demolition projects that are exempt from asbestos survey requirements due to being structurally unsound, the demolition is considered an asbestos project and shall proceed as per Section 56-11.5. (1) All building/structure owners and asbestos abatement contractors on a demolition, renovation, remodeling, or repair project, which includes work covered by this Part, shall inform all trades on the work site about PACM, ACM, asbestos material and suspect miscellaneous ACM assumed to be ACM at the work site. (i) Bidding. Bids may be advertised and contracts awarded for demolition, remodeling, renovation, or repair work, but no work on the current intermediate portion of the project shall commence on the demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair work by any owner or agent prior to completion of all necessary asbestos abatement work for the current intermediate portion of the entire project, in conformance with all standards set forth in this Part. (j) Unidentified and Unassessed Asbestos. When any construction activity, such as demolition, remodeling, renovation or repair work, reveals PACM or suspect miscellaneous ACM that has not been identified by the asbestos survey per this Part, or has not been identified by other inspections as per current OSHA or EPA requirements, all activities shall cease in the area where the PACM or suspect miscellaneous ACM is found and the Asbestos Control Bureau shall be notified by telephone by the building/structure owner or their representative, followed with a written notice in accordance with the notification requirements of this Part. Unassessed PACM or suspect miscellaneous ACM shall be treated and handled as ACM and assumed to be ACM, unless proven otherwise by standard EPA and OSHA accepted methods, including multi -layered systems sampling protocols; subsequent analyses performed by a laboratory that meets the requirements of Section 56-4.2 of this Part; and the analyses satisfies both NYS ELAP and federal requirements, including multi -layered sample analyses, to document non -asbestos containing material. 2.2 Sample Analysis Bulk sample analysis was performed by American Science Team New York Inc., an independent laboratory approved/accredited by the NYS Department of Health (ELAP), the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA), and the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP). 10 ADELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com Samples collected during the course of this survey fell into one of two categories. The first category includes non -friable organically bound (NOB) materials. These materials are those which have an organic binder in their matrix and include items such as floor tiles, sheet flooring, mastics, glazings, caulks and roofing materials. The second category includes non -NOB "friable" materials including parging, sheetrock, joint compound, wall insulations, and wallboard. Analysis of all "NOB" materials was initially performed by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) following the New York State Department of Health ELAP 198.6 Gravimetric Reduction Methodology. If a given sample was reported as non -asbestos following this analysis, it was then analyzed by Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) following the NYS DOH ELAP 198.4 Methodology. Analysis of all "non -NOB" materials was performed by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) following the EPA 600/M4/82/020 and the NYS DOH ELAP 198.1 Methodologies. 2.3 Materials not sampled There were several materials present at the site which were not considered "suspect" by the inspector and were not sampled. These included various fiberglass, foam, vinyl, silicone, wood/cellulose products and concrete/cinder block/brick components. 11 ADEL1A ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, uLAND SURVEYORS 3.0 SURVEY FINDINGS AND CONCLUSIONS 860 Hooper Road snuwon.wY1n7no Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax 607�31.6e50 Website: www.deltaengineers.com 3.1) Clark Hall Suite 293 Space and Penthouse Renovation Project Pre -Renovation Asbestos Survey, Non -Asbestos Materials - Results reported for samples collected as a part of this pre -renovation survey have concluded that of the suspect materials sampled within the Clark Hall Suite 293 renovation spaces and Penthouse AHU#'s 5 & 6 renovation Gp8Ce, the following materials were identified as non -asbestos: Homogenous Area (HA) Non -Asbestos Building Material 01 1'x 1' Fissure Splined ceiling Tile, Suite 293 Space 02 Tan Mastic on Door Frame, Suite 293 Space 03 White Sheetrock from Column Eno|oSune, Suite 293 Space 04 Joint Compound from Column Enclosure, Suite 293 Space 05 Dark Brown Covebase Mastic, Suite 293 Space 06 Light Brown Covebase Mastio, Suite 293 Space 07 Yellow Capet Mastic, Suite 293 Space 08 Tan Covebase Mastic, Suite 293 Space 09 Tar Paper Wrap over Pipe Insulation, Suite 293 Space 11 Yellow/Brown Mastic from H/\10/\Floor Tile 12 Q"x0"Tan w/White Streak Floor Tile, Suite 293 Space 13 Brown Mastic from HAl2A Floor Tile Suite 293 Space 14 12"x12"Grey w/Black spec Floor Tile, Room 2OOCO 15 Grey Mastic form HA14A Floor Tile, Room 20000 16 Original Black Mastic under HA1 4A Tile/1 5A Grey Mastic, Room 2000D 17 Grey Floor Leveler, Suite 293 Space 18 Green SheetVinyl Flooring, Suite 293 Space 19 Yellow/Brown Masticfrom HA18A Flooring, Suite 293 Space 20 Blue Sheet Vinyl Flooring, Suite 293 Space 21 Yellow/Brown Mastic from HA2OA F|0Oring, Suite 293 Space 22 White Top -Coat Plaster, Walls/Columns, Suite 293 Space 23 Gray Base -Coat Plaster, WaIls/Columns, Suite 293 Space 24 White Cloth Outer Covering on Ouctw}rk, AHU #'s 5 & 6 Penthouse Area 25 Grey Vibration Cloth, AHU #s 5 & 6 Penthouse Area 28 Grey Duct Sealant, AHU #s 5 & 6 Penthouse Area 29 Chilled Water Supply Line Fitting lnsulation, AHU #s 5 & 6 Penthouse Area 30 Chilled Water Return Line Fitting Insulation, AHU #s 5 & 6 Penthouse Area 31 White Patch Material on Chilled Water Supply/Return Insulation Lines, AHU #'s5&8Penthouse Area 32 Roof Drain Fitting Insulation, Room 293 33 Steam Line Fitting lnsulation, AHU #s 5 & 6 Penthouse Area Suite 293 Space includes Rooms 200CD287, 289 293 & 293A 12 ADEL1A ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com 3.2) Clark Hall Suite 293 Space and Penthouse Renovation Project Pre -Renovation Asbestos Survey, Asbestos Containing Materials - Results reported for samples collected during this survey have concluded that of the suspect materials sampled within the Clark Hall Suite 293 renovation spaces and Penthouse AHU#'s 5 & 6 renovation space, the following materials were identified as being asbestos containing materials: Homogenous Area (HA) Asbestos Containing Material (ACM's) 10 9" x 9" White w/ Black Streak Floor Tile, Room 293 26 Black Tar Paper Wrap on Duct, AHU #'s 5 & 6 Penthouse Area 27 Black Tar at Duct Seams, AHU #'s 5 & 6 Penthouse Area A breakdown of the Asbestos Containing Materials is as follows: A) 9" x 9" White w/ Black Streak Floor Tile, Room 293, HA 10: This asbestos containing floor tile (VAT) is present in Room 293 along the North and East perimeters. A total of approximately 1,260 square feet of this VAT is present in Room 293. B) Black Tar Paper Wrap on Duct, HA 10: This asbestos containing tar paper wrap is present on the fiberglass duct and unit insulation associated with AHU's 5 and 6. As the specific impact to, and associated quantity of, this material to be affected by the renovation project was unknown at the time of this survey, no quantity is provided for this material. C) Black Tar at Duct Seams, HA 10: This asbestos containing tar is present on the seams of the duct and AHU's 5 and 6 seams. As the specific impact to, and associated quantity of, this material to be affected by the renovation project was unknown at the time of this survey, no quantity is provided for this material. 4.0 INACCESSIBLE AREAS Building sections, spaces and areas which were visible and accessible were inspected and sampled as a part of this survey. Inaccessible areas such as wall cavities, fixed / hard ceiling plenum spaces and enclosed pipe chases could not be inspected without select demolition. Any materials present in those areas not accessible shall be assumed ACM when encountered, until tested. 13 /.DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & N SURVEYORS APPENDIX A Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form 14 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com 6 0 0 0 E (6 COOL) O O r C0(0 L QzNN a) 000 C I -6 C0 (0 C 0 3_ OD a .- X N W WO 1 a) a) Delta Proj. No.: 2012.004.338 Derek Franklin. Tom Ferro Asbestos Inspector Number of Samples Collected Number of Samples Analyzed: PLM - 74/TEM - 38 Work Order No. Dates Sampling Performed: Date of Report: 12/21/12 AmeriSci Labs 0 0 a) o a) 2 U d C O .c a) > amici 'o 0 a. d co o ,o 0 O N O N ns 12q Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form z z ❑ z U u) 1' x 1' Fissure Splined ceiling Tile, Room 293 N 0 M M d' O O N_ O N ❑ z ❑ z ❑ z 1' x 1' Fissure Splined ceiling Tile, Room 287 N O oo O ❑ z ❑ z ❑ z Tan Mastic on Door Frame, Room 293 N N O N O ❑ z 0 z ❑ z co 0) E O O aS E ns Li O O 0 O V O co c co H N N O W N O z ❑ z ❑ z Q z ❑ z z N CO O M O N CO 0 Q z 0 z ❑ z a) U O U W E O 0 E O 4-- -o 7 O Q M E O O 0 N E c 0 N O 2012.004.338 - z 0 z ❑ z N O W O 2012.004.338 - ❑ z ❑ z ❑ z Dark Brown Covebase Mastic, Room 293 N 0 O O ❑ z ❑ z ❑ z Dark Brown Covebase Mastic, Room 287 N 1.0 O W 0 ❑ z ❑ z ❑ z Light Brown Covebase Mastic, Room 287 N O O O O 2012.004.338 - ❑ z ❑ z ❑ z Brown Covebase Mastic, Room 289 m J N O 0 CO CO O 2012.004.338 - ❑ z ❑ z ❑ z Yellow Capet Mastic, Room 289 N r- O 2012.004.338 - O 0 O 1 TB 0 2012.004.338 O z O 0 Derek Franklin, Tom Ferro Asbestos Inspector Number of Samples Collected: 7 co co W Number of Samples Analyzed: PLM - 74 Work Order No N N N Dates Sampling Performe Date of Report: 12/21/12 AmeriSci Labs Client: Cornell University C (6 a) (13 0 0. M 0) N 0 co 0 0 0 a E 0 (n Cn 0 0 c 0 0 0 0 0 O O O C O O 0 0 d 0 0 O d C O RS 0 0 CC E L O Asbestos Bulk Sample Report z 0 z 0 z O Yellow Capet Mastic, Room 289 2012.004.338 -107B z 0 z 0 z Tan Covebase Mastic, Room 200CD N CO O CO O 0 z 0 z 0 z 0 0 0 O O N E O O U 0) (6 0 N (6 a) O 0 C (6 H N O O 0 z 0 z 0 z 0 In E O O O N 0 0 CL 0 0 0_ 0 0 O CL co (6 G)) H N N O O 0)) O 0 z 0 z 0 z 0 In E O O O co 0) a) 0 0 O 0 >(L6 N o_ co RS CS) N N a) O 2012.004.338 - a z zgz 0 O 0 U N v.) O N 0 O N O 2012.004.338 - u) a z U) a z 0 N N O 2012.004.338 - 0 z 0 z 0 z 0 O Yellow/Brown Mastic from HA10A Floor Tile N r 2012.004.338 - 0 z 0 z 0 z 0 N 0 H O O LL O E O 4-- 0 .N O 2 O m O a) > N 2012.004.338 - a z 0 z 0 z 0 O E O O 12G 0 0 LL (75 (6 0 ) C (0 0) X co 6) N N N N 2012.004.338 - 0 z 0 z 0 z 0 E O O 0 H 0 O LL (6 0 4) C t4 H 0) X 0) O N N N 2012.004.338 - 0 z 0 z 0 z 0 Brown Mastic from HAl2A Floor Tile N M M 2012.004.338 - 0 z 0 z 0 z U O Brown Mastic from HAl2A Floor Tile M CO M 2012.004.338 - 0 a) O O 0 0 0 L 0 CL CO m 0 m TDOCDCD E RS CO CD 1.0 0 1,, CO GO CA CO GO ° >- c T`; 115 0. z (3J(34a) 0 r•-• Delta Proj. No.: 2012.004.338 Derek Franklin. Tom Ferro Asbestos Inspector: Number of Samples Collected: 7 Number of Samples Analyzed: PLM - 74/TEM - 38 \ CD CO 10 Work Order No.: Dates Sampling Performed: Date of Report: 12/21/12 AmeriSci Labs 42 8 Client: Cornell University E 0 LL 0 a) CL a) 0. E (0 (.1) -5 Ca _fa U) z z 0 z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z 2 0) 0) 0) 0) (0 (0 0 rl 04 2012.004.338 - 1— EL- 0 0.. 0 (0 a) 0 „ 0 5 N (NI x E _ o o 2012.004.338 - E ct 1- 8 0 71- E 8 0 as 2 o >, 2 8 ( 04 2012.004.338 - E iz 8 0 I3).. E8 (0 2 0 >30 0c'4 r 2012.004.338 - Lc> 00 -cs 0 c' 0 N E o o co (Z. .6 - co 2 75 2 .5) 00 CO 2012.004.338 - Lc) c0 7:r 00 -0 0 8 0 N ti> E o o _se fX c.) co .6 ra '76(0 2 >-‘ 5 (C) r 2012.004.338 - Grey Floor Leveler, Room 293 04 2012.004.338 - Grey Floor Levler, Room 293 04 2012.004.338 - Green Sheet Vinyl Flooring, Room 293 CO 2012.004.338 - CO CO co 2012.004.338 - 0 ET_ co E 0 0 0) 2 2 co co c9,1) E .2 o ir) o >-LL ca c 04 0) r 2012.004.338 - CS) r 2012.004.338 - Blue Sheet Vinyl Flooring, Room 293 4,5 -0 pooE ct) co o 0 o CO CO c0 LO CO. • O CO CO 0 O. z 0 N: •C • Q o <o<� • • , <0 • -C) c0 CI) — Ili Li_ a) 73. Delta Proj. No.: 2012.004.338] Derek Franklin, Tom Ferro Asbestos Inspector: Number of Samples Collected: 77 Number of Samples Analyzed: PLM - 74/TEM - 38 CO CO (f) LC) Work Order No.: Dates Sampling Performed: Date of Report: 12/21/12 AmeriSci Labs 2 0 z 0 z 0 z 0 (f) co E 0 0 0) • 0 L1 0 0 Ea 0 z 0 z 0 z 0 2 0 LL E2 4— .0 0) 2 ca E 9- 0 a) 0 >-D 0 z 0 z 0 z 0 2 CV CV CO z 0 z 0 z White Top -Coat Plaster, Wall, Room 293 z 0 z 0 z White Top -Coat Plaster, Column, Room 293 CV CO z 0 z 0 z 0) 0 CO White Top -Coat Plaster, Wa 0 z 0 z 0 z 0) 0 co (/) White Top -Coat Plaster, Column, Room 293 0 CV z 0 z 0 z White Top -Coat Plaster, WaH, Room 293 z 0 z 0 z 0) 0 Grey Base -Coat Paster, WaH Room 293 z 0 z 0 z 0) 0 co (ID0) Grey Base -Coat Plaster, Column Room 293 CO CO z 0 z 0 z co t Grey Base -Coat Plaster, Wall Room 293 z 0 z 0 z 0) 0 CO CO Grey Base -Coat Plaster, Column Room 293 0 CO z 0 z 0 z 0) 0 CO CO Grey Base -Coat Plaster, Wall Room 293 CO CO CO CO 0 r cD CV co co co • CO CO CO 0 •r0 2012.004338' CO CO CO 0 0 r 0 0 OS 0 0 (2 0) 0) 0 _C • CO (00) O 0 0 'V C OS (I) O • C 0 0 0_ (;3 03 (02) ° N 0 as '5 0u)D- V CD 0 0 E CCS CO 0 In 0 N- CO CO CC CO CO. . v•••• w O3 >- c7-; z ('1 (1.) 0 0 N-• • = 0 a ,a) (0 (0 • • co 0><co c aa Delta Proj. No.: 2012.004.338 Derek Franklin, Tom Ferro Asbestos Inspector: Number of Samples Collected: 77 Number of Samples Analyzed: PLM - 74/TEM - 38 Work Order No.: Dates Sampling Performed: Date of Report: 12/21/12 AmeriSci Labs Client: Cornell University 0 0 0. a) 0. E 0, co (I) _o (I) z 0 z 0 z z 0 z 0 z z 0 z 0 z 0 z 0 z 0 z z 0 z 0) z 0) o_ z 0 z 0) z 0 z 0 z 0 z 0 z 0 z 0 z z 0 z 0 z z 0 z 0 z z 0 z 0 z 0 (/) 0 2 0 0 Grey Vibration Cloth, AHU #5 0. 10 co co L() 03 (0 (0 2012.004.338 - Black Tar Paper Wrap on Duct - AHU #5 2012.004.338 - Black Tar at Duct Seam - AHU #5 2012.004.338 - Black Tar at Duct Seams - AHU #5 2012.004.338 - Grey Duct Sealant - AHU #5 0. 00 Grey Duct Sealant - AHU #5 0 Chilled Water Supply Line 0 0) 00 CO 00 0 0 Chilled Water Supply Line Fitting Insulation 0 0) 0) Chilled Water Supply Line Fitting Insulation 0) co co 0-) -0 0 0 0 E (0 0 (0 o 0 N. (.0 r..) 0 co. . (,) >. 7, 7, 65 z 0 0 0 a cp co C o • • -o X ,•-• oo H w LL Delta Proj. No.: 2012.004.338 Derek Franklin, Tom Ferro Asbestos Inspector: Number of Samples Collected: 77 Number of Samples Analyzed: PLM - 74 Dates Sampling Performed: Date of Report: 12/21/12 AmeriSci Labs .> f2 a.) > 0) 0) 8 0 0 E 8 LL. 0. 0. E c c c u (1) .0 z 0 z 0 z z 0 z 0 z z 0 z 0 z z 0 z 0 z z 0 z 0 z z z 0 z z 0 z 0 z z 0 z 0 z z 0 z 0 z z 0 z 0 z z 0 z 0 z z 0 z 0 z 75 CO 2012.004.338 - 0 er Return Line Fitting Insulation 0 0 0) — 0 _ CO 2012.004.338 - Chilled Water Return Line Fitting Insulation cD CO 0 2012.004.338 - 0 a) 0 0 0) — 0 0 (5 — To ) 2012.004.338 - a_ CO CO `1" -- CO 2012.004.338 - CO 0 CO 2012.004.338 - CO 2012.004.338 - Roof Drain Fitting Insulation, Room 293 c CO 2O12.004.33O- Roof Drain Fitting Insulation, Room 293 75 — 0 CO 2012.004.338 - 0) Steam Line Fit a. CO 2012.004.338 - i75 H Steam Line Fitting Insulation 2012.004.338 - ND - No Asbestos Detected Misc - Miscellaneous Material ADELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS APPENDIX B Laboratory Analytical Results 15 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com AMER SCI Delta Engineers Attn: Stephen Prislupsky 860 Hooper Road EDdweU,NY 13760 AmeriSci New York 117EAST 3OTHST. NEW YORK, NY1UO1O TEL: (212) 679-8600 • FAX: (212) 679-3114 PLM Bulk AsbestosReport Date Received 12/13Y12 Date Examined 12/14/12 ELAP# 11480 Page 1 of 14 RE: 2012.004.338; Cornell University; ClarkHa|�2ndF/ Rooms � 293, 293A, 28, & 200CD ACM; Survey & Penthouse Mech. Room AmeriSci Job # 212122670 Client No. / HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 2012.004.338-01A 212122678-01 No NAD 1 Location: 2nd FI. White 1X1 Fissured Sphried Ceiling Tile -293 (by NYS ELAP 198.6) byMadeUECollins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: Grey, Hnnooganoouo, Fibrous, Buik Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 23 c/o 2012.084.338-01B 212122678-02 No NAD 1 Location: 2nd Fl. White 1}(1'Fissured SdinadCeiling Tile- 287 (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Madell E, Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: Grey, Homogonoouo, Fibmuu, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Materlal: Non-fibrous 20.7 % .2012I04.338 -02A 212122678-03 2 Location: 2nd Fl. Tan Mastic On Door Frame 293 Analyst Description: Tan, Homogeneous, NonFibmuo.Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 28.1 % No NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) byMade|ECollins on 12/14/12 2012.004.338-02B 212122678-04 2 Location: 2nd Fl. Tan Mastic On Door Frame 293 Analyst Descrlption: Tan, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, BuIk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 29.5 °/0 No NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 2012.004.338'03A 212122678-05 3 Location: 2nd Fl. White Sheetrock From Column 293 Analyst Description: Grey/Tan, Heterogeneous, Fibrous,Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Cellulose 10 %, Fibrous glass Trace, Non-fibrous 90 % No NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 See Reporting notes on Iast page AmeriSci Job #: 212122678 Client Name: Delta Engineers PLM Bulk Asbestos Report 2012.004.338; Cornell University; Clark Hall- 2nd Fl. Rooms 293, 293A. 28, & 200CD ACM; Survey & Penthouse Mech. Room Page 2 of 14 Client No. I HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 2012.004.338-03B 212122678-06 No NAD 3 Location: 2nd FI. White Shee(rock From Column 293 (by NYS ELAP1g8.1) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: Grey/Tan, Heterogeneous, Fibrous, BuIk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Cellulose 10 %, Fibrous glass Trace, Non-fibrous 90 % 2012.004.338-04A 212122678-07 No NAD 4 Location: 2nd FI. White Joint Compound From Column 293 (by NYS ELAP 198.1) byMadaUE.Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Descrlption: White, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, BuIk Matenal Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 100 % 2012.004.338-048 212122678-08 No 4 Location: 2nd Fl. White Joint Compound From Column 293 Anal Description: White, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, BuIk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 100 % NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 2012.004.338-05A 212122678-09 5 Location: 2nd Fl. Dark Brown Cove Base Mastic 293 Analyst Descriptlon: Dark Brown, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, BuIk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 37.5 % No NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) byMadmUE.Collins on 12/14/12 2012.004.338-05B 212122878-10 No NAD 5 Location: 2nd FJ. Dark Brown Cove Base Mastic 287 (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: Dark Brown, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, BuIk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 39.7 % 2012.004.338-06A 212122678-11 No NAD 6 Location: 2nd Fl. Lt. Brown Cove Base Mastic 287 (by NYS ELAP 198.6) byMaduUE.Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: Tan, Homogeneous, Non-ribnms.Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 3.4 % See Reportng notes on Iast page AmeriSci Job #: 212122678 Client Name: Delta Engineers PLM Bulk Asbestos Report 2012.004.338' Cornell University; Clark Hall- 2nd Fl. Rooms 293, 293A, 28, & 200CD ACM; Survey & Penthouse Mech. Room Page 3 of 14 Client No. /HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 2012l04.338 -06B 212122678-12 No NAD 6 Location: 2nd Fl. Lt. Brown Cove Base Mastic 28O (by NYS ELAP19V.0) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: Tan, Homoeneous, Non -Fibrous, BuIk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 8.1"/0 2012.004.338-07A 212122678-18 No NAD 7 Location: 2nd FI. YeIIow Carpet Mastic 289 (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: Tan, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, BuIk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 27 % 2012.004.338-07B 212122678-14 No NAD 7 Location: 2nd FI. YeIIow CarpetMastic 289 (by NYS ELAP 198.6) byMudaUE.Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: Tan, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 12.0% 3012.004.338-00A 212122670-15 No NAD 8 Location: Tan Cove Base Mastic 200CD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Descriptlon: YelIow, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 30.1 % 2012.004338-08B 212122078-16 No NAD 8 Location: Tan Cove Base Mastic 200CD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: YeIlow,Homogeneous, Non-Fibrou.8ulhMateha| Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 17.1 °/0 3012.004.338-08A 212122670-17 No NAD 9 Location: 2nd FI. Tar Paper Wrap Over Pipe Insulation 293 (by NYS ELAP198.0) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: BlackHomogeneous, Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Materlal: Fibrous glass 2 %, Non-fibrous 2 % See Reporting notes on Iast page AmeriSci Job #: 212122678 Client Name: Delta Engineer PLM Bulk Asbestos Report 2012.004.330; Cornell University; ClarkHeU-2nd F| Rooms. 293, 293A, 28, & 200CD ACM; Survey & Penthouse Mech. Room Page 4 of 14 Client No. / HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 2013.004.330-09B 312122678-18 No NAD S Location: 2nd FI. Tar Paper Wrap Over Pipe lnsulation 293 (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Modell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: Black, Hnmogonooua, Fihmvo, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Fibrous glass 2 %, Non-fibrous 0.8 % 2012.004.338-104 212122678-19 Yes 4.496 10 Location: 2nd Fl. White m8Black Gteoko8^XV^Floor Tile 283 (by NYS ELAP 198.6) byMadoUE.Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: GreyHomogeneous, Non-FibrousBulk Materia Asbestos Types: Chrysotile 4.4 % Other Materlal: Non-fibrous 39.5 % 2012.004.338-10B 212122678-20 10 Location: 2nd FI. White W/ Black Strecks 9"X9" Floor Tile 293 Analyst Description: Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: NA/PS 2012.004.338-11A 212122678-21 No NAD 11 Location: 2nd Fl. Yellow/ Brown Mastic From White mVBlack Streaks 8"X9^FT29D (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Descripton: Tan, Homo9eneous, Non -Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 27.6 % 2012.004338'11B 312122678-32 No NAD 11 Location: 2nd Fl. Yellow/ Brown Mastic From White mVBlack Streaks S7(9^FT295 (by NYS ELAP19V.0) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Descrlptlon: Tan, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 31.1 °A, 2012.004.338-12A 212122678-23 No NAD 12 LocaUon: 2nd FI. Tan W/White Streaks 9"X9^Floor Tile 293 (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Descripflon: Grey, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Bulk Matenal Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 32.3 % See Reporting notes on last page AmeriSci Job #: 212122678 Client Name: Delta Engineers PLM Bulk ��*� ��^������� - -- '' -----'- Asbestos Report ~ 3012.004.338; Cornell University; Clark Hg)/ -2nd F|. Rooms 293, 293A, 28, & 200CD ACM; Survey & Penthouse Mech. Room Page 5 of 14 Client No. / HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total °A Asbestos 2012.004.838-12B 212122678-24 No NAD 12 Location: 2nd Fl. Tan W/ White Streaks �X9" Floor Tile 293 (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: Grey, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, BuIk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 30.3 % 2012.004.338-13A 212122670-25 No NAD 13 Location: 2nd Fl. Brown Mastic From Tan mVWhite Streaks 9"X9^FT283 (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Descriptlon: Brown, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, BuIk Matenal Asbestos Types: Other Materlal: Non-fibrous 43 % 2012.004.388-18B 212122678-26 No NAD 13 Location: 2nd FI. Brown Mastic From Tan W/ White Streaks 9"X9 FT 289 (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: Brown, Homogeneous, Non-FibrousBulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 48.2Y6 2012.004.338-14A 212122678-27 No NAD 14 Location: 2nd Fl. Grey WVBlack Specks 12"X12~Floor Tile 2OOCD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: Grey, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, BuIk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 16.8 Y6 2012.004.338-14B 212122078-28 No NAD 14 Location: 2nd Fl. Grey m8Black Specks 12"X12^Floor Tile 2O0CD (by NYS ELAP190.}) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: Grey, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Buk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-flbrous 15.6 % 2012.004.338-15A 212122678-29 No NAD 15 Location: 2nd Fl. Grey Mastic From Grey w0Black Specks 127U2^FT2VVCD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: GreyHomogeneous, Nun-`brnuo.Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Matenal: Non-fibrous 4.6 % See Reportng notes on Iastpage AmeriSci Job #: 212123678 Client Name: Delta Engineers PLM Bulk Asbestos Report 2012.004.338; Cornell University; Clark Hall- 2nd Fl. Rooms 293, 293A. 28, & 200CD ACM; Survey & Penthouse Mech. Room Page 6 of 14 Client No. / HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 2012.004.388-15B 212122678-30 No NAD 15 Location: 2nd Fl. Grey Mastic From Grey VV/Black Specks 127(12^FT2OOCD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: GreyHomogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Bulk MateraI Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 5.7 % 2012.004.338-16A 212122678-31 No NAD 16 Location: 2nd FI. Black Mstic "Old Ur,der Grey FT & Grey Mastic 200CD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: Black, Homogoneoun, Non-Fibmuo, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Nonfibrous 8.3 % 2012.004.338-16B 212122678'32 No NAD 16 Location: 2nd FI. Black Mstic OId Under Grey FT & Grey Mastic 200CD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) byMado||E.Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: Black, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, BuIk Material Asbestos Types: Other MateraI: Non-fibrous 9.1 % 2012.004.330-17A 212122678-33 No NAD 17 Location: 2nd FI. Grey Floor Leveer 293 (by NYS ELAP 198.1) byMadoU E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: GreyHomogeneous, NonFibmvo.Cemantitinuo.Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 100 % 2012.004.338-17B 212122678-34 No NAD 17 Location: 2nd Fl. Grey Floor Leveler 298 (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Doseription: Grey,Homogeneous, Nun-Fibmus.ComendUouo.Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 100 % 2012.004.338-18A 212122678-35 No NAD 18 Location: 2nd Fi. Green Sheet VinylFlooring 293 (by NYS ELAP198.8) by Madeli E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: Light Green, Hetemgunaouo, Fibmuo, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 2.8 % See Reporting notes on Iast page AmeriSci Job #: 212122678 Client Name: Delta Engineers PLM Bulk Asbestos Report 2012.004.338; Cornell University; Clark Hall- 2nd F|. Rooms 293, 293A, 28, & 200CD ACM; Survey & Penthouse Mech. Room Page 7 of 14 Client No. / HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 2012.004.330-18B 212122878-36 No NAD 18 Location: 2nd FI. Green Sheet Vinyl Flooring 293A (by NYS ELAP 198.6) byMade||E.Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: Light Green, Heterogeneous, FibrousBulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 4 % 2012.004.838-19A 212122678-87 No NAD 19 Location: 2nd Fl. Brown/ Yellow Mastic From Green Sheet & Vinyl Flooring 293 (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: Grey/Tan, Homogeneous, Nori-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Materlal: Non-fibrous 26.9 % 2012.004.338-19B 212122678-38 No NAD 19 Location: 2nd Fl. Brown/ Yellow Mastic From Green Sheet & Vinyl Flooring 293A (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: Gmyffan, Hetemgenoouo, Non -Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 25 % 2012.004.330-20A 212122678-39 No NAD 20 Location: 2nd FI. Blue Sheet & Vinyl Flooring 293 (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Descilption: Grey/Blue, Heterogeneous, Fibrous,Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 3.8 % 2012.004.338-208 212122078-40 No NAD 20 Location: 2nd FI. Blue Sheet& Vinyl Flooring 293A (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Descrlptlon: Grey/BIue, Heterogeneous, Fibrous, BuIk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 4.3,A 2012.004.338'21A 212122678-41 No NAD 21 Location: 2nd Fl. Brown/ Yellow Mastic From Blue Vinyl Flooring 293 (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: YeIlow, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: See Reporting notes on last page AmeriSci Job #: 21212267 Client Name: Delta Engineers PLM Bulk Asbestos Report 2012.004.338; Cornell University; Clark Hall- 2nd Fl. Rooms 293, 293A, 28, & 200CD ACM; Survey & Penthouse Mech. Room Page 8 of 14 Client No. / HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 2012.004.338-21B 212122678'42 No NAD 21 Location: 2nd FI. Brown/Yellow Mastic From BIue Vinyl Flooring 293A (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: YeIIow, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 21.8 % 2012.004.338-22A 212122678-43 No NAD 22 Location: 2nd Fl. White Top Coat Plaster (moU)2V3 (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by MadeI E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: White, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, BuIk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 100 % 2012.004.338-22B 213122078-44 No NAD 22 Location: 2nd FI. White Top CoatPlaster (Cdumn)o93 (by NYS ELAP 198.1) byMadeUE.Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: White, Homogeneous, Non-Fibmuo.Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-flbrous 100 % 2012.004.338-22C 212122678-45 22 Location: 2nd Fl. White Top Coat Plaster (Wall) 293 AnDescription: White, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, BuIk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 100 % No NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 2012.004.338-22[] 212122678-46 No NAD 22 Location: 2nd Fi. White Top Coat Plaster (Column)293 (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Descrlption: White, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, BuIk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 100 % 2012.004.338-22E 212122678-47 No NAD 22 Location: 2nd FI. White Top Coat Plaster(WalI) 293 (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: White, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 100 % See Reporting notes on last page AmeriSci Job #: 212133678 Client Name: Delta Engineers PLM Bulk Asbestos Report 2012.004.338; Cornell University; Clark Hall- 2nd Fl. Rooms 293, 293A, 28, & 200CD ACM; Survey & Penthouse Mech. Room Page 9 of 14 Client No. / HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total (Y0 Asbestos 2012.004.338-23A 212122678-48 No NAD 23 Location: 2nd FI. Grey Base CoatPlaster 0woU>233 (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: GreyHomogeneous, Non -Fibrous, CementitiousBulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-brous 100 % 2012.004.338-23B 212122678-49 No NAD 23 Location: 2nd FI. Grey Base CoatPlaster (Co|unnn)2V3 (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: GreyHomogeneous. Non -Fibrous, Cementitious, BuIk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 1OOY6 2012.004.338-23C 212122678-50 No NAD 23 Location: 2nd Fl. Grey Base Coat Plaster (maU)293 (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: Grey, Homogeneous, Non-fibrous,CemendUnun.Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrou100 % 2012.004.338-23O 212122678-51 No NAD 23 Location: 2nd FI. Grey Base Coat Plaster(Column) 293 (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: Grey, Homogenaouu, Non'Fibmuo, Cemonddouo, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 100 % 2012.004.388-23E 212122678-52 No NAD 23 Location: 2nd FI. Grey Base CoatPlaster (NoU)293 (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: Grey, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Cementitious, BuIk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 100 % 3012.004.338-24A 212132678-53 No NAD 24 Location: P White Cloth Outer Covering On Duct Work AH#5 (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by&4mdoUE.Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Descnption: WhitefTan, Homogeneous, Fibrous, BuIk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Cellulose 100 % See Reporting notes on !ast page AmeriSci Job #: 212122678 Client Name: Delta Engineers PLM Bulk �&*��� ��m������ - --'-' ----''- Asbestos Report - 2012.004.338; Cornell University; Clark Hall- 2nd FI. Rooms 293, 293A, 28, & 200CD ACM; Survey & Penthouse Mech. Room Page 10 of 14 Client No. / HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total (3/0 Asbestos 2012.004.338-24B 212122678-54 No NAD 24 Location: P White Cloth Outer Covering On Duct Work AH#6 (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: White/Tan, Homogeneous, Fibrous, BuIk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Cellulose 100 % 2012.004.338-25A 212122678-55 No NAD 25 Location: P Grey Vibration Cloth AH#5 Analyst Description: BlackHomogeneous, FibrousBulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Fibrous glass 5 %, Non-fibrous 32 °/0 (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 2013.004.338-25B 212122678-50 25 Location: P Grey Vibration Cloth AH#6 Analyst Descrption: Black, Homogeneous, Fibrous, BuIk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Fibrous glass 5 %, Non-fibrous 49.8 % No NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) hyMadoUECollins on 12/14/12 2012.004.388-26A 212122678-57 26 Location: P Black Tar Paper Wrap On Duct AH #5 Analyst Description: BlackHomogeneous, Fibrous, BuIk Material Asbestos Types: Chrysotile 2.396 Other Material: Fibrous glass 5 %, Non-fibrous 16 % Yes 2.596 (by NYS ELAP 198.6) byMadoUE.Collins on 12/14/12 2012.004.338-26B 212122678-58 26 Location: P Black Tar Paper Wrap On Duct AN #5 Analyst Description: Butk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: 2012.004.338-27A 212122678-59 Yes 6.9 % 27 Location: P Black Tar Duct SeamAH #5 (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: Black, Homogeneous, Fibrous, BuIk Material Asbestos Types: Chrysotile 6.9 % Other Material: Non-fibrous 30.1.& See Reporting notes on last page AmeriSci Job #: 212122678 Client Name: Delta Engineer PLM Bulk Asbestos Report 2012.004.338; Cornell University; {�kyd«Ha|�2nd Fl. Rooms .. 293, 293A, 28, & 200CD ACM; Survey & Penthouse Mech. Room Page 11 of 14 Client No. / HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 2012.004.338-27B 212132078-60 27 Location: PBlack Tar @ Duct Seams AH#0 Analyst Description: BuIk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: 2012.004.338-28A 212122678~61 No NAD 28 Location: P Dark Grey Duct SealantAH #5 (by NYS ELAP19O/}) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: Grey, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, BuIk Matenal Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 1.4 % 2012.004.338'28B 212122078-62 No NAD 28 Location: P Dark Grey Duct Sealant AH #6 (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: GreyHomogeneous, Non -Fibrous, BuIk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 1.9 % 2012.004.338-29A 212122678-63 No NAD 29 Location: P White Fitting Insulation Chilled WaterSupply (by NYS ELAP180.1) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: Grey, Homogeneous, Fibrous, BvIk Material Asbestos Types: Other Materil: Fibrouglass 20 %, Non-fibrous 80 % 2012.004J38 -29B 212122678-64 No NAD 29 Location: PWhite Fitting Insulation Chilled Water Supply (by NYS ELAP1S0.1) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: Grey, Homogeneous, Fibrous, BuIk Material Asbestos Types: Other Matenal: Fibrous glass 20 %, Non-fibrous O0°/0 2012.004.838-39C 212122878-65 No NAD 29 Location: P White Fitting Insulation Chilled Water Supply (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: GreyHomogeneous, Fibrous, BuIk Material Asbestos Types: Other Materlal: Fibrous glass 20 %, Non-fibrous 80 % See Reporting notes on astpage AmeriSci Job #: 212122678 Ckent Name: Delta Engineers PLM Bulk Asbestos Report 2012.004.338; Cornell University; Clark Hall- 2nd Fl. Rooms 293, 293A, 28, & 200CD ACM; Survey & Penthouse Mech. Room Page 12 of 14 Client No. / HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 2012'004.338-30A 212122678-66 No NAD 30 Location: P White Fitting Insulation ChiIIed Water Retum (by NYS ELAP 198.1) byModeUE.Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Descripflon: Grey, Homogeneous, Fibrous,Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Fibrous glass 20 %, Non-fibrous 80 % 2012.004.338-30B 212122678-07 No NAD 30 Location: P White Fitting Insulation Chilled Water Return (by NYS ELAP 198.1) byModoUE.Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Descriptlon: Grey,Homogeneous, Fibrous, BuIk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Fibrous glass 20 %, Non-fibrous 80 % 2012.004.838-30C 212122078-68 No NAD 30 Location: P White Fitting Irisulation Chilled Water Retum (by NYS ELAP 198.1) byMadel|E.Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: GreyHomogeneous, Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Fibrous glass 20 %, Non-fibrous 80 °/0 2012.004.388-31A 212122678-09 No NAD 31 Location: P White Patch Material On Insulation ChiIIed Water Supply (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: GreyHomogeneous, Fibrous, BuIk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Fibrous glass 20 %, Non-fibrous 80 % 2012.004.338-31B 212122678-70 No NAD 31 Location: P White Patch Material On Insulation Chilled Water Supply (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: Grey, Homogeneous, Fibrous, BuIk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Fibrous glass 20 %, Non-fibrous 80 % 2012.004.338-31C 212122678-71 No NAD 31 Location: P White Patch Material On Insulatiori Chilled Water Retum (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: Grey, Homogeneous, Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Fibrous glass 2VY6.Non-fibrous OoY6 See Reporting notes on last page AmeriSci Job #: 212122678 Client Name: Delta Engineers PLM Bulk Asbestos Report 2012.004.338; Cornell University; Clark Hall- 2nd FI. Rooms 293, 293A, 28, & 200CD ACM; Survey & Penthouse Mech. Room Page 13 of 14 Client No. / HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 2013.004.338-32A 213122678-72 No NAD 32 Location: 2nd Fl. White Roof Dram Fitting Insulatiori 293 (by NYS ELAP 198.1) byModo|E.Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Descriptlon: Grey, Homogeneous, Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other MateraI: Fibrous glass 20 %, Non-fibrous 80 % 2012.004.338-32B 212122678-73 No NAD 32 Location: 2nd FI. White Roof Dram Fitting Insulation 293 (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: Grey, Homogeneous, Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Fibrous glass 20%, Non-fibrous 80 °A 2012.004.338-32C 212122078-74 No NAD 32 Location: 2nd FI. White Roof Dram Fitting Insulation 293 (by NYS ELAP 198.1) byMadoUE.Collins on 12/14/12 Analyst Description: Grey, Humogonaoua, Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Fibrous glass 20 %, Non-fibrous 80Y6 2012.004.338-38A 212122678-75 33 Location: P White Fitting Insulation Steam Line Anal t Description: GreyHomogeneous, Fibrous, BuIk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Fibrous glass 20 %, Non-fibrous 0O% No NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.1) byMadeUECollins on 12/14/12 2012.004.330-33B 212122678-76 33 Location: P White Fitting Insulation Steam Line Analyst Description: Grey, Homogeneous, FibrousBulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Fibrous glass 20 °A, Non-fibrous 80 °A No NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 2012.004338-33C 212122678-77 33 Location: PYYhdeFitting/nou/o0onSteomL/no Anal Description: Grey, Homogeneous, Fibrous, Bulk Matenal Asbestos Types: Other Material: Fibrous glass 20 %, Non-fibrous 80 °A No NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by Madell E. Collins on 12/14/12 See Reporting notes onlast page AmeriSci Job #: 212122678 Client Name: Delta Engineers PLM Bulk Asbestos Report 2012.004.338; Comell University; Clark Hall- 2nd FI. Rooms 293, 293A, 28, & 20OCD ACM; Survey & Penthouse Mech. Room Page 14 of 14 Reporting Notes: ( d Analyzed by: MadelI E. Collins /`1 `NAD/NSD =no asbestos detected; NA =not analyzed; NAPS=not analyzed/positive stop; PLM Bulk Asbestos Analysts by EPA 600/M4-82-020 per 40 CFR 763 (NVLAP Lab Code 200546-0), ELAP PLM Method 198.1 for NY friable samples, which includes the identification and quantitation of vermiculite or 198.6 for NOB samples (NY ELAP Lab ID11480); Note:PLM is not consistently reliable in detecting asbestos in floor coverings and similar non -friable organically bound materials. NAD or Trace results by PLM are inconclusive, TEM is currently the only method that can be used to determine if this material can be considered or treated as non asbestos -containing in NY State (also see EPA Advisory for floor tile, FR 59,146,38970,8/1/94) National Institute of Standards and Technology Accreditation requirements mandate that this report must not be reproduced except in full without the approval of the Iab.This PLM report relates ONLY to the items tested. AIHA Lab # 102843, RI Cert#AAL-094, CT Cert#PH-0186, Mass Cert#AA000054. Reviewed By: END OF REPORT AmeriSci Job #: 212122678 ›, e 0 2 z ° 0 0 0 u, w a < < a a < a < z z z z a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 < < < a a < a z z z z z z z z .0 : E o o ›. CC .0 eltZ -C 0 0) o oe0000000000000000 a)I < < a < < a < < < a a < a < a < II z 0 _1 z z z z z z z z z zzzzzz a) 0 _c c a) 06 >, a) 4 t- 6:," u) < . 2 . . , — 0 0 , .=:, — . e w aai oi 1 1 1 1 N: oi cei ce, rs.: csi 6 c(-) N N C‘I N o c C o z — (7) ra co c c\I co 0 u _ co ,,,, (.0 t•-• 10 M. c‘i co c \i o I I 6 'I' . Cr 00, cn ri c6 r-- ,-- 1--. OC' ". -0 'E m 0 0 = cc ,- c‘r c\I al 11) c6 < (7) Ep CO CO CN N x— 0 CO N 1:2 w 0 0 0 c co .c2 CN < E o co E >0 •E c -o •--. c0 r cl N I,- 0 - 0 ri oi cg5lT05 l r 0c =F,,iG c 0 --. N = u) 0 CU as E' E i-.-- 2 ,......_. ..- E 0 I-- CVO- 0V.- Vr-co cc0) CVFiN- (- A- (NcO8 E <4 0) - I 0) () .- l• a) 0 Csi 0 " ci 6 co co O ci ci 6 <6 6 O ci rb d> co cm .:, i= 1= ('4 N C C 0 C7) CO E E co r-- = CO 01 3 0 CD CO Q.) C .> 713 CU CO N EN a N CN t•-• 0) CC) C CO 0 0 0) C C CS 0 .0 0 CO Z..' N N 0 0 0 c c cri co ti 'z-cri E 0 T:r 2 o ‘._ 2 2 0 -6. E 0 u 1.1.. u. a> 0 2 2 to co co E s... m u. E E -o 0-csl 0 2 0 a> o co m tri cil w o c c .0 0 0 27 0- 2 E c c o. co as To" o (..) E o CO ED < -d 03 -,4 E c4-' g ,Is i,) m F, cs, 0 65 . „.... . c, c, ,,, 0 mu > > 1- ..... c, 0);.— ,-, oc,'5 8 «s 00 Q0 8 09 8 9 (-) 009 (-) us c., u.> 40-) C'") W 0 0 0 a 0 : 0)`') :5 cl c'? a us c 0 0 4 0) c c 0 ? `n 0) -., c,) 4,) 0) (1) = .1: 2 -a: cf) 4 (t 5 .4- ...9 ,r 2 -4- 2 3 3 0 0 o ,- tr --s 0 .. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0„as ors, ,:as m2 0 I3si asq p 00)00) 00)00)0 0oa tNi N (‚40)('4(('40) 0 cv LL U LL LL. LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LI- L.L. 0 C C c a a c 2 D '2 0' 32 '2 '2 CC' (0 CY CV 04 NI N N N CV N 04 N N N 04 1-- E E E E E E E E E. E a.. E E E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 U3 7.3 4.-% ass (Is ro ro 73 * tm 47. (0 0 c 0. t 0 ''' CO 0 12 CI 2012.004.338-08B ocation: Tan Cove Base Mastic 200CD See Reporting notes on last page CO ON kl•••• e 0 to CV o 2 0 0 a < 000000000000 7jui<<Z Z <<<<<<<<<<<< CD co a- Z z Z z z z z z z Z Z Z Z Z 0) .0 CU sr AmeriSci Job #: 212122678 Client Name: Delta Engineers E o o ›. CC .o ...0 in (I)0 (1) C.)0 0 CD CD ci 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 cu 0 2 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < z z z z z z z z z z z z .o 0. cu Cl) = : o 4C - a.) Q. od >s CD = 0) v) 0, Q°. in 0CD •c•-• 0, CO 0 Ci 01 cD P r".: c"). a) a -6 V cl .4- CV 0 to r-: Tc.i 6 c,-; co cc; .,... t ,- ri CV co co 4 4- 0 c c o CA 0 •— c"\> Z — IA To 06 c (NI CD iU1n5) (0 —cc.6) Ea Q. o a> P. o o N -I R•,- N. Lt) o> . 0) 0w 0 0 (0 N: N- o N - N- ' CV 0 <00) co co C'( ('1 o o , co co 4 (; o 4 72 W0) u) 8 C\I c CU -a — (CI)vs o ...Ne o (2 CD zig 0, ) co 0 a) o3 ri:1-,:, ....k. .9 cD r- Lo. ocl v- C‘i C‘I " l'..: r- 01 co. 0 C5 ‘C). CV to 0. cu +2) cc> a) (0 CO N CV C71 ci. le_ to.' t7 4. Co '4. 'f:;> 2 csi co 6 4 co 4 ai .- as ,-.. 4 N- cci co o Lo o to 46 2 ... ... = ..,„ c., 0 0 x )<0 0) 0 0 C 1 b) b> co 04 0 0 ni c75 o o co cp E 1 .c _ cu ,t 0 LI LL 0 0 6 0 CV 'to o .0 ks 2 . 15) E (0 N a- ,._ ''') 10 CC> 0 2 cv .•-• N - co iii .- w Lc) 2 c7i CV r- E ... -t-7, = 0 E 6 11° c‘i " csi 2 7) coM CV ... N CV cv cslc,7 c°7- c,4((Cl CNIC;- c,48 t e, c • i ,... 2 6. CO N c0 0 .6 09 6 0.,m (ct> 6 co 6 0 6 0 6 >• Ci) (.‘(3 2 d 6 0, CC N 0 N 6 m 6 t 03 o o Fa ca CV N 0 P. i-7.7 :./2 -- o o 22 0 12 0 8 8 c.4s 0 u• o o 8 0 _ ro = U. u.. -E :6 o u. U. CD 0 a) 0) c 0 '6) 0 fs) '-- ‘-- (NI e- 1-- r') ,-.`r „sr.:& ‘-'1. ,n• ,.— 92 ...- 22 E o u_ (° >, co >., ...- „) ,- x ?.< X Co --- = o> E E X X CD Q. i-75) ET) 2 2 Co 4) c Y. co co I.L. u.. co co w E o 0-o -0 .0 p _se /- _se • c c w 0 OS E.E E 8 a 0 ca. 0 0 D D o > 2 (c) ca u> k3 ra 2 E co ..- 0 x 0 2 u> (7) u. 4 u. u.. p 7 0 2 2 66 a) o. o .x Cr) OS I a) .a) -.= o t cu mi>6 2 .0 o p CO ' co Ts. 09 ‘.. , c° o o c *7 co 4t: E mc." co rn -... m co co ..,.7,- :c -c Fa co CO — c" g? -3 ,,,:c' —• 0 us 4 ca. 4 'i 2 .§. o'cl: ..-- 2 2 2 0 2 0 -§ c _v co _y "E' 8, co 0 .§. --§ >+ N.i .0- - CV Z N 1..eE N -0-.)T; CV 43 C c 2 2 ,Ni 2 •,- (7) .6 co (0 ‘-- CD I- CV . H 0 ,- . 04 . c , ICS' >-• c \H >: I- 0 i - RS 03 0 o 0 CV CV c'sI u_ u_ u.. u.. LL Li_ u.. u. LL u_ a. u_ ti.. -a -o -c) Is 0"0 V -0 V V 0 c c C c C c c Cc c C C c N CV CV CV CV NI CV CV CV CV CV NI CV Chr k E 2 2 2 2 2 E E E 2 E 2 2 o o o o o o to o 0 to o o o 0 3:a to to a to to :a la :a T) u ta c02 3 u 3 cv 3 g g co g a, g g (0 <0) LL See Reporting notes on last page (.0 0 0- AmeriSci Job #: 212122678 Client Name: Delta Engineers >, 4 e VI < 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 201 U12 Z< z < < < < < < < < < < < < < CD l' Z Z Z z z z z z Z Z Z z Z Z .0 •2 : E o o ›, CC .0 ez 0 _C 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 < a < < < a < < < < a < a a Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z J2 p. a) 0 c 11 ots u) ..... ..=• I) 1°, '' ("<:' .0 0 2 g ct a .0 c : co. 0 a) o 33. "2 t i CV ca ui co 4 cNi W 0 us . El N N c) CV I C. C C 0 .... Z — (A C \ I >1 e4 TO C6 C N V) 03 0 Cn 0) ..n 0 c•I :2:) '2 I c\! co N to ,-, ci <6 0•,.- ", r- ci co i i I 1 i 1 t i a 11) 6 o 0 = c 0 I CV CV C71 Cl CV N CV .0 WC) Cr) 0 c o ,AC 0 CO ri> , ra .:E .E 0 ,- Cr'. VI 'C' <C.) " (0 °3. Cr) 1 1 1t 14CV 4 a) 4 co al ui 0)r-: t 1 i t i e) 1 2 x = r6 0 0 0 E) N. I,- 7., CV L0 CV LO 1,- t0 L0 CN) 0) I (000 - .0 0 0 CU 16 o o < E' c7_ ci. co co co a) -g" t—c;.C4 N. co `F'CO1ir N.8'6 2 1 , : co 1 i I cf, ci 6 0 ci °5 O O ci 8 d 8 8 iti ET2 4= ...., _c .c a) a) , -5' 5, cq co co LO LO C C 0) 0) C C 5 5 co a) cv co a) c\ 4 "E" co a) E) CO co a) a) -E 7 N CV E c7CV - ci .-- 11- D 02 r- r-- co co cr) 5 (Dooc4 = NI 0, N Nc:7) CV‘.- E o.1 E (NI 5 6' cscsi To (v o ccc ‘ I Ta c c C.) C.) fE E 2 2 .c c 2 c co < c3 2 co uu0 8 uLL ) a) 0tCV .p p p ,T) toJ) 0 0)5 tur) 0) 0 o> o> . om0m o <- -°-o ,<a- 65 w a) 2 o 5 2 csi -• '8 C*4 ''''' E 1„,1 TO cz,9 Tio -I -J a) oi :5 g oo co ta 0 8 8 c68 (5 6 (3 c., c, c0 (..) cr) Ti. a) ce) E cc, vi. o c.i E) u) .4) t ro LT_ '2 '5 o o LL 8 E >. cri, 6 ico i ITD ,-, co Z5 E 2 t 8 y3 -5 7) co 0 g. mc"") 0_ 8. vl g. (..) a., g02 A) , ,..,i. . . e—. . ,> 0, , ,- : , —cc: -8 1-- 8 1-- 0 01 {3 Frs E i co , c'• csi ..E. = " 2 co E) a ,sc,i 1 a c..4 2 csi 02 0 d) w 0 a) 0 co >, C4 CV . CV . . CV . CV . . . CV . CV C \ I u_ u_ u - LL LL LI- LI- LI. LL LL LL LL LL LL. U. LL 17 17 '0 '0 '0 17 17 13 '0 17 '0 '0 '0 '0 10 -a c c c c a c c c c c cc C C C C C4 CV CV N CV CV CV CI CV CV CVN CV CV CV CV EEEEEEEE g. tE o o o o o o o o 0 oEg c4o _oE,. c4o oE0-J' oE 0 * = -'i'7:o0.c= L, ukot0) ‚0 0)E0'-0oaca- co o .-o 0 V) (c) -I Cil E 3 3 rting notes on last page 0) CO >4 '45 $ 01 "Cr 0 2 I% Ili cr) .0 cu 4 LL 4, AmeriSci Job #: 212122678 Name: Delta Engineers < 0 0 < < < 0 0 < < Z z < < Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z 0 ez (3.900000000 a) I77 2 << < •=c < a a z zZ 2 2 Z Z .0 a. o a) _c CL 05 >, 0 m (r) ..., ...- 0 .42 to . TO g P oc C .Eo .0 C o c ui N Z >1 °6 Tri CO- C CN/ < `t. -ak' 03 0 u 0 C) —o 0 = fa 1 i 1 • • ,CD CI cr)c\i- < o En 0 °) c MI .13 N < E 0 ..Y 0 3 rx 0 e 03 1.1 .5 :U F 2 15 1 2 N' Cr) 0 0 T0 E' E.E• o. cp c 1 = 5 E der, 12 Cf) cii -5.12 .:•,' c*) cn 0) 'al ('4 -E E to E x (NI -6 CV = 0 c a) 'i-). w co C.) a. 0 Co Ta' Cl ., B. 0 ''' C 0 (..) co (..) ce) E a) com a) 4 ea u) 0 U) a) •a: (ca e 0 co o a) c, ... Ni .0 >. N. . cN1 LI )7_ -0 -0 c C N CV !aster (Wall) 293 a 0. E 0 2012.004.338 - at Plaster (Wall) 293 ti Chrysotile 2.3 03 (6 (1) a) (1) a. z.-- o_ 0 0 0 0 (/) < < a a z z z z z L-• z .c c) o co 0ca) (.6 cv c`I cr) cg r-: t() ZE) co Lc) a> aci co Lo o> (0 o to to r-- La) t.-- 1 in L sa- ,- c) r c..) r ,-. N- L()(7! lt o 6 d 6 O ci o a 2 < o )r) Lo t) It 4t NI' z 47 >0 to co i co i r- C,I 0 CV 0CV CV N < CV < C "a" 15 ;0 0 0o a = 0) c 0 0 < C V lt co c c co 0 0 E < << 03 < a a. an 0.< cu ,:r 0 nr c;1 0 N -C cv U) .0 Fj E (x) 5° u) a) co ,- ch 0 ob 2 cO cocl' §- r) r) 0 en -5 el 0 CO L., CO 7 4 o 4 g 0) a 4 ca. "I ciai .c) 0 O1 CO 7 COCO a) CS 0 0 0 2 • 7,2 F, o F 0 Cs) .0 C‘i S.— CV 2 c.i 0 NI 0 cs, 5 E:: 5 C; 1- G 1-- ›, 04 >..>C CV -16 CV -Yu Ca R3 03 0 0 Op co 5 Q . a. a a a a E c E. E E E E E o 0 o o o o o 0 o :c ..rm ..= :c = ..o :o 0 8 g 3 t3ra co to r- cra co a> CV CV 2012.004.338-27B P Lo 0) 2012.004.338-29B P White Fitting Insulation Chilled Water Supply (0 >, .0 95 0 ra LUZ • Z Z Z Z Z • Z Z Z Z Z Z 0 WI - 0) .0 cz .2 CL : AmeriSci Job #: 212122678 Client Name: Delta Engineers E 0 o >, .o CC Client Sample# o o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 < < < < < < < < < < < < Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z 1 >. E E E o_ a = n m = a) a) a) (1") CC it C4 iii a) 4-.) ) a .. . 0 CJ r-) .-,,m 2 •,. ,( 0 2 cr) cii a) 4) '8 18 1:3 v :2 2 5...----_ .c 0 0 0 0 0fic c 0:00: ' co o o .r7oo cv 1-7; tli o ? ob C= -, . = CI ) v, co w co c _ c c el c Nr o 0)o C) ocr, 0 a c) v _.,__= c c co c :i.--, 1.-1 csi as) P ,... Li_ L.L. LL .;:-; u. 0 ,N .0 a) g r•1 ' .c a ..c lc a.. 0... Q a. CD CD E 0 0 0 a c 0 1 1 1 2012.004.338-31B tion: P White Patch Material On Insulation Chilled Water Supply E o Ia) CC 1 t) i 1 1 ra c•-) co 8 0, N 0 C 0 ▪ CO cn to ".-z• CO 7 Ca a) E u) c c as • -- :-, c it u_ co ci 0 < c ▪ oc < c TO CI ,...., 0") 'T. '2 -.. co 01.) • ..:Ti "1 cb ca co an — 'ei 2 15 2 0 cy) ,,, 0 0 • c 8 €0 0 • 0 00 73) .0.) c) a ...: v 0.1 715 *.E C'42: = v.+ .7.. 91- 0_ LL Z it LL ti: :E -a -o 13 c c o Q 0,1 cNi CV a. E E E O 0 g. 0 Iv :7 :17 3 3 0.4 C•1 ..tr 0 Lo o 0 2012.004.338-33B Location: P White Fitting Insulation Steam Line CY) CD • C 0 co 0) 0 0- 0 • g 2012.004.338-33C rting notes an last page a) 0) co r O (D o 2 10. LU CS) a CZ Q a z AmeriSci Job #: 212122678 Client Name: Delta Engineers z 0 d A z ata .e- a) N U •O o N u) Q 0•0 c w8 to g- o co eo c c o N RI Z- '� e6 To cO e Q m m ao y 0 o c c o=to ,Q N 0) c °c 1--a U Q E o Y_ O M5 E' > o ..• � - O O 'N 'E- 145 N = 0 o) 0 RI E' z E«_ C0 G O E R Cl)v �3 m (i) Client Sample# II 0 1- C a) W 0 tE, d :1 n c E c R) in too N C U) terry CO 11 .O O C7 < N N Q 0!±).a O } 7. (� j 17 a) C 0 J z (=iza o > II cc > tri-zz to C O Z' CO N W C - t0�n - E 0 o Q E o N S N a) to CD -0 0 . .0 N V) ( o tN 0 N N 7 O T N O V) CO >- t4 t0 c o z 11 N o < N m Z ¢ 6 O) N A A E< 0 w ,eo X To SI ° o U ai (7� Naz(" `7 N O `4 J:0 ro N-7 N E .- O N n a) g73 :CB V4- 7,5 2W O' Q O 0 w m y8o"80 co p d m -0 2 w• " W .a y p>p .L) b- 80 m o 3 Nmc >. a t CD -1 -° 01 C C Z E 0c 0 o 0 N N V N Q 8 0 .c t6 Co 0 a) < S 3 W LI- T- aI- cE��0 U NN f LLI N o .0 4 0i° Q c CO '? • . al W O t0 Ti 0>.:a= c0LT°J c ., ' 01 ¢: ...v �w and may not be representativ i0 E C 0 E 0 0 a) a) w O 'Co c 0 N 0.N n c 0 To c 1) o -5;? .n 2 .c W a) .c a) -00 c0 E h -o o c a)70; E c o 01 E E N 8 O N v i' o c .0 o o > a) Q- Q E w L o A O N p A E n n.N ai>, o E z o 'Ec c � f6 0 'S c A,DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS 6 z 0 Description / Sample Location 1. X -a I - z ci 3 ri-- "Jo NJ ---. ...., - . - ... -.. .... NA 1 S *..) 3 4 v4-:' l-- . s' , :: •-• - c'^ N ( 1 _--. \.13 ...- ,.) 0 -6 tv ...0- .5 3 . , . .. ne) t S 1 -..-) 4..3. ......e. .. r) a.- -47 S 0 b ..), -k?. S 3 ......, '•• , '. C5 0 L.T. NI Material Condition Material Type Sample Number 24 33' - otA 0 ".") f,- -i 0 rr, .r- iv <:, -(,) 0 t t 1 _---- NYS ELAP 198. .0 To' c 0 0 0 N • 0 -0 0 0 2 -J c0 z _0 0 co 10 0 z0 0 To 0 ELAP 198.4 TEM methodol >z - _0 N 0 0 c 0 cc 0 a) 0 0) • 1) 0) E 0 0 0 • 0) 14.3 co 0 Email Results C:3 E to 0 co co . e CA CD 01 2 e- xLL • 860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.23 0 0 4—P 01 e - Ca 0 0 cc; a. )71 pJ 0 El 48 Hours El Other c() N -J \s, pr N.* Sample Numb v, t..f4 0 c+- 0 •‹) E u.) 0 co E co •oot 0 co C x IL T1)- 0 13 (00 CO CD 0 CO N 73.5 c13 0 00 — It d ' N C.0 Cq w c: 0 0 ling Data Sheet/COC 0 0 0. Turnaround ff\ Sample. Location/Description I )Ao 1,4, j )bc.i ?ccs el f/ 2 3 A - ae't 3 - 1 • cIl • — - (_7(c) E Cv3c.„1\ — 2 ct 3 1 1Gokssm,.) t.,.)1,,,i-t oe-! — ..- . t ,...— S , , I.. o rEi.2 a , Material Condition • 0 0.. .,,, _ , 1•01. 1111111111 iimommi 1111111111111 grill c, <•.1 . n ,,, N , 1. .‹. „.. N.1 c...., 1 11111 0 ,v) 0 b.) LE 24 Hours 0 0 f" CO 0 48 Hours 0 Other — — — _ Floor Sample Location/Description Pi /3 ( 6 , L .?c,,,- i? 12,-, [A,1 , , f 0,7 -,D,L,4- - / H #6— ,,, ,, ,,,, ,,. ,, ,,, - .Abi -# 6 . Bik•Tc,: L.-1, D.,-4- 5e v-,,, s - AW _ / / - A i --i #-. 6 1, ,,, ., ',/ , . i , / -- A ri 1) (c: W\N;ii-t- '1 - ' .‘ li--- T- v,5‘,JcA ,sa •-‘ - CL, -.1 cl- Wca'-t---k ,5'-,p ri \._._ ,f,,, — _ V v '1)(.2.4 (\ r \ IlAa_ot.;•:;.-ct 1 0 — Ly, 1 4-fj ,`C A — C\A; 1 )e Z. Q.,.. c', •-•,--, ---i- NI --._.. -4-- . -..--. —5 • \ . • Material Material Type j Condition c--...,.! ; "li Q ....b\ ._ 111 . 011 JaquinN aidwes r •3 t...) . Qc, gl: ^r) rrl `.' cr,I, tr) I (C,(1 .:,) III II II : lilt Hilo ling Data Sheet/COC 0 N., 0 Floor Sample Location/Description 1 Cr, c.7 r.J c 0 ---.....,— ,/\ ^,-S _. 1...... t -_-- •-•.k. Y ---4c:> - - N • . - ,.. •.../Ns I sk:,IN. .1 S. '..T '... '-c-, --1,--.o . - , Material Condition ---•-< f., ,...s • Sample Number ki Ci--, r.) ri' c"--- ks.) t...") Crl rn 47-r" (.) N ..-- ADELTA. ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORSS 860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax 607.231.6650 www.deltaengineers.com APPENDIX C Delta Engineers Company and Personnel Certifications 16 rat tai ep t1 Division 0 end with License nd Etta pus,i 12 AIs ;12240 ESTOS HANDLING L Delta En 860 H End eer Architts nd Surveyo Road( FILE NUMBER {5 LICENSE NUMBER:'.3 LICENSE CLASS: RE ' t DATE OF ISSUE: 08/201 EXPIRATION, DATE: oc/ s tic t Inas b n issued in ae a anc nwith 'of the L or. Law of New York to d o 1 rew Yo t Codes, Rules rt T2egulation , 12 N RR Part' } 1 i su ect to suSp nsion or revocation. or a (1) oc `vi©)atio o tate, federal o loyal is js r t re ardstt tiie condi n stoS pr©yedt, or (2) demo tratett hack so ibilify to the onduct of any 10 mvolvirr o to -or r sbe its o aal asbe State Departtei 4. os fog ilia contractor named o e end tbls icense or photo ppy must ,b imizteriily display, • Atte, hi ii nse vert thatali rsons ctrtployet y t �e hectic on an sbestc pro d n 1 ed an ` bestcis Certificate, np roprtat forth ,x e(i i o they perform, byt =New Yo t t n Ivl. Franko, Acting Director SH 432 (8/12) For the Commissioner of Labor STATE OF NEW YORK - DEPARTMENT OF LAPOR ASBESTOS CERTIFICATE DERFRANKLIN 333 C(06/13) RANSP(06/13) GRE(06/13) 1-1f)10 (06/13) /33 I 331 ,T# OSEOSE2 815E29409 MUST BE CARRIED ON ASBESTOS PROJECTS EYES BLU HAIR BRO HGT 5 11" I IF FOUND RETURN TO: NYSDOL - L&C UNIT ROOM 161A BUILDING 12 STATE OFFICE CAMPUS ALBANY NY 12240 STATE OF NEW YORK - DEPARTMENT OF LABOR ASBESTOS CERTIFICATE D 4 MUST BE CARRIED ON ASBESTOS PROJECTS 111111 III EYES HAS HAIR BRO HGT 5' 08" 1111111 [1!1111 II III IF FOUND RETURN TO: NYSDOL - L&C UNIT ROOM 161A BUILDING 12 STATE OFFICE CAMPUS ALBANY NY 12240 ADELTA. ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORSS 860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax 607.231.6650 www.deltaengineers.com APPENDIX D Laboratory Certifications 17 MR PAUL MUCHA NE 1 YORK STATE DEPART EI T OF HEAL.' WADSWORTH CENTER Expires 12:01 AM April 01, 201 Issued April 1, 2012 CERTIFICATE OF APPROVAL FOR LABORATORY SERVICE ued in accordance with and pursuant to section 502 Public Health Law of New York State' NY Lab Id No: 11460 AMERICA SCIENCE TEAM NEW YORK INC 117 EAST 30TH ST NEW YORK, NY 10016 hereby APPROVED as an Environmental Laboratory for the category ENVIRONMENTAL ANALYSES SOLID AND HAZARDOUS WASTE All approved subcategories and/or analytes are listed below: rg scenaneous Asbestos in Friable Material EPA 600/M4/821020 Item 198.1 of Manual Asbestos in Non -Friable Material -PLM Item 1986 of Manual (NOB by P Asbestos in Non -Friable Material -TEM Item 198.4 of Manual } Serial No.: 467 2 Property of the New York State Department of Health. Certificates are valid only at the address shown, must be conspicuously posted, and are printed on secure paper. Continued accreditation depends on successful ongoing participation in the Program. Consumers are urged to call (518) 485-5570 to verify the laboratory's accreditation status. Page 1 0 ADELTA. ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORSs 860 Hooper Road. Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax 607.231.6650 www.deltaengineers.com APPENDIX E Bulk Sample Location Drawings 18 V E 3 I I° I I 5 5 ' 4 ______. _„_[___F__,[7.......7 [ , CORNELL SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. This Section and the listed Related Sections provides minimum requirements for the protection of the environment during the project. The requirements of this Section shall apply to both Contractor and all tiers of sub -contractors involved in the project. B. In addition to the requirements of this Section and the listed Related Sections, all laws and regulations by applicable local, state, and federal agencies shall apply to the work of this contract. In some cases the requirements of these Specifications may by intention exceed such legal requirements, but in no case shall this Specification be interpreted or understood to reduce or eliminate such requirements. C. Prior to bidding, review the entire Bidding Documents and report in writing to the Owner's Representative any error, inconsistency, or omission that may have environmental impacts. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 44 — Spill Control B. Section 01 57 13 — Soil Erosion and Sediment Control 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 — Submittals: 1. Waste Disposal Plan. 1.4 JOB SITE ADMINISTRATION A. In accordance with Article 2 of the General Conditions, provide a competent supervisory representative with full authority to act for the Contractor at the site during all working hours. B. If at any time operations under the representative's supervision do not comply with this Section, or the representative is otherwise unsatisfactory to the Owner, replace, if requested by the Owner, said representative with another representative satisfactory to the Owner. There shall be 110 change in superintendent without the Owner's approval. C. Remove from the Work any employee of the Contractor or any Subcontractor when so directed by the Owner. The Owner may request the removal of any employee who does not comply with these specifications. 1.5 CLEARING, SITE PREPARATION AND SITE USE A. In accordance with Section 01 11 00 (1.1.D. Use of Site), only that portion of the working area that is absolutely necessary and essential for the work shall be cleared for construction. All clearing should be approved and performed to provide minimum practical exposure of soils. CLARK HALL LEARNING GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-1 FACILTY PHASE II REQUIREMENTS 3-14-14 B. The Contractor shall make every effort to avoid the destruction of plants, trees, shrubs and lawns outside the area of construction so as not to unduly disturb the ecological or environmental quality of the area. C. Topsoil excavated as part of the Project, which can be reused as part of the Project, shall be stockpiled for future use and temporarily stabilized to prevent erosion. 1.6 SPOIL AND BORROW A. Spoil 1. Dispose of excavated material which, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, is unfit to be used as backfill or embankment or which is in excess of the amount required under the Contract, at a location as directed by the Owner's Representative. 2. All spoil areas shall be graded and seeded to match the surrounding area. 3. Spoil areas shall be covered and protected from erosion into adjacent storm sewers, drainage ways, land areas, or water bodies. B. Borrow Material 1. Borrow material shall be provided from a clean source. Submittals of proposed borrow material shall be reviewed by the Owner prior to delivery on-site. Submittals shall include the quantity of materials, source location and certification by the material supplier that it is free of chemicals or other foreign matter. 1.7 NOISE AND VIBRATION A. Noise and vibration 1. Limit and control the nature and extent of activities at all times to minimize the effects of noise and vibrations. Take adequate measures for keeping noise levels, as produced by construction related equipment, to safe and tolerable limits as set forth by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), the New York State Industrial Code Guidelines and Ordinances and all City, Town and Local ordinances. Equip all construction equipment presenting a potential noise nuisance with noise - muffling devices adequate to meet these requirements. 1.8 DUST CONTROL A. Take adequate measures for controlling dust produced by drilling, excavation, backfilling, loading, or other means. The use of calcium chloride or petroleum-based materials for dust control is prohibited. Dust control measures are required throughout the duration of construction. B. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, the Contractor is not adequately controlling dust, the Owner will first notify the Contractor. If the Contractor does not take adequate actions necessary, the Owner may, at the Contractor's expense, employ alternative means to control dust. CLARK HALL LEARNING GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-2 FACILITY PHASE II REQUIREMENTS 3-14-14 C. Erect, maintain, and remove when appropriate barriers or other devices, including mechanical ventilation systems, as required by the conditions of the work for the protection of users of the project area, the protection of the work being done, or the containment of dust and debris. All such barriers or devices shall be provided in conformance with all applicable codes, laws, and regulations including OSHA. 1.9 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT A. Construction procedures observed by the Contractor, its subcontractors and other employees shall include protection of the environment, in accordance with all pertinent Cornell standards, policies, local laws, executive orders, ordinances, and federal and state regulations. Construction procedures that are prohibited in the undertaking of work associated with this Contract include, but are not limited to: 1. Dumping of spoil material or any liquid or solid pollutant into any stone or sanitary sewer, drainage way, stream sewer, any wetlands (as defined by federal and state regulations), any surface waters, or at unspecified locations. 2. Indiscriminate, arbitrary, or capricious operation of equipment in any stream corridors, any wetlands, or any surface waters. 3. Pumping of any silt -laden water from trenches or other excavations into any storm sewers, sanitary sewers, drainage ways, wetlands, or surface waters. 4. Damaging vegetation beyond the extent necessary for construction of the facilities. 5. Disposal of trees, brush, and other debris in any location on University property, unless such areas are specifically identified on the drawing or in the specifications or specifically approved by the Owner's site representative. 6. Permanent or unspecified alteration of the flow line of a stream. 7. Burning trash, project debris, or waste materials. B. Take all necessary precautions to prevent silt or waste of any kind from entering any drainage or waterways or downstream properties as a result of the Work. C. Runoff of potable water used for concrete curing or concrete truck or chute cleaning operations shall not be allowed to reach the storm water system or open water due to the levels of residual chlorine (New York State water quality standards, 6 NYCRR Part 703.5) and other potential contaminants. If necessary, obtain permission from the local sewer authority and collect and pump the runoff to the sanitary sewer. D. Limit the nature and extent of any activities that could result in the release or discharge of pollutants. Report any such release or discharge immediately to the Owner's Representative and clean up spills immediately, as detailed in Section 01 35 44 — Spill Control Procedures. CLARK HALL LEARNING GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-3 FACILITY PHASE II REQUIREMENTS 3-14-14 1.10 TEMPORARY RE-ROUTING OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK A. Obtain approval from the Owner's Representative prior to any temporary re-routing of piping and exhaust ductwork necessary for the completion of the Work. Submit re- routing plans to the Owner's Representative in writing. The following shall require approval of the Owner: 1. Temporary storm, sanitary or water line connections. 2. Temporary exhaust ductwork connections where such connections may impact air emissions. B. Instruct all personnel to observe extreme caution when working in the vicinity of mechanical equipment and piping. Personnel shall not operate or tamper with any existing valves, switches, or other devices or equipment without prior approval by the Owner's Representative. 1.11 HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC MATERIALS A. Inform officers, employees, agents, contractors, subcontractors at every tier, and any other party which may come into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of its performance hereunder of the nature of such materials, and any health and safety or environmental risks associated therewith. B. Do not use hazardous or toxic materials in a manner that will violate Cornell University Policies or any state, federal, or municipal environmental health and safety regulations. In situations where the risks are unclear consult with Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S) for guidance. C. Provide complete care and treatment for any injury sustained by any parties coming into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of Contractor's performance or failure to perforin hereunder. D. At the completion of project Contractor shall remove all unused chemical products and hazardous materials from campus. Transportation of these materials shall be in accordance with all federal, state, and local regulations. Request and receive written approval from EH&S prior to disposal of any on-site disposal. 1.12 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL AND TITLE A. Prior to start of work and first payment, Contractor shall prepare and submit "Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan" to the Owner's Representative. The plan shall identify the waste transportation and treatment, storage or disposal (TSD) companies which will manage all waste material and any site(s) for disposal of the waste material. B. The "Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan" form, together with definitions associated with the form waste descriptions, is attached to this Section. Contractor must use this form to document waste disposal methods and locations. CLARK HALL LEARNING GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-4 FACILITY PHASE II REQUIREMENTS 3-14-14 C. Contractor shall be responsible for the proper cleanup, containment, storage and disposal of any hazardous material/chemical spill occurring during its work. For Cornell University owned hazardous waste EH&S will oversee, approve or effect the proper disposal. Title, risk of loss, and all other incidents of ownership to the Waste Material, shall vest in Contractor at the time Contractor or any transporter acting on its behalf takes physical possession of Waste Material. Complete and maintain full records of the chain of custody and control, including certificates of disposal or destruction, of all Waste Materials loaded, transported and/or disposed of. Deliver all such records to the Owner in accordance with applicable laws and regulations and any instructions from the Owner in a timely manner and in any event prior to final payment(s) under this Contract. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 35 43*** CLARK HALL LEARNING GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-5 FACILITY PHASE II REQUIREMENTS 3-14-14 Contractor Waste Material Disposa Contact Name/Number 1. Contractor Name: Contract No.: Project Name/Desc Project End Da Project Start Date: be generated as was hazardous materials that 0 N e Destination or Disposal Location Transporter asn-ag Waste Management +'YV tolai.3.11.uo3 CU- Mgt spuno TD SIII algijznnd SQSTAI Source JolaaUuo3 jjatuo3 pajiumsg 0 Y �I ' 0 cn 0 Category Solvents PCBs Asbestos Lead Mercury Chromium Other Toxic Metals (describe in section 4) 0 Light Bulbs Thermostats Batteries Used Oil Contaminated PPE & Materials Other (describe in section 4) No hazardous waste 1 Contractor Wast U U • O U 0 0 0 O 0 0 U by 0 0 0 azardous wastes 0 O 0 Estimated Quantity Transporter Facility Phone Facility Address Disposal Facility Name 0 0 et U 12 023U Clean soil Non C&D solid waste Other (describe in section IV) No non -hazardous waste will be generated CT: Cl.) Y Y 'C'C' c--, O ti t 0 0 ~ cG 04cn n „ r C7', 4.1 ct w 0' O U U N UN e) o 0 � � H vJ h��' 4. r w 0 0 0 ci-, 0 Y 4.M U U U ''"' .,U, 0 0 0 ---, { 0 -0 0 c 0 — Y o v? - , 0 2-oo•v U 3.� O by O N , C4 44 —,- cG "O U 3 u)-0 o 0 0 va > w0 0 -oo 0 .-+ .0 0 0 r 0 0 cG O r U ` _ E O N vz O Ct 0 ,.o D CD -0 va p" o � o c 0 ... 4-, -1-, al n 0 0 .9 0 U O_ c.:1• ,0 ,-i . c0 0 -0 0 0) e) 0 CD 0) 0 0 a) 0) U U 0.. U 0 0 0 0 4-� 0 0 0 4. Further descri 5. Contractor Certification a U U On • O U 0 U U QN 4 O ers O W ', U cG W O G co U U v, H z o 0 .O '57'7; Y V "0 rV) U o mi W 0 O Y •— o •0 .0 U •� 3 0" 0Ct r e- '-'2, U Z �O r n "O CO O CD N 'O 0 N U 6 H G N U v o U _o a) 3 onY 0 0 - 0 N r U 0 U •o - -c, U o W O 8 O Contractor Sign Definitions for Use with Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan: The following is not solid waste: Discarded materials that are being beneficially used pursuant to 6NYCRR Section 360-1.15 A material is disposed of if it is discharged, deposited, injected, dumped, spilled, leaked or placed into or on any land or water so that such material or any constituent thereof may enter the environment or be emitted into the air or discharged into groundwater or surface water. Asbestos: Any waste material containing the asbestifonn varieties of: Cluysotile (serpentine); crocidolite (riebeckite); amosite (cum- mingtonitegrunerite); anthophyllite; tremolite; and actinolite. Batteries: All spent batteries being disposed that are regulated by New York State Department of Environmental Conservation (NYDEC) in 6 New York Code of Rules and Regulations (NYCRR) Part 374-3, or Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) in 40 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 273.2 as Universal Waste Batteries. Borrow Material: Fill material required for on-site construction that is obtained from other locations. Chromium: Any waste containing chromium or contaminated with chromium that exceeds the Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) limit for chromium as .defined in 6 NYCRR Part 371.3 or 40 CFR 261.24. Clean Soil: Soil that is uncontaminated with any solid or hazardous waste, C&DDebris, trees, stumps, yard waste or wood chips per definitions of those tens below. Construction and Demolition (C&D) Debris: Uncontaminated solid waste resulting from the construction, remodeling, repair and demolition of utilities, structures and roads; and uncontaminated solid waste resulting from land clearing. Such waste includes, but is not limited to bricks, concrete and other masonry materials, soil, rock, wood (including painted, treated and coated wood and wood products), land clearing debris, wall coverings, plaster, drywall, plumbing fixtures, non -asbestos insulation, roofing shingles and other roof coverings, asphaltic pavement, glass, plastics that are not sealed in a manner that conceals other wastes, empty buckets ten gallons or less in size and having no more than one inch of residue remaining on the bottom, electrical wiring and components containing no hazardous liquids, and pipe and metals that are incidental to any of the above. Solid waste that is not C&D debris (even if resulting from the construction, remodeling, repair and demolition of utilities, structures and roads and land clearing) includes, but is not limited to asbestos waste, garbage, corrugated container board, electrical fixtures containing hazardous liquids such as fluorescent light ballasts or transformers, fluorescent lights, carpeting, furniture, appliances, tires, drums, containers greater than ten gallons in size, any containers having more than one inch of residue remaining on the bottom and fuel tanks. Specifically excluded from the definition of construction and demolition debris is solid waste (including what otherwise would be construction and demolition debris) resulting from any processing technique, other than that employed at a department -approved C&D debris processing facility, that renders individual waste components unrecognizable, such as pulverizing or shredding. Also, waste contained in an illegal disposal site may be considered C&D debris if the department determines that such waste is similar in nature and content to C&D debris. Construction and Demolition Debris Processing Facility means a processing facility that receives and processes construction and demolition debris by any means. Contaminated PPE & Materials: Any personal protective equipment such as gloves, coveralls, boot covers, respirator cartridges etc.; or rags, tools, articles or other material that has become adulterated by a hazardous material, and which meets the definition of hazardous waste or is considered unsuitable for disposal as regular trash. Exempt C&D and Stump Facilities: The following facilities are exempt from Solid waste management facility permitting requirements provided the facilities operate only between the hours of sunrise and sunset, and (if the allowable waste comes from an off-site source) no fee or other form of consideration is required for the privilege of using the facility for disposal purposes: (i) A site at which only the following C&D debris is placed: recognizable uncontaminated concrete and concrete products (including steel or fiberglass reinforcing rods that are embedded in the concrete), asphalt pavement, brick, glass, soil and rock. (Recognizable means solid waste that can be readily identified as C&D debris by visual observation.) (ii) A landfill for the disposal of trees, stumps, yard waste and wood chips generated from these materials is exempt when origin and disposal of such waste occur on properties under the same ownership or control. Hazardous Waste: Any waste material that meets the definition of "hazardous waste" in 6 NYCRR 371.1 and 40 CFR 261.3 and that is not excluded by regulation. Land Clearing Debris means vegetative matter, soil and rock resulting from activities such as land clearing and grubbing, utility line maintenance or seasonal or storm -related cleanup such as trees, stumps, brush and leaves and including wood chips generated from these materials. Land clearing debris does not include yard waste which has been collected at the curbside. Lead: Any metallic lead or waste material containing lead, e.g. waste paint chips, that exceed the Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) limit for lead as defined in 6 NYCRR Part 371.3 or 40 CFR 261.24. Light Bulbs: All spent lamps or light bulbs being disposed that are regulated in 6 NYCRR Part 374- 3 or 40 CFR 273.5. Mercury: Liquid mercury or any waste containing mercury at levels exceeding the Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) limit for mercury as defined in 6 NYCRR Part 371.3 or 40 CFR 261.24. Mold: Construction material or debris contaminated with mold fungus that is unsuitable for reuse. Other Toxic Metals: Any waste containing a metal or contaminated by a metal identified in, and exceeding the Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) limit of 6 NYCRR Part 371.3 or 40 CFR 261.24.PCBs: All electrical articles and equipment or the used oil removed from them, containing polychlorinated biphenyls at levels regulated by 6 NYCRR 371.4(e) Scrap Metal: Bits and pieces of metal parts (e.g., bars, turnings, rods, sheets, wire) or metal pieces that may be combined together with bolts or soldering (e.g., radiators, scrap automobiles, railroad box cars), which when worn or superfluous can be recycled. Solid Waste (Non C&D): Any garbage, refuse, sludge from a wastewater treatment plant, water supply treatment plant, or air pollution control facility and other discarded materials including solid, liquid, semisolid, or contained gaseous material, resulting from industrial, commercial, mining and agricultural operations, and from community activities, but does not include solid or dissolved materials in domestic sewage, or solid or dissolved materials in irrigation return flows or industrial discharges that are point sources subject to permit under 33 USC 1342, or source, special nuclear or by-product material as defined by the Atomic Energy Act of 1954, except as may be provided by existing agreements between the State of New York and the government of the United States. Solvents: Substances (usually liquid) suitable for, or employed in, solution, or in dissolving something; as, water is the appropriate solvent for most salts, alcohol for resins, ether for fats, and mercury or acids for metals, etc. Typically these are chemicals are used as paint thinners or cleaning solutions. Spoil: Refuse material removed from an excavation. Used Oil: Any oil refined from crude oil, or any synthetic oil, that has been used, and as a result of such use is contaminated by physical or chemical impurities. "See 6 NYCRR 374-2 or 40 CFR 279" Thermostats: Any mercury -containing thermostat as defined in 6 NYCRR 374-3.1(d), or 40 CFR 273.4 Uncontaminated C&D Debris: C&D Debris that is not mixed or commingled with other solid waste at the point of generation, processing or disposal, and that is not contaminated with spills of a petroleum product, hazardous waste or industrial waste. Contamination from spills of a petroleum product does not include asphalt or concrete pavement that has come into contact with petroleum products through normal vehicle use of the roadway. CORNELL SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 SPILL PREVENTION A. In order to minimize the potential for discharge to the environment of oil, petroleum, or hazardous substances on site, the following requirements shall apply to all projects: 1. All oil, petroleum, or hazardous materials stored or relocated temporarily on site during the construction process shall be stored in such a manner as to provide protection from vehicular damage and to provide contaimnent of leaks or spills. Horizontal diked oil storage tanks, temporary berms or barriers, or similar methods shall be employed as appropriate at each site. 2. Any on-site filling or dispensing activities shall occur within an area in which a temporary berm, boom, or similar containment barrier has been placed to prevent the inadvertent discharge to the environment of harmful quantities of any products. 3. All oil, petroleum, or hazardous materials stored on site shall be located in such a manner as to minimize the potential of damage from construction operations or vehicles, away from drainage ways and environmentally sensitive areas, and in accordance with all fire and safety codes. B. Remove immediately from the site any storage, dispensing, or operating equipment that is leaking oil or hazardous substances or is in anyway unsuitable for the safe storage of such materials. 1.2 SPILL CONTROL PROCEDURES All Contractor personnel working at the project site shall be knowledgeable of the potential health and safety concerns associated with petroleum and other hazardous substances that could potentially be released at the project site. Following are a list of activities that should be conducted by the Contractor in the event of an oil/petroleum spill or the release of any other hazardous substance. In the event of a large quantity spill that would require cleanup procedures that are beyond the means of the Contractor, an emergency spill cleanup contractor shall be hired by the Contractor. In the event the Contractor has the personnel necessary to cleanup the spill, the following procedures shall be followed: A. Personnel discovering/responding to a spill shall: 1. Identify and locate the source of the spill. If unsafe conditions exist, then leave the area, inform nearby personnel, notify the site supervisor, and initiate spill reporting (Section 1. 3). 2. Limit the discharge of product, if safely possible, by: (1) diverting discharge to a containment area; (2) creating temporary dikes with soils or other available materials; and (3) utilizing sorbent materials. If secondary containment is present, verify that valves and drains are closed prior to diverting the product to this area. 3. The individual discovering a spill shall initiate containment procedures to prevent material from reaching a potential migratory route, through implementation of the CLARK HALL LEARNING SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-1 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 following actions, or any other methods necessary. Methods employed shall not compromise worker safety. a. Stop the spill at once (if possible). b. Extinguish sources of ignition (e.g., flames, sparks, hot surfaces, cigarettes, etc.). c. Clear personnel from the spill location and rope off the area. d. Utilize available spill control equipment in an effort to ensure that fires, explosions, and releases do not occur, recur, or spread. e. Use sorbent materials to control the spill at the source. f. Construct a temporary containment dike of sorbent materials, cinder blocks, bricks, or other suitable materials to help contain the spill. g. Attempt to identify the character, exact source, amount, and area of the released materials. Identification of the spilled material should be made as soon as possible so that the appropriate cleanup procedure can be identified. h. Assess possible hazards to human health or the environment as a result of the release, fire, or explosion. If spill response measures involve the temporary cessation of any operations, the Contractor shall monitor the affected equipment for: (1) leaks; (2) pressure buildup; (3) gas generation; or (4) ruptures in valves, pipes, or other equipment. B. Spill Cleanup: 1. Following containment of the spill, the following spill cleanup procedures shall be initiated. a. Use proper waste containers. b. Remove bulk liquid by using vacuum, pump, sorbents, or shovel and place material in properly labeled waste container. Be sure not to collect incompatible or reactive substances in the same container. c. Cleanup materials not reclaimed on-site shall be disposed of in accordance with all applicable state and federal regulations. CLARK HALL LEARNING SPILL CONTROL FACILITY PHASE II 01 35 44-2 3-14-14 d. Apply sorbent materials to pick up remaining liquid after bulk liquid has been removed. The Contractor shall not walk over spilled material. Absorbed material shall be picked up with a shovel and placed in a separate waste container, and shall not be mixed with bulk liquid. e. Clean spill control equipment and containers. Replace equipment in its proper location. Restock or reorder any sorbents used to cleanup the spill. Carefully wash spilled product from skin and clothing using soap. Change clothes, if necessary, to avoid further contact with product. g. Disposal of all spilled product shall be made off-site, and shall be arranged through the Contractor. h. A Spill Report shall be completed, including a description of the event. A sample Spill Documentation Form is provided in Appendix B. C. Fire or Explosion: 1. In the event of a fire or explosion at the site, the Contractor shall: a. Verify that the local fire department and the appropriate response personnel (e.g., ambulance, police) have been notified. b. Report to the scene, if safe to do so, and evaluate the situation (e.g., spill character, source, etc.). Coordinate, as necessary, with other appropriate site and emergency personnel. c. Ensure that people are cleared from the area. d. Ensure that fires are safely extinguished (if possible), valves closed, and other immediate actions necessary to mitigate the emergency, if safe to do so. e. Initiate responsible measures necessary to prevent subsequent fires, explosions, or releases from occurring or spreading to other areas of the site. These measures include stopping processes or operations, collecting and containing released oil, or removing and isolating containers. Take appropriate action to monitor for: (1) leaks; (2) pressure build-ups; (3) gas generation; or (4) ruptures in pipes, valves, or other equipment. 1.3 SPILL REPORTING AND DOCUMENTATION In the event of a spill CALL CORNELL POLICE AT 255-1111 who will notify the appropriate departments within the university and coordinate with the contractor for external reporting, if required. CLARK HALL LEARNING SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-3 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 The contractor shall be responsible for the initiation of spill reporting and documentation procedures. All petroleum spills must be reported to NYSDEC Spill Hotline at 1-800- 457- 7362, less than two hours following discovery. Notification must be made to Cornell Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S), 607.255.8200, within 24 hours of reporting the release. The Contractor will be expected to provide EH&S with the DEC issued spill number. Any petroleum spill must be reported to NYSDEC unless ALL of the following criteria apply: TABLE 1 CRITERIA TO EXEMPT SPILL REPORTING CRITERIA SCRIPTI Quantity The spill must be known to be less than 5 gallons. Containment The spill must be contained on an impervious surface or within an impervious structure, such that it cannot enter the environment. Control The spill must be under control and not reach a drain or leave the impervious surface. Cleanup The spill must be cleaned -up within two hours of occurrence. Environment The spill must not have already entered into the soil or groundwater or onto surface water. A release of a "reportable quantity"' or unknown amount of a hazardous substance must also be immediately reported to NYSDEC Spill Hotline. Spills of reportable quantities of chemicals or "harmful quantities'' of oil to navigable waters must be reported to the federal National Response Center, 1-800-424-8802. Spill Reporting Information. When making a telephone report, the caller should be prepared to provide the following information, if possible: The date and time of the spill or release. 2. The identity or chemical name of the material released or spilled, including an indication of whether the material is defined as an extremely hazardous substance. 3. An estimate of the quantity of material released or spilled into the environment and the approximate duration of the event. 4. The exact location of the spill, including the name(s) of the waters involved or threatened, and/or other medium or media affected by the release or spill. 5. The source of the release or spill. 6. The name, address, and telephone number of the party in charge of, or responsible for, the facility or activity associated with the release or spill. 7. The extent of the actual and potential water pollution. 8. The name and telephone number of the person in charge of operations at the spill site. CLARK HALL LEARNING SPILL CONTROL FACILITY PHASE II 01 35 44-4 3-14-14 9. The steps being taken or proposed to contain and cleanup the released or spilled material and any precautions taken to minimize impacts, including evacuation. 10. The extent of injuries, if any. 11. Any known or anticipated acute or chronic health risks associated with the emergency, and information regarding necessary medical attention for exposed individuals. 12. Assistance required, if any. If the release of a hazardous substance or oil occurs in an amount which exceeds a reportable quantity (RQ) as defined in 40 CFR Part 110, 40 CFR Part 117, 40 CFR Part 302, or 6 NYCRR Part 597, then the Contractor shall do the following: Call to the National Response Center shall be made by the person in charge of the site. The applicable phone numbers are 1-800-424-8802 or 1-202-426-2675. 2. Within 14 days of the release, submit a written description of the release. The description should include: (1) a description of the release, (2) the type of material released, (3) estimated amount of the spill; (4) the date of the release, (5) an explanation of why the release occurred; and (6) a description of the measures to be implemented to prevent and control future releases. Reportable I uautity: A Reportable Quantity is the quantity of a hazardous substance or oil that triggers reporting requirements under the Comprehensive Emergency Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (CERCLA) (USEPA, September 1992). While the Contractor is legally responsible for knowing the risks of materials that are part of construction, members of the owner's spill response team have access to information that may help identify these quantities with you. Harm%ul Qumitiiv: A Harmful Quantity of oil includes discharges that violate applicable water quality standards; cause a film, sheen, or discoloration on a water surface or adjoining shoreline; or cause a sludge or emulsion to be deposited beneath the water surface or shoreline (40 CFR 110.3). PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 35 44*** CLARK HALL LEARNING SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-5 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 CORNELL SECTION 01 41 00 Ithaca, New York REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1.1 PERMITS AND LICENSES A. The Contractor shall obtain, maintain and pay for all permits and licenses necessary for the execution of the Work and for the use of such Work when completed. Such permits shall include but are not limited to building, plumbing, backflow prevention, dig safe and building demolition. B. For any projects which include demolition of a structure or load-bearing elements of a structure, the Contractor is required to complete a "Notification of Demolition and Renovation" and provide this notification to the United State Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) in advance of the work as specified in 40 CFR 61.145. The Contractor shall also provide a copy of this notification to the Owner's Representative prior to any demolition. 1.2 INSPECTIONS A. Apply for and obtain all required inspections, pay all fees and charges for same, include all service charges, pavement cuts and repairs. 1.3 COMPLIANCE A. The Contractor shall give all notices, pay all fees and comply with all laws, rules and regulations applicable to the Work. 1.4 OWNER'S REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor, Subcontractors, and employees of the Contractor and Subcontractors shall comply with all regulations governing conduct, access to the premises, operation of equipment and systems, and conduct while in or near the premises and shall perform the Work in such a manner as not to unreasonably interrupt or interfere with the conduct of business of the Owner. B. Upon completion of the project, the Contractor agrees to provide the Owner with a summary of municipal permit fees paid. This shall include the name of the permits secured, the permit fees paid by the Contractor and a copy of the permit. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED **END OF SECTION 01 41 00*** CLARK HALL LEARNING REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS FACILITY PHASE II 01 41 00-1 3-14-14 CORNELL SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain an effective Contractor Quality Control (CQC) program and perform sufficient inspections and tests of all items of work, including those of Subcontractors, to ensure compliance with Contract Documents. Include surveillance and tests specified in the technical sections of the Specifications. Furnish appropriate facilities, instruments, and testing devices required for performance of the quality control function. Controls must be adequate to cover construction operations and be keyed to the construction sequence. Construction shall not begin until the Owner has approved the CQC program. 1.2 CONTROL OF ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION A. Include a control system for the following phases of inspection: 1. Pre -Installation Conference. For all sections where pre -installations are defined, the Contractor shall arrange for a pre -installation meeting. The Contractor shall make available, during this meeting, all approved submittals and products. The following minimum personnel shall be at the meeting: a. Project Manager. b. Project Field Supervisor c. Subcontractor d. Architect's Representative e. Owner's Representative f. Commissioning Agent, when applicable g. Testing Agency, when applicable 2. Preparatory Inspection. Perform this inspection prior to beginning work on any definable feature of work. Include a review of contract requirements with the supervisors directly responsible for the performance of the work; check to assure that materials, products, and equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved; check to assure that provisions have been made for required control testing; examine the work area to ascertain that preliminary work has been completed; physically examine materials and equipment to assure that they conform to shop drawings and data and that the materials and equipment are on hand. 3. Initial Inspection. Perform this inspection as soon as work commences on a representative portion of a particular feature of workmanship review control testing for compliance with contract requirements. 4. Follow-up Inspections. Perform these inspections on a regular basis to assure continuing compliance with contract requirements until completion of that particular work. CLARK HALL LEARNING QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-1 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 1.3 CONTROL OF OFF-SITE OPERATIONS A. Perform factory quality control inspections for items fabricated or assembled off-site as opposed to "off-the-shelf' items. The CQC Representative at the fabricating plant shall be responsible for release of the fabricated items for shipment to the job site. The CQC Representative at the job site shall receive the item and note any damage incurred during shipment. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting and maintaining the item in good condition throughout the period of on-site and during erection or installation. Although any item found to be faulty may be rejected before its use, final acceptance of an item by the Owner is based on its satisfactory incorporation into the work and acceptance of the completed project. 1.4 TESTING A. The Owner may engage the services of an independent testing laboratory to confirm that an installed item or element of work conforms to the Specification and workmanship requirements. 1.5 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. The Owner shall designate a Representative to monitor the progress and execution of the work. The Representative shall have the authority to call for test samples, to approve or to reject work performed and to stop work in progress, if, in its opinion, the work is not in conformance with the Contract Documents. The Representative shall not be authorized to make changes or interpretations of the Contract Documents. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 45 00*** CLARK HALL LEARNING QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-2 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 CORNELL SECTION 01 45 29 Ithaca, New York TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 1.1 GENERAL A. The Owner will employ and pay for the services of an Independent Testing Laboratory to perform specified services. 1. Contractor shall cooperate with the laboratory to facilitate the execution of its required services. 2. Employment of the laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor's obligations to perform the Work of the Contract. B. Testing Laboratory services are specified in connection with work including but not limited to the following: 1. New York State Building Code, Section 17, Special Inspections 1.2 QUALIFICATIONS OF LABORATORY A. Meet "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification", 1971 edition, published by American Council of Independent Laboratories. B. Meet basic requirements of ASTM E329 -05b, "Standard Specifications for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction". C. Authorized to operate in the State of New York. D. Testing and inspections shall be performed under the direction of Licensed Professional Engineer registered in the State of New York who shall be responsible for administering all testing and inspections and shall certify any local agency requirements. E. Submit copy of report of inspection of facilities made by Materials Reference Laboratory of National Bureau of Standards during the most recent tour of inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection. F. Testing Equipment: 1. Calibrated at maximum 12 month intervals by devices of accuracy traceable to either: a. National Bureau of Standards b. Accepted values of natural physical constants. 2. Submit copy of certificate of calibration made by accredited calibration agency. 1.3 LABORATORY DUTIES A. Cooperate with Owner, Architect and Contractor; provide qualified personnel promptly on notice. CLARK HALL LEARNING TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES FACILITY PHASE II 01 45 29-1 3-14-14 B. Perform specified inspections, sampling and testing of materials and methods of construction. 1. Comply with specified standards. Ascertain compliance of materials with requirements of Contract Documents. C. Promptly notify Owner, Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or deficiencies of work or products. D. Should Laboratory tests of material performed at specified intervals of time indicate that strengths do not meet Specification requirements, the Inspection Agency and Geotechnical Engineer shall IMMEDIATELY notify the Owner, Contractor and Architect. The Architect shall determine whether remedial action is necessary. E. Promptly submit written report of each test and inspection; one copy each to Architect, Owner, Contractor, and one copy to Record Documents File. Each report shall include: 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Testing laboratory name, address and telephone number. 4. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 5. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 6. Record of temperature and weather conditions. 7. Date of test. 8. Identification of product and specification section. 9. Location of sample or test in the Project. 10. Type of inspection or test. 11. Observations on compliance with Contract Documents. F. Prepare a summary report for each category of inspection certifying that the work has been inspected and meets the Contract Documents. Specifically list all discrepancies found which have not yet been repaired or resolved. G. Perfonn additional tests as required by Architect or the Owner. 1.4 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY A. Laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. CLARK HALL LEARNING TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES FACILITY PHASE II 01 45 29-2 3-14-14 2. Approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Perform any duties of the Contractor. 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, provide access to Work, and Manufacturer's operations. B. Secure and deliver to the laboratory adequate quantities of representative samples of materials proposed to be used and for which testing is specified. C. Provide to the laboratory the approved design mixes proposed to be used for concrete, and other material mixes which require control by the testing laboratory. D. Furnish copies of Products test reports as required. E. Furnish incidental labor and facilities: 1. To provide access to Work to be tested. 2. To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of the product to be tested. 3. To facilitate inspections and tests. 4. For Laboratory's exclusive use for storage and curing of test samples. F. Notify laboratory a minimum of 24 hours in advance of operations to allow for laboratory assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. 1. When tests or inspections cannot be performed after such notice, reimburse laboratory for personnel and travel expenses incurred due to Contractor's responsibility. G. Make arrangements with laboratory and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor's convenience. H. Employ and pay for the services of a separate, equally qualified independent testing laboratory to perform additional inspections, sampling and testing required when initial tests indicate Work does not comply with Contract Documents. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 45 29*** CLARK HALL LEARNING TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES FACILITY PHASE II 01 45 29-3 3-14-14 CORNELL SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain temporary facilities and controls required by all trades for construction, and remove on completion of Work. 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and safety regulations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL Choice of materials, as suitable for the accomplishment of the intended purpose, is the Contractor's option. B. Materials may be new or used, but must not violate requirements of applicable codes, standards and specifications. 2.2 TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES A. Provide first aid equipment and supplies, with qualified personnel continuously available to render first aid at the site. 2.3 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. Provide a fire protection and prevention program for employees and personnel at the site. B. Equipment: 1. Provide and maintain fire extinguishing equipment ready for instant use at all areas of the Project and at specific areas of critical fire hazard. 2. Hand extinguishers of the types and sizes recommended by the National Board of Fire Underwriters to control fires from particular hazards. 3. Construction period use of permanent fire protection system. 4. Water hoses connected to an adequate water pressure and supply system to reach each area or level of construction upon building enclosure or heating of the building. C. Enforce fire -safety discipline: 1. Store volatile materials in an isolated, protected location. 2. Avoid accumulations of flammable debris and waste in or about the Project. CLARK HALL LEARNING TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-1 FACILITY PHASE II AND CONTROLS 3-14-14 3. Prohibit smoking in the vicinity of hazardous conditions. Smoking is prohibited in all Cornell University buildings. 4. Closely supervise welding and torch -cutting operations in the vicinity of combustible materials and volatile conditions. 5. Supervise locations and operations of portable heating units and fuel. D. Maintain fire extinguishing equipment in working condition, with current inspection certificate attached to each extinguisher. E. Welding or burning operations will be conducted under a Hot Work Permit. Where such work is permitted, the Contractor shall provide an approved fire extinguisher in good operating condition within easy reach of the operating personnel. hi each instance, obtain prior approval of Cornell University Environmental Health & Safety. F. Advise Cornell University Environmental Health & Safety of any items affecting Life Safety, e.g., road blockages, exit closing, etc. 2.4 CONSTRUCTION AIDS A. Provide construction aids and equipment required to assure safety for personnel and to facilitate the execution of the Work; Scaffolds, staging, ladders, stairs, ramps, runways, platforms, railings, hoists, cranes, chutes and other such equipment. B. When permanent stair framing is in place, provide temporary treads, platforms and railings, for use by construction personnel. C. Maintain all equipment in a safe condition. 2.5 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary weather -tight enclosure of exterior walls as work progresses, as necessary to provide acceptable working conditions, provide weather protection for interior materials, allow for effective temporary heating, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. 1. Provide temporary exterior doors with self-closing hardware and padlocks or locksets. 2. Other enclosures shall be removable as necessary for work and for handling of materials. B. Provide temporary enclosures to separate work areas from areas of the existing building occupied by Owner; to prevent penetration of dust or moisture into occupied areas, to prevent damage to existing equipment, and to protect Owner's employees and operations from construction work. 1. Temporary partition and ceiling enclosures: Framing and sheet materials which comply with structural and fire rating requirements of applicable codes and standards. a. Close joints between sheet materials, and seal edges and intersections with existing surfaces, to prevent penetration of dust or moisture. CLARK HALL LEARNING TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-2 FACILITY PHASE II AND CONTROLS 3-14-14 b. In locations where fire protection is required, paint both sides of partitions and ceilings with fire -retardant paint as required by local fire regulations. 2.6 TEMPORARY WATER CONTROL A. The Contractor shall provide, maintain and operate pumps required to keep the Work free of water at all times. B. The Contractor shall: 1. Provide, maintain and operate pumps as required to keep all exterior work, free of water at all times. 2. Dispose of all water with due care and shall not infringe on the rights of others on the Site, of adjacent property owners and of the public. All cost in connection with the removal of such water shall be paid by the Contractor. 2.7 TREE, PLANT AND LAWN PROTECTION A. Preserve and protect existing trees, plants and lawns at the site which are designated to remain, and those adjacent to the site. B. Consult with Owner to remove agreed upon tree roots and branches which interfere with construction. 1. Employ or consult with a Certified Arborist to remove, and to treat cuts. C. Provide temporary fences to a height of six feet, around each, or around each group of trees and plants. Provide temporary lawn protection to prevent soil compaction. Reference Cornell University Design Standards and Details: http://cds.pdc.cornell.edu/TableOfContenls.html D. Protect root zones of trees, plants and lawn areas: 1. Do not allow vehicular traffic or parking. 2. Do not store materials or products. 3. Prevent dumping of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids. 4. Prevent puddling or continuous running water. E. Carefully supervise excavating, grading and filling, and subsequent construction operations to prevent damage. F. Replace, or suitably repair, trees, plants and lawn areas designated to remain which are damaged or destroyed due to construction operations. G. Roots 2 inches or larger that are damaged or cut during construction are to be sawed off close to the tree side of the excavation. CLARK HALL LEARNING TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-3 FACILITY PHASE II AND CONTROLS 3-14-14 H. During the leafing -out period in the spring, extra care should be exercised to reduce root damage such as keeping exposed roots wet, saturating soil when backfilling around roots, and backfilling as soon as possible. I. Trees damaged during construction should be fertilized according to standard tree maintenance practices. J. If roots are cut back as a result of construction, proper pruning standards should be applied to compensate for root loss, while maintaining the natural character of the tree. 2.8 GUARDRAILS AND BARRICADES A. Provide guardrails, barricades, fences, footways and other devices necessary to protect personnel and employees at the site, and the public, against hazards on or adjacent to the construction site. 1. Provide signs, warning lights, signals, flags and illumination as necessary to alert persons to hazards and to provide safe, adequate visibility in areas of hazards. 2.9 ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING AREAS A. Provide adequate temporary roads and walks to achieve all-weather access into the site from public thoroughfares, and within and adjacent to the site as necessary to provide uninterrupted access to field offices, work and storage areas. B. Grade and provide drainage facilities to assure runoff of rainwater and to avoid blockage of flow from adjacent areas. C. During dry weather wet down temporary unpaved areas when necessary to prevent blowing dust. 2.10 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS A. No signs to be displayed at the project site, unless authorized by the Owner. 2.11 SECURITY A. The Contractor shall provide security services as required to protect the interests of the Owner. CLARK HALL LEARNING TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-4 FACILITY PHASE II AND CONTROLS 3-14-14 2.12 FIELD OFFICES A. The Owner shall designate a space within the facility to serve as a field office for the use of the Contractor and Owner. B. Provide a designated break area within the project site limits to minimize interaction between construction personnel and the Campus community. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Consult with Owner, review site conditions and factors which affect construction procedures and temporary facilities, including adjacent properties and public facilities which may be affected by execution of the work. 1. Designate the locations and extent of temporary construction, storage, and other temporary facilities and controls required for the expeditious accomplishment of the Work. 2. Allow space for use of the site by Owner and by other contractors, as required by Contract Documents. 3.2 GENERAL A. Comply with applicable requirements specified in sections of Division 2 through 28. B. Make work structurally, mechanically and electrically sound throughout. C. Install work in a neat and orderly manner. D. Maintain, clean, service and repair facilities to provide continuous usage, and to the quality specified for the original installation. E. Relocate facilities as required by progress of construction, by storage or work requirements, and to accommodate requirements of Owner and other contractors employed at the site. F. Keep the site, at all times during the progress of the Work, free from accumulation of waste matter or rubbish and shall confine its apparatus, materials and operations of its workers to the limits prescribed except as the latter may be extended with the approval of the Owner's Representative. Cleaning of the structure or structures must be performed daily and removal of waste matter or rubbish must be performed at least once a week. Contractor shall at all times keep access road and public roads clean of mud and construction debris and maintain dust control in compliance with the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan and to the satisfaction of the Owner. CLARK HALL LEARNING TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-5 FACILITY PHASE II AND CONTROLS 3-14-14 3.3 REMOVAL A. Completely remove temporary structures, materials, equipment and services: 1. When construction needs can be met by use of permanent construction. 2. At completion of the Project. B. Repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Clean after removal. C. Restore existing or permanent facilities used for temporary purposes to specified, or to original condition. 1. Remove foundations and underground installations for temporary construction and utilities. 2. Grade the areas of the site affected by temporary installations to required elevations and slopes, and clean the area. ***END OF SECTION 01 50 00*** CLARK HALL LEARNING TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-6 FACILITY PHASE II AND CONTROLS 3-14-14 CORNELL SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain temporary utilities required by all trades for construction. Remove on completion of Work. B. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for temporary connections and distribution. 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with National Electric Code, 2008 edition. B. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and safety regulations and with utility company requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2A MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for the required usage, must not create unsafe conditions, and must not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards. 2.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY, LIGHTING AND WATER A. The Contractor shall have access to the Owner's water and electric power for constructing the Work. Temporary utility connections shall be made by the Contractor as close to its operations as possible as long as such connections do not over -load the capacity of the Owner's utilities or interfere with its customary utilization thereof. Utility access points shall be determined in cooperation with and acceptable to the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for the economic use of the Owner's Water and Power. The Owner will pay for the water and power consumed in the construction of the Work as long as economical usage of these utilities is maintained. The Owner reserves the right to meter and charge for the power and water consumed if in the opinion of the Owner the usage of these utilities is not economically conducted by the Contractor. In such an event, the Owner shall give three (3) days written notice to the Contractor of its intentions to meter and charge for temporary utilities used by the Contractor. All connection to and removal of temporary hook up will be paid for by the Contractor. C. All temporary power systems including wiring shall be removed by the Contractor when no longer required. CLARK HALL LEARNING TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-1 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 D. The minimum temporary lighting to be provided is at the rate of fifty foot candles, is to be maintained in each room and changed as required when interior walls are being erected. The required temporary lighting must be maintained for twenty-four (24) hours a day and seven (7) days a week at all stair levels and in all corridors below ground; in any and all egress; in all other spaces temporary lighting is to be maintained only during working hours. All temporary wiring and equipment shall be in conformity with the National Electric Code. E. The minimum temporary outdoor security lighting to be provided is as follows: 1. Along the perimeter of the site fence, consisting of vandal -resistant light fixtures with HID lamps, located 150 foot center, mounted on the inside of the construction fence. 2. Lighting for temporary pedestrian paths and roadways, to provide a minimum of 0.1 foot-candle on the path of travel. F. Three-phase temporary power circuits shall be installed as required to operate construction equipment of the various trades and to Install and test equipment such as pumps and elevators. The Contractor shall install and maintain temporary or permanent service for the permanently installed building equipment such as sump pumps, boilers, boiler controls, fans, pumps, so that such equipment may be operated when required and so ordered by the Owner's Representative for drainage or for temporary heat. G. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner or the Owner's Representative for approval a proposed schedule of all utility shutdowns and cutovers of all types which may be required in connection with the Work. Such schedule shall provide a minimum of four (4) weeks advance notice to the Owner prior to the time of the proposed shutdown and cutover. The Contractor shall be responsible for all charges relating to shutdowns. H. Discontinuance, Changes and Removal The Contractor shall: 1. Discontinue all temporary services required by the Contract when so directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative. The discontinuance of any such temporary service prior to the completion of the Work shall not render the Owner liable for any additional cost entailed thereby. 2. Remove and relocate such temporary facilities as directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, and shall restore the Site and the Work to a condition satisfactory to the Owner. 2.3 TEMPORARY USE OF ELEVATOR A. Use of Existing Elevator 1. If the Contractor elects to use the existing elevator equipment, the Contractor shall: a. Provide adequate protection for such equipment and shall operate such equipment within a capacity not to exceed that allowed by law, rule or regulation. CLARK HALL LEARNING TEMPORARY UTILITIES FACILITY PHASE II 01 51 00-2 3-14-14 b. Provide for the maintenance of the elevator equipment as approved by the Owner's Representative. c. Leave such equipment in perfect condition. 2.4 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION A. The Contractor shall furnish temporary heat as may be necessary for constructing the Work. B. The Contractor will be pernitted to use the building's permanent heating system for temporary heat. Permission to use the building's permanent heating system shall in no way constitute the Owner's acceptance of that portion of the Work. C. When using the permanent building systems for space conditioning, provide a written maintenance plan for acceptance by the Owner's Representative, prior to utilizing the equipment. Plan to address temporary filtering of air and water, sealing of open ducts, lubrication, operation outside of normal ranges, and controls/safeties. Return all equipment to its newly installed condition prior to acceptance testing. D. Any temporary system shall be removed when no longer required. E. During heating cycles the enclosures separating the interior building areas from outside shall be maintained closed to conserve heat energy. The Contractor shall provide for ventilation of all structures until Physical Completion of the Work and shall control such ventilation to avoid excessive moisture levels and rates of drying of construction materials, including but not limited to concrete and to plaster, and to prevent condensation on sensitive surfaces. The Contractor shall be responsible for any moisture intrusion that is detrimental to the Project. 2.5 CONTRACTOR TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Site Superintendant or his/her Representative shall carry a cellular telephone at all times. 2.6 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide adequate toilet and washing facilities for the use of personnel and employees; locate convenient to work stations. B. Existing plumbing facilities shall not be used by construction personnel. C. Facilities may be portable chemical -type toilets or temporary flush toilets connected to sanitary sewer, screened for privacy. D. Service, clean and maintain facilities and enclosures in a neat, clean and sanitary condition. CLARK HALL LEARNING TEMPORARY UTILITIES FACILITY PHASE II 01 51 00-3 3-14-14 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 REMOVAL A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer required. B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary facilities. C. Restore existing and permanent facilities used for temporary services to specified, or to original, condition. ***END OF SECTION O1 51 00*** CLARK HALL LEARNING TEMPORARY UTILITIES FACILITY PHASE II 01 51 00-4 3-14-14 CORNELL SECTION 01 51 23 Ithaca, New York HEAT DURING CONSTRUCTION 1.1 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall maintain existing or temporary building heating systems to accomplish the following: 1. Protect the existing facility and facility plumbing systems against damage due to cold temperatures. 2. Provide sufficient heat so that the Work can be accomplished in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3. Maintain construction schedules as required by the Contract. B. hrclude in the bid price an amount necessary to provide Construction Heat as required. C. Existing central steam systems may be used to the extent that they do not interfere with the safe and effective completion of Work. However, any modifications to existing systems shall be corrected prior to the conclusion of work. D. No natural gas is available to the facility for temporary heat. E. At the conclusion of the project the facility heating systems shall be returned to functional order as necessary to protect the building and facility plumbing systems. 1.2 RESPONSIBILITY A. The Contractor shall include in the bid the cost of the temporary heat. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for repairs to the facility necessitated by the failure to provide heat during any portion of the Work. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED *END OF SECTION 01 51 23* CLARK HALL LEARNING HEAT DURING CONSTRUCTION FACILITY PHASE II 01 51 23-1 3-14-14 CORNELL SECTION 01 57 13 Ithaca, New York SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing and implementing an Erosion and Sediment Control Plan. B. This Section describes minimum standards for the prevention and control of erosion during the construction process and may not be sufficient for all sites. The Contractor shall remain responsible for the means and methods of preventing erosion and may be required to employ additional means and methods as required to prevent violations of local, state, or federal standards. C. On certain sites, a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan may also be required which may include additional or more specific requirements. The requirement for a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan will be indicated by inclusion of Section 01 57 23 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan, or alternative equivalent Section, in the Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit an Erosion and Sediment Control Plan, as specified herein. B. Refer to Section 01 33 00 for general submittal requirements. 1.3 PLAN AND IMPLEMENTATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Plan shall comply with design specifications in the New York Guidelines for Urban Erosion and Sediment Control, NYS Stor nwater Management Design Manual, NYSDEC Technical and Operational Guidance Series, good engineering practices, and this Section. B. Erosion and Sediment Control Plan shall be reviewed and approved by the Environmental Health and Safety Office, and implemented prior to any site work. C. Maintain Erosion and Sediment Control measures throughout the course of site construction activities until vegetative growth is established to the Owner's satisfaction. D. At conclusion of the Project, remove all remaining temporary erosion control structures and properly dispose of accumulated sediment on-site in areas approved by the Owner. 1.4 PERFORMANCE STANDARDS A. At no time shall construction operations or any related disturbance of the site result in the impairment of local waterways. "Impairment" is defined by regulations as including, but not limited to, the following: 1. The release of water into receiving waters that causes a substantial visible contrast to natural conditions; or 2. The deposition of significant sediment into such waters. CLARK HALL LEARNING SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL FACILITY PHASE II 01 57 13-1 3-14-14 B. Such deficiencies shall be corrected immediately by the Contractor to prevent further impairment. C. In addition, and without notice to the Contractor, the Owner shall also have the right, based on the Owner's independent assessment, to stop work or engage other contractor(s) to construct or correct such work as may be necessary to prevent the impairment of waterways, and to charge all costs related to such corrective or additional actions against the Contract. D. Acceptance of an Erosion and Sediment Control plan shall not in any way imply that the plan will be adequate in preventing impairment of waters, or that maintenance and modification will not be necessary. Rather, acceptance of the plan authorizes the Contractor to begin installation of the control measures under the assumption the appropriate maintenance and modification will be required throughout the life of the project to meet the project requirements. E. The Contractor's responsibilities under this Section shall end upon final completion and payment of the Work of the entire Contract. 1.5 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PLAN COMPONENTS A. The Erosion and Sediment Control Plan submitted shall specifically address project measures, features, and areas critical to proper site erosion and sediment control. The Plan shall specifically include, but are not limited to, the following: ® Site Map, to scale; • Measures to prevent stormwater from running onto the disturbed areas of the site; • hilet protection for storm sewers and catch basins; • Measures to be used for dewatering; and • Measures to be used for soil stabilization, runoff control, and sediment control, including specific measures for the following: ® Site entrance stabilization ▪ Staging areas ® Material and soil stock piles ® Concrete curing operations ® Disturbed areas of the site In addition to the requirements included in these specifications, specific erosion control measures shown on the Contract Drawings, if any, shall also be required. B. All features shall be designed and installed in accordance with the references including in paragraph 1.3.A of this Section. C. Keep access roads and public roads clear of mud and construction debris at all times. Maintain dust control measures throughout construction. CLARK HALL LEARNING SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL FACILITY PHASE II 01 57 13-2 3-14-14 1.6 INSPECTIONS A. At the sole discretion of the Owner, inspections may be performed by a third party or on - staff representative of the Owner. 1. The Owner may inspect the site at any time, without prior notification, for compliance with the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan and applicable local, state and federal regulations. Any instances of non -compliances or failure to meet the performance standards found must be resolved within 24 hours, with more immediate responses as required to mitigate active erosion during storm events or similar instances. 2. Modify the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan as necessary, to provide full compliance with the performance standards. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 57 13* CLARK HALL LEARNING SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL FACILITY PHASE II 01 57 13-3 3-14-14 CORNELL SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION 1.1 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall receive, pile, store and handle all materials, equipment and other items incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work, including items furnished by the Owner in a careful and prudent manner and shall protect them against loss or damage from every source. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for obscuring from public view, in a manner acceptable to the Owner, staging and storage areas. 1.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. B. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction space. C. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. D. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installation. E. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct and products are undamaged. F. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement or damage. 1.3 STORAGE A. Materials stored on the Site shall be neatly piled and protected, and shall be stored in a neat and orderly manner in locations that shall not interfere with the progress of the Work or with the daily functioning of the Institution. B. Materials subject to weather damage shall be protected against the weather by floored weatherproof temporary storage sheds. C. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather -protection requirements for storage. Storage piles and sheds shall be located within the area designated as the Staging Area. The Contractor shall work to insure that the condition of the staging area has no negative impact on the Campus, visually or otherwise; and that outside of that area, the Contractor has no impact at all on the Campus. CLARK HALL LEARNING STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-1 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 E. Materials stored within the building shall be distributed in such a manner as to avoid overloading of the structural frame, and never shall be concentrated in such a manner as to exceed the equivalent of 50 pounds per square foot uniformly distributed loading. Stored materials shall be moved if they interfere with the progress of the work. F. Should it become necessary during the course of the Work to move stored materials or equipment, the Contractor, at the direction of the Owner or the Owner's Representative, shall move such materials or equipment. 1.4 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall provide security personnel and adopt other security measures as may be necessary to adequately protect materials and equipment stored at the site. The Contractor shall be obligated to replace or pay for all materials and equipment including items furnished by the Owner which have been damaged or stolen prior to completion of the Work. B. Protection of Utilities 1. If during the course of the Project, it is necessary to work adjacent to existing utilities, pipelines, structures and equipment, the Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect existing facilities from damage. 2. Locations of utilities as shown on the Contract Documents are approximate only. The Contractor shall excavate or otherwise locate to verify existing utilities in advance of its operation. C. Protective Covering 1. All finished surfaces shall be protected by the Contractor as follows: a. Door and window sills and the jambs and soffits of openings used as passageways or through which material is handled, shall be cased and protected adequately against possible damage resulting from the conduct of the work of all trades. b. All surfaces shall be clean and not marred upon delivery of the building to the Owner. The Contractor shall, without extra compensation, replace all blocks, gypsum board, plaster, paint, tile, and all other surfaces, whether or not protected, which are damaged, and shall refinish (including painting as specified) to satisfaction of Owner. c. Tight wood sheathing shall be laid under any materials that are stored on finished concrete surfaces and planking must be laid before moving any materials over these finished areas. Wheelbarrows used over such areas shall have rubber tires on wheels. d. Contractor has the responsibility for protection of carpeting and all finish flooring during all phases of the work including after installation. CLARK HALL LEARNING SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL FACILITY PHASE II 01 57 13-2 3-14-14 e. All floors exposed to view as a floor finish shall be protected by overlaying with plywood in all areas subject to construction traffic within and without the building, special care shall be taken to protect all stair finish surfaces including but not limited to flooring, wood in -fill stairs, cabinetry, counters, equipment, etc. 2. HVAC ductwork shall be protected by the Contractor as follows to prevent introduction of contaminants: a. Ductwork with interior lining shall be wrapped at the factory using plastic wrap to exclude moisture and contaminants. The wrapping shall not be removed until immediately prior to installation. b. Ductwork shall not be exposed to moisture or contaminants at any point in the manufacturing, shipping, storage or installation process. c. Ductwork shall not be staged or stored outside or otherwise exposed to the weather. d. Ductwork shall be transported only inside of covered vehicles. e. Once installed, ductwork shall be protected from contamination during the construction process. 1.5 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION A. Protect installed products, including Owner -provided products, and control traffic in immediate area to prevent damage from subsequent operations. B. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, corners, and jambs, sills, and soffits of openings in and adjacent to traffic areas. C. Cover walls and floors of elevator cabins, and jambs of cab doors, when elevators are used by construction personnel. D. Protect finish floors and stairs from dirt, wear, and damage: 1. Secure heavy sheet goods or similar protective materials in place, in areas subject to foot traffic. 2. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas subject to movement of heavy objects. 3. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas where storage of products will occur. CLARK HALL LEARNING SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL FACILITY PHASE II 01 57 13-3 3-14-14 E. Protect waterproofed and roofed surfaces: 1. Restrict use of surfaces for traffic of any kind, and for storage of products. 2. When an activity is mandatory, obtain recommendations for protection of surfaces from manufacturer. Install protection and remove on completion of activity. Restrict use of adjacent unprotected areas. F. Restrict traffic of any kind across planted lawn and landscape areas. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 66 00*** CLARK HALL LEARNING SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL FACILITY PHASE II 01 57 13-4 3-14-14 CORNELL SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting and patching, including excavation and backfill, required to complete the Work or to: 1. Make its several parts fit together properly. 2. Uncover portions of the Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work. 3. Remove and replace defective work. 4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing. B. Upon written instructions of the Owner's Representative: 1. Uncover designated portions of Work for Architect's observation of covered work. 2. Remove samples of installed materials for testing beyond that specified. 3. Remove work to provide for the alteration of previously incorrectly installed work. 4. Patch work uncovered or removed. C. Do not damage or endanger any work by cutting or altering the Work or any part thereof. D. Do not cut or otherwise alter the work of the Owner except with the written consent of the Owner's Representative. E. Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with the original structure. F. Openings and Chases 1. The Contractor shall build openings, including but not limited to channels, chases and flues as required to complete the Work as set forth in the Contract. 2. After installation and completion of any work for which openings, including but not limited to channels, chases and flues, have been provided the Contractor shall build in, over, around and finish all such openings as required to complete the Work. 3. The Contractor shall furnish and install all sleeves, inserts, hangers and supports required for the execution of the Work. CLARK HALL LEARNING CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-1 FACILITY PHASE II AND REPAIRING 3-14-14 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit a written request to the Architect prior to executing any cutting, alteration or excavation which affects the work of the Owner, or which may affect the structural safety of any portion of the Project. Include: 1. Identification of the Project. 2. Description of the affected work. 3. The necessity for doing the cutting, alteration or excavation. 4. The effect on the work of the Owner's property, or on the structural integrity of the Project. 5. Description of the proposed work: a. The scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation. b. Contractor and trades who will execute the work. c. Products proposed to be used. d. The extent of refinishing to be done. 6. Alternatives to cutting, patching or excavation. 7. Designation of the responsibility for the cost of cutting and patching. 8. Written permission of any separate contractor whose work will be affected. B. Should conditions of the work of the schedule indicate a change of products from the original installation, submit a request for substitution as specified in Section 01 25 00 - Substitutions and Product Options. C. Contractor shall submit a written notice to the Architect and the Owner designating the date and the time the work will be uncovered. CLARK HALL LEARNING CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-2 FACILITY PHASE II AND REPAIRING 3-14-14 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would change their load -carrying capacity of load -deflection ration. 1. Obtain written approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following structural elements: a. Bearing and retaining walls b. Structural concrete c. Structural steel and lintels d. Structural decking e. Miscellaneous structural metals f. Exterior wall assemblies g. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment h. Equipment supports B. Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in increased maintenance or decreased operation life or safety. Obtain written approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following operating elements or safety related systems: a. Primary operational systems and equipment b. Air or smoke barriers c. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers d. Membranes and flashings e. Fire protection systems f. Control systems g. Communication systems h. Electrical wiring systems i. Operating systems of special construction in MEP work C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Owner's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction which was cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner at no expense to the Owner. D. Waterproofing and Water Tightness: Do not cut or piece waterproofed walls or floors or any structural members without written permission of the Owner. 1. Waterproofing and Roofing Membranes a. Employ qualified contractors to accomplish all required cutting, patching, or repairing of existing waterproofing and roofing membranes. CLARK HALL LEARNING CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-3 FACILITY PHASE II AND REPAIRING 3-14-14 b. Before beginning cutting, patching or repairing of existing waterproofing and roofing membranes, obtain approval of all materials, methods and contractor to be used from the Owner and agency, or agencies, holding bond or guarantee/warranty in force for membrane. 2. Water Tightness a. The Contractor shall be responsible for water tightness of product, materials, and workmanship, including work specified to be watertight and inferred by general practice to be watertight. i. All floors (slabs), walls, roof, glazing, windows, doors, sleeves through foundation walls, flashings, and similar items shall be watertight. b. If details or materials shown or specified are felt not satisfactory to produce water tightness, the Contractor shall inform the Owner's Representative before installation and submit proposed substitution or alternative method for review and approval. The Contractor shall execute approved change and make watertight at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.4 WARRANTIES A. Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by methods and with materials in such a manner as not to void any wan-anties required or existing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Comply with the Contract Documents for each product involved. B. Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Inspect existing conditions of the Project, including elements subject to damage or to movement during: 1. Cutting and patching. 2. Excavation and backfilling. B. After uncovering work, inspect the conditions affecting the installation of products, or performance of the work. CLARK HALL LEARNING CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-4 FACILITY PHASE II AND REPAIRING 3-14-14 C. Report unsatisfactory or dubious conditions to the Architect in writing; do not proceed with the work until the Architect has provided further instructions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide shoring, bracing and other support as necessary to assure the structural safety of that portion of the Work. B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of the Project from damage. C. Provide for vertical and lateral support required to protect adjacent buildings and properties. D. Provide protection from the elements for that portion of the Project which may be exposed by cutting and patching work, including but not limited to pumping to maintain excavations free from water. E. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. F. Avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the building but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. 1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods which will assure safety, will be least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction, and will provide proper surfaces to receive new work. 1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a carbon saw or a diamond -core drill. 4. Comply with the requirements of applicable MEP work where cutting and patching of services is required. 5. Prior to cutting investigate and verify no impact to building services. CLARK HALL LEARNING CUTTING, PATCHING FACILITY PHASE II AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-5 3-14-14 C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances. 1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation. 2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 3. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes: a. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. b. For an assembly, refinish the entire unit. 4. When patching existing plaster finished walls and partitions, the Contractor shall utilize plaster trim, lath and other metal components to match the integrity of the existing system. All plaster finishes shall match existing finishes so as to provide a uniform visual appearance. 5. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. 6. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re -hang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even - plane surface of uniform appearance. D. Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials. 1 Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to remain with an approved masonry patching material applied according to manufacturer's written recommendations. E. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which will assure safety, will prevent settlement or damage to other work. CLARK HALL LEARNING CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-6 FACILITY PHASE II AND REPAIRING 3-14-14 F. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes. G. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. H. The Contractor shall replace, repair and patch all surfaces of the ground and of any structure disturbed by its operations and its Work which surfaces and structures are intended to remain even if such operations and work are outside the property lines. Such replacement, repair and patching shall be with like material and shall restore surfaces as they existed. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean area and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. ***END OF SECTION 01 73 29*** CLARK HALL LEARNING CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-7 FACILITY PHASE II AND REPAIRING 3-14-14 CORNELL SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT 1.1 INSPECTIONS A. When the Work has reached such a point of completion that the building or buildings, equipment and apparatus can be occupied and used for the purpose intended, the Owner's Representative shall make a detailed inspection of the Work to insure that all requirements of the Contract have been met and that the Work is complete and is acceptable. B. A copy of the report of the inspection shall be furnished to the Contractor as the inspection progresses so that the Contractor may proceed without delay with any part of the Work found to be incomplete or defective. C. When the items appearing on the report of inspection have been completed or corrected, the Contractor shall so advise the Owner's Representative. After receipt of this notification, the Owner's Representative shall inform the Contractor of the date and time of final inspection. A copy of the report of the final inspection containing all remaining contract exceptions, omissions and incomplete work shall be furnished to the Contractor. D. After receipt of notification of completion and all remaining contract exceptions, omissions and incomplete work from the Contractor, the Owner's Representative shall make an inspection to verify completion of the exception items appearing on the report of final inspection. 1.2 FINAL CLEAN UP A. Upon completion of the work covered by the Contract the Contractor shall leave the completed Project ready for use and occupancy without the need of further cleaning of any kind and with all Work in new condition and in perfect order. In addition, upon completion of all Work the Contractor shall remove from the vicinity of the Work all plant, buildings, rubbish, unused materials, concrete forms and other materials belonging to him or used under its direction during construction or impairing the use or appearance of the property and shall restore such areas affected by the work to their original condition, and, in the event of its failure to do so, the same shall be removed by the Owner at the expense of the Contractor, and the Contractor and/or its surety shall be liable therefore. Final clean-up shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. All finished surfaces shall be swept, dusted, washed and polished. This includes cleaning of the Work of all finishing trades where needed, whether or not cleaning by such trades is included in their respective sections of the specifications. 2. Roofs, utility tunnels, manholes and pipe trenches and spaces between the new and existing Work shall be left thoroughly cleaned. 3. Finished flooring shall be thoroughly cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Where the finish of floors has been marred or damaged in any space or area, the entire floor of that space or area shall be refinished as recommended by the manufacturers of the flooring. 5. All equipment shall be in an undamaged, bright, clean, polished and new appearing condition. CLARK HALL LEARNING PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-1 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 6. All new glass shall be washed and polished, both sides. The Contractor shall be responsible for all breakage of glass in the area of the Work from the commencement of its activities until the building is turned over to Owner. The Contractor shall replace all broken glass and deliver the entire building with all glazing intact and clean. 7. Provide new filters for all fan convectors after final cleaning. 8. Refer to exterior clean up. Remove paint and glazing compound from surfaces. B. Cleaning of Renovated Duct Systems and Existing Duct Systems in Renovated Areas: 1. Cleaning work shall be performed by firm which has minimum three years experience in mechanical cleaning of air systems. Work shall be done by skilled mechanics, technicians and experienced supervisors. 2. Clean dirt, dust and debris from air units, associated equipment arid ducts; sanitize same. Cleaning shall include: a. Cleaning of air unit's supply, return and exhaust sections including coils, fans, filter racks, outdoor air intake shaft, and interior surfaces. b. Cleaning of dampers, heating coils, humidifiers, and similar devices in ductwork. c. Marking of duct -mounted damper settings, prior to cleaning, and returning dampers to marked positions after cleaning. This includes fire dampers, zone dampers, balancing dampers and volume dampers. Cleaning of terminal supply, return and exhaust grilles, registers and diffusers. e. Cutting of access holes in ductwork for cleaning process, as well as sealing and patching of same. f. Removal of portions of duct system which cannot otherwise be thoroughly cleaned, and replacement thereof. g. Sealing of lined duct systems, upon completion. h. Removal and reinstallation of ceiling tiles and ceiling support tracks required to facilitate cleaning. i. Providing access doors required to facilitate cleaning. 3. Cleaning shall meet National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA) Standards, capable of verification by NADCA Vacuum Test. Cleanliness shall be subject to Architect's visual review; provide re -cleaning as necessary to satisfy Architect a. Cleaning methods may include vacuuming, brushing, mechanical brushing, scraping, or air washing. Use method best suited for locations involved. CLARK HALL LEARNING PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-2 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 b. Do NOT use methods which could damage the system or the building. c. Remove dirt, dust, lint and other accumulations by HEPA filtered air machine capable of minimum 6000 cfm. Air machine shall operate to obtain 1250 fpm across the work space. Use brushes, mechanical agitators or air whips to dislodge contaminants to be collected by the air machine. d. Cleaning shall begin at the furthest point of the return system and at the outdoor air intake. Cleaning shall proceed toward the air handling equipment. Cleaning shall finish at the furthest point of the supply ductwork. 1.3 MAINTENANCE STOCK A. Turn over to Owner's Representative the maintenance stock specified. Contractor shall obtain signed receipt from Owner's Representative for all maintenance stock. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED **END OF SECTION 01 77 00*** CLARK HALL LEARNING PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-3 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 CORNELL SECTION 01 78 22 Ithaca, New York INVENTORIES 1.1 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY A. The Owner shall provide the Contractor with a list of Equipment Types to be inventoried and an Excel template. B. The Contractor shall populate the template (see Example Equipment List to be inventoried in Section 1.2). Once populated, the Contractor shall electronically return to the list to the Owner's Representative. The initial data to be captured on each piece of equipment shall include: 1. Naive of Product 2. Equipment Classification 3. Manufacturer 4. Model Number 5. Serial Number 6. Cost 7. Location (including Building and Room Number) 8. Acquisition Date (Date of Installation) C. The Owner shall from the Contractor provided data create a follow-up equipment Excel template that contains the MAXIMO ID for the equipment with all the name plate and specification fields for each type of equipment. This template shall then be returned to the Contractor. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the initial labeling of the equipment and its disconnects with the MAXIMO ID using a electronic label maker. ID labels shall be in close proximity to Equipment Identification information, visually locatable from the access point to the equipment and on the face of disconnects. E. The Contractor shall then populate the MAXIMO Equipment Specification Template with the equipment nameplate, specification information, and warranty information. The Contractor shall electronically submit the equipment data and any related documentation (i.e. - O&M manuals) to the Owner's Representative. CLARK HALL LEARNING INVENTORIES 01 78 22-1 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 F. EXAMPLE EQUIPMENT LIST ® Building Equipment o AC Drive/VSD ® Air Dryer ® Backflow Preventor ® Air Compressor • Building • Sprinkler ® Control ® Vacuum • Pump • Condensate • Glycol • CWC • HWC • Potable • Sanitary Sewer • Storm Sewer • Sump • Quality Water • Fuel • Fan • Exhaust • Supply • Return • Fume Hood • Furnace • Generator • Hot Water Heater • Heat Exchangers • Boiler • Tank • Unit Heater • Fan Coil • VAV Box • Transfer Switch • Motor • Pump • Fan • Lift/Levelers • Water Softener • Reverse Osmosis PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 78 22*** CLARK HALL LEARNING INVENTORIES 01 78 22-2 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 CORNELL SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1.1 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operation of products furnished under the Contract. 1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section, as referenced in other pertinent sections of Specifications and as necessary to operate the completed work. 2. Operations and maintenance data shall be available to the Owner at time of substantial completion. B. Instruct Owner's personnel in the maintenance of products and in the operation of equipment and systems. 1.2 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual and CD for use by Owner's personnel. B. Format: 1. Three (3) hard copies, size: 8-1/2" x 11" and a CD with electronic files. 2, Text: Manufacturer's printed data, scanned .pdf and/or neatly typewritten Word file. 3. Drawings: a. Drawings are required in both hard copy and electronic format. b. Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text. c. Fold larger drawings to the size of the text pages. 4. Provide fly -leaf for each separate product, and major component parts of equipment. a. Provide type description of product, and major component parts of equipment. b. Provide indexed thumb tab. 5. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS". List: a. Title of Project b. Identity of separate structure as applicable. c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual. CLARK HALL LEARNING OPERATING AND 01 78 23-1 FACILITY PHASE II MAINTENANCE DATA 3-14-14 C. Binders: 1. Commercial quality three-ring binders with durable and cleanable plastic covers. 2. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related consistent groupings. 1.3 CONTENT OF MANUAL A. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in a systematic order. 1. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. 2. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to the content of the volume. 3. List, with each product, the name, address and telephone number of: a. Subcontract or installer. b. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate. c. Identify the area of responsibility of each. d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement. 4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents. B. Product Data: 1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product. 2. Annotate each sheet to: a. Clearly identify the specific product or part installed. b. Clearly identify the data applicable to the installation. c. Delete reference to inapplicable information. C. Drawings: 1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate: a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. b. Control and flow diagrams. 2. Coordinate drawings with information on Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation. 3. Do not use Record Documents as maintenance drawings. CLARK HALL LEARNING OPERATING AND 01 78 23-2 FACILITY PHASE II MAINTENANCE DATA 3-14-14 D. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation: 1. Organize in a consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. 2. Provide a logical sequence of instructions for each procedure. E. Original copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued. 1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, give: a. Proper procedures in the event of failure. b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranties or bonds. 1.4 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Submit a CD with electronic files and three (3) copies of complete manual in final form. B. Content, for architectural products, applied materials and finishes: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products: a. Catalog number, size, and composition. b. Color and texture designations. c. Information required for reordering special -manufactured products. 2. Instructions for care and maintenance: a. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods. b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are detrimental to the product. c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C. Content, for moisture -protection and weather -exposed products: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products. a. Applicable standards b. Chemical composition c. Details of installation 2. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair. D. Additional requirements for maintenance data: The respective sections of Specifications. CLARK HALL LEARNING OPERATING AND 01 78 23-3 FACILITY PHASE II MAINTENANCE DATA 3-14-14 1.5 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Submit a CD with electronic files and three (3) copies of complete manual in final form. B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate: 1. Description of unit and component parts. a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of all replaceable parts. 2. Operating procedures: a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions. b. Regulation, control, stopping, shut -down and emergency instructions. c. Summer and winter operating instructions. d. Special operating instructions. 3. Maintenance Procedures: a. Routine operations. b. Guide to "trouble -shooting". c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly. d. Alignment, adjusting and checking. 4. Servicing and lubrication required: a. List of lubricants required. 5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. 7. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance. a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear. b. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. 8. As -installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. CLARK HALL LEARNING OPERATING AND 01 78 23-4 FACILITY PHASE II MAINTENANCE DATA 3-14-14 9. Each contractor's coordination drawings. a. As -installed color coded piping diagrams. 10. Charts of valve tag numbers, with the location and function of each valve. 11. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 12. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications. C. Content, for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate: 1. Description of system and component parts: a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. 2. Circuit directories of panelboards: a. Electrical service. b. Controls. c. Communications. 3. As -installed color coded wiring diagrams. 4. Operating procedures: a. Routine and normal operating instructions. b. Sequences required. c. Special operating instructions. 5. Maintenance procedures: a. Routine operations. b. Guide to "trouble -shooting". c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly. d. Adjustment and checking. 6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. CLARK HALL LEARNING OPERATING AND 01 78 23-5 FACILITY PHASE II MAINTENANCE DATA 3-14-14 7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 8. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications. D. Additional requirements for operations and maintenance data: See the respective sections of Specifications and General Conditions. 1.6 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Submit two (2) copies of preliminary draft of proposed formats and outlines of contents sixty (60) calendar days prior to acceptance. 1. Architect will review draft and return one copy (1) with comments. B. Submit one copy (1) of completed data in final form twenty (20) calendar days prior to final acceptance. 1. Copy will be returned with comments. C. Submit specified number of copies of approved data in final form prior to final acceptance. 1.7 INSTRUCTIONS OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to final inspections or acceptance, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in the operation, adjustment and maintenance of all products, equipment and systems: Instruction time shall be sufficient to fully instruct all shifts of the Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. B. Operations and maintenance shall constitute the basis of instruction: 1. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance. C. Submit typewritten statement, signed by each of Owner's Representatives who have been instructed, describing: 1. Method of Instruction. 2. Equipment and Systems Operated. 3. Length of Instruction Period. D. Contractor is fully responsible until final acceptance, even though operated by Owner's personnel, unless otherwise agreed in writing. CLARK HALL LEARNING OPERATING AND 01 78 23-6 FACILITY PHASE II MAINTENANCE DATA 3-14-14 1.8 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. List under clear plastic (1/8" thick) all operating, maintenance and starting precautions and procedures to be followed by Owner for operating all systems and equipment. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 78 23*** CLARK HALL LEARNING OPERATING AND 01 78 23-7 FACILITY PHASE II MAINTENANCE DATA 3-14-14 CORNELL SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS 1.1 GENERAL The Contractor shall: A. Compile specified warranties and bonds. B. Compile specified service and maintenance contracts. C. Co -execute submittals when so specified. D. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents. E. Submit to Architect for transmittal to Owner. 1.2 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Assemble warranties, bonds and service and maintenance contracts, executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers and subcontractors. B. Number of original copies required: Two (2) each. C. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in orderly sequence. Provide complete information for each item. 1. Product or work item. 2. Finn, with name of principal, address and telephone number. 3. Scope. 4. Date of beginning of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract. 5. Duration. 6. Provide information for Owner's personnel: a. Proper procedure in case of failure. b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond. 7. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. 1.3 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. Prepare in duplicate packets. B. Format: 1. Size 8-1/2 in. x 11 in., punch sheets for 3 -ring binder. a. Fold larger sheets to fit binders. CLARK HALL LEARNING WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-1 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 2. Cover: Identify each packet with typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS". List: a. Title of Project b. Name of Contractor C. Binders: Commercial quality, three-ring, with durable and cleanable plastic covers. 1.4 TIME OF SUBMITTALS A. Make final submittals within ten (10) days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final request for payment. B. For items of work when acceptance is delayed materially beyond the Date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the start of the warranty period. 1.5 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED A. Submit warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts as specified in the respective sections of Specifications. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 78 36*** CLARK HALL LEARNING WARRANTIES AND BONDS FACILITY PHASE II 01 78 36-2 3-14-14 CORNELL SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS 1.1 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall maintain at the site, during construction, one record copy of: 1. Drawings 2. Specifications 3. Addenda 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract 5. Architect's Field Orders or written instructions. 6. Final Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 7. Field Test records 8. Construction photographs 9. Fire Alarm Wiring Diagrams (Device locations & labeling); marked up riser diagram 1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for construction. 1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents. 2. Provide cabinet or storage space for storage of samples. B. File documents and samples in accordance with Data Filing Format of the Uniform Construction Index. C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. D. Make documents and samples available at all times for review by the Owner's Representative and the Architect. 1.3 RECORDING A. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat large printed letters. B. Record information concurrently with construction progress. 1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. CLARK HALL LEARNING RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-1 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 C. Drawings Record drawings shall consist of making any changes neatly and clearly on the Contract Drawings using colored ink or pencil, and the construction record drawings shall be kept current on a day-to-day basis in concert with the progress of the work. Where applicable, the change marked on a drawing is to carry the notation "per Change Order No. X", or similar reference which cites the reason for the change. The day-to-day construction record drawings shall be made available to the Architect or Owner's Representative for review upon request. The "Record" drawings shall show the following information: 1. all significant changes in plan, sections, elevations and details, such as shifts in location of walls, doors, windows, stairs and the like made during construction; 2. all significant changes in foundations, columns, beams, openings, concrete reinforcing, lintels, concealed anchorages and "knock -out" panels made during construction; 3. final location of electric signal system panels, final arrangement of all circuits and any significant changes made in electrical signal system design as a result of Change Order or job conditions; 4. final location and arrangement of all mechanical equipment and concealed gas, sprinkler, domestic, sanitary and drainage systems piping and other plumbing, including, but not limited to, supply and circulating mains, principal valves, meters, clean -outs, drains, pumps and controls, vent stacks, sanitary and storm water drainage; and 5. final location and arrangement of all underground utilities, connections to building and/or rerouting of existing utilities, including, but not limited to, sanitary, storm, heating, electric, signal, gas, water and telephone.. 6. Final topographic contours of finished earth surfaces, finished grades, streets, etc. 7. Additions to project, elimination of project components, relocation of components. D. Specifications and Addenda Legibly mark each section to record: 1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and Supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed. 2. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order. 1.4 SUBMITTAL A. At Contract close-out, deliver all record documents to the Owner's Representative. CLARK HALL LEARNING RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-2 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing: 1. Date 2. Project title and number 3. Contractor's name and address 4. Title and number of each record document 5. Certification that each document is complete and accurate 6. Signature of Contractor or its authorized representative. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 78 39*** CLARK HALL LEARNING RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-3 FACILITY PHASE II 3-14-14 Cornell University Physical Sciences Instructional Facility Phase II Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca, NY Page 02 41 19-1 SECTION 02 41 19 DEMOLITION, REMOVAL, CUTTING, & PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this section shall be governed by the contract documents. Provide materials, labor, equipment, and services necessary to thrnish, deliver, and install all work of this section as shown on the drawings, as specified herein, and/or as required by job conditions. B. The General Construction and Site work Contractor (herein known as contractor) work shall include, but not be limited, to the following: 1. All demolition and removal work in existing spaces and related work, complete, as indicated and noted on the drawings and as specified herein. 2. Removal of existing construction as required by the drawings and necessary for all alterations and rearrangements including but not limited to: steel columns, steel beams, foundation walls, windows, masonry, concrete. etc.. 3. Removal of existing materials as required. from walls, floors and ceilings to accommodate the new materials. 4. Cutting existing construction. 5. Protection of existing facilities which are scheduled or indicated to remain. 6. Cut new openings to accommodate new work. 7. Removal of debris, rubbish, materials and equipment resulting from removals (except material to be reused). 8. Numbering, cataloging storing and protecting salvaged material and material in good condition to be reused. 9. Demolishing and removing existing partitions including doors and frames where indicated on the drawings. 10. Maintaining adequate fire prevention procedures and techniques during the entire course of the work. 11. Scheduling of the work as required by the Contract Documents. 12. Fees and Permits: Obtain and pay for all fees, permits and inspections when and if required in connection with the demolition, removal and disposal of debris. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Demolition, Removal, Cutting, & Patching Page 02 41 19-2 13. All other cutting, piecing out, re -arranging, filling in, etc. of existing work as necessary to properly complete the work whether or not specifically shown on the drawings and/or specified, in accordance with encountered conditions. 14. Patching, filling and replacing all surfaces disturbed, cut, damaged, or in need or repair or made imperfect by the alteration or removal work. All patching for mechanical and electrical work at all locations. Refer to mechanical and electrical drawings. 15. Repairing, replacing, cleaning and realigning existing work which is scheduled to remain. Replacement pieces and/or parts shall match existing materials in every respect as approved by the Architect. C. Specific demolition requirement but not limited to the following: 1. Refer to drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. New work and materials shall be as specified under the other Sections of he Specifications. B. Division 1: Include All Specification Sections PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 VERIFYING CONDITIONS A. Visit the building and spaces to determine by inspection all existing conditions, including access to the building, the nature of structure, objects and materials to be encountered, and all other facts concerning or affecting the work. Information on the Drawings showing existing conditions does not constitute a guarantee that other items niay not be found or encountered. B. Examine the documents covering the work of this section and refer to the existing conditions, including mechanical and electrical areas, which may affect the work of this section or require coordination with other trades. C. Before starting work, make a thorough examination of those portions of the structure in which the work is to be performed. Check the work adjoining or at underlying locations, in which the work is to be performed. Report to the Architect any and all conditions which may interfere with or otherwise affect or prevent the proper execution and completion of the work. Do not start the work until such conditions have been examined and a course of action mutually agreed upon. D. Failure to notify the Architect and Owner of unsatisfactory conditions and electrical areas, which may affect the work of this section or require coordination with other trades. E. The execution of work constitutes acceptance of the conditions. Later claims will not constitute relief from the requirements of the Specifications under this Section. nor will extra compensation be paid by the Owner. Clark Hall Phase 1I - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Demolition, Removal, Cutting. & Patching Page 02 41 19-3 F. Prior to start of demolition, the Contractor shall call to the attention of the Owner any damage, cracks or other imperfections in the work adjacent to demolition areas. G. Obvious existing conditions, installations and obstructions affecting the work shall be taken into consideration as necessary work to be done, the same as though they were completely shown or described. H. Items of existing construction indicated to remain upon completion of the Contract, but which require removal to complete the work, shall be carefully removed and replaced as required. The replaced work shall match its condition at the start of the work unless otherwise required. I. Contractor shall be responsible for the design and construction of its shoring. 3.02 SCHEDULING OF THE PROJECT WORK A. Execute the work in connection with the existing building as indicated. In case of discrepancy between the plans and the actual conditions at the building, report the conditions to the Architect. B. Take every precaution to protect the existing work indicated to remain. If work that is to remain becomes damaged during the course of the demolition operations it will be repaired and/or replaced to the Owner's satisfaction, at no additional cost. C. Demolition or removal work shall not be performed in the existing building until a schedule of operations has been formulated by the Contractor. D. If there are any deviations from the agreed upon schedule, such deviations shall be reported to all parties, a minimum of 72 hours before a deviation takes effect, to allow the other parties to adjust their schedules accordingly, or as mutually agreed upon by all parties. E. Make necessary arrangements to have utilities and services temporarily disconnected while performing the work or as required, maintained for temporary use, and formulate a schedule of disruption with all parties, indicating when and how long, such disruptions will continue, and the provisions to be provided for temporary utilities and/or services. F. Schedule work so as to impose a minimum of hardship on the present operation of the facilities and the performance of the work of other trades. G. Provide approved temporary tire -resistant partitions for the protection of the existing facility, its contents and the work of this contract against dust, weather, damage and noise. Relocate, as approved and as directed, temporary partitions from time to time as work progresses. 3.03 DEMOLITION OPERATIONS A. Perform remodeling, demolition, removal and relocation work in strict accordance with Owner's instructions and applicable Federal. State and Local health and safety standards, codes and ordinances. Where conflicts occur, the more restrictive requirement shall be adhered to. 1. Contractor is solely responsible for construction safety and shall hold the Owner, Owner's Representative, and Architect and their assigned representatives harmless Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Demolition, Removal, Cutting., & Patching Page 02 41 19-4 from litigation and other legal related situations arising out of his failure to perform this portion of the work. B. Execute the demolition in a careful and orderly manner with the least possible disturbance to the public, or functioning of the existing portion of the building, as mutually agreed upon with the Owner. C. In general, demolish and salvage materials in small sections. Remove wood and/or loose members individually. D. Work shall conform to applicable requirements of the various technical sections of the Specifications for this Project; however, the individual sections of the Specifications do not necessarily mention or describe in detail the trade responsibility for removal or relocation of existing construction. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for distribution of the work within the various trades involved. E. Accidental or careless damage to work to remain in place: Restore to a condition as good as or better than existed before work was commenced and at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Remove garbage and rubbish as a result of this work from the existing building in an orderly manner. Do not throw rubbish out of windows. Provide sufficient containers to hold the rubbish prior to its removal from the building. G. Perform demolition and removal work completely and remove debris from the building. Use such methods as required to complete the work within the limitations of governing regulations. H. Take necessary precautions to prevent dust and dirt fi-om rising by wetting demolished debris. Excessive use of water will not be permitted. I. Burning of materials on the premises will not be permitted. J. Partial removal: items of salvageable value to the Contractor may be removed from the structure as the work progresses. Salvaged items must be transported from the Project Site as they are removed. Storage or sale of removed items on the Project Site will not be permitted. 3.04 WORKMANSHIP A. Employ only competent mechanics thoroughly skilled in their respective crafts to perform the work. B. Perform the work in accordance with the highest standards and established practices in the trade, and conform to all the rules and regulations of all city, state and federal authorities having jurisdiction over this work. C. Utility services: Maintain existing utilities, indicated to remain, keep in service, and protect against damage during demolition and removal operations. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to the governing authorities. D. Provide and maintain adequate shoring and bracing to properly maintain the existing construction when cutting new openings and other conditions as required. Shoring and Clark Hall Phase 1I - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Demolition, Removal, Cutting, & Patching Page 02 41 19-5 bracing shall be designed to have the proper strength to sustain the loads and stresses encountered and sufficient to carry the superimposed loads with a safety factor of 4. E. The other trades whose work is affected by or dependent upon the work of this section shall be kept informed of the schedule of operations. F. Furnish and maintain temporary types of protection as necessary to adequately protect and prevent accidental injury to the public, Owner's personnel and personnel employed at the work. Take all necessary precautions to keep trespassers out of work areas. Properly secure work areas from entry when work is not in progress. G. Traffic: Conduct demolition and removal operations and the removal of debris to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and used facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks or other occupied or used facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction. H. Keep roadways and walks reasonably clean during working hours and thoroughly clean and sweep them. When an exterior opening is created which is open to the exterior elements provide temporary watertight secure protection and do not remove until permanent opening are in place and watertight. J. Surplus material resulting from the work which may be left over after the work is completed, shall be hauled away and the building shall be left entirely clean and unobstructed. K. Repair, or replace at the direction of the Architect, any and all equipment, apparatus, parts of the building, property of the Owner not specified to be demolished, and not specified to be removed, but which are damaged during the progress of, and as a result of, the work of this section. Make any and all such repairs, replacements, and recertifications to restore the damaged portions or items to at least their original condition at the time of damage, and without extra cost. 3.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Perform the cutting and patching phase of the operations using skilled men in a clean, neat and orderly manner. Adjoining work or finishes that are disturbed. defaced, or otherwise defective, shall be neatly repaired in good order as approved by the Architect. Patched surfaces shall be neatly filled and made to match adjoining existing surfaces. Upon completion, existing areas that may have been worked on shall be left thoroughly clean and in neat and acceptable condition. B. Do the cutting of the present work as made necessary by the alterations and the installation of new work. Cutting of mechanical work will be done under each respective trade as specified in the mechanical specifications. Patching will be done by general construction trades. Cut site pavement at nearest joint. C. The size, locations, etc., of items requiring an opening, chase or other provisions to receive it by any trade shall be given by the trade requiring same in ample time to avoid undue cutting of the new work to be installed. This provision shall not relieve the Contractor from keeping informed as to the required openings, chases, etc., nor from responsibility for the correctness thereof, nor for cutting and repairing after the new work is in place. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Demolition, Removal, Cutting, & Patching Page 02 41 19-6 D. When it is required that new finishes, materials, equipment or items shall match the existing; and that, that item, material, or equipment is no longer manufactured, the Contractor shall notify the Architect before proceeding with the work. E. Refer to related sections of the specifications for detailed description of materials and workmanship which shall govern. In this Section it is intended only to describe the general scope of work involved and cover items not specified elsewhere in the general specifications. F. Patching and Repairing 1. Matching existing work: Except where otherwise specifically indicated or specified as a definite change, the finish materials and appearance of the new patch work shall match the existing contiguous materials and finishes in all respects. Repairs and/or continuations of existing work shall be relatively imperceptible in the finished work when viewed under finished lighting conditions from a distance of six (6) feet. 2. Patching: repairing and finishing of existing work: Perform in compliance with the application requirements of specification, technical section covering the work to be performed and the requirements of this section. 3. Include all patching in connection with new work that may be required to make its several parts come together and fit it to receive or be received by the work of other trades as shown and/or specified, or reasonably implied by the drawings and specifications. 4. Work disturbed due to all alterations shall be repaired to match surrounding construction and finishes including painting or whatever finish exists. 5. Piping, electrical work, ducts, if they are disturbed, or are built new or altered, shall be furred in and finished to match surrounding construction and finishes. 6. Perform repairing, patching and piecing out, filling in, restoring and refinishing using mechanics skilled in their trade and complete in a workmanlike manner to leave work in condition satisfactory to the Architect and as described throughout the various sections of the specifications. 7. If where indicated and/or required, that new finishes, material, equipment or item shall match existing; and that, that item, material, or equipment is no longer manufactured, the Contractor shall notify the Architect before proceeding with the work. 3.06 DISPOSAL OF DEBRIS A. All material, debris and rubbish resulting from remodeling work: Clean up, remove from the building and site as it is removed and legally dispose of. Leave all areas of work in "broom clean" condition. END OF SECTION Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Cornell University Physical Science Instructional Facility Phase II Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca, NY Page 03 54 16-1 SECTION 03 54 16 CEMENT -BASED UNDERLAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Work includes: 1. This Section includes cement -based, polymer -modified, self -leveling underlay- ment for interior finish flooring. 2. Provide cement based underlayment at entire existing and new floor areas prior to installing any wall framing. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 2. Division 9 Sections for patching and leveling compounds applied with finish flooring. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Plans indicating substrates, locations, and average depths of cement - based underlayment based on survey of substrate conditions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer (applicator) who is acceptable to manufacturer, who has completed cement -based underlayment applications similar in material and extent to that required for this Project, and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Cement Based Underlayment Page 03 54 16-2 1.5 DELIVERY. STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage, nixing with other components, and application. B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deteriora- tion from moisture or other detrimental effects. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for substrate temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventila- tion, and other conditions affecting underlayment performance. B. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after applica- tion recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate cement -based underlayment with requirements of finish flooring products, including adhesives, specified in Division 9 Sections. 1. Before installing surface sealers recommended by underlayment manufacturer, if any, verify compatibility with finish flooring installation adhesives. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be in- corporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. K-15 Self -Leveling Underlayment Concrete; Ardex, Inc. 2. Selby Self -Leveling Underlayment; Harris Specialty Chemicals, Inc. 3. Thoro Underlayment, Self -Leveling; Harris Specialty Chemicals, Inc. 2.2 PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS Underlayment: Cement -based, polymer -modified, self -leveling product that can be ap- plied in uniform thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement, or hydraulic or blended hydrau- lic cement as defined by ASTM C 219. Clark Hall Phase I1 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Cement Based Underlayment Page 03 54 16-3 2. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 3. Underlayment Additive: Resilient -emulsion product of underlayment manufac- turer formulated for use with underlayment when applied to substrate and condi- tions indicated. B. Aggregate: Well -graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch, or coarse sand as recom- mended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for underlayment thickness required. C. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F. D. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate, conditions, and application indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with installer present, for conditions affecting performance of un- derlayment including substrate moisture content. Begin underlayment application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry, neutral -pH substrate for underlayment ap- plication. 1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflect- ing) through underlayment according to manufacturer's written recommenda- tions. 2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking. B. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing com- pounds, form -release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Nonporous Substrates: For ceramic tile, quarry tile, and terrazzo substrates, remove waxes, sealants, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond accord- ing to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlay - mens according to manufacturer's written instructions. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Cement Based Underlayment Page 03 54 16-4 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written Instructions. 1. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to- substrate and intercoat adhesion. B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. C. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface. 1. Apply a final layer without aggregate if required to produce smooth surface. 2. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. D. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contami- nation during application and curing processes. E. Do not install finish flooring over underlayment until after time period recommended by underlayment manufacturer. F. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, in- cluding areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION 03 54 16 Clark Hall Phase I1 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Cornell University Physical Science Instructional Facility Phase 1I Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca, NY Page 06 10 00-1 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this section shall be governed by the contract documents. Provide materials, labor, equipment and services necessary to furnish, deliver and install all work of this Section as shown on the drawings, as specified herein, and/or as required by job conditions. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. General Requirements — Division 1 B. Finish Carpentry: Section 06 20 23 C. Aluminum Entrances & Storefronts: Section 08 41 13 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCES A. Lumber grading rules and wood species: In conformance with PS20. B. Grading rules of the following associations shall apply to materials furnished under this section. 1. Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association, Inc. (NLMA) 2. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB) 3. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB) 4. Western Woods Products Association (WWPA) C. Grade Marks: 1. Identify lumber and plywood by official grade mark. 2. Lumber: a. Grade stamp to contain symbol of grading agency certified by Board of Review, American Lumber Standards Committee, mill number or name, grade of lumber, species grouping or combination designation, rules under which graded where applicable, and condition of seasoning at time of manufacture. b. S -GRN: Unseasoned. c. S -Dry: Maximum 19% moisture content. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Rough Carpentry Page 06 10 00-2 d. MC -15 or KD: Maximum of 15% moisture content. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver rough carpentry materials to the site ready for use, with each piece of lumber clearly marked as to grade, type and mill, and place in an area protected from the weather. B. Deliver rough hardware in sealed kegs and/or other containers which shall bear labels as to type and kind. C. Pile lumber for rough usage when delivered at the site in stacks to insure drainage and free circulation. Support stack on skids, placed to give slope of not less than 1/2" per foot to the stack with a minimum clearance of 6" above grade and cover with tarpaulins or other watertight coverings. Store grounds and similar small sized lumber inside the building immediately after delivery. D. Do not store seasoned lumber in wet or damp portions of the building. E. Protect fire retardant materials against high humidity and moisture during storage and erection. Remove delivered materials which do not conform to specified grading rules or are otherwise not suitable for installation from the job site and replace with acceptable materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMBER A. Lumber: The best of its respective kinds, as best suited for the particular purpose intended, free from shakes, loose knots, or other imperfections which might impair its strength, durability or appearance. B. Sizes indicated on the drawings or specified herein are nominal sizes, except where finished dimensions are stated. The Contractor may use lumber of larger sizes than the dress dimensions listed in the American Lumber Standards for the various board measure sizes provided he makes all necessary adjustments of contingent work and assumes all responsibility for such adjustments. C. Lumber: Surfaced four sides (S4S) unless otherwise specified. D. Lumber for rough woodwork on the interior of the building shall be a commercial softwood species: 1 . General framing Standard and better or stud grade. 2. Plates, blocking, nailers Utility grade. E. Lumber for grounds, blocking, nailers, curbs and the like on the roofs, and wherever in contact with masonry or concrete on the exterior, shall be of Tidewater red cypress, Western red cedar or Redwood of Utility Grade or approved equal. Clark Hall Phase I1 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Rough Carpentry Page 06 10 00-3 F. Rough lumber: Either air-dried or kiln -dried to a moisture content not to exceed 19% as per ASTM D-2016. G. Plywood for rough carpentry work shall conform to Product Standard PSI -74. 1. Plywood for securing telephone equipment in BDF and IDF rooms shall conform to grade designation C -D Plugged INT -APA. 2.02 ROUGH HARDWARE A. Rough hardware for exterior use shall be hot -dipped galvanized, or stainless steel. B. Nails: Common steel wire, untreated for interior work as per FS FF -N-105, treated for exterior work. C. Bolts: Standard mild steel, square head machine bolts with square nuts and malleable iron or steel plate washers or carriage bolts with square nuts and cut washers conforming to the following: 1. Bolts FS -FF -B-575 and 584. 2. Nuts FF -N -836D. 3. Expansion shields FS -FF -B-561. 4. Toggle bolts FS -FF -B-588. 5 Lag screws and bolts FS -FF -B-561. D. Wood screws: As per FS -FF -S-11 ID. E. Concrete anchors: Standard expansion -shield self -drilling type concrete anchors where so shown or noted on the drawings or where approved by the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine surfaces and conditions to which this work is to be attached or applied, and notify the Architect if conditions or surfaces exist which are detrimental to the proper and expeditious installation of the work. Starting on the work shall imply acceptance of the surfaces and conditions to perform the work as specified. B. Verify, by measurements taken at the job site, all dimensions affecting the work. Bring field dimensions which are at variance to the attention of the Architect. Obtain decision regarding corrective measures before the start of fabrication of items affected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Erect rough carpentry true to line, levels and dimensions required; squared, aligned, plumbed, and securely fastened in place. Clark Hall Phase I1 - l00% CD - 3/14/2014 Rough Carpentry Page 06 10 00-4 2. No shimming shall be done, except where required to true up furring, blocking and the like, without approval of the Architect. If shimming is required for installation, use metal or fiber shims. Cardboard shims will not be permitted. 3. Do all cutting, fitting, drilling and tapping of other work as required to secure in place and to perform the work included herein, and all the cutting and fitting of carpentry work, for the work of other trades. B. Ground, Blocking and Furring: 1. Provide grounds, blocking, nailing strips, furring, curbs, etc., wherever shown or required to afford proper support of construction and materials, including the work of other trades and dress to the sizes shown or required and set true at the proper lines and levels to receive the finished work. Block or shim out as required and securely fasten in place. 2. Secure ground to wood members with proper nails or screws spaced 12" o.c. and one inch from ends. Recess all fastenings as required, to conform with requirements of finish materials, unless otherwise noted. 3. Fasten grounds using fastening devices to suit conditions encountered in the field. Space fasteners a maximum of 12" o.c. 4. Provide all wood grounds required for the securing in place of all finished carpentry work, cabinet work, and other items to be furnished under this or other sections of the Specifications. Coordinate this work so as not to delay job progress. 5. Except as specified or indicated otherwise, grounds or furring strips shall be 1-1/2" wide of required thickness and in no case less than 3/4" thick. 6. Grounds, blocking, furring and all other rough carpentry items shall be furnished and installed with as few joints as possible to accommodate the work of other sections as noted on the drawings or as required to suit conditions encountered in the field. C. Rough Hardware: 1. Securely fasten rough carpentry together using nails, spikes, lag screws or bolts as required by conditions encountered in the field. 2. Provide all rough or framing hardware, such as nails, screws, bolts, anchors, hangers, clips, inserts, miscellaneous fastenings and similar items of the proper size and kind to adequately secure the work together and in place, in a rigid and substantial manner. 3. Secure rough carpentry to concrete with countersunk bolts in expansion sleeves or other approved manner, with fastenings not more than 16 inches apart. 4. Bolts: Standard stock machine bolts conforming to U.S. Bureau of Standards coarse thread series. Exposed bolts nuts: Square head with matching nuts. Bolted connections shall be re -tightened before final acceptance. In the case of bolted connections in concealed locations, immediately before the area is sealed off. Clark Hall Phase 1I - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Rough Carpentry Page OG 10 00-5 5. Bolts in nailers and other rough woodwork shall be counter sunk, secured with washers and nuts, with bolts cut off flush with surfaces and peened as may be required to receive finished work of other sections. 6. Inserts to secure wood nailers to concrete: Malleable iron threaded inserts with 3/8" diameter bolts of length to allow for countersinking. Unless otherwise noted, they shall be placed at end of each nailer and at intervals not exceeding 30" o.c. Bolt to wood forms as required. 7. Furnish to other trades for buildings into the work or attaching to work which is to be built-in, anchors, bolts, wall plugs, nailing blocks, etc., which are required for the proper fastening and installation of the work or other items as called for in this section. END OF SECTION Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Cornell University Physical Sciences Instructional Facility Phase II Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca, NY Page 06 20 23-1 SECTION 06 20 23 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section shall be governed by the Contract Documents. Provide materials, labor, equipment and services necessary to furnish, deliver and install all work of this Section as shown on the drawings, as specified herein, and/or as required by job conditions. B. The work shall include, but is not limited to the following: 1. Receive, store and install hollow metal work. 2. Receive, store and install finish hardware. 3. At Seminar Rooms, adjustable shelves at storage closets. 4. Receive, store and install wood doors. 5. Interior millwork, including but not limited to, solid red oak trim at select doors and at marker board trim at seminar room teaching walls (fire -treated). 6. Rough hardware. 7. Rough blocking nailers (fire -treated). 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. General Requirements — Division 1 B. Aluminum Framed Entrances & Storefront: Section 08 41 13 C. Finish Hardware: Section 08 71 00 D. Wood Doors: Section 08 14 16 E. Painting: Section 09 84 33 F. Gypsum Drywall: Section 09 29 00 G. Rough Carpentry: Section 06 10 00 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCES A. Reference Standards 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 2. Department of Commerce 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Finish Carpentry Page 06 20 23-2 4. Architectural Woodwork institute (AWI) 5. Architectural Wood Preservers Institute (AWPI-AWPB) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit three (3) each of the following to Architect for review prior to delivery and installation. I . Plastic Laminate - each color 2. Stain and Paint Grade Moldings - 6" long - each type and kind. B. Shop Drawings Submit shop drawings to the Architect for review in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Shop drawings shall include large scale plans, elevations sections and details of each item of work, clearly noting dimensions, materials, construction of joints. thicknesses, fastening devices, finishes and a list of each piece of hardware giving manufacturer, model number, size and finish. 3. Clearly note the work adjacent to or abutting, and coordinate accordingly. C. Product Literature I. Submit for approval printed standard manufacturer's literature and data sheets for each manufactured item specified herein. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A. Protect finished woodwork from the weather while in transit from point or origin or fabrication to the job site. When delivered at the building place materials under cover and adequately protect from damage. Keep clean, store and handle in such a manner so as to avoid injury. B. Deliver finished carpentry items to the job site ready for installation. Storage of finished items at the job site awaiting installation shall be limited. C. Remove materials which do not conform to approved samples or are damaged, marred or otherwise not suitable for installation from the job site and replace with acceptable materials at the Contractor's expense. D. Under no circumstances shall the Contractor deliver finished woodwork to any part of the building until all spackle, masonry and other "wet" work have been completed and thoroughly cured and dried out. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Finish Carpentry Page 06 20 23-3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General 1. Lumber: best of its respective kinds, as best suited for the particular purpose intended, free from shakes, loose knots, or other imperfections which might impair its strength, durability or appearance and trademarked, exgraded in accordance with the rules of the association under whose jurisdiction it is manufactured and shall be in accordance with Department of Commerce Standard PS 20 latest edition. Lumber: either air-dried or kiln -dried to a moisture content not to exceed 19%. Materials for millwork and finished woodwork throughout shall be thoroughly seasoned and kiln -dried to a moisture content not to exceed 12%. Moisture content shall be determined as per ASTM D-2016. B. Lumber and Millwork 1. Wood to receive a painted finish: White Pine or poplar, common grade. OR APA -INT grade plywood with hardwood edges and paint grade birch veneers. Wood to receive a custom color stain finish: red oak, clear grade OR APA -INT grade red oak veneer plywood with solid red oak edges. 3. Mouldings conforming to profiles noted, red oak, pine or poplar. All mouldings indicated are for profile description only. if the moulding profile indicated is not available in red oak, then the Contractor must have it custom made or obtain it from another manufacturer, at no additional cost to the Owner. a. Acceptable manufacturers 1. Dykes Lumber 718-784-3920 OR APPROVED EQUAL C. Fire Retardant Treatment . Where required by codes or regulations, interior millwork shall be pressure - impregnated to produce a fire retardant wood which shall conform to UL label "FRS - Exterior". In addition, the wood shall be dried to a maximum moisture content of 15%. Fire retardant treatment shall be in accordance with the AWPA Standard AWPA C27 and C20. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Finish Carpentry Page 06 20 23-4 D. Fire Guard Finish 1. All exposed interior millwork shall receive one (1) coat of Flame Control No. 129, Fire Retardant Varnish Base Coat, and two (2) coats of topcoat Flame Control No. 130 Fire Retardant Varnish Topcoat. E. Rough lumber 1. Lumber for rough woodwork on the interior of the building shall be a commercial softwood species: 2. a. General framing: Standard and better or stud grade. b. Plates, blocking, Hailers: Utility grade. Lumber for grounds, blocking, nailers, curbs and the like on the roofs, and wherever in contact with masonry or concrete on the exterior, shall be of Tidewater red cypress, Western red cedar or Redwood of utility grade or approved equal. 3. Rough lumber: Either air-dried or kiln -dried to a moisture content not to exceed 12% as per ASTM D-2016. F. Rough Hardware Nails: common steel wire, untreated for interior work as per FS FF -N -I05. Finishing type at countersunk face locations for concealment. Hot -dipped galvanized for exterior work. 3. Bolts shall be standard mild steel, square head machine bolts with square nuts and malleable iron or steel plate washers or carriage bolts with square nuts and cut washers conforming to the following: a. Bolts FS -FF -B-575 b. Nuts FF -N -836D c. Expansion shields FS -FF -B-561 d. Toggle bolts FS -FF -B-588 e. Lag screws and bolts FS -FF -B-561 4. Woods and screws as per FS -FF -S-1 I ID. 5. Concrete and masonry anchors: standard expansion shield self -drilling type concrete anchors where so shown or noted on the drawings, or where reviewed by the Architect. G. Adhesive & Glues 1. Adhesives for cementing wood and other special adhesives shall be as recommended by the adhesive materials manufacturer, and as approved by the Architect. 2. Glue used for fabrication of millwork shall be casein or cold resin glue, except where stains from the glue joints would be objectionable in which case, a good grade of animal glue shall be used. This glue shall comply with the requirements of the U.S. Navy Specifications No. 52 -F -S, except as specified herein for plastic laminate. Glue for exterior purposes shall be waterproof. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Finish Carpentry Page 06 20 23-5 H. Shop Priming: Paint for shop priming of paint grade wood surfaces shall conform to the following: a. Standard interior lead free alkyd under coat or primer manufactured by PPG Industries, Benjamin Moore, Sherwin Williams or an equal wholly compatible with the shop or field applied finish coats. 2. Finished carpentry work which is installed and assembled in the field from unfinished materials shall receive final finishes provided under Painting Section by other trades. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Produce finished carpentry and millwork in the best manner known to the trade. As a standard of quality, furnish and install woodwork in conformity with "Premium Grade" as defined in the publication "Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodworking Industry" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute. Only first class materials and workmanship will be admissible in the execution of this work. Perform work using craftsman skilled in this trade. There should be no open joints in the finished work, and except for removable members, conceal all fastenings. B. Fabricate and assemble work at the shop insofar as possible completely prefinished, and deliver to the building ready to set in place. The material shall be worked in the best manner known to the trade: mortised, tenoned, doweled, blocked and glued together so as to avoid the use of nails as much as possible, with moldings cleanly cut, sharply defined and miters accurately made. Plain butt joints, without an approved device for preventing separation at joints will not be accepted. Where nails and screws are necessary, they will be concealed. C. Perform all cutting and fitting, drilling and tapping of other work as required to secure or otherwise construct the work included herein, and do all cutting and fitting of carpentry and millwork as required for the work of other sections. D. Construct finished work in the most careful and thorough manner in accordance with details on the approved shop drawings. Finish exposed surfaces and edges smooth and free from marks, blemishes, or defacements caused by workmanship or in the manufacture of the work. E. Neatly and accurately execute joints with care so they are fitted tight, blocked or otherwise put together to avoid opening. F. Exposed parts of finished woodwork shall be scraped, sanded, sponged and, if required, resanded before finishing. The final sanding scratches, dents, mars, or other defects may be cause for rejection of the finished work. 2.03 CABINETRY A. Construct cabinet work as follows and fully coordinate with drawings: B. Assemble work in a manufacturing plant known as a "Cabinet Plant" and construct and detail complete with mortises, tenons and dowels, glued solidly together at the plant and delivered to the job site in as large sections as practical. Field assembly will not be permitted. C. Cabinet work shall have complete framing at all levels, with cross rails where vertical stiles occur. Blind mortise framing and tenon for full width with joints glued and screwed. Miter face member and house re-entrant corners. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Finish Carpentry Page 06 20 23-6 1. Provide 4" high solid resin backsplash for all counter unless otherwise noted. D. Execute work in the most substantial and workmanlike manner, in accordance with the first class practice and particular use, and in accordance with details shown on drawings and reviewed shop drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Study the Contract Drawings and Specifications with regard to the work as shown and required under this section so as to insure its completeness. B. Examine surfaces and conditions to which this work is to be attached or applied, and notify the Architect if conditions or surfaces exist which are detrimental to the proper and expeditious installation of the work. Starting on the work shall imply acceptance of the surfaces and conditions to perform the work as specified. C. Verity dimensions taken at the job site, affecting the work. Bring field dimensions which are at variance to the attention of the Architect. Obtain decision regarding corrective measures before the start of installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF ALUMINUM ENTRANCE & STOREFRONT (Frames) A. Receive, store and install hollow metal work specified below under Section 08411. B. Set frames plumb and level at proper locations, align and brace securely until permanent anchors are fixed. Anchor bottom of frames to floor with expansion bolts, after adjustments are made. Where required to properly brace frames, provide additional struts anchored to rough ceiling construction above. C. Exposed fasteners; Dimple in and fill with metallic filler and finish flush with adjoining surfaces and prime ready for finish painting. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF WOOD DOORS A. Receive, store and install wood doors by a certified door installer. B. Accurately factory cut doors to accommodate hardware items using approved templates. Seal cuts with sealer. Take care not to damage veneers. C. Installation of hardware as per paragraphs specified herein above. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF FINISH HARDWARE A. Finish Hardware: furnished and delivered as specified under the Finish Hardware Section 08700. Receive, store, distribute and install the finish hardware by a certified locksmith sub- contractor and assume responsibility for its safety. Installation of hardware by the General Contractor's carpenters is not permitted. Maintain the protection wrapped Clark Hall Phase 1I - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Finish Carpentry Page 06 20 23-7 around pieces of hardware shall be securely attached to the hardware as it is installed and properly maintained until the final completion of the building. C. Finish hardware shall not be installed in the building until the wet trades have been fully completed. D. Hardware shall be accurately fitted and secured in place, adjusted to operate perfectly and be free from scratched, or other defacements. Location of hardware in connection with doors shall be as shown on drawings, or in accordance with industry standards. E. Upon completion of the work and before final acceptance by the Owner, the Contractor shall, in the presence of the Owner and/or Architect demonstrate that all hardware is in satisfactory working order, that all keys fit in their respective locks, and upon acceptance of the work, shall tag and deliver all keys to the Owner. F. This trade Contractor shall at all times be responsible for the distribution of keys for hardware installed during construction, and shall cause all keys to be returned to him prior to final completion of the building. G. When directed by the Owner, and at no additional cost to the Owner, within one (I) year after the date of Substantial Completion, have a competent person return to the building and adjust the refit doors and hardware as required, and leave all items in satisfactory working order. H. Accurately install weather-stripping to the door and/or frames where scheduled, using proper type flush fasteners spaced not over 18" o.c. Installed work shall make continuous contact with the abutting surfaces and shall function for use intended. Prepare to adjust seals as required, when directed to do so, at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.04 ROUGH CARPENTRY A. Grounds, blocking, nailing strips, furring, curbs, etc. shall be provided wherever shown as required to afford proper support of construction and materials, including the work of other trades. B. No shimming shall be done, except when required to true up furring, blocking and the like, without approval of the Architect. 1f shimming is required for installation of hardware, metal or fiber shims shall be used. Cardboard shims will not be permitted. C. Secure grounds to encountered members with nails or screws as approved by the Architect. Recess all fastenings to conform with requirements of finish materials. D. Fasten grounds in place using appropriate type of fastening devices to suit conditions encountered in the field. Fasteners shall be spaced a maximum of 12" on centers. E. Provide all wood ground required for the securing in place of all finished carpentry work, interior wood finish, and other items to be furnished under this or other sections of the Specifications. F. Except as indicated otherwise, all grounds or furring strips shall be 1-1/2" wide of required thickness in no case less than 3/4" thick. G. Provide rough or framing hardware, such as nails, screws, bolts, anchors, hangers, clips, inserts, miscellaneous fastenings, and similar items of the best quality and of the proper size and kind to adequately secure the work in place, in a rigid and substantial manner. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Finish Carpentry Page 06 20 23-8 H. Secure rough carpentry to solid masonry with countersunk bolts and expansion sleeves or other approved manner, with fastenings not more than 16" apart. Secure woodwork to hollow masonry with toggle bolts spaced not more than 16" apart. Where approved, woodwork may be secured to masonry using hardened cut nails. 3.05 ROUGH HARDWARE A. Rough carpentry shall be securely fastened together, nailed, spiked, lag screwed or bolted as required by conditions encountered in the field. B. Provide all rough or framing hardware, such as nails, screws, bolts, anchors, hangers, clips, inserts, miscellaneous fastenings, and similar items of the best quality and of the proper size and kind to adequately secure the work together and in place, in a rigid and substantial manner. C. Rough carpentry shall be secured to solid masonry with countersunk bolts in expansion sleeves or other approved manner, with fastenings not more than 16" apart. Secure woodwork to hollow masonry with toggle bolts spaced not more than 16 inches apart. Where approved woodwork may be secured to masonry using hardened cut nails. D. Bolts in Hailers and other rough woodwork shall be countersunk secured with washers and nuts, with bolts cut off flush with surfaces and peened as niay be required to receive finished work of other sections. 3.06 WOOD SHELVING (Fixed and Adjustable) A. Wood Shelving 1. 3/4" thick plywood with solid hardwood edges stain grade and selected veneers. B. For fixed shelving provide continuous 1" x 2" wood cleats. C. Anchor cleats to walls using lead shield and lag bolts spaced 1" from end and not over 10" o.c. in between. Attach plywood shelves to cleats with countersunk flat head screws wood filled and sanded smooth 9" o.c. D. For adjustable shelves install shelving standards in parallel rows and secure in place using expansion sleeves and recessed screws. Provide standards which are to receive clip attachments. Install 4 clips per shelf. and shelf quantity as noted on drawings. Installed shelf shall be plumb rigid and parallel to other shelves. Finish of standards and clips shall be antique brass. 3.07 MOULDINGS AND TRIM MEMBERS A. In accordance with the reviewed samples and drawings, install in as long lengths as practical, using countersunk finishing screws long enough to penetrate substrates by at least 1 ". Wood fill nail holes and joints and sand smooth and flush. Miter inside and outside corners, and strike to encountered substrates. At stained wood, provide custom colored wood fill to match color stain. 3.08 PROTECTION & CLEANING Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Finish Carpentry Page 06 20 23-9 A. Carpentry shall be carefully protected during the transportation, erection, and after installation. After the completion of the work and at a time as directed by the Architect, finishes shall be thoroughly cleaned. marred surfaces restored to the complete satisfaction of the Architect. B. The work under this section shall include cleaning up as directed and at the finish of each portion of the work, materials and debris created by the work of this section shall be removed from the site at regular intervals. END OF SECTION Clark Hall Phase 1I - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Cornell University Physical Sciences Instructional Facility Phase II Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca NY Page 06 44 00-1 SECTION 06 44 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this section shall be governed by the contract documents. Provide materials, labor, equipment and services necessary to furnish, deliver and install all work of this Section as shown on the drawings, as specified herein, and/or as required by job conditions. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. General Requirements — Division 1 B. Finish Carpentry: Section 06 20 23 C. Installation: Section 06 20 23 D. Hardware: Section 08 71 00 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCES A. Lumber grading rules and wood species: In conformance with PS20. B. Grading rules of the following associations shall apply to materials furnished under this section. 1. AWI Quality Standard Section 1400 2. AWI Quality Standard Section 900 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Samples 1 each 1. Red Oak (solid and veneer with clear finish — 6" x 6") 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver architectural woodwork materials to the site ready for use, with each piece of lumber clearly marked as to grade, type and mill, and place in an area protected from the weather. B. Remove delivered materials which do not conform to specified grading rules or are otherwise not suitable for installation from the job site and replace with acceptable materials. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Architectural Woodwork Page 06 44 00-2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Lumber: The best of its respective kinds, as best suited for the particular purpose intended, free from shakes, loose knots, or other imperfections which might impair its strength, durability or appearance. B. Sizes indicated on the drawings or specified herein are nominal sizes, except where finished dimensions are stated. The Contractor may use lumber of larger sizes than the dress dimensions listed in the American Lumber Standards for the various board measure sizes provided he makes all necessary adjustments of contingent work and assumes all responsibility for such adjustments. C. Plywood shall conform to U.S. Product Standard PSI of "Moisture Resistant" type and branded or stamped with grade. Red Oak veneers as per CS -35 selected grade. D. Surfaces of woodwork shall be in proper condition by sanding all edges smooth to receive finish. The finish shall be uniformly applied, well brushed into all cracks and crevices. Undercoats shall be sanded well before application of final polyurethane finish. E. Plywood for architectural woodwork work shall conform to Product Standard PSI -74. 2.02 WOOD SHELVING (Adjustable) A. Adjustable Wood Shelving 1. 3/4" thick red oak veneer plywood with 3/4" x 1 /2" solid red oak hardwood edges, ease all exposed edges. Plywood to be stain grade and selected veneers. 2. Provide 8'-0" high surface mounted heavy duty stainless steel standards, model nos. KV-87SS24 in conjunction with KV -875572, Knape and Vogt Series 87, or acceptable equal. Provide a total of seven (7) of each model no. listed above. 3. Provide heavy duty stainless steel shelf bracket, model no. KV-187SS12, Knape and Vogt Series 187, or acceptable equal. Provide a total of fifty-six (56) of model no. listed above. 3. Install shelving standards in parallel rows and secure in place using expansion sleeves and recessed screws. Provide standards which are to receive clip attachments. Install 4 clips per shelf, and shelf quantity as noted on drawings. Installed shelf shall be plumb rigid and parallel to other shelves. Finish of standards and clips shall be satin chrome. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Erect architectural woodwork true to line, levels and dimensions required: squared, aligned, plumbed, and securely fastened in place. Clark Hall Phase 1I - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Architectural Woodwork Page 06 44 00-3 2. No shimming shall be done, except where required to true up furring, blocking and the like, without approval of the Architect. If shimming is required for installation, use metal or fiber shims. Cardboard shims will not be permitted. 3. Do all cutting, fitting, drilling and tapping of other work as required to secure in place and to perform the work included herein, and all the cutting and fitting of carpentry work, for the work of other trades. Ground, Blocking and Furring: I . Provide grounds, blocking, nailing strips, furring, curbs, etc., wherever shown or required to afford proper support of construction and materials, including the work of other trades and dress to the sizes shown or required and set true at the proper lines and levels to receive the finished work. Block or shim out as required and securely fasten in place. 2. Secure ground to wood members with proper nails or screws spaced 12" o.c. and one inch from ends. Recess all fastenings as required, to conform with requirements of finish materials, unless otherwise noted. 3. Fasten grounds using fastening devices to suit conditions encountered in the field. Space fasteners a maximum of 12" o.c. 4. Provide all wood grounds required for the securing in place of all finished carpentry work, cabinet work, and other items to be furnished under this or other sections of the Specifications. Coordinate this work so as not to delay job progress. �. Except as specified or indicated otherwise, grounds or furring strips shall be 1-1/2" wide of required thickness and in no case less than 3/4" thick. 6. Grounds, blocking, furring and all other architectural woodwork items shall be furnished and installed with as few joints as possible to accommodate the work of other sections as noted on the drawings or as required to suit conditions encountered in the field. 3.02 PROTECTION & CLEANING A. Carpentry shall be carefully protected during the transportation, erection, and after installation. After the completion of the work and at a time as directed by the Architect, finishes shall be thoroughly cleaned. marred surfaces restored to the complete satistaction of the Architect. B. The work under this section shall include cleaning up as directed and at the finish of each portion of the work, materials and debris created by the work of this section shall be removed from the site at regular intervals. END OF SECTION Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 SECTION 07 21 00 INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Cornell University Physical Sciences Instructional Facility Phase 11 Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca, NY Paee07 21 00-1 A. Work of this Section shall be governed by the Contract Documents. Provide materials, labor, equipment, and services necessary to furnish, deliver, and install all work of this Section as shown on the drawings as specified herein, and/or as required by job conditions. B. The work shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Batt insulation as scheduled herein. 2. Rigid insulation as scheduled herein. 3. Vapor barriers where scheduled. 4. Attachment means and methods. 5. Fire stopping. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. General Requirements: Division 1 B. Gypsum Drywall: Section 09 29 00 C. Fire stopping: Section 07 84 13 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCES A. Reference Standards 1. Federal Specifications (FS) 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit three (3) samples of type of insulation each to the Architect for review prior to delivery and installation. 1. 6"' x 6" minimum size Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Insulation Page 07 21 00-2 B. Product Literature 1. Submit to the Architect, catalog cuts, data sheets and product literature from the proposed material manufacturers. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the job site, ready for use in the manufacturer's original and unopened containers and packaging, bearing labels as to type of material, brand name, and manufacturer's name. Delivered materials shall be identical to approved samples and certificates. B. Store materials under cover in a dry and clean location, off the ground, and remove materials which are damaged or otherwise not suitable for installation from the job site and replace with acceptable materials. C. Take every precaution to prevent the insulation from becoming wet, cover with tarps or other weather/watertight sheet goods. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Mineral Wool Sound Attenuation batts/MW conforming to the property requirements of ASTM C665, Type 1 and E136, preformed, function fit, un -faced. 1. Flame spread: 5 2. Smoke developed: 0 3. Manufacturers a. Owens Corning Fiberglas "Sound Attenuation Batts/MW" PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Verify adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive installation. Verif v mechanical and electrical services within walls have been installed and tested. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and the manufacturer's recommended installation procedures as approved by the Architect, anchoring all components firmly into position. B. Sound Attenuation Batt Insulation - (at interior partitions and inside all horizontal gypsum board soffits and beams) 1. Install insulation in as long lengths as practical filling all voids in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Support in place using nails or power staples 6" o. c. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Insulation Page 07 21 00-3 3. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Use insulation free of damage. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of insulation. Leave no gaps or voids. END OF SECTION Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Cornell University Physical Sciences Instructional Facility Phase II Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca, NY Page07 29 00-1 SECTION 07 29 00 CAULKING (Sealants) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this section shall be governed by the Contract Documents. Provide materials, labor, equipment, and services necessary to furnish, deliver, and install all work of this section as shown on the drawings, as specified herein, and/or as required by job conditions. B. The work of this section shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Sealants (caulks) as scheduled herein at interior and exterior locations. 2. .loint fillers & backer rods and tapes 3 Primers and sealers 4. issuance of guarantee 5. Fire Sealants 1.02 RELATED SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. General Requirements — Division 1 B. Finish Carpentry: Section 06 20 23 C. Acoustical and Sanitary Sealants: Section 09 29 00 D. Firestopping — Section 07 84 13 E. Aluminum Entrances & Storefront — Section 08 41 13 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCES A. Reference standards 1. American Society for Testing & Materials (ASTM) 2. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit three (3) each of the following to Architect for review prior to delivery and installation: Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Caulking Page 07 29 00-2 1. Cured sealants and color charts 2. Filler and backer rods: 6" long, each type and kind 3. Guarantee B. Submit manufacturer's printed data sheets and color charts. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver sealants, primers, fillers and backup to the job site in sealed containers and packages bearing the manufacturer's original labels, directions and batch numbers. Manufacturer's label shall indicate date of manufacture of each sealant, and the sealant shall not be used beyond the recommended shelf life. B. Store and handle materials, prior to installation. in a manner recommended by the manufacturer. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental requirements 1. Materials shall not be installed when the temperature is 40 degrees Fahrenheit and falling or if there is a threat or forecast of rain or inclement weather. 1.07 GUARANTEE A. Provide a written, notarized guarantee from the manutacturer and the applicator stating that the applied sealants shall remain watertight for a period of two (2) years. B. Guarantee shall be in a form acceptable to the Architect and/or the Owner and executed by an authorized individual. C. Include in the guarantee a provision to repair and/or replace at Contractor's expense, sealant defects which develop during guarantee period, because of faulty labor and/or materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS - GENERAL A. Colors: For exposed materials provide color as indicated or, if not indicated. as selected by Architect from standard color lines. B. Hardness: As recommended by manufacturer for type of application indicated. C. Modulus of Elasticity: Provide the lowest available modulus of elasticity which is consistent with exposure to weathering, indentation, abrasion and support of loading. D. Compatibility: Before purchase of each required material, confirm its compatibility with each other material it will be exposed to or come in contact with in the joint system. E. Size and Shape: As recommended by the material manufacturer for the type and condition of joint, and for the required joint performance and movement. Obtain approval of each joint profile before proceeding. Clark Hall Phase 11- 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Caulking Page 07 29 00-3 F. Grade of Sealant: For each application, provide the grade of sealant (non -sag, self -leveling, no -track, knife grade, preformed, etc.) as recommended by the manufacturer for the particular condition of installation (location, joint shape, ambient temperature, and similar conditions), to achieve the best possible overall performance. Grades specified herein are for normal condition of installation. 2.02 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. Silicone Rubber Based Sealant: One part, low modulus sealant complying with FS TT -S- 001543 and ASTM C-920 and providing plus or minus 50% joint movement capability without failure in adhesion or cohesion. Colors selected by Architect. 1. Locations: Exterior building joints vertical and horizontal not subject to vehicular or pedestrian traffic. 2. Acceptable manufacturers a. Sonneborn NP -1 b. Tremco c. or equal acceptable to Architect Polyurethane Sealant: Polyurethane -based 2 -part elastomeric sealant, complying with FS TT -S-00227 Class A. Type 1 (self -leveling) unless Type 2 recommended by manufacturer for the application shown, and ASTM C-920. Colors selected by Architect. 1. Locations: Subject to vehicular or pedestrian traffic. 2. Acceptable manufacturers a. Tremco Inc. b. Mameco c. Sonneborn NP -2 d. or an equal acceptable to the Architect C. Sealant and backing for joints at floor penetrations and penetrations through interior fire - rated construction: 1. Acceptable manufacturers a. Tremco Fire -Resistive Joint System using Tremco "Mono" sealant and Tremco "Cerablanket-FS." b. General Electric silicone foam penetrating sealant system using Pensil 851 and Thermafiber insulation. Clark Hall Phase I1 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Caulking Page 07 29 00-4 2.03 NON-ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. One -component acrylic base sealant: Acrylic terpolymer, solvent -based, one part, thermo- plastic sealant compound, solids not less than 95% acrylic; complying with FS TT -S-00230, Class B, Type II, paintable, non -staining. 1. Locations: Exposed interior locations. B. Butyl rubber sealant: Polymerized butyl rubber and inert fillers (pigments), solvent -based with minimum 75% solids, non -sag consistency, tack -free time of 24 hours or less. 1. Locations: Concealed interior locations. 2.04 JOINT FILLERS A. Preformed, non -extruding joint filler: Provide resilient and non -extruding type premolded cork units complying with ASTM D 1752, Type I1; FS HH -F-341, Type I1, Class B; and AASHO M153, Type I1. 1. Locations: Backing for polyurethane sealants at vehicular and pedestrian traffic. B. Back-up rod for silicone sealants: closed -cell polyurethane foam of not less than 1.3 pounds per cubic foot density and not less than 2 pounds per square inch compression deflection (25%), with not more than 10% compression set for 25 hours at 50% compression; comply with ASTM D 1564. 1. Locations: All locations except where silicone sealant is used, unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer in writing. C. Bond breaker tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by the sealant manufacturer to be applied to sealant -contact surfaces where bond to the substrate or joint filler must be avoided for proper performance of sealant. Provide self-adhesive tape as required. 2.05 JOINT PRIMER/SEALER A. Joint Primer/Sealer: Provide the type of joint primer/sealer recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the joint surfaces to be primed or sealed. Non -staining type. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Caulking Page 07 29 00-5 2.06 MIXING A. Mix sealant, in strict accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions, by workmen skilled in this type of work. Mix as recommended by the manufacturer, for two part materials only. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine surfaces to which the work is to be applied and notify the Architect if conditions exist which are detrimental to the proper and expeditious installation of the work. Starting of work shall imply acceptance of surfaces to perform work as specified herein. B. Joints shall be clean, free of release agents, curing compounds, loose aggregate. and shall be free of dust. C. Joints shall not be less than 1/2" depth by 1/4" width. For joints in non -porous surfaces such as metal and glass, sealant depth shall be a minimum of 1/2 sealant width and shall in no case exceed width of sealant. Depth of sealant may be equal to width of joints up to 1/2" wide. For expansion and other joints exceeding 1/2" width, depth of sealant shall be no greater than 1/2 joint width. Depth of joint is defined as distance from outside face of joint to closest point of joint filler, whether joint filler is rod shape or rectangular. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Joints to be sealed and caulked shall be thoroughly cleaned of mortar or foreign materials in an approved manner before sealing and caulking materials are applied. Remove coating from metal surfaces by use of solvent recommended by manufacturer of metal. B. The use of primers and other preparatory treatments shall be as recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the encountered substrates. If the primer used will produce discoloration or dirt pick-up, when applied on porous substrates, then protect surfaces adjacent to joint from such contamination by use of masking tape. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Use primer as it comes from the can, unadulterated, and apply as per the approved manufacturer's printed directions, and/or recommendations. Prime joints before insertion of joint back-up material. B. When installing rod stock filler, roll filler into joints so that rod filler in its final position will not be twisted. C. Apply sealants within "pot life" recommended by the manufacturer for prevailing temperature and humidity conditions. D. Apply vertical sealants from gun devices and horizontal traffic bearing sealants gun or pour grade. Tool joints using approved tools to concave profiles assuring uniform and continuous bonding to sides but not to the backer rods. Completed work shall be uniform in appearance without voids, tears or other imperfections. Clark Hall Phase 1I - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Caulking Page 07 29 00-6 3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect exposed surfaces, adjacent to joints, to prevent permanent staining and/or damage to adjacent work. B. Immediately after application of sealants, clean adjacent surfaces, which may have become soiled. Method and materials used for cleaning, compatible with all materials it makes contact with. C. Joints which are not properly sealed, show evidence of lack of adhesion or other defects, as determined by the Architect, shall be cut-out and recaulked at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 SECTION 07 84 13 FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS Cornell University Physical Sciences Instructional Facility Phase 11 Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca, NY Page07 84 13-1 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to work specified in this section. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Firestopping: Material or combination of materials used to retain integrity of fire -rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, water, and hot gases. 1.03 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK OF THIS SECTION A. Work, in general, includes furnishing all materials and labor required for installation of through penetration fire -stop systems around pipe, duct, cable, cable tray, conduit, telephone cable, other electrical devices, blank openings, and at the periphery of fire -rated walls, floors, partitions, and floor/ceiling assemblies. 1.04 RELATED WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Coordinate work of this section with work of other sections as required to properly execute the work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other sections, including but not limited to: 1. Concrete Work - Section 03300 3. Joint Sealers - Section 07 29 00 4. Gypsum Drywall Systems - Section 09 29 00 5. Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 6. Mechanical Insulation 7. Fire Protection 8. Air Distribution 9. Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 1.05 REFERENCES A. Test Requirements: ASTM E-814, "Standard Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops" (July 1983). B. Published Fire -Rated Assemblies: Underwriters Laboratories (UL) of Northbrook, IL runs ASTM E-184 under their designation of UL 1479 and publishes the results in their "FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY" that is updated annually with a mid -year supplement. Clark Hall Phase 1I - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Firestopping Page 07 84 13-2 C. ASTM E-84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. D. All three model building codes, UBC, SBCCI, and BOCCA. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Minimum two years experience installing UL Classified firestopping systems or trained by manufacturer, or manufacturer's representative, in installation procedures based on published UL tested Fire -stop Systems. B. Fire -stop System installation must meet requirements of ASTM E-814 or UL 1479 tested assemblies that provide a fire rating equal to that of construction being penetrated. C. Proposed fire -stop material and methods shall conform to applicable governing codes. D. Fire -stop Systems do not re-establish the structural integrity of load bearing partitions/assemblies, or support live loads and traffic. Contractor shall consult the structural engineer prior to penetrating any load bearing, assembly. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data indicating product characteristics, performance and limiting criteria, including documentation of fire testing by independent fire test lab. B. Submit shop drawings showing each condition requiring penetration seals to document proposed UL Systems, materials. anchorage, methods of installation, and actual adjacent construction. C. Submit Material Safety Data Sheets with product delivered to job site. 1.08 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials undamaged in manufacturer's clearly labeled, unopened containers, identified with brand, type, grade. and UL label where applicable. B. Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date to allow minimum storage time at job site. C. Store materials under cover and protect from weather and damage in compliance with manufacturer's requirements. D. Comply with recommended procedures, precautions or remedies described in Material Safety Data Sheets as applicable. E. Do not use damaged materials. 1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding. B. Do not use materials that contain flammable solvents. Clark Hall Phase I1- 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Firestopping Page 07 84 13-3 C. During installation, provide masking and drop cloths to prevent firestopping materials from contaminating any adjacent surfaces. D. Weather conditions: Do not proceed with installation of fire -stop materials when temperatures exceed the manufacturer's recommended limitations for installation. E. Schedule installation of firestopping after completion of penetrating item installation but prior to covering or concealing of openings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements. provide products of one of the following manufacturers as shown below. 1. Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc., Tulsa, Oklahoma, (918) 252-6901. 2. or an equal acceptable to Architect. 3. insulation a. Celotex b. Owens-Corning c. U. S. Gypsum 2.02 MATERIALS A. Products 1. Hilti CS 240 Fire -stop Sealant: An adhesive, one -part, silicone -based, elastomeric sealant. 2. Hilti CS 2420 intumescent Wrap: an aluminum foil -backed intumescent strip for plastic, insulated pipe, other combustible or penetrating items. 3. Damming Materials: Hilti CB 120 Adhesive Filling and Sealing Foam or fire resistant mineral fiber or other material as directed by appropriate fire -tested designs. B. UL Classification: Provide material classified by UL to provide firestopping equal to time rating of construction being penetrated. C. Firestopping materials shall be asbestos -free, emit no toxic or combustible fumes, and be capable of maintaining an effective barrier against flame, smoke, water and toxic gases in compliance with referenced standards in Section 1.05. D. Firestopping materials/systems shall be flexible to allow for normal movement of building structure and penetrating item(s) without affecting the adhesion or integrity of the system. E. Firestopping materials shall be free of solvents and shall not experience shrinkage while curing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION Clark Hall Phase 1I - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Firestopping Page 07 84 13-4 A. Clean surface to be in contact with penetration seal materials of dirt, grease, oil, loose materials, rust, or other substances that may affect proper fitting, adhesion, or the required fire resistance. B. Clean metal and glass surfaces with a non -alcohol solvent prior to installation of fire -stop system. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Regulatory Requirements: Install penetration seal materials in accordance with rated tested assemblies for published "Through -Penetration Fire -stop Systems" in UL's Fire Resistance Directory. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of through -penetration seal materials. 1. Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air, smoke and water -tight seal. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic. 3. Tool surface of fire -stop materials to give a smooth, clean appearance. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Examine penetration sealed areas to ensure proper installation before concealing or enclosing areas. B. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities. C. Perform under this section patching and repairing of tirestopping caused by cutting or penetrating by other trades. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean condition. B. Neatly cut and trim materials as required. END OF SECTION Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 SECTION 08 14 13 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Cornell University Physical Sciences Instructional Facility Phase II Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca, NY Page 08 14 13-1 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Solid -core doors with wood -veneer faces. 2. Solid -core doors with wood -veneer faces and vision lites. 3. Shop finishing of flush wood doors. B. Related Sections include the following: . Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for wood door frames. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, trim for openings, and louvers. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door: construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 5. Indicate fire ratings for fire doors. C. Samples for Verification: As follows: 1. Corner sections of doors approximately 8 by 10 inches with door faces and edgings representing the typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber required Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Flush Wood Doors Page 08 14 13-2 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE Forest Certification: Provide doors made from wood products obtained from forests certified by an FSC -accredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2, "Principles and Criteria." B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Quality Standard: Comply with the following standard: 1. NWWDA Quality Standard: NWWDA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors." 2. AWI Quality Standard: AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grade of door, core, construction, finish, and other requirements. D. Fire -Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE. AND HANDLING A. Protect doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. Individually package doors in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting. B. Mark each door with individual opening numbers used on Shop Drawings. Use removable tags or concealed markings. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet -work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during the remainder of the construction period to comply with requirements of the referenced quality standard for Project's geographical location. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Door manufacturer's warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Flush Wood Doors Page 08 14 13-3 B. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement on door manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors that have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42 -by -84 -inch section or that show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3 -inch span, or do not comply with tolerances in referenced quality standard. 1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time after the date of Substantial Completion: a. Solid -Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Flush Wood Doors: a. Algoma Hardwoods Inc. b. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division. c. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. d. Weyerhaeuser Co. e. Or Architect approved equal. 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL A. Adhesives: Shall not contain urea formaldehyde. B. Doors for Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. with Grade AA faces. 2. Species and Cut: Red Oak (Plain Sliced), to match existing door finish. 3. Match between Veneer Leaves: The veneer to be book matched. 2.3 SOLID -CORE DOORS A. Interior Veneer -Faced Doors: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Particleboard Cores: Comply with the following requirements: a. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD -1. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Flush Wood Doors Page 08 14 13-4 b. Use particleboard made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde resin. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard -core doors as needed to eliminate through - bolting hardware. 3. Construction: Five or seven plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. B. Fire -Rated Doors: Comply with the following_ requirements: 1. Construction: Construction and core specified above for type of face indicated or manufacturer's standard mineral -core construction as required to provide fire rating indicated. 2. Blocking: For mineral -core doors, provide composite blocking with improved screw -holding capability approved for use in doors of fire ratings indicated and as follows: a. 5 -inch top -rail blocking. b. 5 -inch bottom -rail blocking., at doors indicated to have kick, niop, or armor plates. c. 4-1 /2 -by -10 -inch lock blocks. d. 5 -inch midrail blocking, at doors indicated to have exit devices. 3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide manufacturer's standard laminated -edge construction with improved screw -holding capability and split resistance and with outer stile matching face veneer. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate flush wood doors in sizes indicated for Project site fitting. B. Factory fit doors to suit frame -opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply with requirements of NFPA 80 for fire -rated doors. C. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DH1-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI Al 15-W series standards, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 2. Metal Astragals: Pre -machine astragals and formed -steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire - rated doors. Clark Hall Phase 1I - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Flush Wood Doors Page 08 14 13-5 2.5 FACTORY FINISHING A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard's requirements for factory finishing. Finish faces and edges of doors, including mortises and cutouts. B. Finish wood doors at factory. C. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated for grade, finish system, staining effect, and sheen. 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: AWI System TR -4 conversion varnish. 3. Staining, effect and sheen: Match Architect's sample. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine installed door frames before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb .jambs and level heads. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: install wood doors to comply with nmanfacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire -rated doors in corresponding fire -rated frames according to NFPA 80. C. .lob -Fit Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trine stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire -rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire -rated doors. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Flush Wood Doors Page 08 14 13-6 2. Bevel fire -rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches on lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTING A. Operation: Reinstall or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08 14 13 Clark Hall Phase I1 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 SECTION 08 31 13 ACCESS DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Cornell University Physical Sciences Instructional Facility Phase II Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca NY Page 08 31 13-1 A. Work of this section shall be governed by the contract documents. Provide materials, labor, equipment, and services necessary to furnish, deliver and install all work of this section as shown on the drawings, as specified herein, and/or as required by job conditions. B. The work shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Furnish and Install: a. Fire rated and Non -fire rated access doors. b. At walls locations provide flush access doors with beaded frames to accept joint compound. c. At gypsum board ceilings provide access doors with recessed doors to accept gypsum board material, and beaded frames to accept joint compound. d. Factory -applied baked on primer paint finish. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Gypsum Drywall Ceilings: Division 9 B. Painting: Division 9 C. HVAC & Plumbing: Division 15 D. Electrical: Division 15 E. Installation by Division 9 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCES A. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Wherever a fire -resistance classification is indicated, provide access door assembly with panel door, frame, hinge, and latch from manufacturer listed in Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. "Classified Building Materials Index" for rating shown. 1. Provide UL label on each fire -rated access door. 2. Furnish with flush, key -operated cylinder lock at all wall locations. 3. Furnish with flush, screw driver operated with stainless steel cam and stud at all gypsum board ceiling locations. Size Variation: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard size units which may vary slightly from sizes indicated. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Access Doors Page 08 31 13-2 C. Inserts and Anchorage: Finish inserts and anchoring devices which must be built into other work for the installation of access doors. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit shop drawings to Architect for review in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents which shall include a schedule noting location, type, size, rating, and other data. Indicate metals, gauges, shop coats, anchoring methods, locking devices, and other special features. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver access doors to the job site, ready for use in the approved manufacturer's original and unopened containers and packing, bearing labels as to type of material, brand name, and manufacturer's name. Delivered materials shall be identical to approved samples and certificates. B. Store doors under cover in a dry and clean location, off the ground and remove materials which are damaged or otherwise not suitable for installation from the job site and replace with acceptable materials. C. Deliver doors fully fabricated with proper anchorage assemblies and devices, and shop coats intact. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Furnish access door assemblies manufactured as an integral unit, complete with all parts and ready for installation. B. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Fabricate units of continuous welded steel construction, unless otherwise indicated. Grind welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of the type required to secure access panels to the types of support shown. C. Prior to delivery shop apply a rust inhibitive prime coat to steel and galvanized surfaces. 2.02 NON -RATED ACCESS DOORS (at wall and ceiling locations) A. Where noted on drawings or required to permit access to equipment furnish non- rated access door assemblies conforming to profiles, sizes and arrangement noted, and where not noted provide 12" x 12" minimum. B. Material: 1. Frame: 16 gauge steel frame. 2. Door: 14 gauge steel panel. 3. Trim: Galvanized textured drywall bead flange Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Access Doors Page 08 31 13-3 C. Trim: 1. Provide continuous perimeter galvanized textured drywall bead flange with pre - punched holes. The holes will facilitate the fastening of the flange to framing members with drywall screws, and the textured bead with facilitate drywall joint compound. D. Finish: 1. Factory -applied prime coat of rust inhibitive electrostatic powder, baked grey enamel. Finish painting by Section 09900. E. Hinges: concealed continuous piano type. F. Locks: flush, cylinder lock operated with case hardened steel cam locks keyed alike. Provide two keys to owner's representative. G. Sizes: as noted on drawing and where not noted provide 12" x 12". H. Acceptable manufacturer: 1. Karp Associates, Inc.. model no. '`KDW" Tel: 800-888-4212 Fax: 718-784-9169 www.karpinc.com 2.03 FIRE RATED ACCESS DOORS A. Where noted on drawings or required to permit access to equipment furnish tine rated access door assemblies conforming to profiles, sizes and arrangement noted, and where not noted provide 12" x 12" minimum. B. Material: 1. Frame: 16 gauge steel frame. 2. Door: 18 gauge steel recessed l-1/2" to accommodate double thickness of type X gypsum panel. 3. Trim: Galvanized textured drywall bead flange C. Trim: 1. Provide continuous perimeter galvanized textured drywall bead flange with pre - punched holes. The holes will facilitate the fastening of the tlange to framing members with drywall screws, and the textured bead with facilitate drywall joint compound. D. Finish: 1. Factory -applied prime coat of rust inhibitive electrostatic powder, baked grey enamel. Finish painting by Section 09900. E. Hinges: exposed continuous piano type. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Access Doors Page 08 31 13-4 F. Locks: flush, cylinder lock operated with case hardened steel cam locks keyed alike. Provide two keys to owner's representative. G. Sizes: as noted on drawing and where not noted provide 12" x 12" minimum. H. Rating: Complete assembly 1-1/2 hour ULD B label. I. Acceptable manufacturer: 1. Karp Associates, Inc., model no. "KATR" Tel: 800-888-4212 Fax: 718-784-9169 www.karpinc.com PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Study the contract drawings and specifications with regard to the work as shown and required under this section so as to insure its completeness. B. Examine surfaces and conditions to which this work is to be attached and notify the Architect if conditions or surfaces exist which are detrimental to the proper and expeditious installation of the work. Starting on the work shall imply acceptance of the surfaces and conditions to perform the work as specified. C. Verify by measurements taken at the job site, these dimension affecting the work. Bring field dimension, which are at variance with those on the approved shop drawings, to the attention of the Architect. Obtain decision regarding corrective measures before the start of fabrication or installation. D. Cooperate in the coordination and scheduling of the work of this section with the work of other sections so as not to delay job progress. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installation with work of other trades and locate accurately. B. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for secure attachment. proper relation to adjacent finished surfaces and proper operation. C. Install at their designated locations in a secure, flush, plumb and rigid manner. Hardware shall operate smoothly and quietly for use intended. D. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed or otherwise damaged. E. Receive, store and install as part of Division 9 - Gypsum Drywall. END OF SECTION Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Cornell University Physical Sciences Instructional Facility Phase II Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca, NY Page 08 41 13-1 SECTION 08 41 13 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS Series D318 DuraStileT\I Medium Stile Entrance Door and Frame PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 Work Included A. Furnish and install aluminum entrance,'entrance door frames complete with hardware, and related components as shown on the drawings and specified in this section. B. All doors shall be EFCO" Series D318 DuraStile Medium Stile Entrance Door and Frame. Other manufacturers requesting approval to bid their product as an equal must submit the following information prior to close of bidding. 1. Test reports documenting compliance with requirements of Section 1.05. C. Glass and Glazing 1. All units shall be factory glazed. D. Single Source Requirement 1. All products listed in Section 1.02 shall be by the same manufacturer. 1.02 Related Work A. Section 08 14 16 — Wood Doors B. Section 08 71 00 — Hardware 1.03 Items Furnished but Not Installed 1.04 Items Installed but Not Furnished A. Structural support of the framing, wood framing, structural steel, and final cleaning. 1.05 Laboratory Testing and Performance Requirements A. Test Units 1. Air test unit shall be minimum size of 36" (914 mm) x 84" (2134 mm) B. Test Procedures and Performances 1. Entrance doors shall conform to all requirements for the door type referenced in 1.01.B. In addition, the following specific performance requirements shall be met. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts Page 08 41 13-2 2. Air Infiltration Test a. With door sash closed and locked, test unit in accordance with ASTM E 283 at a static air pressure difference of 1.57 psf (75 Pa). b. Air infiltration shall not exceed .50 cfin/SF (2.54 l/s.m-) of unit, for single doors. c. Air infiltration shall not exceed .10 cfin/SF (.50 1/s.m2) of unit for a pair of doors. 1.06 Quality Assurance A. Provide test reports from laboratories certifying the performance as specified in 1.05. B. Test reports shall be accompanied by the entrance door manufacturer's letter of certification stating that the tested door meets or exceeds the referenced performance standard for the appropriate door type. 1.07 References 1.08 Submittals A. Contractor shall submit shop drawings, finish samples, test reports, and warranties. 1. Samples of materials as may be requested without cost to owner, i.e., metal, glass, fasteners. anchors, frame sections, corner section, etc. 1.09 Warranties A. Total Entrance Door / Storefront System 1. The responsible contractor shall assume full responsibility and warrant for one year the satisfactory performance of the total entrance door installation which includes that of the doors, hardware. glass (including insulated units), glazing, anchorage and setting system, sealing, Clashing, etc., as it relates to air and structural adequacy as called for in the specifications and approved shop drawings. 2. Any deficiencies due to such elements not meeting the specifications shall be corrected by the responsible contractor at his expense during the warranty period. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 Material A. Aluminum 1. Extruded aluminum shall be 6063-T6 alloy and temper. B. Fasteners 1. All exposed fasteners shall be aluminum or stainless steel. C. Glass 1. See glass and glazing section 08 88 00 Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts Page 08 41 13-3 2.02 Fabrication A. General 1. Major portions of the door sections shall have .188" (3 mm) wall thickness. Glazing stop sections shall have .050" (1.2 mm) wall thickness. B. Glazing 1. All units shall be dry glazed with extruded pressure fitting aluminum glazing stops, and a gasket that complies with ASTM E 2203 specification. C. Frame 1. Depth of frame shall not be Tess than 4 1/2" (1 14 mm). 2. Face dimension shall not be less than 2" (50 mm). 3. Shear block construction shall be utilized throughout. 4. System design shall be such that raw edges will not be visible at joints. D. Finish 1. Finish shall be mill finish. 2.03 Hardware A. All doors shall have standard hardware furnished by the door manufacturer. 1. Hardware shall be as specified in section 08 71 00 - Finish Hardware. B. Hardware for doors (check with entrance door manufacturer for compatibility with door) is specified under "Hardware Section" of the specifications and shall be sent to the door manufacturer for application. The finish hardware supplier shall be responsible for furnishing physical hardware and templates of all hardware to the entrance door manufacturer prior to fabrication, and for coordinating hardware delivery requirements with the hardware manufacturer, the general contractor and the entrance door manufacturer to ensure the building project is not delayed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 Inspection A. Job Conditions 1. Verify that openings are dimensionally within allowable tolerances, plumb, level, clean, provide a solid anchoring surface and are in accordance with approved shop drawings. 3.02 Installation A. Use only skilled tradesmen with work done in accordance with approved shop drawings and specifications. Clark Hall Phase 11 - l00% CD - 3/14/2014 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts Page 08 41 13-4 B. Plumb and align entrance door faces in a single plane for each wall plane and erect doors and materials square and true. Adequately anchor to maintain positions permanently when subjected to normal thermal movement, specified building movement, and specified wind loads. C. Adjust doors for proper operation after installation. D. Furnish and apply sealants to provide a weather tight installation at all joints and intersections and at opening perimeters. Wipe off excess material and leave all exposed surfaces and joints clean and smooth. 3.03 Anchorage A. Adequately anchor to maintain positions permanently when subjected to normal thermal movement, specified building movement, and specified wind loads. 3.04 Protection and Cleaning A. After completion of entrance installation, entrance doors shall be inspected, adjusted, put into working order and left clean, free of labels, dirt, etc. Protection from this point shall be the responsibility of the general contractor. END OF SECTION Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Cornell University Physical Sciences Instructional Facility Phase II Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca, NY Page 08 71 00-1 SECTION 08 71 00 FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section shall be governed by the Contract Documents. Provide materials, labor, equipment and services necessary to furnish, deliver and install all work of this section as shown on the drawings, as specified herein, and/or as required by job conditions. B. The work shall include, but is not limited to the following: 1. Furnish finish hardware for each door of the project. 2. Packing, tagging and delivery 3. Furnish and deliver properly tagged hardware as described herein 4. Submit schedules, samples & catalog cuts for review. 5. Key cabinet 6. Construction master keys 7. Anchoring means and methods 8. Furnish templates to other trades 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Installation of Hardware: Section 06 20 23 B. Aluminum Entrances & Storefront: Section 08 41 13 C. Architectural Woodwork: Section 06 44 00 D. Rough Hardware: Section 06 20 23 E. Work Furnished but Installed by others 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCES A. Standards 1. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA) 2. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) 3. Steel Door Institute (SDI) Clark Hall Phase 1I - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Finish Hardware Page 08 71 00-2 4. Door and Hardware Institute 5. U.S. Standards (US) 6. Hollow Metal Manufacturers Assoc. Division of NAAHM 7. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) a. APNSI Al 15.1: Door and Frame Preparation for Mortise Door Locks for 1- 3/4" doors. b. ANSI A156.2: Butts and Hinges. c. ANSI A156.3: Locks and Lock Trim. d. ANSI A156.3: Exit Devices e. ANSI A156.4: Door Controls (Closers). f. ANSI A156.6: Architectural Door Trim. g. ANSI A156.7: Template Hinges. h. ANSI A156.8: Door Controls (Overhead Holders). 8. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. No. 80: Fire Doors and Windows. 9. American Society of Architectural Hardware Consultants (ASAHC): a. Abbreviations and Symbols as Used in Builders' Hardware Schedules and Specifications. b. Standardization for Terms and Nomenclature of Keying B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies 1. Finish hardware where required shall conform to the applicable requirements of the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.. NFPA 80 & 101, local codes and all other regulations and agencies having jurisdiction. Such items of hardware shall bear a label or mark indicating its conformance to the above requirements. C. Suppliers Qualifications 1. All finish hardware shall be furnished by an experience vendor having in his employ competent consultants experienced in detailing, servicing and supplying types of hardware required. All schedules and engineering for this project shall be responsibility of hardware vendor. At all times, there shall be available to Architect and Contractor an approved architectural hardware consultant to assist when so required. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Finish Hardware Page 08 71 00-3 2. Were finished shape or size of members receiving finish hardware are such as to prevent the use of exact types specified, suitable types shall be type specified. All sizes shall be ample for the service required. 3. The finish hardware listed herein is not to be construed as a complete hardware schedule and shall only be considered as an indication of the hardware responsibility to examine the drawings and door schedules and provide all necessary or additional hardware as required but not scheduled herein. Such items of hardware shall be of the same type, quantity and quality as that scheduled herein, and for compliance with the contract documents, of which this is a part. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit three (3) each of the following to Architect for review prior to delivery and installation. 1. Butt hinges - actual 2. Mounted Latch Set - actual 3. Stops - actual each kind B. Shop Drawings 1. Submit shop drawings to the Architect for review in accordance with the requirement of the Contract Documents. 2. Hardware: Immediately after the award of the Contract, the Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval, six (6) copies of a complete hardware schedule, listing all hardware to be provided under this Contract, giving catalog references, type numbers, finish and location of each item identified with door, etc., for which intended. Manufacturers shall be listed for various type of items. Lists not complying with the above will be considered incomplete and will be returned for revision, before checking. 3. Keying - Immediately after the award of the Contract, the Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval, six (6) copies of a keying schedule. 4. Approval of hardware schedule shall not relieve the Contractor of necessity of furnishing all finish hardware designated to be furnished under this Contract. 5. Include in Hardware Schedule all items required for entire project, whether or not hereinafter listed in detail schedule; and cover all details as to proper type strike plates, length of spindle, hand, backset, and bevel of locks, hand and degree opening for closers, length of kick plates, length of rods and flush bolts, type of door stop and other functions of mechanism to meet requirements of Contract. 6. Assume sole responsibility for the provision, proper coordination, installation and functioning of finish hardware required for all openings, whether or not hereinafter listed in detailed schedule. Identify manufacturer of each item, provide complete catalog information of each item and list appropriate finish. 7. If not properly or completely submitted, the Hardware Schedule will be returned for correction and resubmission. Furnish two (2) copies of Hardware Schedule to door and door frame manufacturers. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Finish Hardware Page 08 71 00-4 8. Organize Hardware Schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designation of every item required for each door or opening. Furnish initial draft of schedule at earliest possible date, in order to facilitate fabrication of other work, such as hollow metal frames, which may be critical in project construction schedule. 9. Furnish final draft of schedules after samples, manufacturers' data sheets, coordination with shop drawings for other work, delivery schedules and similar information have been completed and accepted. 10. The review of Hardware and Keying Schedules will not be construed as a complete check, nor will it relieve the Contractor from responsibility for any errors or for any deviations or omissions from the requirements needed to satisfactorily complete the work. C. Product Data 1. For each item of hardware proposed submit catalog cuts and printed manufacturers literature and data sheets defining materials, finishes, sizes, and operation. D. Templates and Reinforcing Units: Promptly following review of the Hardware Schedule by the Architect furnish and deliver templates and lock reinforcing units to the fabricators of items of metal work to which finish hardware is to be applied. Templates and reinforcing units shall be shipped prepaid in ample time to avoid delays in such work. 1.05 PACKING, DELIVERY & STORAGE A. Pack finish Hardware in the manufacturers original containers bearing, type, style, set number and finish, complete with trimmings, trim pieces, fastening devices, and installation instructions. Use only the Architect's door numbering system to identify doors and openings. Deliver materials in the timing and sequence/s required by the Project construction progress schedule, so as to assure full and complete delivery ofthe finish hardware items in ample time to permit installation within the period allotted by the Contractor for such operations. Accompany each shipment with a checking schedule in duplicate. B. Delivered materials shall be identical to the reviewed samples. C. Deliver each piece of individually wrapped finish hardware to the job site under cover in a dry and clean location off the ground. Remove materials which are damaged, or otherwise not suitable for installation from the job site and replace with acceptable materials. D. Provide secure storage for hardware delivered to the job site but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items which are not immediately replaceable, so that completion ofthe work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after installation. E. Shortages, Incorrect Items: Based on the plans, drawings and Specifications in effect at the time of the Architect's and Owner's final approval and instruction to the Contractor to manufacture the finish hardware as per the reviewed final hardware and keying schedules and templates, it is stipulated that Contractor shall be responsible for and shall furnish all required Finish Hardware material items, as well as replace with correct material such shortages and incorrect items as may develop, all at no additional cost to the Owner. Clark Hall Phase 1I - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Finish Hardware Page 08 71 00-5 1.06 GUARANTEE A. Provide a guarantee for finish hardware specified herein. Guarantee shall state that the finish hardware furnished shall be free from defects caused by defective workmanship and/or materials for a period of two (2) years from the date of substantial completion. B. Guarantee shall be in a form acceptable to the Architect and Owner and shall be executed by a principal of the firm issuing the guarantee complete with notarized stamp and date. 1.07 FINAL ADJUSTMENT A. The Contractor shall provide the services of the manufacturer's representative who shall inspect the manufacturer's material furnished under this section and report to the Contractor all repairs, adjustments and replacements necessary to make the hardware function properly. Final payment will not be authorized until all such work is completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCTS A. General 1. Hand of door: the drawings show the swing or hand of each door leaf (left, right, reverse bevel, etc.). Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of the door swing as shown. 2. Manufacturer's name plate: do not use manufacturer's products which have his name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates), except in conjunction with required UL labels. 3. Base metals: produce hardware units of the basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper and hardness but in no case of lesser (commercially -recognized) quality than specified for the applicable hardware units by FS -FF -H-106, FS -FF -H-111, FS -FF -H-1 16 and FS - FF -H-121. Do not substitute "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified. 4. Fasteners: manufacture hardware to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware which has been prepared for self -tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. 5. Screws: furnish screws for installation, with each hardware item. Provide phillips flat head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match the hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match the finish of such other work as closely as possible, including "prepared for paint" in surfaces to receive painted finish. 6. Tools for Maintenance: furnish a complete set of specialized tools as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, removal and replacement of builder's hardware. Clark Hall Phase 11- 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Finish Hardware Page 08 71 00-6 B. Hinges: 1. Hinges: full mortise type template non -rising loose pins. 2. Hinges for 1-3/4" thick doors shall be 4-1/2" wide in the open position. For other thickness doors hinges shall be of a width to permit unobstructed swing of the doors. 3. Sizes and weights of hinges shall conform to the following requirements: From 30" to 36" From 36" to 40" From 40" to 48" 4-1/2 " regular weight 5" regular weight 5" heavy weight 4. Quantity of hinges to conform to the following requirements: Doors up to 60" in height Doors over 60" to 90" in height Doors over 90" to 120" in height 1 pair 1-1/2 pair 2 pair 5. Exterior butts shall have non -removable pins ball bearing flat button tips. 6. Butts shall have special bending when required to suit conditions encountered in the field. 7. Butt sizes shall be detailed so that the least amount of projection shall be visible from the frame. 8. Butts for wood doors shall be full mortise type. Thru bolts for butts shall not be permitted. C. Locks and Latch sets 1. Cylindrical Locks (based on Sargent Co. "10 Line") a. Bored locks conforming to Fed. Spec. Series 161, 1-3/4 back -sets hard drawn steel seamless tubing case, wrought stainless steel fronts, No. 800 curved lip strike as per ANSI A115.3 stainless steel 1-1/4" length, wrought aluminum box, solid brass 7/8 x 5/8 x 1/2" throw latch bolt, 6 pin tumbler master keyed cylinders, brass aligning tube. D. Overhead Closers (Surface and Concealed) 1. All surface closers shall exceed ANSI A156,4 Grade I requirements in all aspects as called for below. All testing laboratory of 10,000,000 cycles without failure. 2. Closers: full rack and pinion type, having a case of non -porous cast or iron with a rack of machine steel alloy, with pinion same material as the rack and constructed in one piece. 3. Unless otherwise noted door closers shall not be visible on the public side of doors, nor shall they appear on the exterior side of exterior doors. Doors with surface closers opening into public spaces shall be provided with parallel arms. Clark Hall Phase I1- 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Finish Hardware Pale 08 71 00-7 4. Closer cylinders shall be cast iron. Closer pinions shall be dual heat treated. Pinion and piston shall be steel alloy. Piston diameter shall be minimum 1 %2". Closers shall be barrier free with spring tension adjustable from size 1 to size 5. 5. All closers shall have 3 non critical adjusting valves: latch, main and backcheck. Closers mounted on bathroom doors shall have delayed action. Backcheck shall take affect at 45 degrees of opening for parallel arm closers and 70 degrees for regular arm closers. 6. All closers shall have forged main arms. Forearms of parallel arm closers shall be forged. Parallel arm brackets shall be forged. All arm joints shall have bronze bushings. Cylinders, arms, brackets and mounting plates shall be powder coated. 7. Closers shall be LCN 4040/4041 Series. All out swinging exterior doors shall have a Spring Cush Arne with hold open. 8. All closers shall be installed so that closer bodies are positioned on room side of doors to and from corridors, i.e., in -swing doors shall be track arm. Out -swing doors shall have an extra heavy-duty parallel arm. Parallel arm shall be used on connecting doors between rooms. 9. All exterior closers shall have all weather fluid that does not require seasonal adjustment to control speed of door, and shall exhibit the same viscosity from -30 degrees F to +120 degrees F. 10. All closers shall have a powder coated aluminum finish on cylinder, arm and accessories. There shall be a full metal, powder coated cover. 11. All closers shall be of one manufacturer's products. All closers shall be inspected after installation by a factory representative to insure proper adjustment and operation. A report shall be filed with the Architect after visit has been made. 12. Closers shall bear underwriters approval where required for label doors. Exposed fasteners for securing closers in place will not be permitted. Size closer in accordance with the manufacturer's standards, to suit height, width, and weight of door and draft conditions. Where closers are used with parallel arms, the next size shall be used. 13. Surface closers: clean faces without indentations or other design features. Corners shall be as square as possible, with no exposed fasteners. 14. Furnish door closers that shall conform to the governing and applicable codes and regulations, for all doors to accommodate the physically handicapped. E. Overhead Door Holders (Surface and Concealed) 1. Extruded brass tracks, rubber shock absorbers backed with plated enclosed spring and cold drawn hard tempered brass arm and bracket. Holders: free acting single point type with automatic holding and release. a. Concealed closers: concealed in top rail. b. Surface doors holders: reversible type secured to door with flush oval -head hex nuts and slotted oval -head bolts. 2. Size overhead door holders to suit door width, height, weight, and draft conditions. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Finish Hardware Page 08 71 00-8 3. Concealed overhead doors holders and overhead door stops, where specified, shall limit door opening to 90 degree unless otherwise specified in schedule. F. Floor and Wall Stops 1. Floor stops: cast aluminum with gray rubber bumper with appropriate anchoring devices for floor conditions encountered. 2. Wall stops: wrought aluminum convex shaped rubber, concealed mounting plate with appropriate anchoring devices to accommodate encountered field conditions. 3. Use wall stops in preference to floor stops as approved by the Architect. Floor stops will not be permitted where they will interfere with traffic, as determined by the Architect. G. Mop, Kick and Armor Plates Plates: manufactured from not less than 16 gauge, Type 304 (18-8) stainless steel, finish 626. Edges: sharp, bevels will not be acceptable. Plates shall be secured to door faces with adhesives. Exposed fasteners will not be permitted. 2. Armor plates: 40" high x 1-1/2" less than the width of the door. 3. Kick and mop plates shall be 8" high x 1-1/2" Tess than the width of the door. H. Door Silencers (mutes) 1. Resilient cushions made especially for this purpose. 1. Coordinators 1. Underwriters Laboratory listed for use with labeled pairs of doors with overlapping astragals. J. Panic (Exit) Devices 1. All exit devices shall be touch bar as specified. 2. Finish shall be 626 3. Where lever trim is specified, levers shall match balance of project. Escutcheons of all lever trim shall be forged bronze. Lever return springs shall be compression type. 4. All exit devices shall be of one manufacturer. 5. Furnish roller strikes, which interlock the door to the frame (499F), for all ring devices and surface vertical rod devices. 6. Furnish security dead latching for all exit device latches (rim, mortise, surface vertical rod and concealed vertical rod.) 7. Furnish stainless steel touch bars on all exit devices. 8. Furnish hydraulic sound dampening on all exit devices. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Finish Hardware Page 08 71 00-9 9. Furnish the words "Caution Stairwell", both lettered and in Braille, embossed on touch bar of all exit device leading into stairwells. 10. Furnish exit devices that are approved and suitable for use with labeled doors with 3/4" undercut. 11. Furnish exit devices, Tess bottom rod, on all cross -corridor pairs of doors, where doors are for compartmentation only. 12. Panic devices for labeled exits shall bear the appropriate UL labels. If pairs of doors are required to have overlapping astragals they shall be furnished at no additional cost and be subject to the Architects review. K. Electro Magnetic Hold Open Device 1. Device shall be provided by the Construction Contractor and installed by the Electrician. 2. Device shall be surface mounted on floor or wall, and door. 3. Finish shall be sprayed aluminum. L Weather-stripping I . Weather-stripping for exterior hollow metal doors shall consist of the following: a. Sills: fully mortised automatic door bottoms, closed cell neoprene sweep in extruded frames. b. Heads, .lambs: closed cell sponge neoprene held by extruded aluminum frames. Fasteners shall be flush type to match finish of frame as approved by Architect. c. Meeting Stiles: fully mortised, adjustable felt or pile in an extruded aluminum housing. d. Acceptable Manufacturers: (1) Zero Weather-stripping Co., Inc. (2) Accurate Metal Weatherstrip Co., Inc. (3) Reese Metal Weather-stripping Co. (4) A. Nitt and Son (5) Pemko Manufacturing Co. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Finish Hardware Page 08 71 00-10 M. Lock Boxes To comply with Local Code Ordinance requirements, Cornell University requires the provision of a lock box for emergency rapid entry. All new and existing buildings that have fire alarm and/or fire detection systems, which interconnect to the fire department, are to be covered by this standard. 2. Alarm system interconnects include, but are not limited to, municipal fire alarm, radio, telephone leased line, telephone dialer, or central station systems. Lock box for the storage of building keys shall be as follows: a. The Knox Company 846 Production Place Newport Beach, CA 92663 2. 4. Model and location of Knox box shall be prescribed and established by the local or City Fire Department or Fire Marshall. Lock boxes shall be installed to the structure in accordance with the manufacturer's detailed instructions. N. Finishes 1. Interior butts 2. Exterior butts 626 626 3. Knobs, cylinders, panic devices, cylinder plugs flush bolts and strikes, door holder, coordinators stops 626 4. Push/pull plates, armor and kick plates 626 5. Exposed closers shall receive a sprayed finish to match hardware finish for door to which it is applied. 6. Finishes for hardware shall match submitted samples. This trade contractor shall coordinate with the various hardware manufacturers to assure that hardware items, form each manufacturer, and specified to receive the same finish are furnished with the same finish. O. Keying 1. Cylinders shall be Master keyed, and Locksets shall be Construction Master keyed in one set. Permanent key records shall be maintained at the manufacturer's factory. 2. Furnish the following to the Cornell Lock Shop for distribution: a. b. c. d. e. f. Cylinder Locks: Master keys: Grand Master keys: Great -Grand Master keys: Construction Master keys: Cylinder Lock Change: three (3) each six (6) each two (2) each two (2) each twenty (20) total fifty (50) for each different keyway. 3. Furnish two (2) keys for each lockset and cylinder furnished. Provide lock cylinders with six (6) pin cores. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Finish Hardware Page 08 71 00-11 4. Master key all locks as directed by the Owner &/or Campus Locksmith. 5. Cylinder plugs and keys: stamped with not more than six (6) digits for each item. Code numbers shall incorporate into the key cabinet system. P. Key Cabinet 1. Hook and label pockets shall be welded to the cabinet panels. The system shall include printed key gathering envelopes, key tags with self-locking key clips, key receipts and receipt holders and a 3 part card index, and the installation of the keys into the key cabinet. 2. Key cabinets shall be type as specified with provisions to accommodate each and every key on the project and in addition provisions at this time to accommodate an expansion of 50% of the total capacity. When capacity exceeds the cabinet specified provide an additional cabinet as approved by the Architect and Cornell Campus Locksmith. 3 Acceptable manufacturers: a. Telkee Inc. b. Lund Equipment Co., Inc. c. Ke -Master 4. Location of cabinet Nvhere directed by Owner &/or Campus Locksmith. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. For this project the following list of manufacturers have been used for the schedule of hardware herein. 1. Locks and Latch sets Sargent 2. Hinges Stanley or Hager 3. Closers Sargent 4. Stops Glynn Johnson 5. Silencers Ives 6. Overhead stop Rixson 7. Plates Hager 8. Pulls Hager 9. Panic devices Sargent 10. Weather-stripping Pemko, Zero 11. Electric Hold Open Rixson 12. Cylinders Sargent Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Finish Hardware Page 08 71 00-12 13. Lock Boxes Knox Co. 2.03 MANUFACTURER A. Finish Hardware where required shall conform to the applicable requirements of the National Board of Fire Underwriters, Underwriters Laboratories. Inc., local codes and all other regulations and agencies having jurisdiction. Such items of hardware shall bear a label or mark indicating its conformance to the above requirements. B. Finish hardware shall be uniform in finish and color and free from imperfections affecting its appearance, function, operation and serviceability. C. Locks: beveled, rounded or rabbeted faces where required. When lock stiles are too narrow for backset of locks. as specified furnish special backsets. D. Bolts, screws and other fastening devices required for the application of the finish hardware shall be of proper size, length, and type to suit conditions encountered. Exposed fastening devices shall match the finish of the hardware. E. Exposed screws and bolts, where acceptable to the Architect, shall be countersunk oval Phillips heads and finished same as hardware finish. F. All fire rated doors and frames shall have hardware, approved by Underwriters Laboratories and comply with the requirements of applicable codes and regulations. G. No manufacturer's names or trademarks shall be on exposed surfaces of hardware. H. Templates Hardware vendor shall be responsible for furnishing templates to other trades as they are required, and shall deliver such hardware to plants of other contractors and/or material vendors as may be necessary to permit them to install in their place of manufacture. All templates shall be clearly marked as to their respective heading number and shall give full information with regard to installation, screw sizes, full product dimensions and other pertinent details affecting their operation. All such templates shall be coordinated completely with approved finish hardware schedule. 1. Cooperate in the coordination and scheduling of the work of this section with the work of other sections so as not to delay job progress. 2.04 HARDWARE SCHEDULE Note: 1) All required fire labelled doors must have fire -rated hardware. 2) All doors with locks to have "Sargent Co." cylinder and core. 3) Provide sex bolts for all panic devices and door closers. 4) Also, see door schedule for saddle requirements. 5) All closers to be mounted on the room side of the door. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Finish Hardware Page 08 71 00-13 Hardware Set No. 1 - Typical Room Single Entrance Door Each leaf shall have: 1 ea Hinge Continuous geared hinge 626 by storefront manufacturer 1 ea Lockset 8255 x LNL US26D SAR 1 ea Closer 351-0 x MC EN SAR 1 ea Kick 8400 (8" x 2" LDW) 626 IV Hardware Set No. 2 - Typical Room Single Closet Door Each leaf shall have: 4 ea Hinge 1 ea Lockset T4A3786 4-1/2"X4-1/2" 8204 x LNL 26D Mckinney US26D SAR PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Receiving, storing, distribution and installation of finish hardware by Section 06200. 3.02 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. The "Hardware Schedule" indicated shows the general intent of what is required. However. the finishing hardware listed shall not be construed as a complete hardware schedule and shall only be considered as an indication of the hardware requirements desired by the Architect. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to examine the drawings and door schedule and provide all necessary or additional hardware as required but not schedule the drawings and door schedule and provide all necessary or additional hardware as required but not scheduled herein. Such items of hardware shall be of the same type, quality and quantity as that scheduled for similar doors, or parts of the building used for similar purposes. Schedule of fabrication, and delivery shall be executed to avoid any delay of entire project. The furnishing of all hardware is required to fully complete the entire hardware requirements of the job, except for items specifically omitted under "Related Work of Other Sections". B. Items of hardware not specifically listed shall conform in class, quality and type of hardware required in like and similar location. C. Proper Kind and Type: The hardware shall be the proper kind for its required use and shall fit its intended location perfectly. Should any hardware, as specified, fail to meet the intended requirements or require any modifications to suit the intended location, this matter or any other necessary advance information, shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for correction or advice in ample time to avoid delay in the manufacture and delivery of the hardware and at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Cornell University Physical Sciences Instructional Facility Phase II Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca NY Page 08 88 00-1 SECTION 08 88 00 GLASS AND GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section shall be governed by the Contract Documents. Provide materials, labor, equipment and services necessary to furnish, deliver and install all work of this Section as shown on the drawing, as specified herein, and/or as required by job conditions. B. The work shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Glass as scheduled herein 2. Glass setting materials 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. General Requirements — Division 1 B. Flush Wood Doors: Section 08 14 16 C. Aluminum Entrances & Storefront: Section 08 41 13 D. Finish Carpentry: Section 06 20 23 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCES A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies 1. Unless otherwise noted, glazed doors, sidelights and glass occurring in fire rated walls, doors or partitions shall conform to the applicable requirements of the codes and regulations having jurisdiction. B. Reference Standards 1. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.) 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 3. Flat Glass Manufacturer's Association (FGMA) 4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 5. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturer's (NAAMM) Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Glass & Glazing Page 08 88 00-2 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit three (3) each of the following to Architect for review prior to delivery and installation. 1. Glass each type and kind -12" x 12" 2. Glass setting blocks and spacers - 4" long 3. Manufacturers literature and data sheets 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site ready for use in the manufacturer's original and unopened containers and packaging, bearing labels as to type, manufacture and brand. Delivered materials shall be identical to approved samples. B. Store materials under cover in a dry and clean location, off the ground. Remove materials which are damaged or otherwise not suitable for installation and replace with acceptable materials. C. Factory label each glass lite. Labels shall not be removed until after the installation and has been approved. D. Remove glass that is cracked, broken, chipped, or otherwise damaged Boni the job site and replace with new material. Glass surfaces which display streak lines or other imperfections will be considered unacceptable and shall be replaced. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General Glass: approved domestic manufacture conforming to the applicable requirements of Federal Specification DD -G-451 for Flat Glass for Glazing, Mirrors and other uses, and DD -G-001403 for heat strengthened and fully tempered glass. Glass shall be Type I. Class 1, quality 3. B. Glass Types Type A: Location: Type B: Location: 1/4" thick safety laminate glass At all glazed openings in aluminum storefront with the exception of the locations listed below in type B, and in all wood door vision lites, see elevations. 1" thick ceramic frit glass insulated panels, two '/" tempered glass units with a %2" air space. Provide ceramic frit pattern to #2 surface (1/4" horizontal white lines at %" spacing). At all lower glazed openings in aluminum storefront, see elevations. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Glass & Glazing Page 08 88 00-3 C. Acceptable Glass Manufacturers 1. PPG Industries 2. Oldcastle 3. Hordis Bros. Inc. 4. ASG Industries, Inc. 5. Guardian Industries 6. Globe Amerada C. Glass Setting Materials 1. Neoprene Setting Materials a. Neoprene materials: extruded high quality ozone resistant, cured, elastomeric, virgin neoprene compounds with Shore "A" durometer hardness, profiles and design parameters, length and locations as required and recommended by the approved glass manufacturer(s). Exposed channels and gaskets shall have smooth neat exposed profiles conforming to approved profiles. 1. Dense (solid) neoprene: AAMA SG -1 2. Closed cell cellular (sponge) neoprene: ASTM C-509, Type 2, Option b. Setting blocks used to support the dead load of the glass: extruded in a neoprene compound conforming to NAAMM Standard SG -1 with a Shore "A" durometer hardness of between 80 and 90. Length of each block: 0.1" for each square foot of glass area but not less than 4" in length. Width: 1/16" less than full channel width and high enough to provide minimum edge clearance for the glass. c. Shims (edge blocks) used to center and station the glass: extruded in a neoprene compound conforming to NAAMM Standard SG -I with a Shore "A" durometer hardness of between 60 and 70. Not less than 3" in length and sized to allow a nominal I/8" clearance between the edge of the glass and the shim. d. Neoprene channels for interior glazing shall conform to shapes and profiles indicated to accommodate glass thicknesses noted, having Shore "A" 50 (+5) durometer hardness. e. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. D. S. Brown 2. Standard Products Co. 3. F. H. Maloney Co. 4. Tremco Inc. 2. Wet Glazing for Screw on Stops a. Glazing tapes: thickness adequate to compensate for tolerances and to insure permanent contact, permanent compression seal flat or tapered as required, non -staining without oil extrusion, compatible with glazing compound used. Clark Hall Phase 1I - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Glass & Glazing Page 08 88 00-4 1/16" greater in thickness than designed space to insure pressure seal at all points under compression, and widths as required. (1) Acceptable Manufacturers: PPG Industries Tremco Inc. b. Glazing compounds: a silicone base sealant meeting the requirements of TT- S -00230. Colors as selected by Architect from approved manufacturer's standard published color range. (1) Acceptable Manufacturers: General Electric Tremco Inc. Dow Corning 2.02 MANUFACTURE A. Manufacture glass lights to approved sizes and thicknesses, from measurements taken at the project. B. Glass lights shall have "clean cut" and/or custom factory edges conforming to manufacturer's recommendations. C. Manufacture tempered glass units to exact sizes for each opening. Discard, remove and replace over and/or undersize units with proper fitting glass units of same type. D. Heat -soak tempered glass after tempering in an autoclave at between 400 - 425 degrees F. for a minimum of four (4) hours. E. Where noted, fabricate tempered butt glass units at the Conference Room with shop fabricated holes to accommodate chair rail and wiring means and methods. Polish all vertical edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine surfaces and conditions to which this work is to be attached or applied and notify the Architect in writing if conditions exist which are detrimental to the proper and expeditious installation of the work. Starting on the work shall imply acceptance of the surfaces and conditions to perform the work as specified. B. Verify dimensions affecting the work at the job site. Bring field dimensions which are at variance to the attention of the Architect. Obtain decision regarding corrective measure before the start of installation. C. Cooperate in the coordination of scheduling of the work in this Section with the work of other sections so as not to delay job progress. D. Verify all glass sizes and clearances. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare glazing rabbets so that they are clean, dry, and free of materials that might adversely affect the bond and seal of the glazing materials or of the proper drainage of the rabbet. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Glass & Glazing Page 08 88 00-5 B. Install glass and glazing materials under the climatological conditions recommended by the manufacturers. C. Prime surfaces to receive glazing materials unless recommended otherwise, in writing, by the manufacturers. D. Protect adjoining surfaces not to receive glazing material against staining or damage. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform glazing using skilled workmen familiar with materials, methods and details noted herein, and in accordance with the best trade practices, without springing or forcing. Follow instructions of the glass and glazing materials manufacturers. B. Glass and glass setting materials shall be compatible with each other and adequate for their intended purpose. C. Remove stops carefully, and after setting glass, replace in their original positions with the same fastening devices. and/or snap in place. D. Install glass setting materials on clean, dry, dirt and dust free surfaces in accordance with the approved manufacturer's recommendations, in a waterproof manner. Clean surfaces to receive glazing materials with cleaning agents as required. E. The minimum bite of glass shall be as follows unless otherwise noted or recommended by the glass manufacturer. Under 50 united inches - I/4" 50 to 100 united inches - 3/8" Over 100 united inches - 1/2" F. Setting blocks: not less than 4" long, by 1/16" less than full width of glass and of a height to permit a proper glass bite as recommended by the approved glass manufacturer and/or as noted herein. Place two setting blocks at the glass quarter points for each light of glass. G. Install spacer shims on 24" centers around the perimeter of each glazed opening with not Tess than two spacers per side. Locate in the vertical channels. H. Set glazing to be thoroughly watertight and free from rattle and strain, and centered in each opening providing the purchases and clearances required. Tong marks of tempered glass units shall not be visible in the finished work. L. If submitted glass supporting enframement details differ from that shown on the drawings, the Contractor shall determine proper glazing procedures before acceptance by the Architect. J. Remove all labels from the glass as soon as possible after glazing. Install identification or markers after glass has been set. Identification of markers shall not be placed directly on the glass surfaces, but placed across the windows with ample space for air movement between markers and glass. K. Remove excess glazing materials from glass and adjacent surfaces during the working time of the materials so as to prevent staining and discoloration. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Glass & Glazing Page 08 88 00-6 3.04 INTERIOR GLAZING CHANNELS A. Examine frames before installation to assure that they are acceptable to perform this work. Remove stops carefully so as not to mar finishes. B. Fit each pane of glass with neoprene channels. Channels shall fit snugly around edges of glass. Positions setting blocks and shims and set as specified herein for regular glass setting. C. Replace stops into original position, using original screws and/or snapping back as required. 3.05 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect glass in transport and during construction, taking all normal precautions against breakage. After installation, mark glazed opening with streamers or other approved means to reduce possibility of damage by other trades. Do not mark glass with compound, or any type. B. This trade Contractor shall be responsible for damage to, or breakage of work caused by his operations during delivery and installation. After installation and initial inspection, the Contractor shall be responsible for protection of the work until final acceptance. C. Replace broken, cracked or chipped glass with new and identical material, as approved and/or directed by the Architect. D. Before final acceptance, remove the protecting materials and clean surfaces of dirt smears, paint spots, mortar and other extraneous material from both sides of each pane of glass, at all interior and exterior locations. END OF SECTION Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Cornell University Physical Sciences Instructional Facility Phase II Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca, NY Page 09 21 10-1 SECTION 09 21 10 ACOUSTIC GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract. including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to work specified in this section. 1.02 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK OF THIS SECTION A. Work, in general, includes installing acoustic gypsum board suspended ceiling framing assemblies and acoustic sealant at both walls and ceilings for the rooms listed below. 1. As base bid scope of work: a. At all gypsum partitions provide one layer of acoustical gypsum board in conjunction with one layer of "Type X" Gypsum Board. b. Install acoustical sealant as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Section Includes: composite gypsum wall and ceiling panels. .03 RELATED WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Coordinate work of this section with work of other sections as required to properly execute the work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other sections, including but not limited to: 1. Gypsum Board Framing: Section 09 29 00 2. Gypsum Drywall Ceilings: Section 09 25 50 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C639 Standard Test Method for Rheological (Flow) Properties of Elastomeric Sealants. 2. ASTM C681 Standard Test Method for Volatility of Oil- and Resin -Based, Knife -Grade, Channel Glazing Compounds. 3. ASTM D750 Standard Test Method for Rubber Deterioration in Carbon -Arc Weathering Apparatus. 4. ASTM D925 Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property -Staining of Surfaces (Contact, Migration, and Diffusion). Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 ACOUSTIC GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page 09 21 10-2 5. ASTM D2202 Standard Test Method for Slump of Sealants. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section. B. Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer's datasheet, for specified products. C. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. 2. Test Reports: Upon request, provide test reports from recognized testing laboratories. Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Warranty documents specified herein. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE I . Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on projects of similar size and complexity. A. Codes and Regulations 1. Work specified herein shall conform to all applicable Local codes and regulations having jurisdiction. 2. Where fire resistive ratings are required, for work of this Section, the gypsum drywall assemblies shall be installed in strict accordance with the Underwriters Laboratory requirements. B. Reference Standards 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 2. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.) 3. Gypsum Association (GA) 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site, ready for use in the approved manufacturer's original, and unopened, undamaged containers and packaging, bearing labels as to type or material, brand name, and manufacturer's name. Delivered materials shall be identical to reviewed samples. B. Store materials under cover in a dry and clean location, and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer, off the ground and remove materials which are damaged or otherwise not suitable for installation from the job site and replace with acceptable materials. Store Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 ACOUSTIC GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page 09 21 10-3 Quiet Rock flat until use. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions. B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under contract documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01. SOUND DAMPING SYSTEM A. Manufacturer: Serious Materials, Inc. Contact: 1250 Elko Dr., Sunnyvale, CA 94089; Telephone: (800) 797-8159.. (408) 541-8000; Fax: (408) 715-2560; E-mail: info cjseriousmaterials.com; Web site: www.quietrock.com. 2.02. PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted. 2.03 MATERIALS 1. Gypsum Wall and Ceiling Panels: 2. QuietRock "E -Z SNAP" 3. Thickness: 5/8 inch, tapered edges. 4. Weight: 3.0 psfl 5. Size: 4 feet x 8 feet. or as needed to complete the scope of work 2.04. ACCESSORIES 1. Acoustical Sealant: QuietSeal: 2. Solids Content (ASTM C681): 91% by weight. 3. Sag: ASTM C639, Type II. Not more that 0.10 inch (2.5 nim) when placed vertically in an oven at 155 - 161 degrees F (68 - 72 degrees C) for 1/2 hour in accordance with ASTM D2202. 4. Staining (ASTM D925): Will not deteriorate a painted surface. 5. Weatherability (ASTM D750): No cracking, bleeding or loss of rubber characteristics after 1000 hours in a weather -o -meter. Clark Hall Phase I1 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 ACOUSTIC GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page 09 21 10-4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify that substrate conditions, which have been previously installed under other sections, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install in accordance with reference standards and manufacturer's instructions, product technical bulletins, product catalog and product carton instructions for installation [and as required to comply with seismic requirements]. B. Follow all OSHA guidelines when completing any construction project. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch up, repair or replace damaged products prior to Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Cornell University Physical Sciences Instructional Facility Phase 1I Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca NY Page 09 25 50-1 SECTION 09 25 50 ACOUSTICAL CEILING BOARDS (Exposed Grid) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this section shall be governed by the contract documents. Provide materials, labor, equipment and services necessary to furnish, deliver and install work of this section as shown on the drawings, as specified herein and/or as required by job conditions. B. The work shall include but not limited to the following: 1. Ceiling boards and units. 2. Exposed grid suspension system. 3. Hangers as required. 4. Carrying channels and clips or direct suspension system. 5. Perimeter molding. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 09 29 00: Gypsum Drywall B. Section 09 29 00: Gypsum Drywall Ceilings C. Division 15: Diffusers, grilles, registers D. Division 15: Sprinklers E. Division 16: Lighting Fixtures 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCES A. Standards 1. All components shall be rated Class A, Incombustible in accordance with Fed. Spec. SS -A-118. 2. Installation of units performed in accordance with the procedures and methods described in the "Ceiling Systems Handbook" published under the direction of the National Acoustical Contractors Association and ASTM C-636 & C-635 unless otherwise noted herein. Clark Hall Phase 1I - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Gypsum Drywall Ceilings Page 09 25 50-2 B. Tolerance 1. Suspension members shall be of sufficient strength and rigidity to carry in a true and level plane without exceeding a deflection of 1/360th of their spans. C. Reference Standards 1. Federal Specifications (FS) 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 3. Ceiling & Interior Systems Contractors Assoc. (CISCA) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Architect three (3) each of the following to Architect for review prior to delivery and installation. 1. Acoustical units - actual - each type and kind. 2. Ceiling suspension system members - each type and kind with finish. 3. Edge moulding with finish. B. Shop Drawings 1. Submit for review in accordance with requirements ofthe Contract Documents. 2. Shop drawings shall include the layout and extent of acoustical ceilings, showing every unit, complete with details of mechanical suspension system, methods of attachment to ceilings and units and details where units abut adjoining materials. 3. Prior to submission of acoustical ceiling shop drawings, the Contractor shall fully coordinate his work, with the work of other trades, with regard to heights above finished floors, clearance for ducts, pipes and conduits, and support and location of lighting fixtures, and all other devices which will penetrate ceiling tiles. C. Product Literature: submit to Architect for review along with data sheets on ceiling units and suspension members. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site, ready for use in the manufacturer's and unopened containers and packaging, bearing labels as to type of material, brand name, and manufacturer's name. Delivered materials shall be identical to submitted samples. Fire classified labels shall be intact and visible. B. Store materials under cover in a dry and clean location, off the ground. Remove materials which are damaged or otherwise not suitable for installation from the job site and replace with acceptable materials. C. Furnish necessary inserts, which are required to be built into the work for the support ofthe acoustical tile ceilings, specified herein. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Gypsum Drywall Ceilings Page 09 25 50-3 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements 1. Maintain a uniform temperature of not less than 60 degrees F. immediately before, during, and after installation of acoustical tiles. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACOUSTICAL CEILING BOARDS A. Type: AC -1 See Reflected Ceiling Plans and Finish Schedule 1. Size/Model: 24" x 24" x 5/8". "Ultima -1912" 2. Material: Mineral fiber 3. Edge: beveled tegular lay -in 4. Pattern: fine texture 5. Finish: Factory applied white latex paint. 6. NRC Range: .55 - .65 according to ASTM C423. 7. Light Reflectance: .90 8. Grid System: Silhouette XL 9/16" Bolt -Slot System 1/4" Reveal B. Type: AC -2 (at new corridors; see reflected ceiling plans and finish schedule for locations) 1. Size/Model: 24" x 72" x 1", Model No. 3261, (cut to width of corridor as required) OR Size/Model: 24" x 96" x 1 ", Model No. 3262, (cut to width of corridor as required) 2. Material: Mineral fiber 3. Edge: square tegular lay -in 4. Pattern: natural fissured 5. Finish: Factory applied white latex paint 6. NRC Range: .95 according to ASTM C423. 7. Light Reflectance: .90 8. Grid System: Silhouette XL 9/16" Bolt -Slot System 1/4" Reveal 9. Accessory: Stabilizer Clip No. 435, provide a total of four clips at each panel, two clips installed at the third points of each long edge. Clark Hall Phase 11- 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Gypsum Drywall Ceilings Page 09 25 50-4 C. Acceptable manufacturer 1. Armstrong World Industries 2. or an equal acceptable to the Architect 2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM MEMBERS A. Hangers: 1/4" diameter adjustable rod hangers complete with selected top and bottom fittings to accommodate carrying channels and encountered construction. B. Carrying channels: 1-1/2", cold rolled, 16 gauge steel asphaltum coated weighing .475 lbs. per lineal foot. 1. Provide acceptable clips between channels and hangers. NOTE: Where permitted by Code and/or trade jurisdictions. carrying channels may be omitted and the tee members hung directly using above hangers or 9 gauge galvanized wire with double twist tie. C. Edge molding: not Tess than 24 gauge steel conforming to approved profiles with factory finished baked -on enamel finish to match grid. D. Tees, runners, splines and clips for suspension systems: metal, zinc coated with rust - inhibitive paint conforming to requirements and profiles as recommended by the tile manufacturer for suspension system with factory finished baked on enamel. E. Suspension system members as per ASTM C-635 F. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Donn Products 2. Chicago Metallic Corp. 3. National Rolling Mills. Co. 4. or an equal acceptable to the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Study the contract drawings and specifications with regard to the work as shown and required under this Section so as to insure its completeness. B. Examine surfaces and conditions to which this work is to be attached or applied, and notify the Architect if conditions surfaces exist which are detrimental to the proper and expeditious installation of the work. Starting on the work shall imply acceptance of the surfaces and conditions to perform the work as specified. C. Verify, by measurement taken at the job site, those dimensions affecting the work. Bring field dimensions which are at variance to the attention of the Architect. Obtain decision regarding corrective measures before the start of fabrication of items affected. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Gypsum Drywall Ceilings Page 09 25 50-5 D. Do not install suspended acoustical ceilings until piping, conduits and ducts in the spaces above the ceilings have been installed, tested and accepted. E. Cooperate in the coordination and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of other sections so as not to delay job progress. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL 1. Perform work in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturers of the materials used, and required by the drawings to meet conditions encountered in a careful and workmanlike manner by mechanics skilled in the handling of the materials herein specified. 2. Cooperate with other trades in the installation of and provision for items affecting or affected by the ceiling work, such as lighting fixtures and other related work. 3. Keep hangers clear of mechanical equipment, and where required provide additional bridging, hangers and framing as required for ducts, lighting fixtures, and other ceiling penetrations. 4. Install suspension system members in lengths as Tong as practicable with splices securely fastened using concealed splice clips. Cutting, forming, spacing and fitting shall be accurately done, with members in proper alignment. 5. Carefully tit acoustical units around ceiling fixtures and other items occurring in tile surfaces. Accurately cut border units to fit tightly and neatly at all intersections with other materials. 6. Provide fillers of units and other cut units as required to complete the installations. Fit all units neatly in place with edges in alignment and faces in a true plane. 7. Ceilings: true in line and face, installed in straight patterns laid symmetrically about the center lines of the areas, leaving borders of equal width. 8. Provide a factory painted metal molding around the perimeter of the ceilings and against vertical interrupting surfaces. Install in lengths as long as practicable with inconspicuous joints, mitered at corners, accurately shaped and fitted throughout to meet conditions encountered and securely fastened in place using concealed fastenings spaced not over 12" o.c. and 1" from ends. 9. All trim and exposed metal in the completed tile ceiling application shall receive a baked -on enamel finish in a color to match the acoustical boards. 10. As required, Contractor shall modify tiles at the corridors or cut in field square tegular edge and finish cut edge with white paint finish to match manufacturers finish. B. Exposed Grid (carrying channels) 1. Install appropriate hanger devices into the encountered structure at 4 feet o.c. over the entire ceiling area and suspend a hanger from each hanger device after securing in place. Precut as required to conform to approved ceiling heights. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Gypsum Drywall Ceilings Page 09 25 50-6 7 Install carrying channels 4 feet o.c. by suing appropriate clips engaging the hangers and the channel. Level channels to 1/8" in 10 feet. Install main runners at right angles to carrying channels using loop type clips at each intersection of runner and channel, or install main runners, securing directly to hangers in accepted direction 2 feet o.c. as per accepted shop drawings. a. Locate runners at 4 feet o.c. 4. Install continuous edge molding where boards abut vertical surfaces, using approved type concealed fasteners spaced not over 12" o.c. 5. Install cross tee runners at right angles to main runners. Secure cross tee runners to wall moldings and to main runners, after runners are all perpendicular to each other. a. Provide cross tees 2'-0" o.c. to form 24 x 24 grids. 6. Flanges of supporting members shall not exceed 15/16" width. Exposed members shall have a baked enamel finish to match color of acoustical boards. 7. install acoustical boards into grids formed by the runners. Cut border units to meet field conditions using manufacturer's approved cutting procedures. Boards shall lie flat and snug in the grid. 8. Insert hold-down clips over main or cross runners to hold ceiling boards in position. C. Exposed Grid (Direct Suspension) 1. Direct hung suspension system members shall be capable of supporting on their simple spans a minimum load of 20 lbs. per linear foot when tested in accordance with the Test Method described and established by the Acoustical and Insulating Materials Association. 2. Suspend hangers from structure above. Hangers shall be as required to conform to ceiling heights noted. For each lighting fixture provide four (4) additional hangers. 3. Edge mouldings shall be installed continuously where tile abut vertical surfaces, using approved type concealed fasteners spaced not over 18" o.c. 4. Suspend and secure main runners to hangers perpendicular to walls at 4 feet o.c. Rest runners in edge mouldings before making final connections to each other. a. Locate at 2 feet o.c. to form 24" x 24" spacing. b. Provide cross tees at 2 feet o.c. to form 24" x 48" grids. 5. Flanges of supporting members shall not exceed 15/16" width. Exposed members shall have a baked enamel finish to match color of approved ceiling panels. 6. Install ceiling boards into grids formed by the runners. Cut boarder tiles as required to meet field conditions. Boards shall lie flat and snug in the grid. 7. Insert hold down clips over main or cross runners to hold all ceiling boards in position. Clark Hall Phase 1I - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Gypsum Drywall Ceilings Page 09 25 50-7 3.03 SPARE STOCK A. The Contractor shall leave at the job site two (2) full cartons of each type of the installed ceiling boards clearly marked as to their contents. Contents of cartons full and factory sealed. 3.04 PROTECTION & CLEANING A. Protect installed work from damages. Remove work that is broken, scratched, cracked, or otherwise not acceptable and replace with new materials at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Adjust and reset work which is out of plumb and not flush with adjacent units. C. Leave exposed surfaces clean and free from blemishes and/or defects. Replace and/or repair exposed metal surfaces which are abraded, scratched or dented. END OF SECTION Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Cornell University Physical Sciences Instructional Facility Phase II Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca, NY Page 09 29 00-1 SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM DRYWALL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section shall be governed by the Contract Documents. Provide materials, labor, equipment and services necessary to furnish, deliver and install all work of this section as shown on the drawings, as specified herein, and/or as required by job conditions. B. The Work shall include, but is not limited to the following: 1. Gypsum drywall 2. metal studs and runners 3. Furring members, high hats, 'Z' members 4. Gypsum drywall ceilings and suspension components 5. Perimeter accessories 6. Screw attachment 7. Provision for penetrations 8. Provide a "Level 5" finish for all areas of gypsum board. 9. Acoustical sealants and sound attenuation blankets 10. Reinforcing and cutouts for other trades 11. Installation of access doors 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Rough Carpentry: Section 06 10 00 B. Finish Carpentry: Section 06 20 23 C. Acoustical and Thermal Batt Insulation Section 07 21 00 D. Access Doors: Section 08 31 13 E. Aluminum Framed Entrance And Storefront: Section 08 41 13 F. Acoustical Gypsum Board Assemblies: Section 09211 G. Gypsum Board Ceiling: Section 09 25 50 H. Painting: Section 09 84 33 I. Lighting Fixtures: Division 16 J. Terminal Air Devices: Division 15 Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Gypsum Drywall Page 09 29 00-2 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCES A. Codes and Regulations I. Work specified herein shall conform to all applicable Local codes and regulations having jurisdiction. 2. Where fire resistive ratings are required, for work of this Section, the gypsum drywall assemblies shall be installed in strict accordance with the Underwriters Laboratory requirements. B. Reference Standards 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (including, but not limited to, ASTM C 840) 2. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.) 3. Gypsum Association (including, but not limited to, GA 214-10) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Literature 1. Submit manufacturer's printed literature and data sheets describing the materials proposed for use. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site, ready for use in the approved manufacturer's original, and unopened containers and packaging, bearing labels as to type or material, brand name, and manufacturer's name. Delivered materials shall be identical to reviewed samples. B. Store materials under cover in a dry and clean location, off the ground and remove materials which are damaged or otherwise not suitable for installation from the job site and replace with acceptable materials. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Joint and recessed fastener treatment shall not be undertaken until the interior temperature is at least 50F and such temperature is maintained at least 24 hours before and 24 hours after, in areas and spaces where joint and recessed fastener treatment are being performed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM DRYWALL A. Gypsum drywall shall conform to Fed. Spec. SS -L -30c and ASTM C-36, with tapered edges, in thickness noted on the drawings. B. Fire -rated gypsum drywall shall be Type "X" and Type "XX"(c) manufactured especially for fire resistance with a core formulated from special mineral materials, and shall conform to ASTM C-707. C. Provide weather resistant drywall conforming to ASTM C-630 at the following locations: walls and ceilings of toilet rooms containing plumbing fixtures and kitchen. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Gypsum Drywall Page 09 29 00-3 D. Shaft wall liner boards: 1" thick, special fire resistant gypsum cores, 24" wide and beveled edges. 2.02 FURRED AND STUD WALL FRAMING MEMBERS A. Metal Studs: as indicated on the drawings and shall be non -load bearing channel type, formed fioni 22 ga. electro -galvanized steel, as per ASTM C-645 designed for screw attachment and provided with knockouts to accommodate pipe and/or conduit installations. Width and height of studs shall conform to partition types noted on the drawings. 1. When height of partition exceeds the following values. studs shall be increased to 20 ga. with spacing remaining of 16" o.c. Partition one layer 11'-6" Partition two layers 12'-0" Furring one layer 10'-0" B. Ceiling and Floor Runners: channel type formed of 25 ga. electrogalvanized steel, designed to receive partition types and studs as required. C. Furring Channels: shall consist of "Hi -Hat" and "Z" Type" manufactured of galvanized steel. "Z" Type shall be used where indicated on the drawings. Furring channels shall be 3/4" cold rolled 16 ga. painted steel channels. D. Stud. runners and furring shall conform to ASTM C-645. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES A. Metal Accessories shall consist of corner beads, stops, edge trim, casing beads and control joints and other accessories as required conforming to proper profiles and sizes to accommodate drywall partition components encountered. Accessories shall be formed of 26 ga. galvanized or cadmium plated steel 'atter manufacture. All beads shall be tapeable type. Plastic beads are not permitted. B. Screws for securing drywall and accessories in place, self -drilling, self -tapping. Phillips head steel screws, designed for power tool attachment. Length and type of screws as recommended by the manufacturer of the partition system and by conditions encountered in the field. The use of nails for application will not be permitted. Screws shall conform to ASTM C-646 and C-1002. C. Joint cement and joint tape: a three (3) coat application as recommended by the gypsum drywall manufacturer. Materials shall conform to ASTM C-475 D. Laminating adhesives for multi -layer applications: as recommended by the drywall manufacturer for partition types noted and conditions encountered in the field. 2.04 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Acoustical Sealant: a highly elastic, non-bleeding and staining, pumpable, type sealant which shall remain permanently flexible, formulated for this type of application. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. U.S. Gypsum Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Gypsum Drywall Page 09 29 00-4 2. Tremco Inc. 2.05 SHAFT WALL FRAMING MEMBERS A. Components for shaft wall partitions: formed from hot dipped galvanized steel meeting ASTM a-466, Grade A with minimum G60 zinc coating. B. Studs: C -H type non -load bearing sections installed between abutting liner panels. E -type studs: used singly to cap panels at intersections with exterior walls or back-to-back as studs for high partitions. 1. For studs exceeding 12 feet increase stud gauge as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Runners: .1 -type used singly at top and bottom of walls, and back-to-back between vertical liner panels at intermediate floors. D. See drawings for widths and relationships of members. E. Frame duct penetrations at mechanical shafts with 18 gauge members at jambs, sills and headers unless otherwise noted. F. Resilient channels: 26 gauge galvanized steel, with pre -punched holes spaced 4" o.c. in the flange for screw attachment. 2.06 ACCEPTABLE DRYWALL MANUFACTURERS A. U.S. Gypsum B. National Gypsum/Gold Bond 2.07 INSULATION A. Insulation within partitions: sound attenuation blankets or rigid insulation (see insulation Section 07200). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Study the contract drawings and specifications with regard to the work as shown and required under this section so as to insure its completeness. B. Examine surfaces and conditions to which this work is to be attached or applied and notify the Architect in writing if conditions exist which are detrimental to the proper and expeditious installation of the work. Starting on the work shall imply acceptance of the surfaces and conditions to perform the work as specified. C. Verify dimensions taken at the job site those affecting the work. Bring field dimensions which are at variance to the attention of the Architect. Obtain decision regarding corrective measures before the start of installation. D. Cooperate in the coordination and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of other sections so as not to delay job progress. 3.02 WORKMANSHIP Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Gypsum Drywall Page 09 29 00-5 A. Materials and partition systems specified herein and as indicated on the drawings shall be installed in strict accordance with the printed directions and/or specifications of the approved manufacturer to attain fire ratings noted on the drawings. B. Apply drywall with the reverse side against the framing members, and with the separate boards in moderate contact. In no case shall the boards be forced into place. At interior and exterior corners, conceal the cut edges of the panels by overlapping them with the abutting boards. Stagger the panels so that the corners of any four panels will not meet at the sane point. C. Provide double studs at both jambs of door frames and at head runner atop frame. Secure to runners at top, bottom and sides. Provide diagonal braces to ceiling construction. D. Build into the drywall partitions reinforcing plates of not less than 3/16" thick, to accommodate items which will be secured on and/or hung from the drywall partitions. Coordinate with other trade Contractors as required. E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide continuous faces of gypsum drywall partitions, with control joints, spaced not over 30 feet o.c. Verify control joint locations with the Architect prior to installation. 3.03 FRAMING FOR PARTITIONS AND FURRING A. Floor and ceiling runners shall be accurately located and aligned, and installed continuously at locations noted, and attached to adjacent construction using power driven anchors space 24" on centers. Anchor floor runners not over one (1) inch from runner ends. B. Position studs vertically in the runners, spaced as recommended by the approved manufacturer but not more than 16" on centers, unless otherwise noted. Anchor studs which are located adjacent to door frames, partition intersections, furred wall, and at corners, to floor and ceiling runner flanges with required screws. 1. Unless otherwise noted all studs shall be continuous in one piece from floor to ceiling. See gauge schedule herein under materials and option to reduce spacing. When the space between the hung ceiling and the underside of the structure is 5'-0" and greater, and the partition layout indicates right angled partition intersections, then only every other stud shall be continuous from floor to underside of structure as determined by the Architect. 3. Continuous studs, which are a greater length than normally manufactured shall consist of nested stud lengths, minimum 18" overlap and screwed together using not less than nine (9) screws staggered over the flanges and other surfaces of the nested studs. 2. 4. For all partitions and walls, studs shall extend from floor to underside of structure as per tested rated assembly. C. Locate double studs not more than 2" from all door frame jambs, abutting partitions, partition corners and other construction. D. Over metal doors place a section of runner track horizontally with a web -flange bent at each end. Fasten with one positive attachment per flange. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Gypsum Drywall Page 09 29 00-6 E. A cut -to -length stud extending from the door frame header to the ceiling runner shall be positioned at the vertical joints over the door frame. Door framing shall be anchored in place independently of the partition framing. F. Provide additional studs and runners to conform to details noted and/or required by conditions encountered on the field. G. Where studs are installed directly against exterior wa11s install asphalt felt strips between studs and wall surfaces. H. Furred Walls 1. Direct Furring Channel a. Attach metal furring channels (vertically, horizontally space 24" o.c. to masonry or concrete surfaces with hammerset or power -driven fasteners or concrete stub nails staggered 24" o.c. on opposite flanges. Nest channels 8" at splices and anchor with two fasteners in each wing. Where furring channel is installed directly to exterior wall, install asphalt felt protection strip between furring channel and wall. 3.04 SHAFT WALLS A. Position steel runners at floor and ceilings with the short leg towards finish side of wall. Securely attach runners to structural supports with power -driven fasteners at both ends and 24" o.c. With steel frame construction, install floor and ceiling runners and .l -runners or E - studs on columns before steel is fireproofed. Remove spray -tire -proofing from runners and E -studs before installing shaft wall liner. B. Cut liner board panels 1" less than floor -to -ceiling height and erect vertically between .1 - runners. 1. Where shaft walls exceed maximum available panel height, position liner panel end joints within upper and lower third points of wall. Stagger joints top and bottom in adjacent panels and reinforce joints with horizontal C -H stud. C. Use steel C -H studs 3/8" to not more than floor -to -ceiling height, and install between liner panels with liner inserted in the groove. Install full-length steel E -studs or J -runners vertically at T -intersections, corners, door jambs. and columns. Install full-length E -studs over shaft wall liner panel with .1 -runner around perimeter. For openings, frame with vertical E -studs or J -runner at edges, horizontal J -runner at head and sill. Suitably frame all openings to maintain structural support for wall. D. Install floor -to -ceiling steel E -studs each side of steel hinged door frames and J -runners or E - studs each side of elevator door frames to act as strut -studs. Attach strut -stud to floor and ceiling runners with two 3/8" pan head screws. Over steel doors, install a cut -to -length section of .1 -runner and attach to strut -studs with clip angles and 3/8" screws. E. Install resilient channels horizontally to face of studs, within 6" of floor and ceilings and maximum 24" o.c. Attach channels to studs with 3/8" screws driven through holes in mounting flange. Extend channels into all corners and attach to corner framing. Splice channel by nesting directly over stud; screw -attach through both flanges. Reinforce with screws at both ends of splice. Install 1/2" x 3" wide continuous gypsum filler strips to top and bottom runner. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Gypsum Drywall Page 09 29 00-7 1 For resilient attached finish, apply base layer horizontally to resilient channels with end joints staggered; fasten with 1" screws 12 o.c. Apply face layer vertically with joints staggered and attach to channels with 1-5/8" screws 12" o.c. F. For double -layer finish, erect 1/2" fire code "C" gypsum panel base layer horizontally one side of studs with end joints staggered. Fasten base layer panels to studs with 1" screws 24" o.c. Caulk perimeter of base layer panels. Apply 1/2" fire code "C" gypsum panel face layer vertically over base layer with joints staggered and attached with 1-5/8" screws staggered from those in base, spaced 12" o.c. and driven into studs. 1. Where both sides of shaft wall are finished, apply 1/2" fire code "C" gypsum panel face layers vertically both sides of studs. Stagger joints on opposite partition sides. Fasten panels with 1" screws spaced 12" o.c. in field and along edges. 3.05 GYPSUM DRYWALL (Metal Studs, Wood Studs) A. Apply drywall with long dimension parallel to framing members, and all abutting ends and edges shall occur over stud flanges. Use panels of the maximum practical length shall be used to minimize joints. End joints shall be neatly fitted and staggered. 1. Do not conceal work unless it has been tested and accepted. B. For single -layer drywall application space 1" screws a maximum of 12" o.c. in the field of the board and 8" o.c. staggered along the vertical abutting edges. C. For double -layer laminated construction. attach base layer with 1" screws spaced 8" o.c. at joint edges and 12" o.c. in Held. Apply adhesive in strips to center and along both edges of vgypsum face panel. Apply strips with a notched metal spreader having four 1/4" x 1/4" min. notches spaced max. 2" o.c. Position pressure to insure bond and fasten top and bottom as required. Drive screws approximately 2" from end and 4" o.c. in field of panel, 1" from ends and 3" o.c. along a line 2" from vertical edge. D. For two layer construction with screw attachment of the face layer, apply the base layer vertically with vertical joints staggered on opposite sides of the partition and screw -attach with 1" screws spaced 16" o.c. in the field and vertical joints of the panel. Apply the face layer vertically with vertical joints offset 24" from base layer joints and staggered on opposite sides of the partition. Attach with 1-5/8" screws spaced 16" o.c. in the field and vertical joints of the board. 1. For 5/8" panels, use 1" screws for base layer and 5/8" screws for face layer. For 1/2" panels, use 7/8" screws for base layer and 5/16" screws for face layer. E. For two hour rated partitions (UL Des. U412-2 hr) attach base layer using Type XX drywall vertically with 1" screws spaced 12" o.c. at joints and in field of each panel. Apply face layer using same type drywall using approved joint compound spread in strips on back side. Joints staggered from base layer as required. Apply supplementary 1-1/2" screws as required, joints finished and perimeter caulked. F. Fur in all exposed piping, ducts and mechanical and electrical conduits in finished spaces with channel furring and 5/8" thick drywall panels as part of the work of this section. G. if drywall panels are not scheduled to extend to underside of structure then extend panels an minimum of 3 inches above the finished suspended ceilings. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Gypsum Drywall Page 09 29 00-8 H. Stagger drywall joints above door openings and not opposite each other on the same stud at door head. At jambs, screw drywall to each double stud with screws spaced 8" o.c. I. Neatly cut to accommodate ceiling penetrations. 3.06 ACCESSORIES A. Install corner beads on all exterior corners in one length without joints and secured with suitable fasteners spaced 9" on centers on both sides. Corner beads shall be formed to angle of 90 degrees with 1-1/4" fine mesh flanges. B. Wherever an end of drywall will remain exposed or cannot be taped, provide continuous tapeable "J Type" mould over face layer and secure in place with fasteners spaced 9" o.c., finish tape and paint. C. Provide control joints in the face layer at continuous unbraced walls exceeding 30'-0" and staple in place in a secure and rigid manner. D. Drywall abutting dissimilar materials shall terminate in casing beads secured to terminal framing only not to dissimilar material. E. Install corner beads only after ceiling wall moldings have been installed. 3.07 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Apply caulking in continuous beads of 1/4" diameter. Each shall receive not less than four (4) beads at top and four (4) beads at the bottom. Apply two (2) continuous beads between floor runner channel and the floor slab, and two (2) continuous beads between the ceiling channel runner and abutting construction. B. Apply two (2) continuous beads between base layer of gypsum drywall, or single layer of gypsum drywall and the abutting ceiling and floor construction, on each side of every partition. C. Caulk around entire perimeters of outlet boxes, switch plate boxes and all other items which penetrate the gypsum drywall partitions to maintain the STC of the partition. 3.08 TREATMENT FOR JOINTS AND FASTENERS A. Completely fill all joints formed by the drywall panels and/or adjoining materials with a three (3) coat application of joint cement and tape. Joint treatment compound shall be mixed according to the approved manufacturer's directions. B. Fasteners shall be driven in slightly below the surface of the board, with heads forming a slight depression below the surface of the drywall. Fasteners shall not be driven closer than 3/8" from edges and ends of panels. Drywall adjacent to the point of fastening to be held tightly against the framing members while driving fasteners. Dependence on fasteners to draw drywall against the framing will not be acceptable. C. All panels shall fit tightly against the supporting framework before applying joint treatment and concealing screw depressions. D. Joint Compound and Taping 1. Mix joint compound in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Clark Hall Phase 11- 100% CD - 3/14/2014 7 Gypsum Drywall Page 09 29 00-9 Apply taping or embedding compound in a thin uniform layer to all joints and angles to be reinforced. Immediately apply Reinforcing Tape centered over joint and seated into compound. Sufficient compound - approx. 1/65" to 1/32" - must remain under the tape to provide proper bond. Follow immediately with a thin skim coat to second coat. Fold and embed tape properly in all interior angles to provide a true angle. The tape or embedding coat must be thoroughly dry prior to application of second coat. 3. Apply second coat of joint compound over embedding coat, filling panel taper flush with surface; cover tape and feather out slightly beyond first coat. On joints with no taper, cover the tape and feather out at least 4" on either side of tape. Allow second coat to dry thoroughly prior to application of finish coat. 4. Spread finish coat evenly over and extend slightly beyond second coat on all joints and feather to a smooth uniform finish. Over tapered edges, do not allow finished joint to protrude beyond plane of the surface. Apply a finish coat to cover tape and taping compound at all tapered angles and provide a true angle. Where necessary, sand between coats and following, the final application of compound to provide a smooth surface ready for decoration. E. Finishing Fasteners 1. Apply a taping and all-purpose type compound to fastener depressions as the first coat. Follow with a minimum of two additional coats of topping or all-purpose compound, leaving all depressions level with the plane of the surface. F. Finish Beads and Trims 1. Apply first coat to all bead and trim and properly feather out from ground to plane of surface. Compound must thoroughly dry prior to application of second coat. 2. Apply second coat in same manner as first coat, extending compound slightly beyond onto face of panel. Compound must be thoroughly dry to application of finish coat. 3.09 INSULATION A. Install continuous, full height insulation blankets between channel studs. Secure insulation to the back of the drywall on one side leaving no voids. B. Install insulation behind furred locations where noted. 3.10 PREPARATION FOR FINISHES A. Fill gypsum drywall surfaces which have depressions, gouges and dimples and spackle and sand to present a smooth level surface acceptable for painting and wall covering by other trades. B. Spackle openings around pipes, switches, and all other framed openings. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Gypsum Drywall Page 09 29 00-10 3.11 CLEANING A. At the completion of installation, remove all rubbish, excess material scaffolding, tools and other equipment from the building and job site and leave surfaces clean and whole. B. Completely remove excess joint compound from all surfaces which are not scheduled to receive the joint compound in a manner which does not cause damage or injury to such surfaces. Remove promptly before hardening. END OF SECTION Clark Hall Phase 11- 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Cornell University Physical Sciences Instructional Facility Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca NY Page 09 29 50-1 SECTION 09 29 50 GYPSUM DRYWALL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section shall be governed by the Contract Documents. Provide materials, labor, equipment and services necessary to furnish, deliver and install all work of this section as shown on the drawings, as specified herein, and/or as required by job conditions. B. The Work shall include, but is not limited to the following: 1. Gypsum drywall 2. Suspension system components 3. Perimeter accessories 4. Screw attachment 5. Provision for ceiling penetrations 6. Three coat tape and spackle for joints and screw depressions. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. General Requirements — Division 1 B. Painting: Section 09 84 33 C. Lighting fixtures: Division 16 D. Terminal air devices: Division 15 E. Access Doors: Section 08 31 13 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Literature 1. Submit for review manufacturer's printed literature and data sheets describing the materials proposed for use. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site, ready for use in the approved manufacturer's original, and unopened containers and packaging, bearing labels as to type or material, brand name, and manufacturer's name. Delivered materials shall be identical to approved samples. B. Store materials under cover in a dry and clean location, off the ground and remove materials which are damaged or otherwise not suitable for installation from the job site and replace with acceptable materials. Clark Hall Phase II 100% CD 3/14/2014 Gypsum Drywall Ceilings Page 09 25 50-2 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Joint and recessed fastener treatment shall not be undertaken until the interior temperature is at least 50 degrees F and such temperature is maintained at least 24 hours before and 24 hours after, in areas and spaces where joint and recessed fastener treatment operations are being perfonned. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM DRYWALL A. Gypsum drywall shall conform to Fed. Spec. SS -L -30c and ASTM C-36, with tapered edges, in thickness noted on the drawings. 2.02 HUNG CEILING FRAMING MEMBERS A. Hangers: 1" x 3/16" steel painted flats or 1/4" diameter adjustable rods. Provide top and bottom attachment fittings as required. B. Tie wires for securing main runner channels attaching cross furring to main runners shall be No. 16 gauge galvanized annealed steel wire. Fuming channel clips where used, shall be galvanized, made especially for the purpose. C. Main runners: 1-1/2" cold rolled, painted steel, 16 gauge channels weighing not less than 500 pounds per 1,000 linear feet. D. Furring channels: rolled formed hat -shaped 25 gauge galvanized steel sections, 7/8" depth weighing not less than 285 lbs. per 1,000 lin. ft. E. Connections between hangers and main runners shall be specially formed clips complete with double nuts for adjustment. NOTE: Where permitted by code and/or trade jurisdictions carrying channels may be omitted and tee members hung directly using galvanized wire hangers with double twist tie. . Coordinate with HVAC and lighting trade contractors to provide their own suspension components. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES A. Metal Accessories shall consist of corner beads, stops, edge trim, casing beads and control joints and other accessories as required conforming to proper profiles and sizes to accommodate drywall partition components encountered. Accessories shall be formed of 26 ga. galvanized or cadmium plated steel after manufacture. Hot dip galvanized as per ASTM A-525. B. Screws for securing drywall and accessories in place, self -drilling, self -tapping. Phillips head steel screws, designed for power tool attachment. Length and type of screws as recommended by the manufacturer of the partition system and by conditions encountered in the field. The use of nails for application will not be perrnitted. Screws shall conform to ASTM C-646. C. Joint cement and joint tape: a three (3) coat application as recommended by the gypsum drywall manufacturer. Materials shall conform to ASTM C-475. Clark Hall 100% CD 12/11/2012 Gypsum Drywall Ceilings Page 09 25 50-3 2.04 ACCEPTABLE DRYWALL MANUFACTURERS A. U.S. Gypsum B. National Gypsum/Gold Bond C. Georgia Pacific D. Or an equal acceptable to the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Study the contract drawings and specifications with regard to the work as shown and required under this section so as to insure its completeness. B. Examine surfaces and conditions to which this work is to be attached or applied and notify the Architect in writing if conditions exist which are detrimental to the proper and expeditious installation of the work. Starting on the work shall imply acceptance of the surfaces and conditions to perform the work as specified. C. Verify dimensions taken at the job site those affecting the work. Bring field dimensions which are at variance to the attention of the Architect. Obtain decision regarding corrective measures before the start of installation. D. Cooperate in the coordination and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of other sections so as not to delay job progress. 3.02 WORKMANSHIP A. Install materials and partition systems specified herein and as indicated on the drawings shall be installed in strict accordance with the printed directions and/or specifications of the manufacturer to attain fire ratings noted on the drawings. B. Apply drywall with the reverse side against the framing members, and with the separate boards in moderate contact. In no case shall the boards be forced into place. At interior and exterior corners, conceal the cut edges of the panels by overlapping them with the abutting boards. Stagger the panels so that the corners of any four panels will not meet at the same point. 3.03 HUNG CEILING FRAMING A. Grillage for hung ceilings: composed of hangers placed not over 4'-0" o.c. along the main runner direction and not over 4'-0" o.c. in the opposite direction and 6" from boundary walls. Hangers shall be of sufficient length to provide proper anchorage to the main runners and shall hang plumb. Install main runners not over 4'-0" o.c. and level at designated heights with hangers secured to runners not over 4'-0". Splice channel ends not less than 12" with double strand of tie wire near end of each splice. Saddle tie furring channels at right angles to main runners 16" o.c. and 1" from parallel walls with double strand of 16 gauge tie wire. Lap furring channel ends 8" by nesting one channel into the other and wire tie at center of splice. Screw attach drywall panels to the furring channels as specified herein. Option Install the galvanized wire hangers from appropriate under slab fittings and space not over 4 feet o.c. along the "tee" members. Space "tee" members to the hanger. Clark Hall 100% CD 12/11/2012 Gypsum Drywall Ceilings Page 09 25 50-4 B. At the Contractor's option furring channels may be secured to carrying channels using furring channel clips as recommended by the approved manufacturer. C. Provide additional framing members as required to accommodate conditions encountered in the field at no additional cost to the Owner, to accommodate ceiling fixtures, access doors and other ceiling penetrations or items. D. Hung ceiling support members shall be sized and spaced so that deflection is not over 1/240 of the spans. 1. Provide additional members as required to accommodate ceiling penetrations. E. Access Doors 1. Provide and install access doors. Install as per manufacturers in a manner which will result in a flush condition with abutting drywall. 3.04 GYPSUM DRYWALL A. Apply drywall with long dimension parallel to framing members, and all abutting ends and edges shall occur over stud flanges. Use panels of the maximum practical length shall be used to minimize joints. Fit and stagger joints. 1. Do not conceal work unless it has been tested and accepted. B. For single -layer drywall application space 1" screws a maximum of 12" o.c. in the field of the panel and 8" o.c. staggered along the vertical abutting edges. C. At all exposed edges provide continuous beads of proper profile secured in a concealed manner at 9" o.c. and which will be completely concealed in the finish work. D. Neatly cut to accommodate ceiling penetrations. 3.05 TREATMENT FOR JOINTS AND FASTENERS A. Completely fill all joints formed by the drywall panels and/or adjoining materials with a three (3) coat application of joint cement and tape. Mix joint treatment compound according to the approved manufacturer's directions. B. Drive fasteners slightly below the surface of the panel with heads forming a slight depression. Fasteners shall not be driven closer than 3/8" from edges and ends of panels. Drywall adjacent to the point of fastening to be held tightly against the framing members while driving fasteners. Dependence on fasteners to draw drywall against the framing will not be acceptable. C. All panels shall fit tightly against the supporting framework before applying joint treatment and concealing screw depressions. D. Joint Compound and Taping 1. Mix joint compound in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Apply taping or embedding compound in a thin uniform layer to all joints and angles to be reinforced. Immediately apply Reinforcing Tape centered over joint and seated Clark Hall 100% CD 12/11/2012 Gypsum Drywall Ceilings Page 09 25 50-5 into compound. Sufficient compound - approx. 1/65" to 1/32" - must remain under the tape to provide proper bond. Follow immediately with a thin skim coat to second coat. Fold and embed tape properly in all interior angles to provide a true angle. The tape or embedding coat must be thoroughly dry prior to application of second coat. 3. Apply second coat of joint compound over embedding coat, filling panel taper flush with surface; cover tape and feather out slightly beyond first coat. On joints with no taper, cover the tape and feather out at least 4" on either side of tape. Allow second coat to dry thoroughly prior to application of finish coat. 4. Spread finish coat evenly over and extend slightly beyond second coat on all joints and feather to a smooth uniform finish. Over tapered edges, do not allow finished joint to protrude beyond plane of the surface. Apply a finish coat to cover tape and taping compound at all tapered angles and provide a true angle. Where necessary, sand between coats and following the final application of compound to provide a smooth surface ready for decoration. E. Finishing Fasteners 1. Apply a taping and all-purpose type compound to fastener depressions as the first coat. Follow with a minimum of two additional coats of topping or all-purpose compound, leaving all depressions level with the plane of the surface. Finish Beads and Trims 1. Apply first coat to all bead and trim and properly feather out from ground to plane of surface. Compound must thoroughly dry prior to application of second coat. 2. Apply second coat in same manner as first coat, extending compound slightly beyond onto face of panel. Compound must be thoroughly dry to application of finish coat. 3. Apply finish coat to all bead and trim, extending compounds slightly beyond the second coat and properly feathering from ground to plane or surface. Sand finish as necessary to provide a flat smooth surface ready for decoration. 3.06 PREPARATION FOR FINISHES A. Fill gypsum drywall surfaces which have depressions, gouges and dimples and spackle and sand to present a smooth level surface acceptable for painting and wall covering by other trades. B. Spackle openings around pipes, switches, and all other framed openings. 3.07 CLEANING A. At the completion of installation, remove all rubbish, excess material, scaffolding, tools, and other equipment from the building and job site and leave surfaces clean and whole. END OF SECTION Clark Hall 100% CD 12/11/2012 Cornell University Physical Sciences Instructional Facility Phase II Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca, NY Pale 09 65 13-1 SECTION 09 65 13 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Work of this section shall be governed by the contract documents. Provide materials, labor, equipment, and services necessary to furnish, deliver, and install all work of this section as shown on the drawings, as specified herein, and/or as required by job conditions. B. The work shall include, but is not limited to the following: 1. Preparation of substrates. 2. Resilient tiles (VT -1 and VT -2). 3. Solid Rubber tiles (RT -1) to match existing tiles in covered walkway. 3. Bases -vinyl, flat. and coved. 4. Edge strips. 5. Adhesives, primers, leveling. 6. Cleaning and polishing. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Cement Based Underlayment: Section 03 54 16 B. Gypsum Drywall: Section 09 29 00 C. Carpet: Section 09 68 13 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCES: A. Reference Standards: 1. Resilient Floor Covering Institute (RFCI) 2. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.) 3. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) 4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Samples and product literature: Submit to the Architect three (3) each of the following before fabrication and/or installation: 1. Resilient flooring - actual size, each color, each type 2. Vinyl base - 6" long, each color and type. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Resilient Flooring Page 09 65 13-2 3. Manufacturer's product literature on adhesives. 4. Manufacturer's product literature on primers and leveling compounds. 1.04 STORAGE & DELIVERY A. Keep materials in rooms having a minimum temperature of 70 degrees F. for at least 48 hours before laying, and the room or space in which it is laid shall be maintained at 70 degrees F. for at least 24 hours before laying, during laying, and for 24 hours after laying. B. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original cartons, and/or packages with labels clearly defining color, type, and size of materials. Delivered materials shall be identical to the approved samples and delivered so as to cause no delay in job progress. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Vinyl Tiles 1. Conform to Federal Specification SS -T -312B(1), Type IV, Comp. 1 2. Fire Test Data: a. Critical Radiant Flux - 0.45 watts/sq. cm. or more (class 1) per ASTM E 648. b. NBS Smoke - 450 or less per ASTM E 662. 3. Physical Characteristics: a. Size: See drawings. b. Through -grained tile patterns shall have uniform disbursement of color and texture throughout the thickness of the tile. c. Square edges. d. Factory waxed. e. Colors: VT -1 —51807, Shadow Blue VT -2 —51916, Dutch Delft 4. Manufacturers: a. Armstrong Imperial Texture Excelon b. or an equal approved by Architect. B. Rubber Tiles 1. Conform to Federal Specification SS -T -312B(1), Type IV, Comp. 1 Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Resilient Flooring Page 09 65 13-3 2. Fire Test Data: a. Critical Radiant Flux - 0.45 watts/sq. cm. or more (class 1) per ASTM E 648. b. NBS Smoke - 450 or less per ASTM E 662. 3. Physical Characteristics: a. Size: See drawings. b. Through -grained tile patterns shall have uniform disbursement of color and texture throughout the thickness ofthe tile. c. Square edges. d. Factory waxed. e. Colors: RT -1 —Field, color to match existing tile in covered breezeway. 4. Manufacturers: a. Johnsonite Rubber Tile b. or an equal approved by Architect C. Vinyl Base: premoulded, top set .080" thick by 4" high, or as shown on drawings, complete with preformed end stops and external corners. Provide cove type at tile floors and flat type at carpet floors. D. Edge strips where indicated and/or required shall be vinyl premoulded type not less than I" wide x 1/8" thick, manufactured by Mercer Plastics or equal. E. Colors and patterns of tile, base, and edge strip materials will be selected by the Architect. F. Primers, adhesives, and leveling materials for resilient flooring materials shall be of types recommended by the manufacturer of the resilient flooring materials for the particular surfaces and conditions of project. NOTE: Leveling material shall be a latex type. G. Soap for cleaning: neutral and as recommended by the manufacturer ofthe resilient flooring. H. Wax for polishing: of a type recommended by the manufacturer of the resilient flooring. I. Latex Patching Material: Henry #335 and #336. Durabond Webpatch 90 or level-astic. Manufacturer of adhesive and finish material must approve patching material. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Resilient Flooring Page 09 65 13-4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Examine the surfaces and conditions to which this work is to be attached or applied, and notify the Architect if conditions or surfaces exist which are detrimental to the proper and expeditious installation of the work. Starting on the work shall imply acceptance of the surfaces and conditions to perform the work as specified. 3.02 PREPARATORY WORK A. Prior to commencement of work, test the sub -base moisture content to ascertain its acceptability for application ofthe resilient flooring. Remove dirt, grease, oils, dust and other materials which might impair the bond ofthe flooring to the sub -base. Set in edging strips for correctness of position and elevation. B. Installation, including preparatory work, shall not begin until all other work has been installed to such an extent as to prevent damaged to the preparatory work and/or to materials installed herein. C. Be responsible for correcting damage done to adjoining finished work in place, as a result of this operation. D. Remove all excess concrete or debris adhering to the floor. Grind raised areas or ridges smooth and'to a level surface. Floor shall be free of any wax, dirt, grease, paint or old adhesives (especially cut-back or emulsion). Previous residue of asphalt adhesive (cut-back or emulsion) must be removed by grinding with a concrete or terrazzo grinding machine and moist sand. Never use solvents. Apply latex sealer over remaining cut back at carpet areas only. E. Repair holes, cracks, depressions, or rough areas using materials recommended by carpet or adhesive manufacturer. Underlayments mixed with water are unacceptable. F. After patching and grinding, floor shall be swept or vacuumed clean to remove all grit. Oil based sweeping compounds should not be used. 3.03 INSTALLATION: A. Install work in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications and instructions governing each type of material and conditions encountered in the field. B. Install flooring so as to insure good, uniform contact with close, even joints, and with all finished surfaces smooth in a true plane, free from buckles, waves or other imperfections. Resilient flooring shall be shall be completely fitted with joints as inconspicuous as possible. C. Extend flooring to, but not under cabinets, built in, or to fixed objects, fit neatly into breaks and recesses, against non -resilient bases, around pipes, under saddles, and into closets, unless otherwise noted. D. Neatly cut all holes required for pipes and closely fit flooring so as to leave no space for dirt to collect. Seal joints around pipes and where tile abuts vertical surfaces, with waterproof cement. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Resilient Flooring Page 09 65 13-5 E. Where the floor requires filling or building up to produce flush surfaces within fields, or flush surfaces with adjacent flooring materials, such building up shall be performed in an acceptable planner without additional cost. F. Lay tiles symmetrically about the center of rooms and spaces. Do not install tiles less than half size unless approved. Tiles against the walls shall be the same width on each side of the room. G. Lay with tight joints and in true alignment across the entire floor and to patterns as selected and/or indicated on the drawings. Cut ends and edges of flooring to fit accurately to join with other materials. H. Where tiles abut other materials and/or change patterns, such transitions shall occur only under doors or saddles, or where indicated on the drawings. I. At all doors shown, and at all otherwise unprotected edges of the resilient flooring, furnish and install beveled edge strips with shoulder finishing at same height as top of finished flooring. Bases: 1. install bases continuously to all walls, columns, piers, partitions, etc., throughout the rooms and spaces. Cove bases; shall have a feather edge toe so that when installed the toe shall be under compression to effectively seal the joint between the floor and the base. Securely fastened into position with adhesive cement with joints tight and even. 3.04 ADJUSTMENTS & PROTECTION: A. Promptly, as the work progresses, remove all cement and/or other materials from the exposed surfaces of the flooring, bases and other materials installed. B. Reset installed material, that have not seated properly, and are out of level plane with adjacent materials and/or surfaces. C. Remove materials having broken corners of fracture lines, and new materials of sante color and thickness shall be substituted at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Protect installed work from damage by other trades. 3.05 CLEANING & POLISHING A. After the resilient flooring has been installed, clean the floors of all surface dirt and dust, and buff dry by machine, bringing the surface to a sheen. Resilient floors shall receive two (2) coats of wax, which shall be thoroughly and uniformly buffed. 3.06 SPARE STOCK A. Upon substantial completion of this project, deliver to the Owner at the job site, two boxes of each type of resilient flooring, installed into the work. Tiles shall be from the same "run" as tile installed on the job, to insure color and/or pattern correctness. END OF SECTION Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Cornell University Physical Sciences Instructional Facility Phase 1I Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca, NY Page 09 68 13-1 SECTION 09 68 13 MODULAR CARPET TILE (PEEL AND STICK) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work of this Section shall be governed by the Contract Documents. Provide materials, labor, equipment and services necessary to furnish, deliver and install all work of this section as shown on the drawings, as specified herein and/or as required by job conditions. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. General Requirements — Division 1 B. Resilient Flooring: Section 09 65 13 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Examine all surfaces to receive carpet. Examine new concrete slab to receive carpet. For renovation projects, examine existing surfaces before time of bid. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to installer and carpet manufacturer. B. Areas to receive carpet to be smooth and clean. C. Provide heat, light and power for effective working conditions. D. Provide unobstructed spaces for carpet installation. This includes removing and replacing any furniture or equipment in installation areas. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit three (3) each of the following to Architect for review prior to delivery and installation. 1. Carpeting - 12" x 12" - each type 2. Literature and data sheets on adhesives. 3. Underlayment - 12" x 12" 4. Edgestrips - 6" long each color 5. 4" Rubber Cove Base — 12" long Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Modular Carpet Tile Page 09 68 13-2 B. Shop drawings: Submit to Architect in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, and include 1/8" scale plans of the areas which are scheduled to receive carpeting. Identify seam locations, special cut-out conditions and those areas where the carpet abuts other materials. Provide details of trim pieces and edge details at carpet termination. C. Before delivery of carpet, submit 3 certified copies of the reports of tests specified herein for flammability and static propensity. Testing shall have been performed by an Independent Testing Laboratory within two years of submittal of the report for approval. Test reports shall be accompanied by certificates from the manufacturer certifying that the material is of the same type, quality, manufacturer, and make as that tested. Also, submit 3 copies of certificates from the manufacturer attesting that the carpet meets the requirements specified and that the installer and installation supervisor have the required experience. D. Before installation, submit the manufacturer's printed instructions for installation of the carpet. They shall include procedures for an expert installation giving preparation of substrate. and recommended adhesives and tapes. E. Submit 3 copies of the manufacturer's instructions for maintenance. Include recommended cleaning equipment and materials, spotting and cleaning methods and cleaning cycles. F. Maintenance Data: Provide the Owner with a manual which shall describe the care, cleaning and maintenance of the installed carpet. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. installer shall be a specialty contractor normally engaged in this work, having done satisfactory work of this type for a minimum of five years. The work shall be done by manufacturer's certified installers, working under a qualified supervisor. B. Manufacturer to submit in writing a report from a representative who has observed installation in the field with verification that installation is in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. C. All products must be closed cell vinyl, cushion backed and in production for a minimum of ten (1 0) years form same manufacturer, no hard backed products will be accepted. 1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver carpet to the site in manufacturer's original wrappings and packages clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name, brand name, size and related information. B. Each roll shall have register number attached or stenciled on bale and intact. C. Store in a safe, dry, clean, and well -ventilated area, protected from damage, soiling and moisture. Store rolls flat, not on end. D. Where carpet is to be fabricated at a carpet workroom, keep receiving records and have carpet available for inspection by Architect. E. Do not open containers until needed for installation unless verification inspection is required. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Glue -down Carpeting Page 09 68 13-3 F. Take precautions to protect any existing construction finishes of the building against damage due to the carpeting operations. The contractor will be held responsible for the cost of any damage and to repair to the satisfaction of the Owner, at no additional cost. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty agreeing to repair or replace unsatisfactory work due to defective materials or workmanship during times as listed below, without cost to Owner; and agreeing to repair or replace other defects not attributable to defective material or workmanship, as judged by Architect, at Owner's expense at prevailing rates. B. Full ten (10) years - full term, not pro -rated. Full ten (10) years against water marking - full term not pro -rated. Ten (10) years against delamination - full term, not pro -rated. Ten (10) years against edge ravel - full term, not pro -rated. Ten (10) years against seam zippering - full term. not pro -rated. Ten (10) years resiliency - full term, not pro -rated. Installation included. Stairs included. Chair caster areas included - not pro -rated. All have standard warranty coverage. If carpeting fails, replacement at Owner's discretion. C. All warranties shall be of sole source responsibility. Warranties that involve more than one manufacturer, or company will not be allowed. D. All warranties shall be an official published warranty. Warranties issued on a job basis will not be allowed. E. All warranties shall be signed and notarized by an officer of the Corporation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Carpeting 1. Tandus Flooring "Aura #02619 Hologram and Vaporize" a. Specification Data Product Construction Stratatec® Patterned Loop Fiber Dynex® Nylon Soil/Stain Protection Ensure Antimicrobial Intersept® Secondary Backing Prestige Plus RC® Yarn Weight 26oz/sq.yd. Machine Gauge 5/64 Pile Height .187 in. Stitches 13.4/in Pile Density 7846 Total Thickness .403 Size 24 in. x 24 in. Pattern Repeat 18 in. Radiant Panel Passes Class 1 (ASTM E-648) Critical Radiant Flux Smoke Density Dm corrected Static (AATCC-134)<3.5KV Flammability Passes Methenamine Pill Test(DOC-FF1-70) Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Modular Carpet Tile Page 09 68 13-4 b. Warranties: Wear Warranty: warrants that carpets manufactured with Antron Legacy Nylon on the Action Bac system will not lose more than 10% of their face fibers within ten years if the carpet is installed according to the installation guidelines. Static Warranty: warrants that carpets manufactured with Antron Legacy nylon on the Action Bac system will not generate static shock within ten years if the carpet is installed according to the installation guidelines. 3. Manufacturer a. Tandus Flooring b. Or an equal accepted by Architect B. Adhesives for installation as recommended by the manufacturer of the carpet. Submit notarized certificates stating that the recommended adhesive is compatible with the carpet specified and the sub-strate, and that the adhesive will not affect the carpeting any way for the life of the installation. C. Edgestrips: solid vinyl conforming to approved profiles and shapes, colors selected by Architect and manufactured by Mercer Plastics co., or an acceptable equal. D. Latex Patching Material: Henry #335 and #336, Durabond Webpatch 90 or level -antic. Manufacturer of adhesive and finish material must approve patching material. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Study the contract drawings and specifications with regard to the work as shown and required under this section so as to insure its completeness. B. Examine surfaces and conditions to which this work is to be attached or applied, and notify the Architect if conditions or surfaces exist which are detrimental to the proper and expeditious installation of the work. Starting of the work shall imply acceptance of the surfaces and conditions to perform the work as specified. C. Verify dimensions taken at the job site, affecting the work. Bring field dimensions which are at variance to the attention of the Architect. D. Cooperate in the coordination and scheduling of the work of this section with the work of other sections so as not to delay job progress. 3.02 GENERAL A. Carpet installation shall constitute validation by the Contractor that the substrate and conditions in the area meet all requirements for satisfactory installation. B. Install carpet after the work of other trades, including painting, is substantially completed. Installed carpet shall be smooth, uniform, and secure. Accurately match patterned goods. Fit cutouts, such as door jambs, columns, and ducts, neatly and securely. C. Locate carpet joints and carpet seams at doorways parallel to and centered directly under doors. Do not locate joints or seams at doorways perpendicular to door or at pivot joints. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Glue -down Carpeting Page 09 68 13-5 D. Install wall to wall in rooms and areas indicated on the Finish Schedule. Include all material indicated, specified, and necessary for a complete finished installation. E. Be responsible for the required quantities of carpet. Check all dimensions in the field as well as other conditions affecting the work. F. Minimum floor temperature before, during, and after installation and requirements for conditioning adhesive, shall comply with the carpet and adhesive manufacturer's instructions. However, in no case shall floor temperature be less than 650 for 72 hours prior to, during, and after installation. All materials should be stored in this temperature for at least 48 hours before commencing installation. This temperature should be maintained for 48 hours after installation. At no time should the temperature exceed 950 while installation is being made. G. Do not permit traffic or movement of furniture or equipment in carpeted areas for at least 24 hours after installation. 3.03 FLOOR PREPARATION: A. Inspect all rooms and areas to be carpeted. Before installation, test concrete floors for moisture content and hydrostatic pressure and take corrective measure if necessary. Excessive moisture is defined as no more than 2.5 pounds per sq. ft. Concrete should be tested for acidity/alkalinity and should test in to 6.0 to 8.0 range. B. Remove all excess concrete or debris adhering to the floor. Grind raised areas or ridges smooth and to a level surface. Floor shall be free of any wax, dirt, grease, paint or old adhesives (especially cut-back or emulsion). Previous residue of asphalt adhesive (cut-back or emulsion) must be removed by grinding with a concrete or terrazzo grinding machine and moist sand. Never use solvents. Apply latex sealer over remaining cut back at carpet areas only. C. Repair holes, cracks, depressions, or rough areas using materials recommended by carpet or adhesive manufacturer. Underlayments mixed with water are unacceptable. D. After patching and grinding, floor shall be swept or vacuumed clean to remove all grit. Oil based sweeping compounds should not be used. 3.04 INSTALLATION: A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Maintain direction of pattern and texture, including lay of pile as shown in accepted layout drawings. Arrows on back of material should be all going in the same direction. 2. Run carpet in the same direction and install with a minimum number of seams as per the approved shop drawings. Install in each space using the minimum number of carpet sections except where indicated otherwise. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Modular Carpet Tile Page 09 68 13-6 3. Extend carpet under open bottomed and raised bottom obstructions, and under removable flanges of obstructions. Extend into closets and alcoves opening onto rooms to be carpeted, unless another floor finish is indicated for such spaces. Extend carpet under movable furniture and equipment. 4. Provide cut-outs as indicated for removable access devices in substrate. Bind edges as neatly as possible and secure both sides of cut to the substrate. Cut only 3 sides where feasible to provide carpet flap in lieu fully -removable cutout. 5. Provide cut-outs or running joints (as applicable) for removable access covers and similar required access through carpeting to substrate. 6. Install carpet divider strips, with corners accurately mitered and tightly butted. 7. Install carpet edge guard at locations where edge of carpet is exposed to traffic, except where another device, such as threshold, is indicated with integral carpet binder bar or edge guard. Anchor edge guard to substrate. 8. Where seams relate to doors, center seams under door thickness. Do not place carpet seams in traffic direction in doorways. 9. Provide special carpeting treatment as indicated at expansion joints in substrate or, if none is indicated, install carpeting with provisions to accommodate movement without damaging carpet installation. 10. Use skilled carpet layers who have been accepted by the approved carpet manufacturer and the Architect. Make joints between carpet rolls in such a way so as to provide for exact alignment of fiber rows, texture and pattern from roll to roll. Sew all cross seams with approved type of waxed yarn, and install all other seams using the "hot melt tape" method. 12. Stretch carpet drum tight using stretchers and/or other mechanical aids to enable carpet to be laid in a proper and workmanlike manner. Use sufficient concrete nails to hold stretch while seaming and for temporary anchoring. Mark locations and remove nails as each area of work is completed. 13. Cut carpet along walls, closely around projections, and to and through thresholds at doorways and other openings, taking care to align tuft rows, texture and pattern between pieces. Treat cut edges with sealer and neatly trim. 14. Filler strips where permitted shall not be less than 9" in width and at least 36" in length. 15. Where carpet abuts other floor materials, furnish and install continuous vinyl edge members in as long lengths as practical, in a secure and rigid manner. 16. Installed carpeting shall be smooth, free from ripples, bulges, puckers and uneven surfaces. Recommended procedures for installation shall be furnished in each roll. Remove portions of carpeting which are different from the approved samples as directed by the Architect. Clark Hall Phase iI - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Glue -down Carpeting Page 09 68 13-7 B. Direct Glue Down Method 1. Cut two (2) pieces of carpet to length, plus trim and lay in place, forming a seam by the method recommended by the carpet manufacturer and snap a chalk line to make seam location. Turn each piece back approximately three (3) feet from the seam and spread adhesive uniformly for two (2) feet to each side of chalk line. 2. Unroll one (1) piece of carpet into adhesive. Brush out air bubbles toward the seam. Unroll the second piece toward the seam and work its cut edge into adhesive to pick up sufficient adhesive to "butter" the seam. Brush out any air bubbles in second place toward seam. 3. Roll up uncemented portion of first piece toward the seam, apply adhesive and unroll the carpet into the adhesive. Brush out any air bubbles away from the seam. Do likewise with the second piece but omit the adhesive for two (2) feet from the uncemented edge where the next seam will occur. Cut off excess carpet. Cut length of carpet and lay in place. Repeat installation procedure. 4. Back sew or heat bond cross seams as per manufacturer's recommendations and joined pieces treated as one. Continuous lengths and as broad widths as possible shall be used. 5. At columns and other projections, cut the carpet with maximum possible overage. Position the seams made by these cuts first. Fit closely and evenly to and through thresholds where carpet joins together at doorways and other openings, taking care to align tuft rows, texture and pattern between pieces. 3.05 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION A. Upon completion of the work, remove all waste, excess materials, tools and equipment from the job site. Remove all loose treads. B. Prior to acceptance of the installation, carpet portions which are damaged, stained, discolored, torn, ripped or otherwise not acceptable shall be repaired an/or replaced with new material of same dye batch. C. Vacuum clean the installed carpet with an upright type bar type beater vacuum cleaner. D. Usable pieces (approximately one square yard and larger) of carpet not required to complete the work shall e left on the job site and shall be placed in an orderly manner in an area designated by the Architect. E. Protect installed carpeting from damage by other trades. Install and maintain protective materials over traffic areas, and if necessary, close off areas to traffic. F. After the installation is completed, the carpet manufacturer shall provide one of his representatives to thoroughly instruct the Owner's maintenance personnel in the care, cleaning and maintenance of the installed carpet. 1. Remove debris from installation, carefully sorting pieces to be saved from scraps to be disposed of. Carpet scraps are to be disposed of in polyethylene bags for recycling by carpet manufacturer. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Modular Carpet Tile Page 09 68 13-8 2. Vacuum carpet with a commercial machine, with rotating agitator or beater in nozzle. Remove spots, and replace tile where spots cannot be removed. 3. Protect carpet with non -staining covering during remainder of the construction period, so that it will be in undamaged and unsoiled condition at time of project completion. END OF SECTION Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 SECTION 09 91 23 PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Cornell University Physical Sciences Instructional Facility Phase 11 Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca, NY Page 09 91 23-1 A. Work of this section shall be governed by the contractor documents. Provide materials, labor, equipment and services necessary to furnish, deliver and install all work of this section as shown on the drawings, as specified herein, and or as required by job conditions. B. The Work shall include, but is not limited to the following: 1. Painting interior and exterior surfaces as scheduled herein. 2. Preparation of substrates to be painted. 3. Protection of surfaces not scheduled to be painted. 4. Powdercoat factory applied paint finish for stair railings, newel posts and associated stair rail parts. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. General Requirements — Division 1 B. Gypsum Drywall: Section 09250 C. Finish Carpentry: Section 06200 D. Access Doors: Section 08305 E. Prime and shop coats specified in other Sections. F. Painting of factory finished items. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCES A. Job Mock -Up 1. In addition to the samples, specified herein to be submitted for review, apply in the field at their final location, each type and color of approved paint materials to no less than 32 sq. ft. of wall or other surfaces, before proceeding with the remainder of the work, for approval by the Architect. 2. These applications when approved will establish the quality and workmanship for the work of this section. 3. Repaint individual areas which are not approved, as determined by the Architect, until approval is received. B. Reference Standards Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Painting Page 09 91 23-2 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 3. National Paint Varnish and Lacquer Association 4. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Samples and Product Literature 1. Submit three (3) of each of the following to the Architect for his review prior to delivery and installation. a. Color is based upon Benjamin Moore, and the paint manufacturer shall match to the selected colors. b. At the Architect's request, provide 6" x 6" boards on which the paint color selected by the Architect has been applied. Boards shall be either hardboard, drywall or plywood and fully labeled and identified. 2. Include with each sample submitted manufacturer's technical literature describing fully the material submitted, including manufacturers color system. 1.05 DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to job site in the approved manufacturer's original containers and packages, bearing original labels with brand, type and color of paint clearly visible. Materials shall be identical to approved literature and samples submitted. Store paint and mix only in such rooms or spaces within the building as are assigned to the Contractor for such purposes. Keep storage place clean and neat. Cover floors of storage spaces with heavy building paper and tarpaulins. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental An ambient temperature of not less than 50 degrees F. shall be maintained in all spaces or locations, where this work is in progress. Work shall not be performed during any period of high humidity which would prevent the attainment of satisfactory results from the painting operation. Provide 75 foot-candle minimum temporary lighting during application of paint. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Painting products for use in the work, standard best or top brands produced for each particular kind of material required herein. These specifications are written around the following manufacturer: Benjamin Moore (BM) PPG Industries (PPG) Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Painting Page 09 91 23-3 Sherwin Williams (SW) In addition to the above listed manufacturers, the following manufacturers will be considered acceptable, provided that complete descriptive literature is submitted to the Architect for approval describing each paint material, by giving a percentage breakdown of pigment and vehicle, and a percentage breakdown of each in turn. The Architect shall be the sole judge as to the evaluation of which are acceptable equals and which did not conform to the Standards. Devoe & Raynolds Pratt & Lambert Glidden B. Colors have been selected by Architect from color system. C. Spackling compound: finely ground, grit free when dry; shall be set without shrinkage to a smooth, hard, white surface, and shall be sanded easily to take any finish. D. Patching plaster: white non -shrinking, containing no lime and uniform in set and quality. E. Paint content restrictions shall conform to all current requirements of EPA, OSHA and all other federal, state and local codes and regulations having jurisdictions. 1. Shall not contain lead compounds of which the lead content (calculated as Pb) is in excess of 1/2 of 1 percent of the total weight of the contained solids (including pigments, films, solids and dryers); 2. Paintings, coating, and stains shall conform to the American National Standards institute specification Z66.1. 3. Method of determination of concentrations of lean and quantities of mercury shall be in accordance with ASTM D-2088 and ASTM D-2206 respectively. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION OF NEW SURFACES A. General 1. Prior to installation of work, examine surfaces which are to receive painting coats, and report conditions of surfaces which are not properly prepared to receive work of this section. Start of work shall imply that work can be performed as specified herein. 2. Spaces, broom clean and surfaces dust -free before painting is started. Before painting, plaster, greases and other extraneous matter which would affect the finished work shall be removed. Areas and/or spaces where painting work is being performed shall be maintained above 50 degrees F. during application and drying. 3. Do repairing of spackling of the surfaces necessary for proper application of paint. Surfaces shall be thoroughly dry and cleaned of oil, grease, dirt, rust, and shall be sand papered smooth and otherwise properly prepared. Clark Hall Phase I1 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Painting Page 09 91 23-4 4. Thoroughly dry and clean surfaces of oil, grease, dirt, rust, and where necessary properly prepare surfaces by sand papering smooth. 5. Take every precaution to prevent damage by fire. Storage and protection of materials shall conform to all regulations, code and ordinances having jurisdiction. 6. Mask hardware, lighting fixtures, switch plates and the like before painting and afterwards remove masking. B. Masonry Thoroughly clean masonry and other absorptive surfaces to be painted of grit, efflorescence, grease, dirt and release agents which will adversely affect the adhesion or appearance of the paint finish. Scrape or grind fins and protrusions and patch holes and cracks flush with the surface. Rake joints clean. 2. Masonry construction shall be cured for 30 days before painting. C. Gypsum Drywall: 1. Scratches, cracks; holes, indentations, gouges, and similar defects in surfaces shall be properly cut and filled with spackling compound, patching plaster and other patching material as may be required, and brought to a smooth, flush surface. D. Wood: 1. Woodwork to be painted shall be sand papered to remove roughness, loose edges, slivers or splinters, and then brushed to remove other suitable cleaner. Knots and sappy streaks or spots shall be given two (2) thin coats of shellac, lightly sand papered when dry. 2. Fill cracks, nail holes and surface defects in woodwork with putty or plastic wood after the priming coat, filler has been applied. Putty or plastic wood filler shall be brought up flush with the surface and sand papered smooth. Metals 1. Wash metal surfaces with solvent to remove dirt or grease before applying materials as per SSPC SP -1. Where rust or scale is present, remove by power tools as per SSPC SP -3 before painting. Clean shop coat of paint that becomes marred and touch up with the primer originally used. Interior metal not exposed to view finish by hand tool as per SSPC SP -2. 2. Wipe down galvanized metal surfaces so that surfaces are free of dirt, grease or foreign matter. 3. Clean shop or prime coated metal surfaces of foreign matter as described above, and bare and rust spots by SSPC SP -3 and re -prime as required. 4. Fill dents, cracks, hollow places, open joints and other irregularities in metal work to be painted, with a approved metal filler suitable for the purpose, and after setting, sand to a smooth hard surface and spot prime. F. Mechanical and Electrical Items Clark Hall Phase 1I - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Painting, Page 09 91 23-5 i. Apply to pipe and duct coverings heavy coat of glue size before other paint applications, except when sized under the work of other sections. Add glue to size, and to each coat of paint applied thereafter, a sufficient amount of a fungicide agent to render the fabric mildew -proof. The fungicide agent shall be a type which will not adversely affect the color, texture, or durability of the paint. 2. Apply to exposed panel boxes, electric cabinets, piping ducts, and other mechanical and electrical work and equipment in finished spaces, one (1) prime coat and then finish to match walls and ceilings on which or near which they are located. G. Preparation of Existing Surfaces for Repainting 1. Surfaces shall be properly prepared to receive paint. Spaces shall be broom clean before painting is started, and the surfaces to be painted shall be dry. All existing surfaces that have been painted shall be repainted, or as indicated on the finish schedule. 2. Examine existing surfaces and, where the existing coating is in poor condition as determined by the Owner, remove the existing coating and methods of surface preparation shall be similar to those employed for new work. 3. Plaster and gypsum drywall surfaces shall be repaired by having patching plaster applied to cracks, gouges and other imperfections. 4. Masonry: Remove loose and non -adhered paint using wire brushes, sandpaper and other means and methods to properly prepare surface to receive new paint. 5. Ferrous metal surfaces: wire brushed and scraped removing rust and, if corrosion is present under the film, the old paint as well. Areas to be sanded with rough material to provide a surface for the new coating. 6. Woodwork: Where the existing paint is intact, only the removal of dirt and dust is necessary before applying paint. Loose paint and curled edges, and paint which is peeling or in any way not intact, shall be removed by scraping and/or wire brushing. Paint and varnish remover may also be employed. Areas shall be sand papered with care taken to feather -edge the boundary of intact paint. Glossy surfaces shall be sand papered to assure good adhesion of the new paint. 3.02 WORKMANSHIP A. Apply paint using skilled mechanics, performing work in accordance with the best practices which are consistent with the surfaces being finished and the types of materials being applied. Painting materials shall be free of skins, lumps or foreign matter, and the solids kept well stirred in the vehicle materials while being applied. B. Paint shall be evenly and smoothly spread or flowed on, and free of runs, drips, sags, crawling, brush marks and clogging of angles. Do not apply successive coats until the preceding coat is thoroughly dry and hard. C. Stir, blend, tint, thin and apply in accordance with the manufacturer's directions, with each coat a different tint from that of the preceding coat. Final coat shall be the exact shade and texture as represented by the sample previously selected and approved by the Architect. Where two coat work is specified, tint the first coat toward the final color. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Painting Page 09 91 23-6 D. Each coat shall be thoroughly dry before succeeding coats are applied. Allow a minimum of 24 hours between coats on any surface, unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer. E. The number of coats specified are in addition to any priming or other coats specified under the various sections. Painted surfaces shall receive at least one (1) priming coat and two (2) finishing coats, unless otherwise specified. All painted surfaces shall receive a minimum dry film thickness of not less than 5 mils. l . When materials and surfaces are delivered and installed and have factory applied prime coats, then the prime coat shall be touched -up as required and then two (2) finish coats applied. F. Hardware, lighting fixtures, switch plates and the like, shall be masked before painting and removed after painting. G. In the painting of movable or operating parts, do not apply paint to sliding contacts and the like, where the bare material is necessary for proper operation. Remove paint applied to such surfaces. H. Paint in access doors, plates, panel boxes, conduits and the like with the adjoining surfaces on which they occur, using the same kind of paint, number of coats, color and finish. In spaces where adjoining surfaces do not receive paint, the work shall be painted the same as similar work in painted spaces and in colors as directed. I Do not do interior painting until the building is thoroughly dried out and conditions are suitable to produce satisfactory results, in accordance with manufacturer's directions. J. Provide and use a sufficient number of drop cloths and exercise care to protect finished surfaces of floors and other work, and immediately remove spatter, and droppings from such surfaces. Take care when painting adjacent to other finished surfaces, furnishings and equipment. 3.04 PAINTING SCHEDULE A. The brand names of the various materials specified are those cited as a standard of quality. Other materials proposed for use shall be equivalent to those specified in every respect, and in each case shall be subject to review by the Architect in writing. All materials. factory - mixed and tinted to selected colors. B. Closets, finished the same as adjoining rooms, unless otherwise specified with other surfaces finished the same as nearest or adjoining surfaces, unless otherwise shown, e.g. recesses, returns, reveals, soffits and fascias. C. Colors and glosses to be determined by the Architect D. Exterior Surfaces: I. Wood (Painted) 1 coat Moorwhite Primer 100 (solvent thinned) 2 coats Moorglo Latex House and Trim Paint 096 Factory Primed Ferrous Metals 1 coat PPG Speedhide inhibitive primer (lead free) Clark Hall Phase 1I - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 or Painting Page 09 91 23-7 2 coats PPG Sunproof House and Trim Paint 1 coat SW Kem Kromik Metal Primer 2 coats SW Pro mar in alkyd house paint or metaltex semi -gloss For factory primed ferrous metal touch-up prime coat as required and apply two (2) finish coats. 3. Galvanized Metals 1 coat PPG Galvanized Steel Primer 2 coats PPG Sunproof House and Trim Paint or 2 coats SW Metaltex semi -gloss E. Interior Spaces (new and existing) 1. Metal Stairs, Ladders or or 2. or 1 coat PPG Speedhide inhibitive primer 2 coats PPG Florhide 1 coat BM Alkyd enamel underbody 2 coats BM Porch and Floor enamel 1 coat SW Hi -Hide primer 2 coats SW Floor enamel Primed and Unprimed Ferrous Metal Exposed to View (frames) I coat PPG Speedhide inhibitive primer 2 coats PPG Polyester -Epoxy Gloss coating I coat SW Hi -Hide rust inhibitive metal primer 2 coats SW Kem-Lustral semi -gloss enamel. 3. Gypsum Drywall or or 1 coat PPG Speedhide Latex primer 2 coats PPG Speedhide Lo -Sheen alkyd 1 coat BM latex underbody 2 coats BM Regal Aquavelvet eggshell 1 coat SW Pro mar Latex wall primer 2 coats SW Pro mar alkyd semi -gloss 4. Concrete Masonry Units or or 1 coat PPG Speedhide Masonry block filler 1 coat PPG Speedhide Lo -Sheen alkyd enamel 1 coat BM Fill -coat filler 2 coats BM alkyd Dulamel 1 coat SW Pro mar block filler Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Painting Page 09 91 23-8 1 coat SW Pro mar alkyd semi -gloss 5. Wood (Painted) 1 coat PPG Speedhide QD Undercoater 2 coats PPG Speedhide Lo -Sheen enamel. or or 1 coat BM alkyd enamel underbody 2 coats BM porch Duramel Eggshell enamel 1 coat SW wall and wood primer 2 coats SW Pro mar alkyd eggshe 6. Wood (clear transparent finish) ename I coat Sealer 1 coat Sherwin Williams Flame Control No. 129 Fire Retardant Varnish Base Coat Sand with steel wool between coats. 7. Wood (Stained finish) (open grain) (for close grain wood delete filler) 1 coat P&L Paste Filler 1 coat P&L Tonetic Wood Stain 1 coat Sherwin Williams Flame Control No. 130 Fire Retardant Varnish Topcoat or 1 coat BM Benwood wood filler tinted 1 coat BM Benwood Penetrating stain 1 coat Sherwin Williams Flame Control No. 130 Fire Retardant Varnish Topcoat or 1 coat SW Paste wood tiller 1 coat SW Oil Stain 1 coat Sherwin Williams Flame Control No. 130 Fire Retardant Varnish Topcoat 8. Canvas Cover (over insulation) (Pipes or ducts exposed to view) 1 coat PPG Speedhide Emulsion Sealer 6-2 1 coat PPG Speedhide Latex flat or 2 coats BM latex flat or 2 coats SW Pro Mar latex flat 9. Uncovered Pipes (Not containing heat) (Exposed to view) 1 coat BM primer 2 coats BM alkyd semi -gloss or 1 coat SW Kem Kromik metal primer 2 coats SW Pro Mar Enamel semi -gloss or 1 coat PPG Speedhide inhibitive primer 2 coats PPG Speedhide Lo -Sheen alkyd enamel 3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Painting Page 09 9I 23-9 A. Work under this Section shall not check, crack, peel or discolor or have other defects due to improper materials or workmanship or improper preparation of the surfaces. Unsatisfactory work shall be refinished at no additional cost to the Owner. B. When so directed, retouch where necessary, and restore where damaged or defective, and clean off paint spots from floors, walls, finished hardware, glass and other surfaces not scheduled to receive paint, and shall leave surfaces clean and in a satisfactory condition. C. Acceptance shall be governed by body finishes and colors. Apply additional coats as required to produce proper finish and coverage. D. Protect this work and the work of other trades against damage or injury by the materials, tools and equipment used in connection with the Painting operations, shall be repaired at no additional cost to Owner and to the Owner's satisfaction. END OF SECTION Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 SECTION 10 11 00 CHALKBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Cornell University Physical Sciences Instructional Facility Phase 11 Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca NY Page 10 11 00-1 A. Work of this Section shall be governed by the Contract Documents. Provide materials, labor, equipment and services necessary to furnish, deliver and install all work of this section as shown on the drawings, as specified herein. and/or as required by job conditions. B. The work shall include but is not limited to the following: 1. Furnish and install new chalkboards as specified. 2. Patching and other preparation of surfaces scheduled to receive new boards. 3. Provision of all anchoring means and methods. 4. Provision of all solid custom profile red oak trim components, metal chalk trays and related accessories. 5. Provision of manufacturer's warranty and contractor's one year guarantee. 6. Clean up. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this section. B. All porcelain enamel chalk boards shall comply with the Porcelain Enamel Institute's specifications. The manufacturer shall be a member of the Porcelain Enamel Institute Inc., Washington D.C. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Samples and Test Results: Submit two (2) of each of the following: 1. Chalkboard sample - minimum 6"x6" and manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Once the contractor has received a letter of intent or similar notice, he shall submit the following: 1. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this section with existing construction. Clark Hall Phase 1I - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Chalk boards & Tackboards Page 10 11 00-2 2. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work. 3. Test results for required fire resistance of core materials, tack board surface, and other products. 4. Mechanical Fasteners - 2 each type. 5. Adhesive fasteners — Manufacturer's cuts, and MSDS sheets. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. All boards must be stored and handled per manufacturer's recommendations in order to avoid warping and other irregularities. B. Permissible delivery location and times, on site storage, and staging area will be as agreed to by Owner. Verify all requirements prior to delivery of materials. C. Remove materials which do not conform to approved samples or are damaged, marred or otherwise not suitable for installation, from the job site and replace with acceptable materials at the contractor's expense. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CHALK BOARDS A. Provide chalk boards including all wood trim, metal chalk tray, related accessories, adhesive, anchoring and fastening devices, and labor required to install the chalk boards in all locations listed in these specifications. Chalk boards to be custom sized to fit within wood trim at each location and are to be pre -fabricated in the factory. B. Standard of Quality 1. For purposes of identification and to establish a standard of quality, the specifications are based on the Claridge Series 210 Vitracite Chalk board. C. Acceptable Manufacturer 1. Claridge 914-318-5330 D. Writing Surface 1. All chalkboards shall be Claridge porcelain enamel surface on specified Gauge Steel applied in three (3) uniform coats as follows: a. Nickel deposition coat of 2 grams per square foot. b. Nickel cobalt primer coat of .0025" min. thickness. c. Writing surface coat of high fired porcelain frits of .0025" min. thickness. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Chalk boards & Tackboards Page 10 11 00-3 2. The side opposite the writing surface shall have two (2) uniform coats as follows: a. Nickel deposition coat of 2 grams per square foot. b. Nickel cobalt ground coat of .0025" min. thickness with a spray coat of silica for better lamination adhesion. 3. The following chalkboard surfaces are not acceptable: a. Low fired organic (paint) coatings. b. Porcelain coatings of less than .005" min. thickness on writing side and .0025" on reverse side. c. Porcelain coating on one side only. 4. Color is to match existing seminar rooms completed in Phase 1. E. Facing Sheet 1. Base metal special quality "enameling iron or steel" low metalloid and copper content for temperature over 1,400 degrees used in coating porcelain on steel units for architectural purposes and shall be 22 GA. or 24 GA. Base steel sheets shall be chemically bathed and rinsed prior to enameling. The following base metals are not acceptable. a. Aluminum, aluminized cold rolled steel and metal having less than specified thickness unless otherwise approved by the Architect. F. Core Material 1. 7/16" Fiberboard - Class A rated. G. Panel Backing 2. .005" aluminum bonded with flexible adhesive. H. Trim 1. All trim to be solid red oak. Sizes and section to be as specified, as shown on drawings, and as approved by the Architect. Mounting Adhesive 1. Use double sided tape and construction adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of boards as approved by Architect. Submit technical information for approval. Guarantee 1. Upon project completion and acceptance by Architect, provide manufacturer's limited warranty that the porcelain enamel finish under normal atmosphere conditions and usage will retain it's original writing and erasing qualities and will not fade excessively or otherwise deteriorate for 50 years or the lifetime (per manufacturer) of the original installation. Clark Hall Phase 11- 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Chalk boards & Tackboards Page 10 11 00-4 The installing contractor shall issue to the owner his one year guarantee which will include materials and labor should remedial work be required due to defects in the material or original installation. 2.02 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as recommended by the manufacturer and as approved by the Architect. These materials to include, but not limited to, adhesive as required to secure boards to wall, and mechanical fasteners compatible with existing wall material and board trim. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND SCHEDULING A. Study the Contract Drawings and Specifications with regard to the work as shown and required under this Section so as to insure it's completeness. B. Examine surfaces and conditions to which this work is to be attached or applied and notify the Architect if conditions exist which are detrimental to the proper and expeditious installation of the work. Starting on the work shall imply acceptance of the surfaces and conditions to perform the work as specified. C. Verify, by measurements taken at the job site, those dimensions effecting the work. Bring field dimensions which are at variance with those on the reviewed shop drawings to the attention of the Architect. Obtain decision regarding corrective measures before the start of installation. D. Cooperate in the coordination and scheduling of the work of this Section with the Owner so as not to disturb their on going operations and use of the building. 3.02 REMOVALS AND PREPARATION A. Provide all necessary labor, materials and equipment to complete the removal of the existing tackboards and/or the existing chalkboards. "Remove" shall be considered to include total removal to reasonable cut-off point at items to remain, including proper disposal of such removed items off-site. Filling in of any depressions and patching at items to remain shall be included in demolition work. The Owner retains the right to have some removed boards returned to the Owner. These boards shall be carefully removed so as to avoid damage to boards. B. Provide necessary safety equipment and supplies to protect workers and others from harm. C. Provide adequate protection to prevent damage to structures, equipment and utilities to remain. D. Provide smooth and level wall surface for installation of new boards. Clean wall to original substrate and fill in ant depressions or rough areas in order to provide a surface suitable for fastening boards by means of adhesive. 3.03 INSTALLATION AND WORKMANSHIP A. Installed materials shall be products of the approved manufacturer and fabricated in accordance with the reviewed shop drawings and other submittals. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Chalk boards & Tackboards Page 10 11 00-5 B. Execute work using skilled workmen, in strict accordance with the instructions and recommendations of the approved manufacturer and per the drawings and specifications. C. Installed work: Securely and neatly set in place at designated locations in the building free from scratches, mars, and other defects. Work which becomes damaged or marred, prior to approval, shall be replaced and/or the owner, at no additional cost to the owner. D. Secure pre -fabricated dry chalkboards or tackhoards to wall substrate using double sided tape and construction adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of boards and as approved by Architect. E. Per drawings. all boards are to be installed within profiled wood frames as indicated on the Contract Drawings. 3.04 LOCATION AND QUANTITY A. See drawings for location and quantity. It is the responsibility of the contractor to field verify all quantities and dimensions. 3.05 CLEAN-UP A. The work under this Section shall include cleaning up including removal and disposal of all removed materials, excess materials, and debris created by the work of this section. B. The work areas should be thoroughly cleaned at the end of the job and left in a "Broom Clean" manner. END OF SECTION Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Cornell University Physical Sciences Instructional Facility Phase 11 Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca, NY Page 11 52 13-1 SECTION 11 52 13 ACCESS/SERIES M MANUALLY OPERATED FRONT PROJECTION SCREENS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manually operated, ceiling recessed, front projection screens. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 5 - Metal Fabrications: Suspension systems for projection screens. B. Division 9 - Suspension Systems: Supports and trim for suspended ceilings. C. Division 9 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Ceiling for recessed screen installation. D. Division 9 - Acoustical Ceilings: Ceiling for recessed screen installation. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NFPA 701-99 - Fire Tests for Flame -Resistant Textiles and Films. B. GREENGUARD Environmental Institute Children & Schools. C. US Green Building Council. D. Cradle to Cradle Certified - Cradle to Cradle Products Innovation Institute. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Manually Operated Front Projection Screens Page 11 52 13-2 C. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings showing layout and types of projection screens. Show the following: 1. Location of screen centerline. 2. Seams in viewing surfaces. 3. Detailed drawings for concealed mounting. 4. Connections to suspension systems. 5. Anchorage details. 6. Accessories. 7. Frame details. D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of projection screen required from a single manufacturer as a complete unit, including necessary mounting hardware and accessories. B. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of projection screens with other construction supported by, or penetrating through, ceilings.. including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire -suppression system, and partitions. 1.6 DELIVERY. STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver projection screens until building is enclosed and other construction where screens wi11 be installed is substantially complete. B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. C. Protect screens from damage during delivery, handling, storage. and installation. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work with installation of ceilings, walls, electric service power characteristics, and location. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Manually Operated Front Projection Screens Page 11 52 13-3 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Draper, Inc., which is located at: 411 S. Pearl P. O. Box 425 ; Spiceland, IN 47385-0425; Toll Free Tel: 800-238-7999; Tel: 765- 987-7999; Fax: 866-637-5611; Email: request info (drapercontract@draperinc.com); Web: www.draperinc.com B. Substitutions: must be submitted 14 days before bid opening. C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Division 1. 2.2 MANUALLY OPERATED, CEILING RECESSED, FRONT PROJECTION SCREENS A. Access/Series M: Spring roller operated, extruded aluminum case. Ceiling - recessed, extruded aluminum housing, 6-5/8 inches deep and 6-5/8 inches wide with white paint finish and stamped steel end caps. UL approved "Suitable for use in environmental air space". Bottom closure panel forms slot for passage of viewing surface and is removable for access to viewing surface. Bottom perimeter flange provides support and trim for acoustical ceiling panels or gypsum board ceiling. Housing designed to be installed separately from roller/viewing surface assembly. Factory or site installed roller: steel tube with heavy-duty spring and mounted on zinc plated brackets with double row radial ball bearings. Viewing surface securely attached to roller at top and at bottom hemmed around steel dowel. Provide with pull cord. System Options: a. Auto Return spring roller with built-in inertia reduction mechanism to ensure viewing surface retracts slowly, smoothly and quietly into case. Provide intermediate stop positions. 2. Projection Viewing Surface: a. Ecomatt XT700E — On Axis gain of 0.7. PVC free viewing surface made of 100 percent polyester yarn. Ecomatt is fully recyclable. Flame and mildew resistant. GREENGUARD Children and Schools certified. Cradle to Cradle - Silver certified. Clark Hall Phase 11- 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Manually Operated Front Projection Screens Page 1 1 52 13-4 3. Viewing Area H x W. a. HDTV Format (16:9). Black masking borders standard. 1) 133 inch (3378 nim) diagonal, 65 inches x 116 inches (1651 mm x 2947 mm). 4. Provide an extra screen drop with an overall screen drop of 12" with top border matching the viewing surface. 5. Provide an extra screen drop with an overall screen drop of 12" with a black top border. 6. Provide with 4 foot (1.22 m) aluminum operating pole. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. Verify rough -in openings are properly prepared. C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install front projection screens with screen cases in position and relationship to adjoining construction as indicated, securely anchored to supporting substrate, and in manner that produces a smoothly operating screen with plumb and straight vertical edges and plumb and flat viewing surfaces when screen is lowered. C. Test manually operated units to verify that screen operating components are in optimum functioning condition Clark Hall Phase I1 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Manually Operated Front Projection Screens Page 11 52 13-5 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Cornell University Physical Sciences Instructional Facility Phase II Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca, NY Page 12 24 13-1 SECTION 12 24 13 MANUAL SOLAR SHADES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manually operated roller shades with single rollers. Related Requirements: 1. Division 6 "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades and accessories. 2. Division 7 "Joint Sealants" for sealing the perimeters of installation accessories for light - blocking shades with a sealant. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including fabric panel materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 10 inches long. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type and color of fabric panel material. 1. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection. E. Samples for Verification: For each type of roller shade. 1. Fabric Panel Material: Not less than 10 inches square. Mark inside face of material if applicable. Clark Hall 100% CD 12/11/2012 Roller Window Shades Page 12 24 13-2 2. Roller Shade: Full-size operating unit, not less than 16 inches wide by 36 inches long for each type of roller shade indicated. 3. Installation Accessories: Full-size unit, not less than 10 inches long. F. Roller -Shade Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of fabric panel material, signed by product manufacturer. C. Product Test Reports: For each type of fabric panel material, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Roller Shades: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each size, color, and fabric panel material indicated, but no fewer than one units. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. A firm with at least 20 years of demonstrated experience in United States -based manufacture of the products required in this Section. 2. A firm with the capability to use both knife cutting and ultrasonic cutting in the manufacture of the products required in this Section. 3. A firm with the capability to digitally print on shade panels. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Roller Window Shades Page 12 24 13-3 1.8 DELIVERY. STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Division 1 "Product Requirements. "MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, but are not limited to, the following: B. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insolroll, Inc.: lnsolroll Window Shading Systems, or comparable product by one of the following: 1. lnsolroll. Inc., or architect approved equal C. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS A. Chain -and -Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous -loop bead chain and clutch comprised of multi -banded steel springs that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated. 1. Bead Chains: Nickel -plated metal. a. Metal Chain Guide Color: Nickel. b. Clutch Color: Vanilla. c. Clutch Holding Capacity: 30 pounds. d. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade. e. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Roller Window Shades Page 12 24 13-4 2. Spring Lift -Assist Mechanisms: Manufacturer's standard for balancing roller -shade weight and lifting heavy roller shades. a. Provide for fabric panels that weigh more than 24 lb or for shades as recommended by manufacturer, whichever criteria are more stringent. B. Spring Operating Mechanisms: Roller contains spring sized to accommodate shade size indicated. Provide with positive locking mechanism that can stop shade movement at each half - turn of roller and with manufacturer's standard pull. Rollers: Corrosion -resistant steel or extruded -aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of fabric panels indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive -end assemblies and idle -end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of fabric panels for service. 1. Roller Drive -End Location: Right side of inside face of shade. 2. Direction of Fabric Panel Roll: Regular, from back of roller. 3. Fabric Panel -to -Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method. a. Provide fabric panels not less than 12 inches longer than desired shade height to assure solid attachment to roller tube and ability to adjust panels in field without removing mounting brackets. D. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions indicated. E. Fabric Panels: 1. Fabric Panel Material: Light -filtering fabric. a. Provide 5% openness at all windows along the east facade of Clark Hall. b. Provide 3% openness at all seminar room interior windows facing the north and east exterior walls of Clark Hall and the Quiet Study Area. 2. Fabric Panel Bottom (Hem) Bar: Enclosed in hem pocket of fabric panel material, thermally sealed, not sewn. a. Bottom (Sill) Channel: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at bottoms of shades when shades are closed. b. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. F. Installation Accessories: 1. Recessed Shade Pocket: Rectangular, extruded -aluminum enclosure designed for recessed ceiling installation; with front, top, and back formed as one piece, end plates, and removable bottom closure panel. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Roller Window Shades Page 12 24 13-5 a. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to enclose roller and fabric panel when shade is fully open, but not less than 5 inches. b. Provide pocket with lip at lower edge to support acoustical ceiling panel. 2. Side Channels: Designed to eliminate light gaps at sides of shades as shades are drawn down. 3. Bottom (Sill) Channel: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at bottoms of shades when shades are closed. 4. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range of colors. 2.3 FABRIC PANEL MATERIALS A. Fabric Panel Material Flame -Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. B. Light -Filtering Fabric: Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Insolroll M -Screen. 2. Opacity: a. Provide 5% openness at all windows along the east facade of Clark Hall. b. Provide 3% openness at all seminar room interior windows facing the north and east exterior walls of Clark Hall and the Quiet Study Area. 3. Composition: Vinyl -coated fiberglass yarns woven in 1 x 2 weave configuration. 4. Certification: GreenGuard indoor Air Quality Certified. Bacterial and Fungal Resistance: 2.4 ROLLER -SHADE FABRICATION A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including requirements for flexible, chain -loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels. B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F: 1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb -to -jamb dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch per side or 1/2 -inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Roller Window Shades Page 12 24 13-6 Length equal to head -to -sill or -floor dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch. C. Fabric Panel Fabrication: Fabricate fabric panels without battens or seams to extent possible except as follows: 1. Vertical Shades: Where width -to -length ratio of fabric panel is equal to or greater than [1:4], provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along fabric panel length to ensure fabric panel tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion of the material. 2. Railroaded Materials: Railroad material where material roll width is less than the required width of fabric panel and where indicated. Provide seams as required by railroaded material to produce fabric panels with full roll -width panel(s) plus, if required, one partial roll -width panel located at top of fabric panel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 ROLLER -SHADE INSTALLATION A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Opaque Fabric Panels: Located so fabric panel is not closer than 2 inches to interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean roller -shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. Clark Hall Phase II l 00% CD - 3/14/2014 Roller Window Shades Page 12 24 13-7 C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain manually -operated roller shades. END OF SECTION 12 24 13 Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Cornell University Physical Science Instructional Facility Phase II Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca NY Page 21 00 00 - 1 SECTION 210000 GENERAL FIRE PROTECTION PROVISIONS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Scope of Work. 2. Intent of Drawings. 3. Discrepancies in Documents 4. Pre -Bid Site Visit. 5. Definitions. 6. General Standards of Materials. 7. Products and Substitutions. 8. Applicable Codes and Standards 9. Codes, Permits, and Inspections. 10. Guarantees and Certificates. 11. Temporary Shutdown of Existing Systems. 12. Coordination. 13. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 14. Owner Instruction. 15. Class I and Class 1I Substances. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK A. The scope of the work included under Division 21 of the specifications shall include complete systems as shown in the Contract Documents and specified herein. Any work reasonably inferable or required to result in a complete installation or the intended operation and performance of the systems, shall be included in the Base Bid except where there is specific reference to exclusion and incorporation in other quotations. B. Provide temporary fire protection during the building construction phase. 1.4 INTENT OF DRAWINGS A. Provide complete and functional systems for the project. The systems shall conform to the details stated in the specifications and shown on the drawings. Items or work not shown or specified, but required for complete systems, shall be provided and conform to accepted trade practices. The drawings and specifications are presented to define specific system requirements and serve to expand on the primary contract requirements of providing complete systems. The drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement and routing of the systems included in this contractors work. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 General Fire Protection Provisions Page 21 00 00 - 2 B. Do not scale the drawings. Because of the scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate offsets, fittings, valves, or similar items which may be required to provide complete operating systems. Carefully investigate conditions affecting the work associated with this project. Check and verify dimensions and existing conditions at the site. Install systems in such a manner that interferences between pipes, conduit, ducts, equipment, architectural and structural features are avoided. Provide items required to meet the project conditions without additional cost to the owner. C. These documents may not explicitly disclose final details required for a complete systems installation; however, contractors shall possess the expertise to include the necessary appointments of complete operating systems. D. Contractors shall be "Experienced" (as defined in Division 01) in this type of construction and realize the extent of the work required. 1.5 DISCREPANCIES IN DOCUMENTS A. If drawings or specifications conflict or are unclear, the Fire Protection Contractor shall advise Architect / Engineer in writing before award of contract. Otherwise, Architects / Engineers interpretation of contract documents shall be final, and no additional compensation shall be permitted due to discrepancies or clarifications. B. Where drawings or specifications do not coincide with manufacturers' recommendations or with applicable codes and standards, the Fire Protection Contractor shall advise Architect / Engineer in writing before installation. Otherwise, contractor shall be responsible to provide revisions to their work as directed by architect / engineer within contract price. C. If the required material, installation, or work can be interpreted differently from drawing to drawing, or between drawings and specifications, the Fire Protection Contractor shall provide material, installation, or work which is of the higher standard. D. It is the intent of these contract documents to have the Fire Protection Contractor provide systems and components that are complete and operational for the intended use. If the Fire Protection Contractor discovers a discrepancy or requires a clarification and has failed to notify the Architect / Engineer of the situation in accordance with Paragraph (A) above, the Fire Protection Contractor shall provide the specific systems or components within contract price. E. In cases covered by Paragraph (D) above, where the Fire Protection Contractor believes direction or clarification is required from the Architect / Engineer, the Fire Protection Contractor shall submit a sketch identifying the issue and a proposed solution. The Architect / Engineer will review proposed solution, note if necessary, and return. 1.6 PRE-BID SITE VISIT A. Bidders shall visit the site and become completely familiar with existing conditions prior to submitting their bid. No extra charges shall be allowed as a result of existing conditions. To schedule a site visit, contact Ruth Howell (607-351-4949) at least 48 hours in advance of desired time of visit. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 General Fire Protection Provisions Page 21 00 00 - 3 1.7 DEFINITIONS A. Specific terminology, as used herein, shall have the following meanings: 1. "Furnish"...Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar subsequent requirements. 2. "Install"...Operations at project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar requirements. 3. "Provide"...Furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use. 4. "Concealed, Interior"...Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. 5. "Concealed, Exterior" ...Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. 6. "Exposed, Interior"...Exposed to view indoors (not concealed). 7. "Exposed, Exterior"...Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and xveather conditions. 8. "Finished Space" ...Space other than mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, space above finish ceilings, crawl spaces, utility service tunnels, and interstitial spaces. 9. "Conditioned"...Spaces directly provided with heating and cooling. 10. "Unconditioned"...Spaces without heating or cooling including ceiling plenums. 11. "Indoors"...Located inside the exterior walls and roof of the building. 12. "Outdoors"...Located outside the exterior walls and roof of the building. 13. "Atmosphere"...The same as outdoors. 1.8 GENERAL STANDARDS OF MATERIALS A. Equipment and materials, unless otherwise noted, shall be new and of first quality, produced by manufacturers who have been regularly engaged in the manufacture of these products for a period of not less than five years. B. Equipment and material of one type shall be the products of one manufacturer; similar items of the same classification shall be identical, including equipment, assemblies, parts, piping, and components. C. Equipment and materials furnished shall be determined safe by a nationally recognized testing organization, such as Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation, and materials shall be labeled, certified or listed by such organizations. Where third party certification is required for packaged equipment, the equipment shall bear the appropriate certification label. D. With respect to custom made equipment or related installations which are constructed specially for this project, the manufacturer shall certify the safety of same on the basis of test data. The Owner shall be furnished copies of such certificates. Clark Hall Phase 11- 100% CD - 3/14/2014 General Fire Protection Provisions Page 21 00 00 - 4 1.9 PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Where a specific manufacturer's product is specified, the contract sum shall be based on that product only. Any substitutions from the specified product shall be offered as a Substitution Request. Refer to Division 01 for requirements. Substitutions shall not be pennitted after the bidding phase without a Substitution Request Fonn included with the bid. B. Where several manufacturers' products are specified, the Contract Amount shall be based upon the specified products only. Any substitutions from the specified products shall be offered as a Substitution Request. Refer to Division 01 for requirements. Substitutions shall not be permitted after the bidding phase without a Substitution Request Form included with the bid. C. Where only one manufacturer's product is specified, the associated systems have been designed on the basis of that product. Where several manufacturers' products are specified, the associated systems have been designed on the basis of the first -named manufacturer's product. When products other than those used as the basis of design are submitted, the contractor shall agree to accept a unilateral change order that includes additional costs incun-ed by the Owner for the Architect's and other Contractors review of submissions, redesign, and system and/or structure modifications required by the use of that product. 1.10 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Materials furnished and work installed shall comply with applicable codes listed in Division 01, with the requirements of the local utility companies, and with the requirements of governmental departments or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sprinklers, components, and appurtenances shall be both UL listed and FM approved whenever possible. The minimum standard is a UL listing. 1.11 CODES, PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS A. The fire suppression system shall be designed and hydraulically calculated by a contractor who is a registered fire protection engineer. B. Materials furnished and work installed shall comply with the Fire Code of New York State, the National Fire Protection Association, the Ithaca Fire Department, FM Global, Cornell University Environmental Health and Safety, and with authorities having jurisdiction. At a minimum the fire suppression work shall be provided in accordance with: 1. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems 2. NFPA 25 — Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water -Based Fire Protection Systems 3. The Federal Fire Safety Act of 1992. Materials and equipment furnished for the electrical portion of the fire protection systems shall comply with the National Electrical Code and bear the approval label of or shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. C. The building owner's insurance company is FM Global. The fire suppression system shall be designed following the requirement of the Fire Code of New York State, the National Fire Protection Association, the Ithaca Fire Department, FM Global, Cornell University Environmental Health and Safety, and with authorities having jurisdiction. Drawings and Clark Hall Phase I1 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 General Fire Protection Provisions Page 210000-5 hydraulic calculations shall be submitted to the Ithaca Fire Department, FM Global, Cornell University Environmental Health and Safety, and with authorities having jurisdiction for review and approval prior to the start of system installation. D. Fire Protection contractor shall provide labor, materials, services, apparatus, drawings, and hydraulic calculations required to comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, whether or not shown on the drawings and/or specified. E. Fire Protection contractor shall obtain and pay for required pennits associated with approval and installation of plumbing systems and associated appurtenances. 1.12 GUARANTEES AND CERTIFICATES A. Defective equipment, materials or workmanship, including damage to the work provided under other divisions of this contract, shall be replaced or repaired at no extra cost to the Owner for the duration of the stipulated guarantee periods. 1. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, the duration of the guarantee period shall be one (I) year following the date of Substantial Completion. Temporary operation of the equipment for temporary conditioning, testing, etc., prior to occupancy will not be considered part of the wan-anty period. 1.13 TEMPORARY SHUTDOWN OF EXISTING SYSTEMS A. Provide temporary fire protection required by NFPA and the City of Ithaca. Provide shop drawings for temporary fire protection prior to the shop drawing submittal for the remaining fire protection system. 1. Provide computer generated design drawings and hydraulic calculations as required by NFPA. B. Plan installation of fire protection systems and connections to existing fire protection systems to insure minimum interference with regular operation of existing fire protection systems. Some temporary shutdown of existing fire protection systems may be required to complete the work.. A. Submit to the Owner, Fire Code Officials, Fire Department, and other Authorities Having Jurisdiction in writing for approval, proposed dates, times, and duration of temporary shut downs of existing fire protection systems. 1. Submit schedule at least fifteen (15) calendar days in advance of intended shutdown. Shutdowns shall be made at such times as shall not interfere with regular operation of existing facilities and only after written approval of Owner. 2. Provide detailed written description of temporary shutdown requirements to Owner. The Owner reserves the right to require the Fire Protection Contractor to provide a walk- through prior to any shutdown. 3. Shutdowns shall be planned to occur on weekdays between 9:00 p.m. and 4:00 p.m. or on weekends, as approved by the Owner. 4. To insure continuous operation, make necessary temporary connections between new and existing work. Bear costs resulting from temporary shutdowns and temporary connections. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 General Fire Protection Provisions Page 21 00 00 - 6 5. Provide temporary fire protection as directed by the Owner, Fire Code Officials, Fire Department, and other Authorities Having Jurisdiction during temporary outage. C. Shutdowns must be performed by the Owner. Do not shut -down any system. The Owner reserves the right to require a walk-through of any shutdown prior to the shutdown. Following electrical shutdowns, verify that affected motors are rotating in the proper direction. Bear costs associated with reverse rotated motors. L14 COORDINATION A. Coordinate and furnish in writing to the Architect information necessary to permit the work to be installed satisfactorily and with the least possible interference or delay. B. Coordination drawings shall be prepared as defined in Division 01. No installation of permanent systems shall proceed until the coordination drawings are reviewed by the Architect. No extra charges shall be allowed for changes required to accommodate installation of systems provided under other divisions of this contract. C. Coordination drawings shall be developed from individual system shop drawings and contractor fabrication drawings. Electronic or other reproduced engineering design drawings used as coordination drawings are not acceptable. D. When work is installed without proper coordination, changes to this work deemed necessary by the Architect shall be made to correct the conditions without extra cost to the Owner. E. The value of the coordination drawings shall be identified as a line item in the Schedule of Values. If the coordination drawings are not submitted as required, their value shall credited to Owner in accordance with the provisions of Article 7 of the General Conditions. The value of coordination drawings shall be a minimum of two (2.0) percent of this Contract Amount. 1.15 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES A. Shop Drawing and Product Data Submittal Procedures 1. Fire Protection Contractor shall prepare and submit electronic submittals. a. The fire suppression system design, shop drawings, hydraulic calculations, and components shall be reviewed by the Ithaca Fire Department, FM Global, Fire Code Officials, Cornell University Environmental Health and Safety, and other Authorities Having Jurisdiction for review prior to any installation. The Owner may request paper copies of certain submittals for onsite coordination. b. Permits, Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Permits, Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 2. Product Data: Fire Protection Contractor shall compile information into a single submittal for each component, piece of equipment, and appurtenances. a. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 General Fire Protection Provisions Page 21 00 00 - 7 b. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. c. Include the following information: 1) Submittal Package number and Submittal Item number. 2) Manufacturer's catalog cuts. 3) Manufacturer's product specifications. 4) Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. 5) Testing by recognized testing agency. 6) Application of testing agency labels and seals. 7) Notation of coordination requirements. 8) Availability and delivery time infonnation. d. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: 1) Wiring diagrams showing factory -installed wiring. 2) Printed performance curves. 3) Operational range diagrams. 4) Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. Shop Drawings: Fire Protection contractor shall provide project -specific fire protection system design based on their hydraulic calculation. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. a. Include the following information: 1) Submittal Package number and Submittal Item number. 2) Identification of products. 3) Schedules. 4) Compliance with specified standards. 5) Notation of coordination requirements. 6) Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 7) Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. 8) Seal and signature of professional fire protection engineer. b. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by I 1 inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 General Fire Protection Provisions Page 210000-8 c. Upon receipt of Revise And Resubmit or Rejected shop drawings, the Fire Protection Contractor shall make all noted modifications then submit to the Architect / Engineer and Commissioning Agency within ten (10) days of receiving returned submittal. 1) No fire protection work may proceed until shop drawings have been reviewed by Architect / Engineer, Owner Insurance Carrier, Fire Code Officials, Fire Department, Authorities Having Jurisdiction, and Commissioning Agency. B. Prior to submission of any fire protection shop drawing or product data to Architect / Engineer Owner Insurance Carrier, Fire Code Officials, Fire Department, Authorities Having Jurisdiction, and Commissioning Agency for review, the Fire Protection Contractor shall: DESIGNER NOTE: Select Construction Manager or General Contractor 1. Review, stamp, date, and sign the submission confirming that the manufacturer, model number, construction criteria, and appurtenances include in the shop drawing submittal are in compliance with the fire protection contract document requirements. 2. Submit dated and signed submittal to the Construction Manager or General Contractor for confirmation that the shop drawing submission is in compliance with the fire protection contract documents.. 3. Confirm that the Construction Manager or General Contractor has forwarded the submittal to the Architect / Engineer, Owner Insurance Carrier, Fire Code Officials, Fire Department, Authorities Having Jurisdiction, and Commissioning Agency for review. 4. Submittals not provided with review confirmation, date and signature will be returned without review. ` C. Fire Protection System Design and Hydraulic Calculation Submittal 1. Final fire protection system design and hydraulic calculations shall be submitted to the Architect / Engineer as a record submittal that includes review and sign off by Owner Insurance Carrier, Fire Code Officials, Fire Department, and other Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 2. Sprinkler design and hydraulic calculations shall be provided based on specified sprinkler types / styles, characteristics, and appurtenances specified in the contract documents. D. The following shop drawings shall be submitted by to the Architect / Engineer for review: 1. Welding certificates 2. Fire Protection specialties 3. Valves 4. Hangers, anchors, support, and guides 5. Pipe, and valve Identification 6. Piping and sprinkler locations 7. Product data for system components and materials (including construction standards) 8. Sprinklers, escutcheons, and guards. Include sprinkler flow characteristics, finish, and other pertinent data. 9. Miscellaneous fire protection components Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 General Fire Protection Provisions Page 21 00 00 - 9 F. The value of shop drawings, product data and samples shall be identified as a line item in the Schedule of Values. If the shop drawings, product data and samples are not submitted as required, their value shall be credited to Owner in accordance with the provisions of Article 7 of the General Conditions. The value of these items shall be a minimum of one (2.0) percent of this Contract Amount. 1.16 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. Provide temporary fire protection in accordance with the requirements of the Fire Code of New York State, the National Fire Protection Association, the Ithaca Fire Department, FM Global, Cornell University Environmental Health and Safety, and with authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide computer generated design drawings and hydraulic calculations as required by NFPA. 2. Temporary fire suppression system design, shop drawings, hydraulic calculations, and components shall be reviewed by the Engineer of Record, the Ithaca Fire Department, FM Global, Cornell University Environmental Health and Safety, and authorities having jurisdiction prior to the start of any system installation. 1.17 OWNER INSTRUCTION A. After final tests and adjustments have been completed, furnish the services of qualified personnel to instruct representatives of the Owner in the operation and maintenance procedures for systems installed as part of this project. B. Operation and maintenance instructions for major items of equipment shall be directly supervised by the equipment manufacturer's representative. Operate equipment for sufficient as required to meet governing authorities' operation and performance tests and as required to assure that the Owner's representatives are properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. C. Minimum instruction period shall be 8 man hours. The instruction period shall be broken into segrnents at the direction of the Owner. 1. Notify the Architect, the Owner's representative and equipment manufacturers' representatives, by letter, as to the time and date of maintenance instruction periods approved by the Owner at least one (1) week prior to conducting same. 2. Provide sign off sheet for every training session that includes: a. Agenda b. Date c. Attendees d. Training session subject e. Training session presenter f. List of questions and comments 3. Fire Protection Contractor and / or Manufacturers' Representative shall provide the above within five (5) days after each training session. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 General Fire Protection Provisions Page 21 00 00 - 10 1.18 CLASS I AND CLASS II SUBSTANCES A. All equipment containing Class I or Class II substances as identified by the Clean Air Act of 1990 shall be manufactured in strict accordance with that act and its amendments. B. All work involving Class I or Class 11 substances as identified by the Clean Air Act of 1990 shall be performed in strict accordance with that act and its amendments. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 21 00 00 Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Cornell University Physical Science Instructional Facility Phase II Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca NY Page 21 05 00 - 1 SECTION 21 05 00 COMMON WORK FOR FIRE PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Cutting and Patching. 2. Air Plenums. 3. Electrical Connections. 4. Accessibility. 5. Painting. 6. Cleaning, Protection and Adjustment. 7. Special Tools. 8. Dielectric Fittings 1.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Provide cutting and patching necessary to install the work specified herein. Patching shall match adjacent surfaces. Refer to Division 01 - Cutting and Patching for specific directions. B. Fire and smoke ratings compromised due to demolition shall be immediately restored. Repair or apply fire proofing to structural components that are exposed due to demolition, unless noted otherwise. C. No structural members shall be cut without prior approval of the Architect. D. Provide ceiling removal and replacement where work above ceilings is required. Replace ceiling components damaged in the process. 1.4 AIR PLENUMS A. Plenums which are used as part of an air distribution system as defined by NFPA 90, shall be provided with materials tested in accordance with NFPA 255, ASTM E 84, and rated for air plenum installation. The Contractor shall be responsible to utilize the correct materials in ceiling space used for environmental air purposes. 1.5 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Regardless of voltage, provide control wiring, interlock wiring, and equipment control wiring for the equipment provided under this division of the specifications. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Common Work for Fire Protection Page 21 05 00 - 2 B. Coordinate to ensure that electrical devices furnished or provided are compatible with the electrical systems used. C. Confirm final location of electrical equipment to be installed in the vicinity of fire protection system. 1.6 ACCESSIBILITY A. Coordinate to ensure the sufficiency of the size of shafts, and chases, and the adequacy of clearances in hung ceilings and other areas required for the proper installation of this work. B. Locate equipment which must be serviced, operated or maintained in fully accessible positions. Locations in ceilings requiring access shall be coordinated with, but not limited to lights, curtain tracks, speakers, etc. Equipment requiring access shall include, but is not necessarily limited to, valves, traps, clean -outs, motors, controllers, switchgear, drain points, etc. C. Indicate the locations of access doors for each concealed valve, control, damper, or other device concealed behind finished construction and requiring service on the coordination drawings. Equipment below floor slab or finished grade shall be also be indicated on the coordinating drawings. 1.7 PAINTING A. Painting requirements of this section shall conform to Division 01 — Painting. B. Provide surface preparation, priming, and final coat application in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Provide painting of Fire Protection items exposed in mechanical equipment room and in exposed occupied spaces. Fire Protection items to be painted are as follows: 1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports 2. Accessory items. 1.8 CLEANING, PROTECTION AND ADJUSTMENT A. Cleaning: 1. General cleaning requirements are specified in Division 01. 2. Upon completion of the work, clean the exterior surface of equipment, accessories, and trim. Clean, polish, and leave equipment, accessories, and trim in first-class condition. B. Protection of Surfaces: 1. Protect new and existing surfaces from damage during the construction period. 2. Provide plywood or similar material under equipment or materials stored on floors or roofs. Provide protection in areas where construction may damage surfaces. 3. Surfaces damaged during the construction shall be repaired or replaced at the cost of the Contractor at fault. The method of repairing or replacing the surface shall be approved by the Owner and Architect. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Common Work for Fire Protection Page 21 05 00 - 3 C. Protection of Services: 1. Protect new and existing services from damage during the construction period. 2. Repair, replace and maintain in service any new or existing utilities, facilities or services damaged, broken or otherwise rendered inoperative during the course of construction. 3. Services damaged during the construction shall be replaced at the cost of the Contractor at fault. The method used in repairing, replacing or maintaining the services shall be approved by the Owner and Architect. D. Protection of Equipment and Materials: ] . Materials shall be stored in a manner that shall maintain an orderly, clean appearance. If stored on-site in open or unprotected areas, material shall be kept off the ground and out of standing water by means of pallets or racks, and covered with tarpaulins. 2. Material, if left unprotected and damaged, shall be repainted or otherwise refurbished at the discretion of the Owner. Material is subject to rejection and replacement if, in the opinion of the Architect or the manufacturer, the equipment has deteriorated or been damaged to the extent that its immediate use or performance is questionable, or that its normal life expectancy has been curtailed. 3. During the construction period, protect piping, fittings, valves, and associated appurtenances from damage and dirt. Each system of piping shall be flushed to remove grit, dirt, sand, and other foreign matter for as long a time as required to thoroughly clean the systems. E. Adjustment: 1. After the entire installation has been completed, make required adjustments to automatic controls, pressure reducing valves and similar devices until performance requirements are met. 1.9 SPECIAL TOOLS A. Provide the Owner's representative with two (2) sets of special tools required for operation and maintenance of equipment provided. 1.10 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Ferrous to non-ferrous pipe connections shall be made with threaded, soldered, plain, or welded end connections that match piping system material. Dielectric fittings shall prevent any electrolytic action between dissimilar materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCESS DOORS A. 18 inch x 18 inch access door assembly manufactured as an integral unit, complete with all parts and ready for installation. B. Access doors and frames shall be of continuous welded steel construction, unless otherwise indicated. Grind welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of support shown. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Common Work for Fire Protection Page 21 05 00 - 4 C. Frames shall be fabricated from 16 -gauge steel. 1. Fabricate frame with exposed flange nominal 1 inch wide around perimeter of frame for units installed in the following construction: a. Exposed Masonry 2. For gypsum drywall or veneer gypsum plaster, furnish perforated frames with drywall bead. 3. For installation in masonry construction, furnish frames with adjustable metal masonry anchors. 4. For full -bed plaster applications, furnish frames with galvanized expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead, welded to perimeter of frame D. Flush Panel Doors shall be fabricated from not less than 14 -gauge sheet steel, with concealed spring hinges or concealed continuous piano hinge set to open 175°. Finish with manufacturer's factory -applied prime paint. 1. For fire -rated units, provide manufacturer's standard insulated flush panel/doors, with continuous piano hinge and self-closing mechanism. E. Locking devices shall be flush, screwdriver -operated cam locks of number required to hold door in flush, smooth plane when closed. F. Manufacturers: 1. Bar -Co., Inc. 2. J. L. Industries 3. Karp Associates, Inc. 4. Nystrom, Inc. 2.2 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Dielectric unions shall be factory — fabricated assemblies with a minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures. B. Dielectric flanges shall be factory — fabricated, companion flange assemblies with a minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures. C. Dielectric flange kits shall be field — fabricated with a minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures. Kit shall include flanges, full face type phenolic gasket, phenolic bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. D. Dielectric couplings shall be galvanized steel with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining, threaded ends and a minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures. E. Dielectric nipples shall be electroplated steel nipple with unert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining, plain, threaded, or grooved ends and a minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Common Work for Fire Protection Page 210500-5 F. Manufacturers I. Watts Industries 2. Zurn Industries 3. Sioux Chief Industries PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ACCESS DOORS A. Coordinate installation of access doors with the General Contractor. Locations of access shall be submitted and doors furnished in sufficient time to allow installation in the normal course of the work. END OF SECTION 21 05 00 Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Cornell University Physical Science Instructional Facility Phase II Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca NY Page 21 05 1 9 - 1 SECTION 21 05 19 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 GENERAL A. Provide fire suppression systems and equipment as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 1.3 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Sprinkler system valves. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 SPRINKLER SYSTEM VALVES A. Provide flushing valves on mains, cross -mains, branches and run outs to facilitate the cleaning and flushing of the entire fire protection system. 1. Flushing valves shall be sized and selected by the Fire Protection Contractor. a. Valve shall capable of providing the minimum water flow requirements as required by NFPA 25. b. Provide detailed supporting calculations for each flushing valve that indicates flow velocity and volume. c. Valves and calculations shall be submitted as a shop drawing for review and comment prior to installation. B. Control Valves 1. Valves size larger than 2-1/2 inches shall be UL / FM approved listed butterfly valves with integral tamper resistant two SPDT monitoring switches and rated for 300 PSI. Control valves shall be provided with monitor switches. Monitor switches shall be provided with contacts for inter -connection with the building fire alarm system. (Wiring shall be under Division 28.) a. Manufacturer and Model 1) Tyco — Model BFV-N 2) Kennedy — Figure 01 Series Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Fire Protection Specialties Page 21 05 19 - 2 3) Nibco - Model GD -4765-8N. 4) Victaulic — Model Series 705W butterfly valve. C. Ball Valves 1. Sprinkler system valves one inch and smaller shall be FM approved ball valves. a. Manufacturer and Model 1) Nibco - Model KT -585 -70 -UL. 2) Anvil - Model 171. 3) United - Model 80SS. D. Verify proper operation of existing control valve(s). Provide testing of existing tamper switch(es) to verify operation and compatibility with proposed alarming system. Coordinate testing with the Owner's maintenance and fire alarm personnel. PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 21 05 19 Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Cornell University Physical Science Instructional Facility Phase II Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca NY Page 21 05 29 - 1 SECTION 21 05 29 FIRE PROTECTION HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND SLEEVES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 GENERAL A. Provide fire suppression systems and equipment as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 1.3 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hangers and Support. 2. Sleeves. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. General 1. Hanging, bracing, and seismic restraint of system piping shall conform to Chapter 9 of NEPA-13. 2. Specified bracket clamp and rod sizes are minimum size. Support and hanger design shall include a safety factor of 5. 3. Plastic -coated hangers and clamps shall be provided for copper pipe unless shields are provided between hangers or clamps. 4. Chain straps, perforated bars, wire hangers or expansion shields are not permitted. 5. Inserts for piping shall be of a type which shall not interfere with structural reinforcing and which shall not displace excessive amounts of concrete. 6. Rigid hangers for horizontal piping shall provide a means of vertical adjustment after erection. 7. In grooved installations, use Victaulic Style 005 rigid couplings with offsetting angle - pattern bolt pads, which permit support and hanging in accordance with NFPA-13. 8. Material and components shall be UL Listed and/or FM Approved. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Fire Protection Hangers, Supports, and Sleeves Page 21 05 29 - 2 B. Manufacturers and Model Hanger Type PHD Erico B -Line Anvil International Beam clamp 250-1 200 B351L Figure 95 Standard clevis hanger 450 400 B3100 Figure 260 Standard iron pipe riser clamp 550 510 B3373 Figure 261 Standard U -bolt 90 150 B3188 Figure 137 Welded side beam attachment 920 325 B3060 Figure 206 C. Hanger Rod Schedule Pipe Size Up to 2 inches 2-1/2 inches to 4 inches D. Fasteners and Anchors 1. Drilled -In Anchors Minimum Rod Size 3/8 inch diameter 1/2 inch diameter a. Wedge Anchors: Wedge type, torque -controlled, with impact section to prevent thread damage complete with required nuts and washers. 1) Provide anchors with length identification markings conforming to ICC ES ACO 1 or ICC ES AC 193. 2) Interior Use: Provide carbon steel anchors with zinc plating in accordance with ASTM B633. 3) Manufacturer a. Hilti b. Fastenal b. Cartridge Injection Adhesive Anchors: Threaded steel rod, inserts or reinforcing dowels, complete with nuts, washers, polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive injection system, and manufacturer's installation instructions. 1) Interior Use: Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, provide carbon steel threaded rods conforming to ASTM A36, ASTM A 193 Type B7 or ISO 898 Class 5.8 with zinc plating in accordance with ASTM B633, or carbon steel HIT TZ rods conforming to ASTM A510 with chemical composition of AISI 1038. 2) Reinforcing dowels shall be A615 Grade 60. 3) Manufacturer a. Hilti b. Fastenal Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Fire Protection Hangers, Supports, and Sleeves Page 21 05 29 - 3 c. Capsule Anchors: Threaded steel rod, inserts and reinforcing dowels with 45 degree chisel point, complete with nuts, washers, glass or foil capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane methacrylate -based resin and accelerator, and manufacturer's installation instructions. 1) Interior Use: Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, provide chisel - pointed carbon steel rods conforming to ASTM A36,ASTM A 193 Type B7 or ISO 898 Class 5.8 with zinc plating in accordance with ASTM B633. 2) Reinforcing dowels shall be A615 Grade 60, with 45 -degree chisel -points at embedded end. 3) Manufacturer a. Hilti b. Fastenal 2.2 PIPE SLEEVES A. Provide sleeves for piping passing through walls, ceilings, structural members, and other building parts. Sleeves shall be securely fastened to the assembly penetrated. 1. Through penetration of fire -resistance -rated walls a. Annular space between sleeves and pipes shall be protected by an approved UL listed through - penetration fire stop system installed and tested in accordance with ASTM E814, with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inch of water and shall have an F rating of not less than the required fire resistance rating of the wall penetration. b. Sealant in one-hour and two-hour walls shall be UL listed and installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. c. Manufacturer 1) Pro Set 2) Hilti 2. Through penetration of fire -resistance -rated floors a. Annular space between sleeves and pipes shall be protected by an approved UL listed through - penetration fire stop system installed and tested in accordance with ASTM E814, with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inch of water. The system shall have an F rating and a T rating of not less than one hour but not less than the required rating of the floor penetration b. Sealant in one-hour and two-hour floors shall UL listed and installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. c. Manufacturer 1) Pro Set 2) Hilti Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Fire Protection Hangers, Supports, and Sleeves Page 21 05 29 - 4 3. Through penetrations of non -fire -resistance -rated walls and floors. a. Annular space between sleeves and pipes in non -fire -resistance -rated assemblies shall be filled or tightly caulked in an approved manor. b. Sealant for general purpose use and for Kitchen, Food Preparation, and Dining areas shall be provided in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. c. Manufacturer 1) Pro Set 2) Hilti B. Piping shall be installed to prevent strains and stress that exceed the structural strength of the pipe. Provisions shall be made to protect piping from damage resulting from expansion, contraction, and structural settlement. D. Where piping is provided through holes, notches in studs, joists, rafters, or other similar members and is less than 1.5 inches from the nearest edge of the member, the pipe shall be protected by shield plates. Protective shield plates shall be a minimum of 0.062 inch thick steel and shall cover the area of the pipe that is closer than 1.5 inches from edge. E. Schedule of Sleeve Materials Sleeve Type Sleeve Material 1 18 gauge galvanized steel. 2 Std. weight galvanized steel pipe. 6 Metal deck and wall sleeves. F. Escutcheon Plates 1. Schedule of Escutcheon Plate Materials Location Escutcheon Plate Material Finished spaces Anodized aluminum or chrome -plated brass Unfinished spaces Plain brass, cast iron or aluminum G. Schedule of Sleeve Caulking and Packing Caulking/Packing Type Caulking/Packing Requirements A Space between pipe or pipe covering and sleeve shall be caulked with an incombustible permanently plastic waterproof, non -staining, fire proof compound leaving a smooth finished appearance. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Fire Protection Hangers, Supports, and Sleeves Page 21 05 29 - 5 H. Schedule of Sleeve Applications Location Sleeve Type Thru Fire Rated Construction Sleeve Type Thru Non- Fire Rated Sleeve Caulking and Packing Type Interior Walls, partitions, and floors 2 1 A Cellular metal deck floors 2 6 A PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install entire sprinkler system in strict accordance with NFPA 13: Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. END OF SECTION 21 05 29 Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 SECTION 21 07 00 SPRINKLERS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Cornell University Physical Science Instructional Facility Phase II Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca NY Page 21 07 00 - I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 GENERAL A. Provide fire suppression systems as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 1.3 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. System design. 2. Sprinklers. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESIGN A. The quantity of sprinklers shown on the drawing represents the minimum number of sprinklers required. Provide additional sprinklers as required to meet NFPA 13 for adverse conditions, beam and bulkhead conditions, below large ducts, etc. at no additional cost to the owner. B. The entire sprinkler system shall be hydraulically designed based on the results of the new water supply flow test conducted by the contractor. A minimum of 10% PSI cushion shall be provided between the water supply curve and the system design point. The fire protection contractor's base bid price shall be for a fully sprinklered space / area associated with this project. C. Design shall be based on the occupancy hazards as specified in NFPA. Minimum design requirements for the facility shall be as follows: 1. Light Hazard areas shall be designed for 0.10 GPM/SF over the most remote 1,500 SF area using 1/2" orifice quick response sprinklers plus a 250 GPM hose stream. D. Suggested sprinkler locations are shown on the drawings. The sprinkler layout shall be centered in the ceiling tiles. Minimum distance from vertical surface to centerline of sprinkler head: 12 inches. Any deviation from this layout must be approved by the Architect. E. Coordinate the location of sprinklers and piping to insure the adequate space is available. Some revisions to the sprinkler as shown on fire protection drawings may be required as a result of coordination. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Sprinklers Page 210700-2 F. Sprinklers provided at window glazing assemblies located in fire separation assemblies shall be designed to meet report number NER-516 issued by the National Evaluation Service, Inc., of Falls Church, VA. Report is downloadable at www.nateval.org. Sprinklers shall be hydraulically calculated for the most remote 46.5 feet of linear window area at a flow rate of 20 GPM per sprinkler and a pressure of 12.7 PSI for sprinklers spaces at less than 6 feet. Load shall be added to sprinkler load at point where the systems piping interconnect. 2.2 SPRINKLERS A. General 1. Sprinkler temperature ratings throughout the facility shall be ordinary classification between 135° F and 170° F. 2. Sprinklers shall be installed at least 12 inches from any air distribution devices. Sprinkler location at wall mounted and peninsular shelving units shall be a minimum of 18 inches away. 3. Where possible, sprinklers shall be both UL listed and FM approved. The minimum standard is a UL listing. 4. Provide two (2) sprinkler head wrenches for each type sprinkler head. a. Wrenches shall be provided by the sprinkler manufacturer that directly engage the hex -shaped wrench boss integrally cast in the sprinkler body. Victaulic FireLock Series. 5. Sprinklers shall be supplied from one (1) manufacturer unless specified otherwise. Submit one (1) sample of each sprinkler to be utilized on this project. 6. Sprinklers using rubber O -rings or rubber seals shall not be permitted for use in this project. 7. Escutcheons and guards shall be listed, supplied, and approved for use with the sprinkler by the sprinkler manufacturer. B. Sprinkler Cabinet 1. Provide sprinkler cabinet to house 12 spare sprinklers of each type of sprinkler as required by NFPA 13. Mount in the location as directed by the Owner. a. Manufacturer and Model 1) Victaulic - Model number SA -000-0000. 2) Croker - Model 8055. 3) Tyco- Spare Sprinkler Cabinets C. Quick Response Sprinkler 1. Exposed Sprinklers (Upright and Pendant) — Quick Response a. Exposed sprinklers shall be chrome plated, glass bulb automatic sprinklers rated for 155°F at 175 PSI (68°C at 1207 kPa.) 1) Manufacturer and Model Clark Hall Phase I1 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Sprinklers Page 210700-3 a. Viking —Model VK 300 or VK302 b. Victaulic - Model V2704 or V2708 c. Tyco - Model TY -FRB 2. Semi -Recessed Sprinklers — Quick Response a. Semi -recessed sprinklers shall be chrome plated, glass bulb operated rated at 155°F at 175 PSI (1207 kPa at 68°C) 1) Manufacturer and Model a. Viking —Model VK 302 or VK317 HP with Model El recessed escutcheon. b. Victaulic - Model V2704 or V2708 c. Tyco - Model TY -FRB D. Special Sprinkler Applications 1. Window Sprinklers a. Window sprinklers shall be chrome plated, glass bulb operated rated at 155°F at 175 PSI (1207 kPa at 68°C) 1) Manufacturer and Model a. Tyco - Model WS — TY3488 Vertical sidewall b. Tyco - Model WS — TY3388 Horizontal sidewall E. Sprinkler Type Application Schedule 1. The following schedule shall be used to determine which type of sprinkler should be installed in a given area. Room Type Ceiling Type Sprinkler Type Density Offices Lay -In Semi -Recessed Light Hazard Corridors Lay -In Semi -Recessed Light Hazard Glass in rated partitions Gypsum/Lay-In Window Sprinkler 15.0 GPM or 0.00095m3/S Seminar Rooms Lay -In Semi -Recessed Light Hazard Rooms without ceilings N/A Upright Light Hazard PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install entire sprinkler system in strict accordance with NFPA 13: Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Sprinklers Page 21 07 00 - 4 B. Do not install sprinklers that have been dropped, damaged, or show a visible loss of fluid. Never install sprinklers with cracked bulbs. Sprinkler bulb protector shall be removed by hand after installation. Do not use tools or any other device(s) to remove the protector that could damage the bulb in any way. C. Contractor shall notify the owner's insurance company, the Engineer of Record, the Ithaca Fire Department, FM Global, Cornell University Environmental Health and Safety, and authorities having jurisdiction to schedule a final inspection by their personnel. Alarm valves and signaling devices shall be tested. END OF SECTION 21 07 00 Clark Hall Phase I1- 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Cornell University Physical Science Instructional Facility Phase II Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca NY Page 21 10 00 - 1 SECTION 21 10 00 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM PIPING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 GENERAL A. Provide fire suppression systems and equipment as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 1.3 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Piping and fittings. 2. Microbiologically influenced corrosion control systems. 1.4 SYSTEM DESIGN A. Cross mains and branch lines shall be held as high above the floor lines as possible. B. Provide piping as required for complete drainage of the sprinkler systems. C. Branch lines, cross mains, and feed mains shall be graded towards the drainage point. Provide drain valves at low points. Where special conditions occur in branch lines, valved drainage pipes shall be provided with discharge piped to outside the building, or to a floor drain. D. Test pipes with ball valves and sight glasses shall be provided as required in the sprinkler systems. E. Provide approved flushing connections at ends of mains and cross mains as required by code. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING AND FITTING MATERIAL SCHEDULES A. Piping or tubing used in sprinkler systems shall be as listed in NFPA 13: Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. Piping and tubing used in sprinkler systems shall be designed to withstand a working pressure of not less than 175 PSIG. Clark Hall Phase It - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Fire Protection System Piping Page 21 10 00 - 2 B. All steel sprinkler piping 4 inches and smaller shall be coated on the interior surface with an antibacterial coating such as the "ABF" coating. 1. Manufacturer and Model a. Allied Tube and Conduit Company b. Wheatland Tube Company C. Sprinkler system fittings shall meet the following requirements: 1. Fittings into which sprinkler and sprinkler head riser nipples are threaded shall be welded or threaded type. 2. Rubber Basketed grooved end pipe and fittings with mechanical couplings shall be permitted in pipe sizes 1-1/2 inch and larger. D. The same manufacturer, in accordance with the manufacturers written instructions shall supply fittings, mechanical couplings, and rubber gaskets. Do not mix fittings and couplings of various manufacturers. 1. Castings used for coupling housings, fittings, valve bodies, etc., shall be date stamped for quality assurance and traceability. E. Fittings shall be: 1. Cast iron with threaded ends. (Fittings 1-1/2" and smaller shall be threaded) 2. Grooved style ductile iron short -pattern fittings. 3. Standard seamless steel with grooved ends or butt -welded ends 4. Forged steel with flanged ends. The use of plain end pipe type fittings is prohibited. F. Piping systems shall be constructed of the following, materials as scheduled below, subject to approval by authorities having jurisdiction. G. U -bolt fittings similar to and including Victaulic 921 outlet tees are not permitted. H. Outlet tee fittings similar to and including Victaulic 920 and shop welded outlets are permitted provided they are listed and approved and are compatible with the system pressure rating. I. Piping systems shall be constructed of the following materials as scheduled below, subject to authorities having jurisdiction MATERIAL ANSI ASTM Piping Black welded and seamless steel pipe A-795 Hot dipped zinc coated (galvanized) welded and seamless steel pipe A-795 Electric resistance welded steel pipe A-135 Welded and seamless steel pipe A53 A-53 Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Fire Protection System Piping Page 211000-3 MATERIAL ANSI ASTM Fittings Schedule 40 black steel Threaded/mechanical couplings similar to Victaulic Style 920 Cast iron threaded fittings - Class 125 and 250 B16.4 Threaded/mechanical couplings similar to Victaulic Style 005 and FireLock fittings Cast iron pipe flanges and flanged fittings B16.1 Threaded/mechanical couplings similar to Victaulic Style 005 and FireLock fittings Malleable iron threaded fittings - Class 150 and 300 B16.3 Fittings — Mechanical Couplings Ductile iron fittings A-536 Malleable iron fittings A-47 Systems Pipe Fittings Connection to existing system Schedule 40 black steel Threaded/mechanical couplings similar to Victaulic Style 920 Concealed Feed Mains and Cross Mains Schedule 40 black steel with ABF coating Threaded/mechanical couplings similar to Victaulic Style 005 and FireLock fittings Concealed Branch Piping Schedule 40 black steel with ABF coating Threaded/mechanical couplings similar to Victaulic Style 005 and FireLock fittings PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install required extensions to existing sprinkler system in strict accordance with NFPA 13: Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. B. Test the system for two hours at 50 PSI (345 kPa) over the system working pressure or 200 PSI (1,380 kPa,) whichever is greater. Record test data and submit for review and approval. Contractor shall make repairs and re -test as needed until system passes. Submit to Cornell University, Ithaca New York Fire Department, and FM Global in writing for approval, proposed date, schedule, time, and duration for the site water system flow test. Submit schedule at least fifteen (15) calendar days in advance of intended shutdown. Site water system flow test shall be witnessed by both Cornell University and FM Global. C. The minimum slope towards the main drain of the system branch lines shall be 1/8"/ft (4mm/m). The minimum slope toward the main drain of the system mains shall be 1/16"/ft (2mm/m). D. With the exception of low point and auxiliary drains, all new system drains shall be hard piped to an approved exterior location, or to a safe location inside the building that shall accept full flow without causing property damage or a safety hazard. All drains shall discharge to sanitary system that has the capacity to except full discharge. If it is determined that the sanitary system does not have adequate capacity for full flow discharge, fire protection contractor shall Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Fire Protection System Piping Page 21 10 00 - 4 coordinate alternates with Cornell University Environmental Health & Safety prior to installation. E. Auxiliary Drains 1. Provide an auxiliary drain for each location where piping pitch prevents complete drainage through the main drain valve. If the capacity of the trapped section exceeds 5 gallons (19 L), a valve must be provided and the outlet piped to a drain or convenient location acceptable to the AHJ. F. Contractor's Inspection of System 1. The Contractor shall thoroughly inspect the completed system to assure compliance with this document, project plans, NFPA 25, and all applicable Codes and Standards. IMPORTANT: This must include a test of each waterflow alarm switch and all system supervisory devices, in coordination with the fire alarm system Contractor. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Submit to Cornell University Environmental Health & Safety in writing for approval, proposed date schedule, time, and duration of back flushing of fire protection system. Submit schedule at least fifteen (15) calendar days in advance of intended back flushing. Back flushing of the sprinkler and standpipe hydrostatic testing shall be witnessed by a representative from Environmental Health & Safety. B. Fire protection system shall be thoroughly cleaned and flushed with tri -sodium phosphate or a cleaning agent approved by the Facilities Engineer prior to final acceptance. Once the system is filled by the contractor, a water sample shall be provided that verifies the concentration of the cleaning agent within the system. C. Cleaning 1. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers. 2. Remove and replace any sprinkler having with paint that was not provided as part of the factory finish. D. Provide each fire protection system with corrosion coupon and test port rack (1 inch stub with valve and cap) installed at the alarm valve. The corrosion coupons shall be obtained from FM Pipe Shop Water Treatment Lab so the water quality and corrosion data can be properly recorded and monitored by Cornell University. END OF SECTION 21 10 00 Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Cornell University Physical Science Instructional Facility Phase II Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca NY Page 23 00 01 - 1 SECTION 23 00 01 GENERAL HVAC PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Scope of Work. 2. Intent of Drawings. 3. Pre -Bid Site Visit. 4. Definitions. 5. General Standards of Materials. 6. Products and Substitutions. 7. Applicable Codes. 8. Guarantees and Certificates. 9. Quiet Operation and Vibration Control. 10. Temporary Shutdown of Existing Systems. 11. Coordination. 12. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 13. Owner Instruction. 14. Class I and Class II Substances. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK A. The scope of the work included under Division 23 of the specifications shall include complete systems as shown in the Contract Documents and specified herein. Any work reasonably inferable or required to result in a complete installation or the intended operation and performance of the systems, shall be included in the Base Bid except where there is specific reference to exclusion and incorporation in other quotations. B. A brief written Scope of Work appears in Division 1. 1.4 INTENT OF DRAWINGS A. Provide complete and functional systems for the project. The systems shall confonn to the details stated in the specifications and shown on the drawings. Items or work not shown or specified, but required for complete systems, shall be provided and conform to accepted trade practices. The drawings and specifications are presented to define specific system requirements and serve to expand on the primary contract requirements of providing complete systems. The Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 General HVAC Provisions Page 23 00 01 - 2 drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement and routing of the systems included in this contractors work. B. Do not scale the drawings. Because of the scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate offsets, fittings, valves, or similar items which may be required to provide complete operating systems. Carefully investigate conditions affecting the work associated with this project. Check and verify dimensions and existing conditions at the site. Install systems in such a manner that interferences between pipes, conduit, ducts, equipment, architectural and structural features are avoided. Provide items required to meet the project conditions without additional cost to the owner. C. These documents may not explicitly disclose final details required for a complete systems installation; however, contractors shall possess the expertise to include the necessary appointments of complete operating systems. D. Contractors shall be "Experienced" (as defined in Division 1) in this type of construction and realize the extent of the work required. 1.5 PRE-BID SITE VISIT A. Bidders shall visit the site and become completely familiar with existing conditions prior to submitting their bid. No extra charges shall be allowed as a result of existing conditions. To schedule a site visit, contact the Owner at least 48 hours in advance of desired time of visit. 1.6 DEFINITIONS A. Specific tenninology, as used herein, shall have the following meanings: 1. "Furnish"...Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar subsequent requirements. 2. "Install"...Operations at project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar requirements. 3. "Provide"...Furnish and Install and shall include, without limitation, all labor, materials, equipment, transportation, services, and other items required for reasonably inferable to complete the referenced tasks. 4. "Concealed, Interior"...Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. 5. "Concealed, Exterior" ...Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. 6. "Exposed, Interior"...Exposed to view indoors (not concealed). 7. "Exposed, Exterior"...Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. 8. "Finished Space" ...Space other than mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, pipe chases, unheated spaces irnrnediately below roof, space above finish ceilings, crawl spaces, utility service tunnels, and interstitial spaces. 9. "Conditioned"...Spaces directly provided with heating and cooling. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 General HVAC Provisions Page 23 00 01 - 3 10. "Unconditioned"...Spaces without heating or cooling including ceiling plenums. 11. "Indoors"...Located inside the exterior walls and roof of the building. 12. "Outdoors"...Located outside the exterior walls and roof of the building. 13. "Atmosphere"...The sane as outdoors. 1.7 GENERAL STANDARDS OF MATERIALS A. Equipment and materials, unless otherwise noted, shall be new and of first quality, produced by manufacturers who have been regularly engaged in the manufacture of these products for a period of not less than five years. B. Equipment of one type shall be the products of one manufacturer; similar items of the same classification shall be identical, including equipment, assemblies, parts and components. C. Materials furnished shall be determined safe by a nationally recognized testing organization, such as Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation, and materials shall be labeled, certified or listed by such organizations. Where third party certification is required for packaged equipment, the equipment shall bear the appropriate certification label. D. With respect to custom made equipment or related installations which are constructed specially for this project, the manufacturer shall certify the safety of same on the basis of test data. The Owner shall be furnished copies of such certificates. 1.8 PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Where a specific manufacturer's product is specified, the contract sum shall be based on that product only. Any substitutions from the specified product shall be offered as a Substitution Request. Refer to Division 1 for requirements. Substitutions shall not be permitted after the bidding phase unless a Substitution Request Form was included with the bid. B. Where several manufacturers' products are specified, the Contract Amount shall be based upon the specified products only. Any substitutions from the specified products shall be offered as a Substitution Request. Refer to Division 1 for requirements. Substitutions shall not be permitted after the bidding phase unless a Substitution Request Form was included with the bid. C. Where only one manufacturer's product is specified, the associated systems have been designed on the basis of that product. Where several manufacturers' products are specified, the associated systems have been designed on the basis of the first -named manufacturer's product. When products other than those used as the basis of design are submitted, the contractor shall agree to accept a unilateral change order that includes additional costs incurred by the Owner for the Architect's and other Contractors review of submissions, redesign, and system and/or structure modifications required by the use of that product. D. It is the intent of these specifications that service organizations such as balancing agencies follow the above substitution procedures. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 General HVAC Provisions Page 23 00 01 - 4 1.9 APPLICABLE CODES A. Materials furnished and work installed shall comply with applicable codes listed in Division 1, with the requirements of the local utility companies, and with the requirements of governmental departments or authorities having jurisdiction. 1.10 GUARANTEES AND CERTIFICATES A. Defective equipment, materials or workmanship, including damage to the work provided under other divisions of this contract, shall be replaced or repaired at no extra cost to the Owner for the duration of the stipulated guarantee periods. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, the duration of the guarantee period shall be one (1) year following the date of Substantial Completion. Temporary operation of the equipment for temporary conditioning, testing, etc., prior to occupancy will not be considered part of the warranty period. 1.11 QUIET OPERATION AND VIBRATION CONTROL A. Equipment and associated items shall operate under conditions of load without sound or vibration deemed objectionable by the Architect. In the case of moving equipment, sound or vibration noticeable outside of the room in which it is installed, or noticeable within the room in which it is installed, shall be deemed objectionable. Sound or vibration deemed objectionable shall be corrected in an approved manner at no extra cost to the Owner. Vibration control shall be provided by means of approved vibration isolators and installed in accordance with the isolator manufacturer's recommendations. B. The sound pressure levels around mechanical and electrical equipment (fans, pumps, motors, etc.) in equipment spaces shall not exceed 85 dBA at any point three (3) feet from the equipment, with all equipment in the room operating. The sound criteria applies to the complete range of each piece of equipment. 1.12 TEMPORARY SHUTDOWN OF EXISTING SYSTEMS A. Plan installation of new work and connections to existing work to insure minimum interference with regular operation of existing systems. Some temporary shutdown of existing systems may be required to complete the work. B. Submit to the Owner in writing, for approval, proposed date schedule, time, and duration of necessary temporary shutdowns of existing systems. Submit schedule at least fifteen (15) calendar days in advance of intended shutdown. Shutdowns shall be made at such times as shall not interfere with regular operation of existing facilities and only after written approval of Owner. The Owner reserves the right to cancel shutdowns at any time prior to the shutdowns. To insure continuous operation, make necessary temporary connections between new and existing work. Bear costs resulting from temporary shutdowns and temporary connections. No additional charges shall be allowed for Owner -canceled shutdowns that must be rescheduled. C. Shutdowns must be performed by the Owner. Do not shut -down any system. The Owner reserves the right to require a walk-through of any shutdown prior to the shutdown. Following electrical shutdowns, verify that affected motors are rotating in the proper direction. Bear costs associated with reverse rotated motors. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 General HVAC Provisions Page 23 00 01 - 5 1.13 COORDINATION A. Coordinate and furnish in writing to the Architect information necessary to permit the work to be installed satisfactorily and with the least possible interference or delay. B. Coordination drawings shall be prepared as defined in Division 1. No installation of permanent systems shall proceed until the coordination drawings are reviewed by the Architect. No extra charges shall be allowed for changes required to accommodate installation of systems provided under other divisions of this contract. C. Coordination drawings shall be developed from individual system shop drawings and contractor fabrication drawings. Electronic or other reproduced engineering design drawings used as coordination drawings are not acceptable. D. When work is installed without proper coordination, changes to this work deemed necessary by the Architect shall be made to correct the conditions without extra cost to the Owner. E. The value of the coordination drawings shall be identified as a line item in the Schedule of Values. If the coordination drawings are not submitted as required, their value shall be credited to the Owner in accordance with the provisions of Article 7 of the General Conditions. The value of coordination drawings shall be a minimum of two (2.0) percent of this Contract Amount. 1.14 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES A. Shop drawings, product data, and samples shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of Division 1. B. The following shall be submitted by the Contractor for review: 1. Scale shop drawings showing, system components with sizing indicated, including but not limited to: a. equipment locations. b. piping and ductwork c. insert and sleeve locations d. hangers, anchors and guides e. expansion joints and loops f. access doors 2. Product data for system components and materials (including construction standards). 3. Samples of finishes and trim exposed to view, such as cleanout plates, fixture trim, escutcheon plates and similar items. C. The value of shop drawings, product data and samples shall be identified as a line item in the Schedule of Values. If the shop drawings, product data and samples are not submitted as required, their value shall credited to Owner in accordance with the provisions of Article 7 of the General Conditions. The value of these items shall be a minimum of one (1.0) percent of this Contract Amount. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 General HVAC Provisions Page 23 00 01 - 6 1.15 OWNER INSTRUCTION A. After final tests and adjustments have been completed, furnish the services of qualified personnel to instruct representatives of the Owner in the operation and maintenance procedures for equipment and systems installed as part of this project. Operation and maintenance instructions for major items of equipment shall be directly supervised by the equipment manufacturer's representative. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time as required to meet governing authorities' operation and performance tests and as required to assure that the Owner's representatives are properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. Minimum instruction period shall be 80 man hours. The instruction period shall be broken into segments at the discretion of the Owner. 1. Notify the Architect, the Owner's representative and equipment manufacturers' representatives, by letter, as to the time and date of operating and maintenance instruction periods approved by the Owner at least one (1) week prior to conducting same. 2. Forward to the Architect the signatures of all those present for the instruction periods. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Cornell University Physical Science Instructional Facility Phase II Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca NY Page 23 05 00 - 1 SECTION 23 05 00 COMMON WORK FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition. 2. Cutting and Patching. 3. Waterproofing. 4. Air Plenums. 5. Electrical Connections. 6. Accessibility. 7. Painting. a. Equipment Foundations, Supports, Piers, and Attachments. b. Equipment Guards and Rails. c. Cleaning, Protection and Adjustment. d. Special Tools. e. Welding. 1.3 DEMOLITION A. Review the construction documents, to determine the affected areas of the existing structure. Remove systems in the affected areas not to be reused including equipment, piping, ductwork, controls, hangers, supports, etc. B. Schedule demolition work with Owner. C. Demolition work involving electrical systems shall be coordinated prior to commencement of demolition work. D. All existing piping shall be saw -cut, not broken, at point where piping connects to existing. E. Where demolition of existing piping, ductwork, and other mechanical equipment, all such service shall be properly terminated in an approved manner to allow affected systems to remain in operation. F. When demolishing existing equipment, all control wiring or pneumatic tubing serving that equipment shall be properly terminated in an approved manner to allow affected systems to remain in operation. Remove pneumatic tubing back to risers and plug. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Common Work for HVAC Page 23 05 00 - 2 G. Where systems serve areas under construction and areas not affected by the construction, all return air and exhaust air terminals in the construction area shall be capped, and fans shall be rebalanced for new air quantities. H. The Owner has the right -of -first -refusal for any items to be demolished, salvaged or removed. The Contractor and Owner shall jointly review the space where demolition is to occur and identify items the Owner elects to retain prior to demolition and removal. Remove items to be retained by the Owner and deliver thein to the location directed by the Owner within a (5) five mile radius of the project. Promptly remove and properly dispose of materials, equipment, ductwork, piping, debris, etc., which is not specified for reuse, storage, or retainage by Owner. I. Provide support as required for any existing piping and equipment support affected by demolition. Provide cutting and patching to match existing finish of roof, wall, floor, etc., required for demolition of existing systems. Fire and smoke ratings compromised due to demolition shall be immediately restored. Repair or apply fire proofing to structural components that are exposed due to demolition, unless noted otherwise. K. Where piping, ductwork, etc., serves area affected by demolition and other areas of building not affected by demolition, reconnect piping, ductwork, etc., serving unaffected areas to existing or new systems serving affected areas. 1.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Provide cutting and patching necessary to install the work specified herein. Patching shall match adjacent surfaces. Refer to Division 1 - Cutting and Patching for specific directions. B. No structural members shall be cut without prior approval of the Architect. C. Provide ceiling removal and replacement where work above ceilings is required. Replace ceiling components damaged in the process. 1.5 WATERPROOFING A. Where work pierces waterproofing, including waterproof concrete, the method of installation shall be approved by the Architect prior to performing the work. Furnish necessary sleeves, caulking and flashing required to make openings absolutely watertight. 1.6 AIR PLENUMS A. In plenums which are used as part of an air distribution system as defined by NFPA , materials must or of the type rated for air plenum use. The Contractor shall be responsible to utilize the correct materials in ceiling space used for environmental air purposes. 1.7 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Regardless of voltage, provide control wiring, interlock wiring, and equipment control wiring for the equipment provided under this division of the specifications. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Common Work for HVAC Page 23 05 00 - 3 B. Furnish electrical disconnect switches, starters and combination starter disconnects required for equipment provided under this division of the specifications. Circuit breakers furnished shall be rated for motor protection. C. Provide all power wiring for the Building Automation Control System (BACS). D. Power wiring not used for control functions, complete from power source to motor or equipment junction box, including power wiring through starters, shall be provided under Division 26. E. Coordinate to ensure that electrical devices furnished or provided are compatible with the electrical systems used. 1.8 ACCESSIBILITY A. Coordinate to ensure the sufficiency of the size of shafts, and chases, and the adequacy of clearances in hung ceilings and other areas required for the proper installation of this work. B. Locate equipment which must be serviced, operated or maintained in fully accessible positions. Locations in ceilings requiring access shall be coordinated with, but not limited to lights, curtain tracks, speakers, etc. Equipment requiring access shall include, but is not necessarily limited to, valves, traps, clean -outs, motors, fire dampers, controllers, switchgear, drain points, etc. C. Provide access doors under this division. D. Indicate the locations of access doors for each concealed valve, control, damper, or other device concealed behind finished construction and requiring service on the coordination drawings. Equipment below floor slab or finished grade shall be also be indicated on the coordination drawings. 1.9 PAINTING A. Painting requirements of this section shall conform to Division 9 — Painting. B. Provide surface preparation, priming, and final coat application in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Provide field painting of all piping, ductwork, hangers, supports, equipment platforms, railings, and miscellaneous metals located outdoors (including galvanized jacketed piping, galvanized jacketed ductwork, insulated ductwork, and insulated piping). Piping over 200 deg. F shall be finished with high temperature epoxy paint. Application shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Provide painting of mechanical items exposed in mechanical equipment room and in occupied spaces. Mechanical items to be painted are as follows: 1. Piping, pipe hangers, pipe insulation, and supports 2. Ductwork, duct insulation. 3. Mechanical equipment, and supports. 4. Heat exchangers. 5. Tanks. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Common Work for HVAC Page 23 05 00 - 4 6. Accessory items. 1.10 EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS, SUPPORTS, PIERS AND ATTACHMENTS A. Provide necessary foundations, auxiliary steel, supports, pads, bases and piers required for equipment specified in this division; submit drawings in accordance with Shop Drawing Submittal requirements prior to the purchase, fabrication or construction of same. B. Provide 4 inch thick concrete pads for compressors, base -mounted pumps, rotating equipment, and floor -mounted equipment located in equipment rooms and as indicated on drawings. Pads shall be extended 6 inches beyond machine base in each direction with top edge chamfered. Anchor equipment pads to the floor in accordance with latest building codes seismic requirements. C. Construction of foundations, supports, and pads where mounted on the floor, shall be of the same materials and same quality of finish as the adjacent and surrounding floor material. D. Equipment shall be securely attached to the building structure in an approved manner. Attachments shall be of a strong and durable nature and any attachments that are, in the opinion of the Architect, deemed insufficient shall be replaced as directed, with no additional cost to the Owner. 1.11 EQUIPMENT GUARDS AND RAILS A. Provide readily removable guards or railings for belt drives and rotating, machinery. Guards shall consist of heavy angle iron frames, hinged and latched, with heavy galvanized iron crimped mesh wire securely fastened to frames. Railing shall be 1-1/2 inch pipe and railing fittings. B. Multiple V -belt drives shall have band belts to minimize vibration. 1.12 CLEANING, PROTECTION AND ADJUSTMENT A. Cleaning: 1. General cleaning requirements are specified in Division 1. 2. Upon completion of the work, clean the exterior surface of equipment, accessories, and trim installed. Clean, polish, and leave equipment, accessories, and trim in first-class condition. B. Protection of Surfaces: 1. Protect new and existing surfaces from damage during the construction period. 2. Provide plywood or similar material under equipment or materials stored on floors or roofs. Provide protection in areas where construction may damage surfaces. 3. Surfaces damaged during the construction shall be repaired or replaced at the cost of the Contractor at fault. The method of repairing or replacing the surface shall be approved by the Owner and Architect Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Common Work for HVAC Page 23 05 00 - 5 C. Protection of Services: 1. Protect new and existing services from damage during the construction period. 2. Repair, replace and maintain in service any new or existing utilities, facilities or services (underground, overground, interior or exterior) damaged, broken or otherwise rendered inoperative during the course of construction. 3. Services damaged during the construction shall be replaced at the cost of the Contractor at fault. The method used in repairing, replacing or maintaining the services shall be approved by the Owner and Architect D. Protection of Equipment and Materials: 1. Equipment and materials shall be stored in a manner that shall maintain an orderly, clean appearance. If stored on-site in open or unprotected areas, equipment and material shall be kept off the ground and out of standing water by means of pallets or racks, and covered with tarpaulins. 2. Equipment and material, if left unprotected and damaged, shall be repainted or otherwise refurbished at the discretion of the Owner. Equipment and material is subject to rejection and replacement if, in the opinion of the Architect or the manufacturer's engineering department, the equipment has deteriorated or been damaged to the extent that its immediate use or performance is questionable, or that its normal life expectancy has been curtailed. 3. During the construction period, protect ductwork, piping and equipment from damage and dirt. Properly cap ductwork and piping, whether in transit, stored or installed. Each system of piping shall be flushed to remove grit, dirt, sand, and other foreign matter for as long a time as required to thoroughly clean the systems. 4. Provide two (2) complete sets of filters. One set shall be installed just prior to balancing but after cleaning of duct and air handling systems. The second set of filters shall be turned over to Owner for future use. 5. Should air handling systems be used for temporary heating during construction, provide temporary filters of equivalent efficiencies to those specified in addition to the two (2) permanent sets required above. Temporary filters shall be replaced with additional temporary filters, as required, when the pressure drop is double the initial pressure drop rating of the filter. E. Adjustment: 1. After the entire installation has been completed, make required adjustments to balancing valves, air vents, automatic controls, circulators, pressure reducing valves and similar devices until performance requirements are met. 2. Provide factory -lubricated bearings for mechanical equipment. Before initial startup of mechanical equipment, inspect and verify bearings for proper amounts of lubricant. If required, provide proper amounts of lubricant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Common Work for HVAC Page 23 05 00 - 6 1.13 SPECIAL TOOLS A. Provide the Owner's representative with two (2) sets of special tools required for operation and maintenance of equipment provided. 1.14 WELDING A. General Requirements 1. This paragraph covers the welding of systems. Deviations from applicable codes, approved procedures and approved shop drawings shall not be permitted. Materials or components with welds made off the site shall not be accepted if the welding does not conform to the requirements of this specification. Develop and qualify procedures for welding metals included in the work. Certification testing shall be performed by an approved independent testing laboratory. Bear costs of such testing. 2, Certified welders, previously certified by test, may be accepted for the work without re- certification provided that all of the following conditions are fulfilled: a. Submit copies of welder certification test records in accordance with this Division and Division 1 requirements. b. Testing was performed by an independent testing laboratory. c. The welding procedures and welders are certified in accordance with the "ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," and base materials, filler materials, electrodes, equipment, and processes conform to the applicable requirements of this specification. d. Certification has been within a one (1) year period from the start of the project. 3. Filler metals, electrodes, fluxes and other welding materials shall be delivered to the site in manufacturers' original packages and stored in a dry space until used. Packages shall be properly labeled and designed to give maximum protection from moisture and to assure safe handling. 4. Submit welding certificates for review. Each welder assigned to work covered by this specification shall be certified by performance tests using equipment, positions, procedures, base metals, and electrodes or bare filler wires. 5. Before assigning welders to the work, provide the architect with their names, together with certification that each individual is certified as specified. No welding work shall start prior to submissions. The certification shall state the type of welding and positions for which each is certified, the code and procedure under which each is certified, date certified, and the firm and individual certifying the certified tests. 6. Each welder shall be assigned an identifying number, letter, or symbol that shall be used to identify his welds. A list of the welders' names and symbol for each shall be submitted. To identify welds, either written records indicating the location of welds made by each welder shall be submitted, or each welder shall apply his mark adjacent to his weld using an approved rubber stamp or felt -tipped marker with permanent, weatherproof ink or other approved methods that do not deform the metal. For seam welds, identification marks shall be placed adjacent to the welds at 3 foot intervals. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Common Work for HVAC Page 23 05 00 - 7 Identification by die stamps or electric etchers shall be confined to the weld reinforcing crown, preferably in the finished crater. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCESS DOORS A. Each access door assembly manufactured as an integral unit, complete with all parts and ready for installation. B. Access doors and frames shall be of continuous welded steel construction, unless otherwise indicated. Grind welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of support shown. C. Frames shall be fabricated from 16 -gauge steel. Fabricate frame with exposed flange nominal 1 inch wide around perimeter of frame for units installed in the following construction: a. Exposed Masonry 2. For gypsum drywall or veneer gypsum plaster, furnish perforated frames with drywall bead. 3. For installation in masonry construction, furnish frames with adjustable metal masonry anchors. 4. For full -bed plaster applications, furnish frames with galvanized expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead, welded to perimeter of frame D. Flush Panel Doors shall be fabricated from not less than 14 -gauge sheet steel, with concealed spring hinges or concealed continuous piano hinge set to open 175°. Finish with manufacturer's factory -applied prime paint. 1. For fire -rated units, provide manufacturer's standard insulated flush panel/doors, with continuous piano hinge and self-closing mechanism. E. Locking devices shall be flush, screwdriver -operated cam locks of number required to hold door in flush, smooth plane when closed. F. Manufacturers: 1. Bar -Co., Inc. 2. J. L. Industries 3. Karp Associates, Inc. 4. Nystrom, Inc. 2.2 PIPING WELDING A. Welding materials shall comply with the "ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code." Welding equipment, electrodes, welding wire, and fluxes shall be capable of producing satisfactory welds when used by a certified welder using qualified welding procedures. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Common Work for HVAC Page 23 05 00 - 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ACCESS DOORS A. Coordinate installation of access doors with the General Contractor. Locations of access shall be submitted and doors furnished in sufficient time to allow installation in the normal course of the work. 3.2 WELDING A. Perform welding in accordance with qualified procedures using certified welders. Welding shall not be done when the quality of the completed weld could be impaired by the prevailing working or weather conditions. Welding of hangers, supports, and plates to structural members shall conform to AWS specifications. B. Field bevels and shop bevels shall be by mechanical means or by flame cutting. Where beveling is by flame cutting, thoroughly clean surfaces of scale and oxidation just prior to welding. Beveling shall conform to ANSI B31.1 and AWS B3.0. C. Replace and reinspect defective welds. Repairing defective welds by adding weld material over the defect or by peening shall not be permitted. Welders responsible for defective welds must be re -certified. D. Store electrodes in a dry heated area, keep free of moisture and dampness during fabrication operations. Discard electrodes that have lost part of their coating. END OF SECTION Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Cornell University Physical Science Instructional Facility Phase II Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca NY Page 23 05 13 - 1 SECTION 23 05 13 COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Division 26 section 262923, "Variable Frequency Motor Controllers." 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Motors 2. Enclosed Controllers (Starters, Combination Starter/Disconnects and Sentinel Switches) 3. Enclosed Switches (Disconnects) 4. Adjustable Frequency Drives 1.3 DESCRIPTION A. Enclosed Controllers, Enclosed Switches and Adjustable Frequency Drives shall be provided under this Division for motors provided. Controllers and Switches in motor control centers shall be provided under Division 26. B. This section does not apply to Controllers and Switches in a motor control center. 1.4 STANDARDS A. AC motor control shall conform to standards and references in NEMA MG 1 and UL. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTORS A. Provide motors for equipment specified in this Division. B. Motors for equipment shall be supplied by the equipment manufacturer. Motors shall be furnished with Enclosed Controllers, except motors with Controllers in a motor control center. Refer to electrical drawings for Motors with Controllers in a motor control center. C. Motors shall comply with the following requirements: 1. Motors shall be built in accordance with the latest standards of NEMA and applicable IEEE standards and as specified. Motors shall be tested in accordance with ASA C50 and conform thereto with respect to insulation resistance and dielectric strength. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Common Electrical Requirements for HVAC Page 23 05 13 - 2 2. Each motor shall be provided with conduit terminal box and adequate starting and protective equipment as specified or required. The capacity shall be sufficient to operate associated driven devices under all conditions of operation and load and without overload, and shall be at least the horsepower indicated or specified. Each motor shall be selected for quiet operation. 3. Provide motors rated for 200 volts for 208 volt service. Provide 230 and 460 volt rated motors for 240 and 480 volt service. For herpetic refrigeration and elevator applications, motor voltage must match service voltage. 4. Brake horsepower load requirements at specified duty shall not exceed 85 percent of nameplate horsepower times NEMA service factor for motors with 1.0 and 1.15 service factors. For motors with 1.25, 1.35, and 1.4 service factors, maximum load percentage shall be 78 percent, 72 percent, and 70 percent, respectively. Brake horsepower load requirements do not apply for water-cooled or refrigerant -cooled motors. 5. Starting (locked rotor) currents shall not exceed NEMA Design B maximum values for the specified ratings. 6. Motors of open drip -proof construction shall be NEMA Class B for operation for 40°C ambient. Except: Motors used in conjunction with variable frequency speed drive controller shall be inverter duty motors with NEMA Class F insulation based on Class B rise. 7. Where motors operate in an ambient temperature above 40°C, the motors shall be suitably designed for the ambient temperature indicated. 8. Outdoor, Exposed Motors: Totally enclosed fan -cooled construction, stator windings totally encapsulated having non -hygroscopic insulation approved for outdoor use and double shielded bearings. 9. Provide power factor correction as follows: a. lndividual single speed, non -reversing motors, 15 hp and larger, having a full load power factor of less than 90 percent, shall be supplied by the equipment supplier with power factor correcting capacitors which shall correct the full load power factor of the circuit to a minimum of 90 percent and the no load power factor to a maximum of unity. Where the power factor of the motor combined with a variable speed controller exceeds 90 percent at full load, power factor correction capacitors are not required. b. These capacitors shall be sized by the motor manufacturer. The shop drawings for the equipment shall list the capacitor KVAR, and full load current of the motor - capacitor combination to enable proper sizing of the overload protection and the correct power factor at no load and full load. c. Capacitors will: be 3-phase, rated for the applied circuit voltage, fused at 5 KVAR's and above; employ non -PCB impregnated paper or film dielectric and insulation; be in indoor dust -proof or NEMA Type 3R enclosure, depending on location; not contain more than 3 gallons of a combustible insulating liquid; be equipped with integral discharge resistors to reduce voltage to a maximum of 50 volts in three minutes. d. Capacitors for individual motors shall be installed and connected under Division 26. Package or unitized equipment on which motors and controls are factory wired up to a point or points of power connection shall have the capacitors, Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Common Electrical Requirements for HVAC Page 23 05 13 - 3 as specified above, installed and connected to the motor circuits between the starters and the motors, as part of the factory supplied assembly. e. Do not apply power factor correction to motors with variable frequency drives. 10. Single Phase Motors: Open type capacitor start with lifetime sealed ball bearing or oilable ball bearing type. Minimum efficiency 70 percent, minimum power factor 75 percent. 11. Three Phase Motors: Polyphase induction type with lifetime ball bearing through 2 horsepower, anti -friction bearing with a minimum L10 life of 110,000 hours under the application specific (actual) drive -load conditions. Bearings shall be in regreasable race with grease zerks. Belt drive motors shall have steel adjustable slide base with slide rails and adjustment screws. a. Minimum efficiency shall be the NEMA "premium efficiency" level in accordance with Table 12-12 of NEMA MG -1 (2006). b. The motor power factor shall be: 1) No less than 85 for motors 7.5 HP and larger 2) No less than 75 for motors between 1 HP and 5 HP. 12. Motors for use with Variable Frequency Motor Controllers shall be designed for use with these controllers and shall be tested with the specific controller supplied for this project. The motors shall comply with the "Three Phase Motors" paragraph above, but with the following additional requirements: a. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture -resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse -width modulated inverters. b. Inverter -Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. c. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 Part 31, Definite Purpose Inverter -Fed Motors. d. Bearings: Motors shall have insulated bearings, or the motor shall be fitted with Aegis split type grounding rings by Electro Static Technology Inc. 1) Bearings for use on direct drive fans powered through variable frequency controllers shall be selected to produce the minimum L10 life specified above at the equipment peak (design) speed. D. Manufacturers: 1. US Motor 2. Lincoln 3. General Electric 4. Electric Machinery Company 5. Reliance 2.2 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS (Starters, Combination Starter/Disconnects and Sentinel Switches) A. Provide Enclosed Controllers for equipment and apparatus specified in Section 262913, Enclosed Controllers, as indicated on the contract documents, and as specified herein. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Common Electrical Requirements for HVAC Page 23 05 13 - 4 B. Provide Combination Starter/Disconnect type Enclosed Controllers for integral horsepower motors where remote control is specified or indicated. C. Provide Starter type Enclosed Controllers for integral horsepower motors where no remote control is required, and manual operation is specified or indicated. D. Provide Sentinel Switches for fractional horsepower motors where no remote control is required. (Toggle switches may be used for controlling single phase motors of 1/8 horsepower or less rating equipped with integral thermal protection.) E. Manufacturers: 1. Provide Enclosed Controllers as specified in Section 262913, Enclosed Controllers. 2.3 ENCLOSED SWITCHES (Disconnects) A. Provide Enclosed Switches for equipment and apparatus specified in Section 232816, Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers, as indicated on the contract documents, and as specified herein. B. Disconnects used with adjustable frequency drives shall have auxiliary "Run Permit" interlock wiring contacts to interface with drive shutdown. C. Enclosed Switches shall be furnished with appropriate fuses designed specifically for motor protection. Fuses shall comply with the requirements of Section 262813, Fuses. D. Manufacturers: Provide Enclosed Switches as specified in Section 262816, Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers. 2.4 ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES A. Provide Adjustable Frequency Drives (VFDs/VSDs/AFDs) for motors and equipment specified in this Division, as indicated on the contract documents, and as specified herein. B. Manufacturers: 1. Provide Adjustable Frequency Motor Controllers as specified in Section 262923, "Variable Frequency Motor Controllers." PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 HANDLING A. Electrical equipment furnished by this Contractor, but installed by the Electrical Contractor shall be delivered to the project site by this Contractor. The Electrical Contractor shall receive it at the project site, move it to its intended location and install it. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Common Electrical Requirements for HVAC Page 23 05 13 - 5 3.2 ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS START-UP A. The Adjustable Frequency Motor Controller Manufacturer shall provide start-up service for each Controller on the project. In providing this service, it shall be expressly understood that the Manufacturer's representative shall be present during initial equipment startup and shall sign a startup data sheet or checklist for each Controller. Do not initially energize any Controller except in the presence of the Manufacturer's representative. B. The start-up service shall include the following 1. Verify all control and power wiring connections. 2. Check power lugs on source and load sides and tighten as required. 3. Jog each motor to verify proper rotation. 4. Start and operate the Adjustable Frequency Motor Controller including fan or pump. 5. Operate each safety device. Repair each device as required. 6. Physically check each motor and Adjustable Frequency Motor Controller at start-up and shut down to insure no abnormal or problem conditions exist. 7. Following successful start-up of the Adjustable Frequency Motor Controllers, the manufacturer's representative shall provide a minimum of 2 hours instruction to the Owner's operators. Training will consist of one session, with the date selected by the Owner. C. The start-up service by the Adjustable Frequency Motor Controller Manufacturer shall also include a one-week period for simultaneously monitoring the incoming power and the load side power to problem drives with Dranetz meters 1. It shall be the Manufacturer's responsibility to prove that the problems exist outside of the Variable — Frequency Motor Controller itself, i.e., to prove the Controller itself is not at fault. 2. Should this testing prove that the problems exist inside the Adjustable Frequency Motor Controller, this service shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Should this testing prove that the problems exist outside of the Adjustable Frequency Motor Controller, i.e., problem is with electrical distribution system or with motor or with the fan/pump, the testing costs shall be borne by the responsible trades. END OF SECTION 23 05 13 Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Cornell University Physical Science Instructional Facility Phase II Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca NY Page 23 05 19 - 1 SECTION 23 05 19 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Thermometers. 2. Pressure gages. 3. Pressure and temperature test plugs. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 THERMOMETERS A. Thermometers shall be 9 inch scale, red -reading mercury thermometers with cast aluminum case and clear glass window, and shall read degrees Fahrenheit. Thermometers shall be adjustable locking angle type, with 6 inch stem and 2-1/2 inch brass extension neck separable socket. Scale range shall be selected to provide mid -scale reading at normal temperatures, with 2°F scale divisions. B. Manufacturers: 1. Weiss 9VU6-240 2. Trerice BX9140607 3. Weksler AS5L-9. 2.2 PRESSURE GAGES A. Provide pressure gauges at suction and discharge connections to pumps and as indicated on the drawings. B. Pressure gauges shall have 4-1/2 inch diameter stainless steel cases, no back flange, and removable stainless slip ring. Gauge dial shall be white coated with black figures, gradations, and micro adjustable. Gauges shall be capable of reading to approximately twice the working pressure. Accuracy: 1 percent. C. Provide pressure gauges with the following accessories: 1. Valves: 1/4" brass or stainless-steel ball type (gauge cocks not permitted). 2. Syphons: 1/4" coil of brass tubing with threaded ends. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping Page 23 05 19 - 2 3. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, 1/4" brass bushing with corrosion -resistant, porous -metal disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure. D. Manufacturers: 1. Weiss 4CTS-1 2. Trerice 500XB 3. Weksler EA 14 2.3 PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE TEST PLUGS A. Provide pressure and temperature test plugs as shown on the drawings and specified herin. B. Test plugs shall be a 1/4 inch MPT fitting to receive either a temperature or pressure probe with a 1/8 inch OD. Fitting shall be solid brass with two valve cores of Nordel (maximum 275°F), fitted with a color coded and marked cap with gasket and shall be rated at 1,000 psig. Fittings shall be Peterson Equipment Company, Incorporated, Pete's Plug, or approved equal. C. Manufacturers: 1. Flow Design, Inc. 2. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc. 3. Trerice, H.O. Co. D. Provide two test kits with pressure dial range, and shall have adaptor use with pressure and temperature kits shall be Peterson Equipment equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. 3.2 A. B. C. 3.3 A. gauge and thermometer. Pressure gauges shall have 0-50 psi with 1/8 inch probe of 304 stainless steel and union nut for test plug. Thermometers shall have 0° to 220°F range. Test Company, Incorporated, Series 1500 Test Kit, or approved THERMOMETERS Install thermometers in oversize pipe tee and nipple. Thermometers shall be installed such that they are easily read from a normal observation point. PRESSURE GAUGES Gauges shall be installed such that they are easily read from the nonnal observation point. Install needle -valve and snubber fitting in piping for each pressure gauge for fluids (except steam). Install needle -valve and syphon fitting in piping for each pressure gauge for stea PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE TEST PLUGS Provide pressure and temperature test plugs where indicated on the drawings and one pair at every main to riser connection point. For this project, provide a minimum of two pair of pressure and temperature test plugs and main to riser connection points. Clark Hall Phase 1I - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping Page 23 05 19 - 3 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions, after installation. B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility. END OF SECTION Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Cornell University Physical Science Instructional Facility Phase II Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca NY Page 23 05 23 - 1 SECTION 23 05 23 GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Bronze ball valves. 2. High-performance butterfly valves. 3. Bronze swing check valves. 4. Iron swing check valves. 5. Calibrated balance valves. 6. Automatic flow control valves. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 23 HVAC piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only. 2. Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CWP: Cold working pressure. B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber. C. NBR: Acrylonitrile -butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber. D. SWP: Steam working pressure. E. WOG: Water/oil/gas 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer. Clark Hall Phase 11- 100% CD - 3/14/2014 General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping Page 23 05 23 - 2 B. ASME Compliance: 1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. 3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 6. Block check valves in either closed or open position. B. Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES A. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Refer to Section 232113 for component and equipment ratings. Components, fittings, equipment, coils, specialties, etc., shall meet the component's pressure rating listed, and as required for system pressures and temperatures. B. Valve Sizes: 1. Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated. 2. In general and unless otherwise noted, shut-off valves 2 -inch size and smaller shall be ball valves. Shut-off valves 2-1/2 — inch size and larger shall be butterfly valves. C. Valve Actuator Types: I . Gear Actuator: For quarter -turn valves NPS 8 and larger. 2. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter -turn types. 3. Handlever: For quarter -turn valves NPS 6 and smaller, except plug valves. 4. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every five plug valves, for each size square plug -valve head. 5. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to valve handwheel, stem, or other actuator; of size and with chain for mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation" Article. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping Page 23 05 23 - 3 D. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2 -inch stem extensions and the following features: 1. Gate Valves: With rising stein. 2. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non -thermal -conductive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation. 3. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck. E. Valve -End Connections: 1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves. 2. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606. 3. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 4. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1. F. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP -45. G. Gate valves shall be suitable for repacking under system pressure. H. Install valves in accessible locations. I. Valves for equipment shutoff shall be size of pipe indicated on the drawings before reducing to equipment inlet/outlet size. 2.2 BUTTERFLY VALVES (Steam and Hydronic Services) A. Butterfly valves shall be fully factory assembled, set, and tested with external disc position indicators. Packing shall be able to be tightened without removing the insulation. B. For hydronic service, butterfly valves greater than 2 inches: fully lugged type with ductile iron or cast iron body, 316 or 17-4pH stainless steel disc and trim, resilient EPDM seat, locking lever handle on valves up to 4" size, gear operated hand wheel on valves over 4" size, ANSI Class 150 body, 150 PSIG @ 250 ° F seat working P/T minimum rating, bubble tight shut-off in either direction dead-endable. C. For steam and steam condensate service, butterfly valves greater than 2 inches: tapped lug full flanged type with carbon steel body, 316 stainless steel disc, 316 stainless steel double offset stem, high temperature RTFE seat, locking lever handle on valves up to 4" size, gear operated hand wheel on valves over 4" size, ANSI Class 150 body, 100 PSIG @ 450 ° F seat working P/T minimum rating, bubble tight shut-off in either direction, dead-endable. 2.3 BALL VALVES (HEATING WATER up to 230°F, AND CHILLED WATER) A. Ball valves 2-1/2 inches and below: 300 PSIG WOG/150 PSIG saturated steam pressure rating minimum, 300 psig@ 250 ° F seat working P/T rating, 300 psig@ 300 ° F body working P/T rating, bronze body, standard port, 316 stainless steel ball and stem with stem extension to raise stem out of insulation, Reinforced teflon RTFE 15% glass filled double seal seats, blow-out proof stern, and threaded connections. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping Page 23 05 23 - 4 B. Grooved ball valves 3 inches through 6 inches: 400 PSIG WOG/100 PSIG @ 450 ° F steam pressure rating, 300 psig@ 250 ° F seat working P/T rating, 300 psig@ 300 ° F body working P/T rating, bronze body, standard port, 316 stainless steel ball and stem with stem extension to raise stem out of insulation, Reinforced teflon RTFE 15% glass filled double seal seats, blow- out proof stem, butt and socket weld connections. 2.4 BALL VALVES (Steam and Steam Condensate) A. Ball valves 2 inches and below: 400 PSIG WOG/100 PSIG @ 450 ° F steam pressure rating minimum, 100 psig@ 450 ° F seat working P/T rating, 750 psig@ 100 ° F body working P/T rating, carbon or 316 stainless steel body, standard port, 316 stainless steel ball and stem, RTFE seats, blow-out proof stem, and threaded connections. 2.5 SWING CHECK VALVES A. NPS 2 and smaller: MSS SP -80; Class 200, 300 -psi CWP; horizontal swing, Y-pattem, ASTM B 61 cast -bronze body and cap, rotating bronze disc with renewable rubber seat or composition seat, threaded or soldered end connections: B. NPS 2'/z and larger: MSS SP -71, Class 125, 200 -psi CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bolted cap, horizontal -swing bronze disc, flanged end connections. 2.6 AUTOMATIC FLOW CONTROL VALVES A. Automatic flow control valves shall automatically control flow to +5 percent accuracy. Ends as required. Test plugs for temperature and pressure readout. Pressure drop for automatic control valve shall be 2 psig at scheduled flow rate unless higher pressure differential is required. Ball valves on combination units shall have chrome plated ball, teflon packing, brass packing nut, and blowout proof stem. 2.7 CALIBRATED BALANCING VALVES A. Calibrated balancing valves shall be bronze body/brass ball under 4 inches and cast iron body/brass vane 4 inches and above. Valves shall have differential pressure readout ports with check valve, 1/4 inch tapped drain/purge port, memory stop, calibrated nameplate. 2.8 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Butterfly Valves: 1. DeZurick HP Class 150, Bray Series 40, Cooper Cameron WKM, Jamesbury Series 815W Model C Class 150 2. DeZurick HP Class 150, Bray Series 40, Cooper Cameron WKM, Jamesbury 3. Vanessa Series 30,000; Cooper Cameron TriAx, Posi-Seal Clark Hall Phase 11 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping Page 23 05 23 - 5 B. Ball Valves 1. Domestic Water, Heating Water, and Chilled Water: Victaulic Series 726 (2-1/2" and larger), Apollo 70-200, Watts 6081, Stockham S-214-FBR, Jamesbury Series 400. 2. Steam a. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: Apollo 453-200, Jamesbury Series 7000. b. 2 inches and Smaller: Apollo 72-140, Jamesbury Series 5H. C. Check Valves: Stockham B-345, Milwaukee 507. D. Automatic Flow Control Valves: Hays, Flow Design International, Belimo. E. Calibrated Balancing Valves: Bell & Gossett Circuit Setter Plus, DeZurick, Rockwell, Victaulic/TA Hydronics. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Provide shut-off valves at inlet and outlet of each item of HVAC equipment, including but not limited to pumps, coils, fin -tube convectors, cabinet heaters, unit heaters, heat exchangers, and other similar equipment. B. Install valves so that the tops of the valve stems are above the horizontal. C. Install all steam valves with stem 30 ° off vertical to protect the bottom bearing from debris. D. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. E. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations. F. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. G. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, Length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage. H. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. I. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. J. Install valves so that the tops of the valve stems are above the horizontal. K. Install valves in accessible locations. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping Page 23 05 23 - 6 L. Valves for equipment shutoff shall be size of pipe indicated on the drawings before reducing to equipment inlet/outlet size. M Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. N. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. O. Install chainwheels on operators for valves 4 inch and larger in mechanical rooms and more than 7 feet above floor. Extend chains to 76" above finished floor. P. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and install swing check valves in a horizontal position with hinge pin level. Q. Install unions in piping 2" and smaller adjacent to each valve. Install flanges in piping 2-1/2" and larger adjacent to adjacent to each valve. END OF SECTION Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Cornell University Physical Science Instructional Facility Phase II Renovations to Clark Hall Ithaca NY Page 23 05 29 - 1 SECTION 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for HVAC system piping and equipment: 1. Pipe hangers and supports. 2. Equipment supports. 1.3 SIESMIC REQUIREMENTS A. Provide seismic -restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment where applicable. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data for the following: 1. Pipe hangers and supports. B. Provide fabrication and installation drawings and include load analyses calculations Signed and sealed by a registered professional engineer for the following: 1. Pipe hangers and supports for piping 8 inches and larger 2. Equipment supports. C. Welding certificates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE HANGER AND SUPPORT MANUFACTURERS A. Provide supports and hangers for the items included in the work. Hanger design and spacing shall conform to ANSI Code B 31.1.0 for Pressure Piping and the Manufacturers' Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry (MSS) SP -58 and SP -69, unless supplemented or modified herein. B. Manufacturers: 1. F&S. Clark Hall Phase I1 - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Hanger and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment Page 23 05 29 - 2 2. F&M. 3. Grinnell Corp. 4. Central Iron Mfg. 2.2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS - GENERAL A. Submit for approval product bulletins with figure numbers of supports, hangers and inserts proposed for the various conditions and services. B. Supports shall secure pipes in place, prevent swaying and vibration, maintain required pitch by proper adjustment, and provide free expansion and contraction. Design supports to suit the loading and service, and not over stress the building structure. C. Hanger rods shall be threaded 1-1/2 inch on each end or all -threaded cadmium plated or galvanized steel. Hangers, rollers, and supports that are not plated shall be factory painted with a red oxide primer and black enamel finish. D. Specified bracket clamp and rod sizes are minimum size. Support and hanger design shall include a safety factor of 5. E. Where several pipes 4 inches in diameter and smaller can be installed in parallel at the same level, approved- type trapeze hangers may be used in lieu of separate clevis hangers, with suspension rods having double nuts and securely attached to the building structure in an approved manner. Brace trapeze hangers to prevent motion due to expansion and contraction of pipe. Support individual pipes on trapeze by saddles and rollers. For trapeze hanger spacing, use the maximum support spacing listed for the smallest pipe on the trapeze. F. Plastic coated hangers and clamps shall be provided for uninsulated brass or copper pipes, unless shields are provided between hangers or clamps and uninsulated brass or copper pipes. G. Provide supplemental steel required for support of pipes other than steel shown on the structural drawings. H. Do not hang one pipe from another pipe, conduit, or ductwork. I. Do not use perforated band iron, wire, or chains as pipe hangers. J. Support piping as close as practical to heavy load concentrations such as vertical runs, branch connections, valves, and other pipe accessories such as air separators and strainers. K. Locate supports adjacent to both sides of control valves or pipe sections shown to be removable. L. Locate supports adjacent to branch shutoff valves to permit removal of branch piping without the installation of temporary supports. M Support piping on at least one side and adjacent to each change in direction. N. Provide additional supports as specified elsewhere when grooved pipe construction is employed. O. Hangers for insulated pipes shall be sized to clear the outside diameter of the insulation, unless otherwise noted. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Hanger and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment Page 23 05 29 - 3 P. Supports and hangers for horizontal piping shall be provided with a means of vertical adjustment after erection. Turnbuckles shall be provided with one lock nut. Rod connections to hangers and attachment devices shall be provided with two (2) nuts. Inserts for pipe hangers shall be of a type that does not interfere with structural reinforcing and does not displace excessive amounts of concrete. R. Piping located near floors which can be supported from floor or walls shall be provided with approved floor stands, wall brackets, roller supports, masonry piers or similar items. S. Resilient hangers and isolation devices shall be provided on piping connected to rotating equipment including pumps and air handling units and on other piping which may vibrate and create audible noise. Refer to this division specification, Vibration and Seismic Controls, for additional requirements concerning vibration isolation at pipe supports.. T. Additional hangers or supports shall be provided, as required, to stabilize and re -support any existing piping that is to remain and be reused in areas affected by demolition. U. Vertical piping shall utilize riser clamps specifically designed for piping. V. Pipe Hanger Schedule Hanger Type Manufacturers' Model Numbers F&S F&M Grinnell Central Iron 360 shield, split 981 --- 548 Beam Clamp 55 282 218 39 Multi -J hook blade 120 --- 208 Clevis hanger 86 239 260 10 180 degree shield 980 80 167 550 Rigid trapeze 710 Std. 46 551 U -bolt 37 176 137, 137C 98H Adj. steel pipe stanchion 421 291 259 71 Welded steel bracket 800, 801 151, 155 195, 199 195, 199 Riser clamp 91, 93, 94 241 261, 261C 37, 261 Pipe rest 92, 925 --- 552 Base elbow support 720, 721 --- --- 67, 68 Double bolt pipe clamp 89 261 295 Welded beam attachment 966 --- 66 Insert 180A, 180B 178 280 Series 100, 101 Cont. slotted insert 150A, 150B 190 --- 50 Underground pipe hanger 275 600A Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Hanger and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment Page 23 05 29 - 4 2.3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS — PIPING 6 INCHES AND SMALLER A. Piping 6 inches and smaller shall be supported by hangers and supports referred to in MSS- SP69. B. High pressure steam and condensate pump discharge piping shall be supported on Type 43 adjustable pipe roller hangers or Type 46 adjustable pipe roller and base supports and Type 39 saddles. C. Instrument air piping shall be supported with copper -plated Type 1 clevis hangers or Type 8 riser clamps. D. Cold water piping shall be supported with Type 40 protection shields and Type 1 clevis hangers. E. All other piping shall be supported by Type 1 adjustable steel clevis hangers. F. Hangers for piping with insulation shall be equipped with insulation inserts and protection shields. Support piping in accordance with the insert manufacturer's recommendations. G. Hangers for piping 4 inches and smaller with insulation shall be equipped with Type 40 protection shields. Hot service piping shall be equipped with calcium silicate insulation inserts. H. 6 inch cold service piping shall be provided with insulation inserts or oak blocking of square dimension equal to the insulation thickness specified and 12 inches long. In addition, Type 40 protection saddles shall be provided. 6 inch hot service piping shall be supported on Type 39 protection saddles. Pipe saddles may not be used on piping with insulation requiring a vapor barrier. Support plastic piping in accordance with the piping system manufacturer's recommendations for the intended service based on the expected fluid temperatures. K. Copper piping shall be supported by copper or plastic clad hangers or shall be protected by plastic non -conducting spacers to prevent dielectric corrosion. L. Vertical piping shall be supported at floor levels with Type 8 riser clamps. Piping 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be provided with a minimum of two (2) shear lugs installed in accordance with PFI Standard ES -26. Support locations shall be selected to permit uniform loading, provision for expansion, or to suit space limitations. The riser clamps at exposed locations shall be of such design as to avoid creating a hazardous or unsightly condition and staying within the space limitations. M. Pipe guides shall be provided whenever piping has insufficient physical strength to maintain alignment with the force of lineal expansion applied. The base of piping at circulating pumps shall be Type 52 variable spring base supports or with stanchions. Pipe stanchions shall be a minimum of 1/3 to 1/2 the nominal pipe diameter of the pipe being supported and 1 inch minimum. The base plate shall be a minimum 1/4 inch thick and its size shall be selected for fastening to the floor with a minimum of two (2) 3/8 inch bolts. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Hanger and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment Page 23 05 29 - 5 O. Piping 4 inches and smaller supported from the steel structure shall be supported by Type 23 beam clamps or by inserts and/or expansion bolts in the floor structure above. P. 6 inch piping and trapeze hangers where loads in excess of 200 pounds are anticipated shall be supported by Type 22 welded beam attachments. Piping along walls shall be supported by Type 33 brackets with drilled horizontal legs for fastening standard hangers and hanger rods, and vertical legs shall be fastened to the wall with at least two (2) fasteners. R. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel at the same level, provide trapeze hangers constructed of uni-strut or steel angle suspended by hanger rods. Brace trapeze hangers to prevent motion due to expansion and contraction of the pipe. Support individual pipes by hangers or rollers. S. Support spacing for horizontal steel piping. The support spacing listed below is the maximum normal spacing, and does not reduce the need for additional hangers and supports when specified elsewhere. Steel Pipe Size 1-1/4 inches and smaller 1-1/2 inches 2 inches 2-1/2 inches 3 inches 4 inches 5 inches 6 inches Minimum Rod Size 3/8 inch diameter 3/8 inch diameter 3/8 inch diameter 1/2 inch diameter 1/2 inch diameter 5/8 inch diameter 5/8 inch diameter 3/4 inch diameter Maximum Support Spacing 7' — 0' 9' —0" 10' —0" 11' — 0" 12 —0" 14'-0" 15'-0" 17'-0" T. Support spacing for horizontal copper piping. The support spacing listed below is the maximum normal spacing, and does not reduce the need for additional hangers and supports when specified elsewhere. Copper Pipe Size 3/4 inch and smaller 1 inch 1-1/4 inches 1-1/2 inches 2 inches 2-1/2 inches 3 inches 4 inches Minimum Rod Size 3/8 inch diameter 3/8 inch diameter 3/8 inch diameter 3/8 inch diameter 3/8 inch diameter 1/2 inch diameter 1/2 inch diameter 1/2 inch diameter Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Maximum Support Spacing 5'-0" 6' — 0" 7' — 0" 8' — 0" 8' —0" 9' —0" 10' — 0" 12' — 0" Hanger and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment Page 23 05 29 - 6 U. Support spacing for horizontal PVC piping. Support spacing listed below is the maximum normal spacing, and does not reduce the need for additional hangers and supports when specified elsewhere. Additionally, provide support at every pipe joint. PVC Pipe Size 3/4 inch and smaller 1 inch 1-1/4 inches 1-1/2 inches 2 inches 2-1/2 inches 3 inches 4 inches 6 inches Minimum Rod Size 3/8 inch diameter 3/8 inch diameter 3/8 inch diameter 3/8 inch diameter 3/8 inch diameter 1/2 inch diameter 1/2 inch diameter 1/2 inch diameter 5/8 inch diameter Maximum Support Spacing 5'-0" 5' — 0" 5' — 0" 6' — 0' 6' —0" 7' — 0" 7' — 0" 7' — 0" 8' — 0' NOTE: The above table is based on Schedule 40 PVC not exceeding 100°F service temperature. For other pipe wall thicknesses and service temperatures, consult the manufacturer's published recommendations. 2.4 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS — PIPING 8 INCHES AND LARGER A. Piping 8 inches and larger: Piping 8 inches and larger shall be supported by hangers and supports referred to in MSS -SP 69 or shall be designed by a Professional Engineer who is registered in the State of New York. B. Pipe hangers, guides, and anchors shown on the Drawings are partially complete and are shown to establish the basic hanger criteria for type, size and layout. The Contractor shall provide additional hangers, supports, anchors and guides required to complete the work at no additional cost to the Owner. 1. Piping 8 inches and larger shall not be connected to floor slabs or bar joints. These pipes shall be supported directly from the building's steel structure or from miscellaneous structural steel provided by the Contractor. C. Provide the services of a Professional Engineer who is registered in the State of New York to perforin dead load analyses and pipe stress analyses on piping systems where the piping is 8 inches or larger in diameter. D. Once final pipe layouts have been established and coordinated with the other disciplines, a set of these drawings shall be forwarded to the Professional Engineer who shall in turn complete his pipe dead load and stress analysis, and shall select and design the pipe hangers, supports and guides. Shop drawings shall then be prepared. Shop drawings shall be stamped by the Professional Engineer with his/her registration seal prior to submission for approval. When required, pipe supports located in Mechanical Equipment Rooms shall be provided with spring vibration isolation hangers. Additionally, vibration isolation type supports and hangers Clark Hall Phase 11- 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Hanger and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment Page 23 05 29 - 7 shall be provided in all vertical mechanical shafts. Refer to this division specification, Vibration and Seismic Controls, for additional requirements. F. All high pressure steam, medium pressure steam, low pressure steam, and condensate pump discharge piping shall be supported on Type 46 adjustable pipe roller and base supports or Types 41 or 43 roller hangers complete with Type 39 protection saddles. G. Hot water supply and return piping and steam condensate return piping with horizontal movements exceeding 1/2 inch shall be supported with Type 39 protection saddles or with Type 40 protection shields on Type 46 adjustable pipe roller and base supports or Types 41 or 43 roller hangers. Where horizontal movements are less than 1/2 inch use Type 1 clevis hangers or Type 3 pipe clamps. H. Chilled water piping shall be supported with Type 40 protection shields and Type 41, 43 or 44 roller hangers where horizontal movements exceed 1/2 inch. Where horizontal movements are less than 1/2 inch, use oak blocking with oversized Type 1 clevis hangers. Insulation inserts or oak blocking shall be of square dimension equal to the insulation thickness specified and 12 inches long. In addition, Type 40 protection saddles shall be provided. Condenser water piping shall be supported with Type 44 roller hangers, Type 1 clevis hangers or Type 4 pipe clamps. J. Pipe guides shall be provided whenever piping has insufficient physical strength to maintain alignment with the force of lineal expansion applied. K. Piping supported from the steel structure shall be supported by suitable type beam welding attachments. L. The base of piping at circulating pumps shall be supported by pipe stanchions. Pipe stanchions shall be a minimum of 30 percent of the nominal pipe size of the pipe being supported. The base plate shall be a minimum 1/2 inch thick and its size shall be selected for fastening to the floor with a minimum of four (4) 1/2 inch bolts. M. Piping connections to pressure vessels, such as chillers, boilers, and heat exchangers, shall be supported from overhead in such a manner that no pipe load is exerted on the vessel nozzles. N. Vertical piping 8 inches and larger shall be supported at its lowest level by pipe stanchions. Pipe stanchions shall be a minimum of 30 percent of the nominal pipe size of the pipe being supported. It shall be provided with a base plate limiting loading on the structure to 2,000 pounds per square foot. The riser shall be supported on higher levels by riser clamps. Clamps shall be restricted from movement along the pipe by welding a minimum of four (4) shear lugs to the pipe. Refer to PFI Standard ES -26 for the shear lug requirements. Support locations shall be selected to permit uniform loading, provision for expansion or to suit space limitations. The riser clamps at exposed locations shall be of such design as to avoid creating a hazardous or unsightly condition and staying within space limitations. 0. Support spacing for horizontal steel piping. Support spacing listed below is the maximum normal spacing, and does not reduce the need for additional hangers and supports when specified elsewhere. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 Hanger and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment Page 23 05 29 - 8 Steel Pipe Size 8 inches 10 inches 12 inches 14 inches 16 inches 18 inches 20 inches 24 inches 30 inches Minimum Rod Size 7/8 inch diameter 7/8 inch diameter 7/8 inch diameter 1 inch diameter 1 inch diameter 1 inch diameter 1-1/4 inch diameter 1-1/4 inch diameter 1-1/2 inch diameter Maximum Support Spacing 19'-0" 22' — 0" 23' — 0' 25' — 0" 27'-0" 24' — 0" (see Note below) 22' — 0" (see Note below) 18' — 0" (see Note below) 15' — 0" (see Note below) NOTE: For pipe sizes 18 through 30 inches, the support load requirements exceed the capacity requirements of standard manufactured supports. Therefore, use of larger support spacing is permitted only when custom designed supports are provided. P. Support spacing for horizontal PVC piping. Support spacing listed below is the maximum normal spacing, and does not reduce the need for additional hangers and supports when specified elsewhere. Additionally, provide support at every pipe joint. PVC Pipe Size 8 inches 10 inches 12 inches Minimum Rod Size 3/4 inch diameter 3/4 inch diameter 3/4 inch diameter Maximum Support Spacing, 8' — 0" 9' — 0" 10'-0" NOTE: The above table is based on Schedule 40 PVC not exceeding 100°F service tempera- ture. For other pipe wall thicknesses and service temperatures, consult the manufacturer's published recommendations. 2.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Provide welded, shop -fabricated or field -fabricated equipment supports made from structural - steel shapes as required by the contract documents. B. Equipment supports shall be capable of supporting the combined operating weight of supported equipment and the connected systems and components. C. Provide the services of a Professional Engineer who is registered in the State of New York to perform analyses for equipment supports provided. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HANGERS AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE Building Construction Hanger and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment Page 23 05 29 - 9 Pipe Support Method Poured concrete floor slabs Galvanized steel inserts, and/or fishplates of sufficient area to support twice the calculated dead load. Building structural steel Beam attachments and similar devices. Precast concrete floor slabs Metal deck floor slabs with concrete fill Concrete slabs where piping revisions are re- quired and approved af- ter fter slabs are poured or existing concrete slabs Concrete floor slabs on grade with ground water condition Fishplates of sufficient area to support twice the calculated dead load and approve type specialty hanger accessories manufactured for the specific purpose of attaching to precast floors. Galvanized steel inserts and/or fishplates of sufficient area to support twice the calculated dead load, and approved type specialty hanger accessories manufactured for the specific purpose of attaching to metal deck floors. "Phillips" or "Hilti" expansion bolts and shields for piping 4" and smaller, with main supports welded to structural steel at maximum 20 feet on center 4" x 4" x 3/8" thick clip knee angles with 3/4" expan- sion bolt in shear (horizontal) and supporting rod at 90° from anchor bolt for piping greater than 4", attached to concrete beams or columns. Drainage, waste and vent piping to be encased in slab construction. 3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Provide hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field -applied finish. B. Instal] hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, loops, and bends. C. Provide lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. D. Provide building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. Install and at inserts E. Install hangers and supports so piping loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. F. Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. Clark Hall Phase II - 100% CD - 3/14/2014